diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:06:30 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:06:30 -0700 |
| commit | 845ddefdf75c666ced1a53a57171d18fd942e4c4 (patch) | |
| tree | 355cf82befb189f03e012d9aad5870b9d1c36623 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 19853-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 124450 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 19853-h/19853-h.htm | 7109 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 19853.txt | 7019 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 19853.zip | bin | 0 -> 118384 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
7 files changed, 14144 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/19853-h.zip b/19853-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c06ee16 --- /dev/null +++ b/19853-h.zip diff --git a/19853-h/19853-h.htm b/19853-h/19853-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1e97c63 --- /dev/null +++ b/19853-h/19853-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7109 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Bob Hunt in Canada, by George W. Orton</title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ + <!-- + p {margin-top: .75em; text-align: justify; margin-bottom: .75em;} + p.titleblock {margin-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0; text-indent: 0; text-align: center;} + h1,h2,h3 {text-align: center; clear: both;} + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + .pagenum {display: inline; font-size: x-small; text-align: right; + position: absolute; right: 2%; border:1px solid white; + padding: 1px 3px; font-style: normal; + font-variant:normal; font-weight:normal; text-decoration: none; + color: #444; background-color: #EEE;} + hr.major {width:75%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;} + a {text-decoration: none;} + td.pr {padding-right:10px;} + .tnote {border: dashed 1px; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; + padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; padding-left: .5em; + padding-right: .5em; font-size: 90%;} + hr.full { width: 100%; } + pre {font-size: 75%;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, Bob Hunt in Canada, by George W. Orton</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: Bob Hunt in Canada</p> +<p>Author: George W. Orton</p> +<p>Release Date: November 17, 2006 [eBook #19853]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOB HUNT IN CANADA***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3>E-text prepared by Roger Frank<br /> + and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> + (http://www.pgdp.net/)</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<table width='450' cellpadding='2' cellspacing='0' summary='' border='1'><tr><td> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 250%; margin-top: 50px; margin-bottom: 30px;'> Bob Hunt in Canada</p> +<p class='titleblock'> By</p> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 140%; margin-bottom: 20px;'> George W. Orton, Ph.D.</p> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 80%;'>Graduate Coach of Track and Cross Country Teams</p> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 80%;'>University of Pennsylvania, Joint Manager of</p> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 80%;'>Camp Tecumseh, N. H., and author of</p> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 80%;'>"Bob Hunt at Camp Pontiac,"</p> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 80%;'>and "Bob Hunt, Senior</p> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 80%; margin-bottom: 200px;'>Camper."</p> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 140%;'>Whitman Publishing Co.</p> +<p class='titleblock' style=' font-size: 80%; margin-bottom: 50px;'>Racine, Wis.</p> +</td></tr></table> + +<hr class='major' /> + +<p class='titleblock' style="margin-bottom: 0.5em; font-size: 80%;">Copyright, 1916, by George W. Jacobs & Co.</p> +<p class='titleblock' style="margin-bottom: 0.5em;">Printed in 1924 by <br /> +Western Printing & Lithographing Co.<br /> +Racine, Wis.</p> +<p class='titleblock'>Printed in U. S. A.</p> + +<hr class='major' /> + +<h2><a name="Contents" id="Contents"></a>Table of Contents</h2> + +<table border="0" width="500" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> +<col style="width:20%;" /> +<col style="width:70%;" /> +<col style="width:10%;" /> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">I</td> + <td align="left">OFF TO CANADA</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#I">7</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">II</td> + <td align="left">UP THE ESCOUMAINS</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_II">30</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">III</td> + <td align="left">CAMP AT LAKE PARENT</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_III">45</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">IV</td> + <td align="left">ACROSS THE PORTAGE</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">60</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">V</td> + <td align="left">THE SHORT TRAIL TO ESCOUMAINS</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_V">71</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">VI</td> + <td align="left">PIERRE'S BEAR STORY</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">82</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">VII</td> + <td align="left">BOB'S CLUE</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">94</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">VIII</td> + <td align="left">THE WIRELESS IN THE WILDERNESS</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">106</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">IX</td> + <td align="left">A WEEK ON THE TRAIL</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX">117</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">X</td> + <td align="left">MOCCASINS AS FOOD</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_X">130</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">XI</td> + <td align="left">A RESCUE IN THE RAPIDS</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI">145</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">XII</td> + <td align="left">PIERRE'S BIG SALMON</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII">157</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="pr" align="right">XIII</td> + <td align="left">THE PLATINUM MINE</td> + <td align="right"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">168</a></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<hr class="major" /> + +<h1>Bob Hunt In Canada</h1> + +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">7</a></span> +<a name="I" id="I"></a> +<h3>OFF TO CANADA</h3> +</div> + +<p>"Hey there, Pud. Come here," yelled Bill Williams one day late in May to +Pud Jones, as the latter sauntered across the athletic field.</p> + +<p>"I'm coming," said Pud, as he rushed across, and grabbing Bill by the +shoulders slammed him up against the fence around the track.</p> + +<p>"What do you think this is?" asked Bill. "A football game, or do you +take me for a tackling dummy?"</p> + +<p>"Well, some kind of a dummy," replied Pud, as he held Bill so firmly +that he could not get at him to punch his head.</p> + +<p>"That'll do, you big rhinoceros," said Bill, as Pud released him.</p> + +<p>"What's the news?" said Pud.</p> + +<p>"I've just had a letter from Bob Hunt and he wants us to go up to Canada +with him to a fishing and hunting camp there," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"That would be fun but I don't know whether my father would let me go or +not. He's been talking about having me work this summer," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Well, you see what you can do with your father and I'll get after +mine," replied Bill. "I rather think that I won't have much trouble as +father was saying just the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">8</a></span> other day that he thought the open air life +was the only thing for a boy in the summer."</p> + +<p>"All fathers think that, but some of them want to have us around during +the summer," said Pud, rather gloomily for him.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I've noticed that oftentimes they make cheap chauffeurs out of +us," said Bill. "They tell us they cannot spare us during the summer and +then make us drive them around at all hours. That's quite a snap for +them, I think, but it doesn't get us any place."</p> + +<p>"You're right," assented Pud. "I had a very poor time last summer for my +family was always having me drive them some place where I did not want +to go. They couldn't see that I would much rather get out on a lot in +the hot sun and have a game of ball than take the finest drive there +is."</p> + +<p>"You ought to have been at Pontiac last year. We had a great time. There +was something doing every minute," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I heard that you had a great summer," said Pud. "How did you get +along without Bob as a pitcher?"</p> + +<p>"We certainly missed him as he was a whole team by himself," said Bill. +"That's one reason why I would like to go to Canada with Bob, for I +haven't seen him since two summers now, and I would like to spend +another summer with him."</p> + +<p>"So would I," said Pud. "Whereabouts in Canada does Bob want to go?"</p> + +<p>"Wait," said Bill, pulling a letter out of his pocket. "I'll read you +what he says. Here it is: 'Father wants me to go up to a camp in Canada +called Camp Tadousac. It is situated east of the Saguenay River and +there is some wonderful fishing to be had there. I've decided to go and +I hope that your father will let you come along. It will be a new +experience for us. This camp has no permanent quarters but the members +go from one part of the country<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">9</a></span> to the other and live out of doors all +the time. They use shelter tents sometimes but often they will be away +for a week with only one's pack and sleeping bag as protection against +the weather. I'm eager to try it for father says that it is fine sport. +He's been up in that country and says it is a sportsman's paradise. He +was farther west in the Lake St. John region, but it should be even +better farther east. So, Bill, get busy. Talk it up with father and +write me that you'll be with me.' That sounds good, don't it?" concluded +Bill.</p> + +<p>"It 'listens' very well," said Pud. "But, don't you let Professor Gary +hear you say 'Don't it' again or you'll get into trouble."</p> + +<p>"Doesn't it. Doesn't it, you boob," said Bill impatiently. "Mr. Shields +told us a good one this morning about a boy who would write 'I have +wrote' instead of 'I have written.' The teacher kept him in after school +one day and made him write it out one hundred times. The teacher was +called from the room and the boy got through his task. He waited a few +minutes but as the teacher did not return, the boy wrote a note as +follows. 'Dear Teacher, I have wrote "I have written" one hundred times. +You have not came back so I have went home.'"</p> + +<p>"Ha, ha, ha!" roared Pud. "That's a good one, but to get down to cases, +are you really going up to Canada with Bob?"</p> + +<p>"I am if I can get father and mother to let me go," replied Bill.</p> + +<p>"Well, I'll see what I can do, for I think that a month or six weeks up +in those Canadian woods would make me real husky."</p> + +<p>"You, real husky," said Bill in a commiserating tone. "I suppose that +you're not as hard as nails and nearly two hundred pounds in weight. +Now, don't get in wrong at home by telling them that you would like to +go to Canada to get husky. That would be no reason at all for you to go +there. Tell them anything you like but that."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">10</a></span></p> + +<p>"I'll see them to-night and let you know to-morrow," said Pud.</p> + +<p>The two boys then separated, Pud to go in to get his baseball suit and +Bill to go out to the diamond, as he already had his suit on. Both boys +were members of the school team. Bill was now the best player in the +school, having made quite a reputation in scholastic circles as a +pitcher. He was the captain of the team, which shows better than +anything else how he had developed since first we met at Camp Pontiac's +Junior camp.</p> + +<p>Pud was waiting for Bill the next morning at the school gate.</p> + +<p>"I'm going, I'm going!" cried Pud, as soon as Bill appeared.</p> + +<p>"That's fine," said Bill in rather a gloomy tone.</p> + +<p>"What's the matter?" asked Pud. "Don't they want you to go?"</p> + +<p>"I'm not sure," said Bill. "Father is willing, but mother is making a +big fuss. She's almost as bad as she was before I went to Pontiac."</p> + +<p>"Gee, that's bad. I don't think they'll let me go unless you go," said +Pud, and he too looked as if he had just lost his best friend.</p> + +<p>"I'll just bet that your father persuades your mother to let you go," +said Pud. "He did the other time, you know."</p> + +<p>"Yes, that's so, but he told me as we walked down to school this morning +that there really was some danger in such a trip as we planned and that +he did not feel that he should persuade mother to let me go. He said +that if he did and then something happened that he wouldn't have an +excuse," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"That's so," said Pud in a hopeless voice. "I guess it's all off, then, +and I was counting on having such a fine summer."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">11</a></span></p> + +<p>"It's not all off. I'll have a chance to talk to mother this afternoon +and I'll show her why she should let me go," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"It's not so dangerous, is it?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"No, of course not," replied Bill. "Mr. Waterman, the head of the camp, +told me that he was always careful and that unless one got careless or +foolhardy that there was little real danger. He said that they got +tipped over now and then and were sometimes temporarily lost, but that +these things only lent spice to the summer and were the things +remembered in after years."</p> + +<p>"He's right," said Pud. "Well, I hope that you can get your mother on +your side for my parents did not raise any objections."</p> + +<p>"It's going to help me tell mother that you're going and that your +father and mother are contented about it. I'll bring her round all +right."</p> + +<p>"I hope you do," said Pud, as they separated to go to their classes.</p> + +<p>The next morning, Bill was waiting for Pud at the school gate. There was +such a light in Bill's eye that Pud exclaimed on seeing him.</p> + +<p>"Don't tell me. Don't tell me, Bill. I can see in your eyes that you're +going to Canada."</p> + +<p>"You bet I am," said Bill, swelling up his chest. "I talked mother over +and she even got enthusiastic before I got through. Father was all right +as soon as mother felt satisfied."</p> + +<p>"Let's write Bob to-day that we'll be with him," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Don't worry," said Bill, with a twinkle in his eye. "I did that last +night and I'm going round to see Mr. Waterman to-night to find out what +I'll have to get for the trip."</p> + +<p>"I'll go with you," said Pud. "We'll both need the same kit, for I have +never been to a real fishing camp before, nor have you."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">12</a></span></p> + +<p>"That's right," said Bill. "We'll have to get a whole lot of things we +didn't have to get for Camp Pontiac; dunnage bags, sleeping bags, tump +lines, fishing tackle, a lot of flies—"</p> + +<p>"A lot of flies,—why, you dummy, we'll have to take some stuff along to +get rid of the flies, from all I hear."</p> + +<p>"You big dub, don't you know that they fish with flies?" said Bill in a +disgusted tone.</p> + +<p>"How do you catch them?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"Say, what are you driving at?" asked Bill. "Do you really mean that you +do not know that they fish with artificial flies?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, artificial flies," said Pud. "Yes, I've heard of that, but I never +saw any. My father's not a fisherman like yours."</p> + +<p>"I should think not," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Well, don't swell up and bust because you know more about artificial +flies than I do," said Pud, digging Bill in the ribs. "Before we come +back, I'll be telling you a few things."</p> + +<p>"Stop your kidding, you small giant," said Bill. "You can't be even sure +of going until you see Mr. Waterman. I would not be surprised if they +charge you two prices, for they will surely have to get an extra guide +to carry the big canoe they'll have to have for you and another extra +man to carry extra grub."</p> + +<p>"Now, Bill, stop kidding and let me know if you really are going around +to see Mr. Waterman to-night, for if you are, I'll go along," said Pud +in a serious tone.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I'm going," said Bill. "For heaven's sake, don't let on to Mr. +Waterman that you've never seen an artificial fly or he'll be disgusted. +Thank goodness, you learned to paddle a canoe well and to swim well as +Camp Pontiac, for those two accomplishments are really necessary for +such a trip."</p> + +<p>"I'll be all right in that way," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Well, don't boast, for though you can probably swim better than any +guide we may see, they'll show you a few<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">13</a></span> things about handling a canoe +that you never dreamed of. Father says that the Lake St. John guides are +wonders and we'll be only a little farther east, so our guides should be +just as clever," said Bill enthusiastically.</p> + +<p>"Gee, it's going to be some summer," said Pud. "I wouldn't miss it for +the world."</p> + +<hr style='width: 45%;' /> + +<p>Two weeks later, Bob Hunt, Pud Jones and Bill Williams left Broad Street +Station for Canada. They were going to travel to Tadousac at the mouth +of the Saguenay River, where they would be met by Mr. Waterman or one of +his men. All three boys were big enough to make such a journey alone. +The boys had their dunnage bags with them and had practically no other +baggage excepting a suitcase. Mr. Waterman had told them to take their +dunnage bags right along with them so they would run no risk of having +them held up in the Custom House at Quebec. They were all provided with +passports, as the big European war was going on and they might have use +for this means of identification.</p> + +<p>The boys arrived in New York without any unusual happenings, but Pud got +separated from them at the Big Pennsylvania Railroad Station and they +were worried until they saw his big good-natured form looming up at the +train gate at the Grand Central Station.</p> + +<p>"Where have you been?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"Gee, I'm glad I found you," said Pud. "How did you get lost?"</p> + +<p>"We get lost, you big duffer," said Bill. "Why, you were the one that +got lost. We've been looking all over for you."</p> + +<p>"That's rich," said Pud, breaking out into a big laugh. "I thought that +you were lost. I know New York like a book."</p> + +<p>"You remind me of a little boy," said Bob. "A policeman found him +wandering round the Pennsylvania Railroad<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">14</a></span> Station and on going up to +him, the little boy said, 'Have you seen my muvver. I think she's got +losted. I can't find her any place.'"</p> + +<p>"Ha! ha! Ha! ha! ha!" laughed Pud. "That's good, but I don't see how you +can liken me to a little boy."</p> + +<p>"All aboard! all aboard for the Montreal and Eastern Canada Express!" +yelled the crier.</p> + +<p>"That means us, fellows," said Bob. "Let's hustle."</p> + +<p>The three boys went through the gate and were soon sitting in the +Pullman bound for Quebec.</p> + +<p>"That was some idea of father's to get us this drawing-room," said Bill. +"We'll certainly enjoy life on this trip."</p> + +<p>"You bet," said Pud.</p> + +<p>They certainly were traveling in style. They tossed up to see who would +get the lower berth or the sofa. Pud was the one left over and he got +the upper berth, whereupon Bill, who had the lower, said that he would +not take any chances but would take the upper berth himself. A +good-natured, argument followed and the result was that Bob took the +lower berth, Pud the sofa and Bill went upstairs. They awoke in the +morning to find themselves at Sherbrooke and to get their first taste of +the Canadian habitant. When they got down to stretch their legs before +breakfast, they found most of the Canadians speaking French.</p> + +<p>"Here's a chance to spout your French, Bob," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Who told you that I talked French?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Father told me some time ago," answered Bill. "He said that you could +talk it like a native."</p> + +<p>"I could a few years ago, but I'm rusty now, as I haven't talked French +for at least five years," replied Bob.</p> + +<p>"They don't talk real French here anyway," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, they do," said Bill. "It's a kind of dialect, but father tells +me that it is much easier to understand a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">15</a></span> French-Canadian than many of +the French people from Paris."</p> + +<p>"That's very true," said Bob. "My father, as I've told you before, has +been up in the Lake St. John region, and he says that he gets along +quite well with the inhabitants. He says that they have some peculiar +expressions, but that it is quite easy to talk to them as they speak a +pretty pure dialect of French."</p> + +<p>They were soon off again, now headed for Quebec. They got a seat in the +dining-car and watched the scenery as they rode along. They found the +quaint little Canadian cottages of the habitants much like the farmers' +homes in New England. The land was rolling and, as usual, they followed +the course of some river. As they went along, they heard less and less +English and Bob was often called on to translate the cries that were +heard at the different stations.</p> + +<p>"I'll soon get my French back up here," said Bob. "They seem to talk +pretty good French. I can understand them quite easily."</p> + +<p>About ten o'clock, they came into a hilly country and found evidences of +mining being carried on. On Bob's inquiring, they found that they were +asbestos mines and that it was practically a new industry for this part +of Canada. They also noted that many new farms were being cleared by the +young Frenchmen and that much lumber was being transported both by the +rivers and the railroad. The look of the people was quite foreign by +this time and the boys felt that they were indeed in a foreign land.</p> + +<p>"Have you ever been in Toronto?" suddenly asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"No," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Well, that is certainly different from this part of Canada," said Bill. +"You can hardly tell that you are out of the United States when you are +there."</p> + +<p>"I should think that the French talk would make it seem foreign anyway," +said Pud.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">16</a></span></p> + +<p>"That's it," said Bob. "You don't hear any more French there than you do +in Chicago, Philadelphia or any other American city. I remember that I +was up there to the great Toronto Fair and I hardly knew that I was in +Canada."</p> + +<p>"This is certainly different," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Many people that visit only Quebec and Montreal have an entirely wrong +impression of Canada. They think there are just as many French all over +as they find in those cities. The fact is that outside of the province +of Quebec, Canada is just as much an English-speaking country as the +United States.</p> + +<p>"Is that so?" said Pud. "Why didn't we go, then, to some place where +they talk sense? I'm going to have a fine time getting along with these +fellows. I can't talk French."</p> + +<p>"Get busy and you'll learn a lot this summer," said Bob. "Mr. Waterman +told me that two of the guides talk English a little, so we'll get along +all right."</p> + +<p>"I'm glad they talk English," said Bill. "All the French I know you +could put in your eye tooth."</p> + +<p>A short time later, they arrived at Levis and saw the majestic heights +of Quebec opposite.</p> + +<p>"This St. Lawrence is some river," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"I should think it is," said Bob. "The biggest ocean liners can come up +this far, while there is a twenty-seven-foot channel all the way up to +Montreal."</p> + +<p>"You don't say so," said Pud. "Well, there is one thing sure that I'm +learning some geography at first hand this morning."</p> + +<p>"When do we leave for Tadousac?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"We go down to-morrow on the boat," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"That's fine," said Pud. "We can see the town this afternoon."</p> + +<p>"You bet we will," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Where are we staying?" asked Pud.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">17</a></span></p> + +<p>"At the Chateau Frontenac," said Bob. "It's that building up on the +cliff there."</p> + +<p>"That's some hotel," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"You'll think so before to-morrow," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Say, let's go up to the Plains of Isaac and see where John Paul Jones +fell when he captured Quebec from the English," said Pud.</p> + +<p>At this, Bill and Bob just curled up and laughed until they nearly fell +off their chairs.</p> + +<p>"What's the matter?" asked Pud. "Isn't that the real place to see in +Quebec?"</p> + +<p>"You need some history lessons as well as geography," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Well, let's have it," said Pud. "I know I'm always getting things +fatally twisted."</p> + +<p>"You mean the Plains of Abraham," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"Oh, Abraham, Jacob or Isaac, it's all the same, isn't it?" said Pud, +apparently rather disgusted that they had blamed him for such a natural +mistake.</p> + +<p>"And, who ever heard of John Paul Jones taking Quebec?" asked Bill, +looking at Bob.</p> + +<p>"Well, who was it?" said Pud. "Those historical names always get me."</p> + +<p>"It was Wolfe, the famous young English general. He was killed in the +moment of victory, and the French general, Montcalm, also was killed," +said Bob.</p> + +<p>"Well, let's go out there and see the place," said Pud. "It must be +interesting."</p> + +<p>By this time, they were across the St. Lawrence and at the mercy of +about a hundred cab drivers. Bob led the way and they were soon going up +the hill to the Chateau. In the dining-hall, they heard practically +nothing but English spoken as the Chateau was the place where most of +the tourists stayed. After an excellent lunch, they sauntered<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">18</a></span> out to +see the sights. They were again mobbed by the cabbies.</p> + +<p>"Let's take one of those funny-looking cabs," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"That's just what I was looking for," said Bob. "Father told me to be +sure and have a ride in a 'caleche,' as he called it."</p> + +<p>They got into the 'caleche,' which is just like a hansom cab except that +the old-fashioned leather springs were used, and instead of the driver +sitting behind, he rode in front on a sort of wide dashboard. Away they +went and the driver plied the whip. The horse was not large but proved +strong and wiry. In a short time, the boys were out on the Plains of +Abraham, looking at the various monuments marking the great battle which +meant the end of the French dominion in Canada. They saw the monuments +to Wolfe and Montcalm and enjoyed the view far south into the United +States. Their guide showed them the path up which Wolfe climbed with his +soldiers to surprise the French that memorable morning. After seeing the +sights there, they drove back and went through part of the citadel. This +proved to be one of the strongest forts in America, and its strength, +the number of British Tommies about, the guns of large caliber that +could be seen, so impressed the boys that Bob at last broke out.</p> + +<p>"This is some fort. It would take a real siege gun to make much of an +impression on those walls and ramparts while I guess those big cannon +would do a little talking themselves."</p> + +<p>"I should think so," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Wait a minute," said Bill. "I'd like to get some photos."</p> + +<p>Thereupon, he pulled out a little pocket kodak he had, and got ready to +focus on a big gun set in an embrasure of the walls. Before he could +move almost, a soldier was at his side and said,</p> + +<p>"You are under arrest. It is forbidden to bring kodaks or cameras of any +kind within these walls."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">19</a></span></p> + +<p>"I didn't know that," said Bill. "I simply wanted to take a few photos +of the place."</p> + +<p>"You'll have to explain all that to the Commandant," said the Tommie, as +he led the way.</p> + +<p>The whole thing had happened so suddenly that neither Bob nor Pud had +time to say a word before they saw Bill turn to follow the soldier.</p> + +<p>"May we not go with our friend?" asked Bob of the Tommie.</p> + +<p>"I was about to ask that you accompany us, for though you are not under +arrest, I'll have to bring you along as witnesses."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry, Pud," said Bob. "It'll be all right. We're not at war and +we were not doing anything very wrong."</p> + +<p>"That's all very well," said Pud also in a low tone. "They may take us +for spies and keep us locked up here all summer."</p> + +<p>"Oh, Tommyrot," said Bob, though at heart he did not know just what was +liable to happen.</p> + +<p>In the meantime, the party went along the walk until they came to a big +door. They entered and soon were asked to seat themselves in a large +room in which there were many desks with officers seated and busily +writing. Gold lace, silver spurs, bright officer's swords, red caps, and +the air of discipline and business that characterized the whole room did +not fail to have its effect on the boys. Nor did they fail to notice +that each of the doors was guarded by soldiers with fixed bayonets +standing at attention. The Tommy who was escorting them took them up to +one of the desks and said,</p> + +<p>"Captain Davidson, I have here under arrest, this young man with these +two others as witnesses."</p> + +<p>"Of what are they accused?" asked the officer, as he glanced sharply at +the three of them.</p> + +<p>"Of espionage," said the soldier.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">20</a></span></p> + +<p>"Of espionage?" said the officer. "That is a serious offense."</p> + +<p>"I know it is but that is the term under which the offense comes," +replied the soldier.</p> + +<p>"This must be taken up by the Commandant himself," said the Captain, as +he touched a bell at his side. Immediately a young officer appeared.</p> + +<p>"Captain Abercrombie, tell Major-General Norris, the Commandant, that we +have here a prisoner accused of espionage."</p> + +<p>The orderly saluted and was soon lost to view behind a door at one end +of the hall. He was back in a few minutes. During that time, our three +adventurers stood and watched with interest the varied scene that was +taking-place before them.</p> + +<p>"This is some lark," said Bill to Bob in a low tone.</p> + +<p>"No communication between the prisoner and witnesses," said the Tommy at +once, as he moved nearer as if to enforce his demands. Pud looked over +at Bill with a sort of reproach in his eyes, for he had heard the +remark. Bob kept his eyes front for he was very much interested in the +comings and goings of the officers, orderlies and soldiers that came and +went throughout the hall.</p> + +<p>"Captain Davidson," said the orderly as he returned, "the Commandant +requests that you send in the prisoner and witnesses to him at once.'</p> + +<p>"Very well," said the Captain. "Here they are and I hand them over to +you together with Private Watkins, who arrested them."</p> + +<p>They were then marched into the next room where they found a big +white-haired man sitting at a desk busily engaged. The orderly stopped +his charges at a respectful distance. The Commandant kept on writing for +a few minutes but suddenly he turned around and gave a sharp and +piercing look at the young Americans.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">21</a></span></p> + +<p>"Americans," said he, in rather a relieved tone. "Captain Abercrombie, +let me know the gist of this affair."</p> + +<p>"Major-General Norris, I shall have to ask Private Watson to give you +the details at first hand, for as yet I know nothing about the matter, +except that one of these young men is accused of being a spy."</p> + +<p>"Private Watson, give me the details of the matter."</p> + +<p>"Your Excellency," said Private Watson, "I know nothing more than that +as I stood at my post on the Ramparts, near Gun No. 145, I saw this +young man (pointing to Bill) suddenly produce one of those very small +German cameras and try to take a photo of the gun and its location."</p> + +<p>"Young man, is this so?" asked the Commandant in a serious voice.</p> + +<p>"It is so, except that I did not intend to do any harm; the gun seemed +very picturesque to me and I wanted a photo of it," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Were you not told that you should leave cameras of all kinds with the +gateman?" asked the Commandant.</p> + +<p>"No," said Bill. "We came in a carriage and nothing was said to us."</p> + +<p>"Then, you were given a card and asked to read it, were you not?" +continued the Commandant.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Bill, "but to tell the truth, I didn't read it carefully."</p> + +<p>"Where is that card?" was the next question.</p> + +<p>Bill fumbled in his pocket and in a moment held it out.</p> + +<p>"Private Watson, kindly show the prisoner the order relating to +cameras," said the Commandant.</p> + +<p>Private Watson then came forward and, taking the card, he showed Bill +the paragraph stating that all cameras must be left at the gate.</p> + +<p>"I am very sorry, sir, that I was so careless," said Bill. "I did not +think that anything I could do would get me into trouble here and I +didn't think it necessary to read<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">22</a></span> the card. There were so many things +to see that I just put it in my pocket."</p> + +<p>"That is not much of an excuse," said the Commandant in a stern voice. +"You must remember that you are here in a military fortress and that we +can't be too strict in some matters."</p> + +<p>"I recognize that now, but I assure you that I had no motive whatever in +taking the picture except to get a unique photo," said Bill humbly.</p> + +<p>The Commandant for the next ten minutes put the three boys through a +regular third degree examination. They told him who they were, where +they came from, who their parents were, what business they were in, and +a hundred other questions.</p> + +<p>"Boys," said the Commandant, "I'm afraid that I'll have to detain you +until Captain Abercrombie here can verify some of your statements."</p> + +<p>Then, turning to the orderly, he said,</p> + +<p>"Captain Abercrombie, call up the Chateau and see if these three are +registered there as they state. Send Private Watson out to the West Gate +to get the driver who took them to the Plains of Abraham this afternoon. +Call up the Richelieu and Ontario Navigation Company's office and see if +passage is booked for to-morrow for three in the name of Hunt. Look +through their luggage at the Chateau and report as soon as possible."</p> + +<p>"Very well, your Excellency," said the Captain, and saluting, he +vanished.</p> + +<p>"Private Watson," said the Commandant.</p> + +<p>"At your orders, sir," said the private, clicking his heels as he +saluted.</p> + +<p>"Take these young gentlemen to the guard-house and remain with them +until I send Captain Abercrombie to you with orders for their release."</p> + +<p>"Very well, your Excellency," said Private Watson, as he led the way out +of the room.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">23</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys followed him through the big room, out into the air and along a +path until they came to a smaller building with iron bars at the +windows. Private Watson had to stop and tell the nature of the errand to +the soldier at the door, who finally saluted and let them in. They found +themselves in a rather large antechamber. After a talk with the Captain +in charge, the boys were led to a bright airy room on the second floor.</p> + +<p>"I've brought you here, boys," said Private Watson, "because you can +look out of the windows and find something to interest yourselves with. +I can tell by the way in which Major-General Norris spoke that he thinks +you are all right, so I'll give you the benefit of the doubt. When you +get tired of seeing the scenery, take a look at those old guns in the +cases over there."</p> + +<p>Thereupon, their escort left them and could be seen pacing in front of +the door.</p> + +<p>"You're a fine specimen," said Pud, as soon as the door was closed.</p> + +<p>"Ah, what's the matter?" said Bill. "I suppose you think that I brought +the camera along just to get us into trouble."</p> + +<p>"You didn't seem to think it was serious a little while ago," replied +Pud. "Then, you said it was a lark. This is a fine lark. If we're kept +here, we'll miss our boat to-morrow and that will make us miss the other +boat to Escoumains and then Mr. Waterman won't know where we are and it +will ball everything up."</p> + +<p>"Dry up, you old tear-bag," said Bob. "This isn't very serious. I can +see why it's only right that they should be very careful around a +fortress and any trouble we're in is our own fault, but Captain +Abercrombie will find everything straight and we'll be out of here just +in time to have a good dinner and to talk over our experience with +gusto."</p> + +<p>"I hope so, I hope so," said Pud, in such a dejected tone that even Bill +had to laugh at him.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">24</a></span></p> + +<p>"Gee, I'm sorry, Bob, to get you two into all this trouble," said Bill +to Bob.</p> + +<p>"Don't worry. Things will be all right."</p> + +<p>The boys then busied themselves watching the boats ply to and fro on the +broad St. Lawrence. The people seemed like small flies far down on the +esplanade near the Chateau Frontenac, while further down on the wharves, +they could see a jumbled mass of people, carriages, carts, wagons, etc., +all indicating how busy things were in Quebec. They found plenty to +interest them, but at last they turned and began to examine the old +muskets and arms in the cases by the walls.</p> + +<p>"Gee, here's a good one," said Bill. "It's a musket that used to belong +to old Count Frontenac. What do you think of that?"</p> + +<p>"Who was Fronty?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"Count Frontenac was one of the greatest governors that Canada ever had +in the time of the French regime."</p> + +<p>"He was a great man, as our forefathers found out in the time of the +French and Indian wars," said Bob. "There are so many stories told, +showing what a wonderful man he was. It's like a touch of the past to +look at a gun that such a famous man once used."</p> + +<p>"That's all right," said Pud, "but it don't help us any in getting out +of here."</p> + +<p>"Don't get impatient," said Bob. "It will take some time to look up the +various things about us."</p> + +<p>"That's so, but it's commencing to get dark and I'm getting hungry," +said Pud.</p> + +<p>"I thought so," said Bob. "I thought it had something to do with your +stomach."</p> + +<p>"It's too bad that I got into this," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Cut it out, Bill," said Bob. "I've really enjoyed myself so far, for +when you come to think of it, we're not in the slightest danger. At the +worst, we can call for aid<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">25</a></span> on the American consul here and make him +straighten out the matter."</p> + +<p>"That's so," said Pud. "I never thought of that."</p> + +<p>"Of course, you didn't, you big puddenhead," said Bob. "At your time of +life, you have difficulty in thinking of anything but your stomach."</p> + +<p>A little later, Captain Abercrombie came to the door. The boys rushed +over to hear what he had to say.</p> + +<p>"I am instructed by Major-General Norris, the Commandant, to say to you +that he regrets the inconvenience to which you have been put. He finds +that the information given him is correct in every particular, and he +feels that there was no idea of spying on your part. At the same time, +he desires to recommend to all of you that in future, on going into a +fortress, whether here or elsewhere, that when given a card of +instructions, you read and act according to the same. He desires that +you be set at liberty at once and has a military carriage at the West +Gate to drive you to the Chateau. Private Watson, will you kindly see +the gentlemen to the West Gate, where you will find the carriage ready? +With your permission, I shall also accompany you as far as the +Commandant's office."</p> + +<p>"Hurray," said Pud. "I knew it would be all right."</p> + +<p>"I'm sorry to have put you to all this trouble, Captain," said Bill. +"I'm sure that I'll be more careful in the future."</p> + +<p>"It was no bother. I am glad that you got off so easily. We have to be +careful here at all times, for this is, you know, the strongest fortress +in His Majesty's great Dominion, and its secrets must be guarded."</p> + +<p>On arriving at the Commandant's office the captain left them, and it was +not long afterwards that they were sitting around a table at the Chateau +Frontenac, chatting and laughing and having a good feed, as Pud +expressed it.</p> + +<p>"That experience of ours seems just like a dream to me," said Bob, as +the waiter left to get the dessert.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">26</a></span></p> + +<p>"It was no dream," said Pud. "If that old Major-General Norris had not +been such a thoroughbred, he might have given us a peck of trouble."</p> + +<p>"Never again for me," said Bill. "If ever I go into a public place and +they give me directions, I'm going to listen and do what's ordered."</p> + +<p>"What's doing to-night?" asked Pud, who was always looking for fun in +some form or other.</p> + +<p>"Nothing much," replied Bob. "I understand that there's a band concert +by the Highland Regiment band on the Esplanade this evening. We can +listen to that for a while and then get to bed. We must be up early as +the boat leaves for Tadousac at seven o'clock to-morrow morning."</p> + +<p>"I'll never make it," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"You'll make it, all right," said Bob. "We're all sleeping in the same +room and I have a call in for five-thirty. That will give us time to get +up and have a decent breakfast before going."</p> + +<p>The boys enjoyed the band concert after their dinner. On the broad-walk +on the river side of the Chateau, a large crowd gathered and sauntered +up and down listening to the excellent music. The scene was interesting +to the boys mainly because of the many kinds of military dress that was +sprinkled throughout the crowd. The military men gave a touch of the Old +World to the scene that was different from anything that the boys had +ever noted in the United States. In good time they turned in, and +five-thirty saw Bob out of bed and on top of Pud, who said that he could +not get awake.</p> + +<p>"I'll waken you up, you lazy dog," said Bob, as he jumped on Pud's bed. +This action thoroughly aroused Pud, and a five minutes' wrestling match +resulted in Bob's being finally buried beneath the covers.</p> + +<p>"Help, Bill," yelled Bob. "This big elephant will crush the life out of +me if you do not come to my assistance."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">27</a></span></p> + +<p>Bill, thereupon, rushed over and grabbed Pud by the shoulders with such +a force that he finally had to cry quits.</p> + +<p>"Oh, all right," said Pud, "but it takes two of you to do it."</p> + +<p>"Let's hurry," said Bob. "I have ordered oatmeal, buckwheat cakes and +maple sirup, poached eggs on toast, chops—"</p> + +<p>"Stop, stop," yelled Pud. "My mouth's watering now. I'll beat you all to +the dining room."</p> + +<p>Ten minutes later they were having their last breakfast in Quebec for +many a long day. A little later, they drove down to the wharf and were +soon on board. They found the boat large and roomy and filled with +tourists, taking the Saguenay trip, that is, the trip from Quebec to +Murray Bay, to Tadousac and up the far-famed Saguenay to Chicoutimi. The +scenery is noted all over the world as this is one of the big +sight-seeing trips of the Western continent. It was not long until they +swung out into the stream and headed for the Ile d'Orleans which lies +just below Quebec. Further along, they looked over to the northern bank +of the river and saw the famous Montmorency Falls.</p> + +<p>"I was going to suggest yesterday that we go down to Montmorency for +dinner last night," said Bob. "Father told me to do this, but our +adventure at the Citadel made this out of the question."</p> + +<p>"That's too bad," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"That was some business," said Pud. "I thought it was all over with us +for awhile. I was dreaming of dungeons deep for weeks to come."</p> + +<p>"Don't exaggerate, Pud," said Bob. "We might have had a lot of trouble. +I wonder what that fine church over there is."</p> + +<p>"That's the well known St. Ann de Beaupre cathedral," said an Englishman +or Canadian standing nearby.</p> + +<p>"I never heard of it," said Bill.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">28</a></span></p> + +<p>"It's easily seen that you're not a Roman Catholic," said the stranger. +"I can't imagine a Catholic ever coming to Quebec without knowing of the +virtues and miracles of St. Ann."</p> + +<p>"I must confess my ignorance too," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"Well, St. Ann de Beaupre is the patron saint of this particular parish +and for many, many years she had been doing miracles in that little town +over yonder. That magnificent church is a tribute donated by the +hundreds that have been blessed by her ministrations."</p> + +<p>"In what special field does the gracious Saint consent to show her +power?" asked Bob, with his best manner.</p> + +<p>"Towards the crippled," said the stranger. "Hundreds of crutches have +been left in that church as proof of the divine powers of St. Ann."</p> + +<p>"Is that so?" said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Yes, and there really seems to be some miraculous influence at work."</p> + +<p>"We must go there when we are coming home," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"It will pay you," said the stranger, "for you will see there some +things to be seen in no other part of North America except in Mexico."</p> + +<p>As they went down the river it gradually broadened, until they were +steaming along on what looked more like an inland sea than a river. In +due time, they came to the famous northern watering place, Murray Bay. +The ship stopped there for some time and the boys had a chance to hire a +carriage and go up into the town. They saw some nice hotels and +evidences of fashionable country places. It was getting dark as they +came off the mouth of the Saguenay River, and the high rocks on either +side as they moved on gave one the impression of great depth. This +impression was correct, as the river flows along a cleft in the strata +rather than along any bed that has been made by the action of the waters +themselves. They moved<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">29</a></span> into a wharf that merely jutted out from the +rocky shore. Everything was confusion, for there did not seem to be any +one but Frenchmen on the wharf. The boys got off and waited in the glare +of a big torch light, made after the fashion of the lights used by +itinerant showmen. No Mr. Waterman appeared.</p> + +<p>"What was the name of that hotel?" asked Bob of Bill.</p> + +<p>"I can't remember it, but I have it in my notebook," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Look it up, for if Mr. Waterman does not come soon, we'll go up there +as he directed us. Let's get our baggage."</p> + +<p>They collected this and were just on the point of making a start when +Bill was slapped on the back and turned to see Mr. Waterman standing +before them, dressed for the woods.</p> + +<p>"How are you boys?" asked Mr. Waterman, as he turned to Bob and Pud.</p> + +<p>"Fine as silk," said Pud. "We were just going to try to find that little +hotel you wrote us about."</p> + +<p>"We'll go up there to-night anyway and take the early boat down the +river in the morning. I've engaged rooms for you there and an early +breakfast."</p> + +<p>"Oh, Lord!" said Pud. "Early breakfast again. I'll be a 'shadder' of my +former self if this early rising stunt is to be my regular medicine."</p> + +<p>"Get used to it," said Mr. Waterman, "for you'll be up early from now +on, only some days it will be earlier than others. But I'll guarantee +that you'll get all the sleep that's good for you."</p> + +<p>"All right, I'm game," said Pud. "I came up here to have a good time and +get into condition. You're the doctor and I'll not kick on taking the +medicine."</p> + +<p>"It will be the sweetest medicine you ever had," said Mr. Waterman. +"Why, boy, we're going to have a real man's time this summer and you'll +be the first one to say so six weeks from now."</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">30</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER II</h2><h3>UP THE ESCOUMAINS</h3> +</div> + +<p>About five o'clock the next morning, Bob was awakened by what sounded +like a parade under his windows. He got up and saw a lot of women and +men coming from the little church on the opposite corner. Bob's action +and noise in opening the window had awakened the others, as they were +all sleeping in a sort of dormitory.</p> + +<p>"What the deuce is going on outside?" asked Bill Williams. "Has the +circus come to town or why this procession so early in the morning?"</p> + +<p>"You must remember that you are in a real Catholic country and that the +Roman Catholic religion plays a very big part in the life of the people +here. The so-called procession you will hear any morning as it is merely +the good souls of the parish returning from the mass or the matin +service," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Well, let's get up now that we're all awake," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Not all," said Bob, pointing to Pud, who slept on, totally unconscious +of all that had aroused the others. "Little Lord Fauntleroy is still +peacefully sleeping."</p> + +<p>"Not so loud," said Mr. Waterman. "You'll wake him up."</p> + +<p>"No fear of that," said Bill. "What's the answer, Bob? Shall we merely +mob him or what shall it be?"</p> + +<p>"Let's dump him on the floor and have some fun with him," said Bob.</p> + +<p>The two boys then went over and with a mighty shove, they dumped Pud on +the floor and turned cot and mattress over him. They both climbed on top +and only smothered sounds could be heard from beneath the pile. Then +like<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">31</a></span> Goliath in his wrath, Pud arose, cot, mattress, blankets, two +yelling boys, and all, and shook himself. He made a bull-like rush at +Bob but Bill got him from behind and for five minutes there was some +pretty rough-house work in that room.</p> + +<p>"Ye gods! I'm hot," at last cried Bob, stepping back for a breathing +spell.</p> + +<p>"Same here," said Pud, sitting down on a cot and wiping off the sweat +with a pajama top that had gotten separated from its master during the +melee.</p> + +<p>"Let's get dressed and get some breakfast," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Is this the regular setting up exercises that this little company of +mild-eyed anarchists have every morning?" asked Mr. Waterman in his +quiet way. "If so, I am afraid that I cannot recommend it for persons +nervously disposed."</p> + +<p>"Oh, this is nothing," said Bob. "This will just give us an appetite."</p> + +<p>"Well, I hear Madame Colombe busy getting breakfast ready, so we'll just +be in time," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Ten minutes later, the party was seated around a table in the dining +room eating a breakfast of oatmeal, milk, ham and eggs, hot biscuits and +coffee.</p> + +<p>"The boat leaves at six-thirty so we haven't much time to lose," said +Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"We'll be with you in a minute," said Bob.</p> + +<p>The boys hurried upstairs and came down with their dunnage bags. They +had expected to carry these down to the boat, but a little hotel cart +came along and took them down. They had a few minutes to spare as they +arrived at the wharf, so they went out to the little observation house +in the middle of the pond right near the wharf. This pond was used by +the Government as a Fishery Station and there were scores of magnificent +salmon in the pond. The boys were much interested in watching these +wonderful game fish. They could see them swimming around and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">32</a></span> +occasionally one of them would jump clear out of the water after a fly +or some other insect.</p> + +<p>"We'll have to catch a few like those this summer," said Mr. Waterman +with a glistening eye.</p> + +<p>"Will we really have a chance to catch salmon as large as those?" asked +Bob.</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, on our Portneuf River trip, we should get some salmon just as +fine as these," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"What do you catch them with? I'm sure I have nothing big enough to hold +a fish like that," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"We catch them with the regular rod and fly," replied their leader.</p> + +<p>"Don't say 'we'; say 'I' catch them, for I should think it would have to +be a real fisherman that could land such a big fish with such a small +line and rod," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"That's why we're coming up here," said Bill Williams. "My ambition is +to get one of those salmon and I don't want it unless I can catch it +with my regular tackle."</p> + +<p>"That's talking like a real fisherman and sportsman," said Mr. Waterman. +"Boys, this fishing is or should be considered a sport. That being so, +we must make it a matching of our wits against that of the fish. It +should not be merely our strength against theirs. We, as sportsmen, +should give them a chance."</p> + +<p>"That's the idea," said Bob. "Well, I'll consider that I am developing +into a real fisherman when I am able to land one of those big fellows."</p> + +<p>Just then the boat whistle was heard and the boys hurried on board. The +vessel that was to take them to Escoumains was an old side-wheel steamer +apparently of the vintage of about 1812. It did some wheezing and +puffing before it got straightened out for the trip. The boys looked +over the boat with interest, paying special attention to the people who +were on board. They were greatly interested in the talk and gestures of +the Frenchmen that composed the crew and most of the passengers. A +little old Frenchman<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">33</a></span> with a fiddle also attracted their attention. A +few pennies soon had him playing away for dear life and calling off the +figures in French in a singsong voice.</p> + +<p>On their way down the river, the boat stopped at two places, at both of +which lumbering seemed to be the main industry. At last, the boat put in +for Escoumains. Two large tramp steamers were anchored off the town +loading lumber from big barges. The steamers drew too much water to get +into the town wharf, thus requiring two handlings of the lumber. Quite a +few people were on the wharf. Mr. Anderson, one of Mr. Waterman's men, +was awaiting them. As soon as they were off the boat, he had a carriage +ready and they were off for the little village a half mile away. They +stopped at Madame LaBlanche's boarding house, where Mr. Waterman had +made arrangements for keeping their "store" clothes while they were out +in the woods. They were shown upstairs and in a short time, the boys +were getting into their real wool suits. Mr. Waterman brought in the +shoepacks that he had made for them according to the measurements he had +taken previously. All fitted nicely, though Mr. Waterman looked over +them carefully.</p> + +<p>"It pays to be sure that your shoepacks are right," said Mr. Waterman, +"for they are the real boots for use in canoeing trips. They should be +comfortable."</p> + +<p>"Are these waterproof?" asked Bob. "Father told me that his shoepacks +were tight as a drum and that he stepped right out of the canoe into the +water whenever he wanted to."</p> + +<p>"That's right," replied Mr. Anderson. "It is possible that they may leak +just a little the first two days until the seams swell, but after that +they will be just as dry as rubber boots."</p> + +<p>This information caused Bill and Pud to look at their shoepacks with +more care. They were both anxious to try them out. Finally, they were +ready for the woods, with everything unnecessary put away at Madame +LaBlanche's. Their sleeping bags, extra shirts, moccasins, etc., were +in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">34</a></span> their dunnage bags and all of these were piled outside the door on +the porch.</p> + +<p>"We still have about a half hour before lunch so let us go over to the +store, as I want you all to meet Sandy MacPherson, the owner," said Mr. +Waterman. "Sandy is the big man of this village. He runs the big saw +mill, owns the store and manages scores of lumbermen in the winter when +the trees are cut many miles up the valleys. He's a good man to know as +everybody here does as he says. In addition, he talks English and that +helps when one cannot talk French very well."</p> + +<p>They all went over to the store and found it the center of male society +at least for the village. Several men were gathered there while others +came and went, buying things in the store, which was quite a large store +for such a small village. Sandy seemed delighted to meet the boys.</p> + +<p>"I'm delighted to meet you, boys," said he. "You're in for a fine time +if you're going into the woods with Mr. Waterman. If you get in trouble, +just call on me."</p> + +<p>The boys thanked him for his good wishes and after taking a look at the +big saw mill, they went back to the boarding house.</p> + +<p>"Fill up, boys, as this is the last meal you'll eat in a house for some +time," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"That's all right, but I wager that they'll enjoy some of the meals +we're going to have on Lac Parent or Corbeau more than any they have had +in a long time," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Madame LaBlanche outdid herself at this lunch for she had a very good +chicken dinner for the boys, with pie, cake, preserved raspberries and +crabapples for dessert.</p> + +<p>"This is a fine meal to start one off for the woods," said Pud. "I +couldn't walk a step if you paid me five dollars."</p> + +<p>"You won't have to walk for some time," said Mr. Anderson. "We're going +to drive in about sixteen miles and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">35</a></span> I'll wager that this dinner will be +pretty well digested by the time we get there. We're going in on an old +wood road so you will hardly find it like the macadamized roads you have +in the park in Philadelphia."</p> + +<p>A short time later they were off. Two carriages were to take them into +the woods, each drawn by a hardy looking though rather small +French-Canadian horse and driven by a habitant. Bob was in the front +seat with the driver, with Pud and Mr. Waterman in the back seat. Bill +and Mr. Anderson were in the other buggy.</p> + +<p>"Well, here's a chance to begin talking French," said Mr. Waterman to +Bob. "Bill tells me that you spout it quite well."</p> + +<p>"Bill is exaggerating," said Bob. "I used to talk French rather well and +I hope to pick it up soon again."</p> + +<p>"You will," said Mr. Waterman. "You will also find that these habitants +speak a pretty good dialect of French. In no time, Bob, you will be able +to talk just like the natives."</p> + +<p>"Allons, Gi-may," cried the driver to the horse as he touched him with +the whip. The horse responded nobly and they bowled along right merrily. +Bob tried to think what "Allons, Gi-may" meant. He got the first word +all right. That meant "Giddap or Go-along" in the vernacular but what +that "Gi-may" meant he could not think. He did not want to ask Mr. +Waterman so soon for information. Taking the bull by the horns, Bob +began a conversation with the driver. To be sure it was very limited, +for Bob had his troubles, but after a little while he got along very +well. He was soon asking the driver for the names of the various trees +they noted along the road. Bob thought that this would be valuable in +the woods. All the habitants in such a place as Escoumains are woodsmen, +and the driver, as such, knew the names of everything in the woods. But, +every once in a while, he would cry out "Allons, Gi-may" and Bob would +wonder what that word "Gi-may" meant. Soon the road led by a small +farmhouse that had about two acres cleared around it.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">36</a></span></p> + +<p>"That's the last house you'll see," said the driver to Bob. Bob asked +Mr. Waterman if this was right.</p> + +<p>"That's right," said Mr. Waterman, "and you will soon know that it is +so, for the road gets worse from now on."</p> + +<p>This proved correct and Pud was bounced around so that he had no trouble +digesting his dinner.</p> + +<p>"This is some road," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"All the same, we must keep going for we want to ford the river before +dark," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"What river?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"The Escoumains," said Mr. Waterman. "That is the name of the river at +the little village from which we started. The village is called after +the river. You will get to know this river well before the summer is +over, for we'll run down it to the village some time."</p> + +<p>"Are there any rapids?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"You can't find any river in this country without fast water here and +there," said Mr. Waterman. "The only difference is that some rivers have +faster water than others. After I have seen you on the lakes awhile and +have had the guides teach you a few things we'll take a try at some fast +water and you'll think that there is no better sport than shooting a +rapid."</p> + +<p>"It must be great fun," said Bob.</p> + +<p>Shortly afterwards, they struck the river and the road led up along the +bank. It followed the windings of the river and it was slow work. Every +now and then the driver yelled "Allons, Gi-may," and Bob racked his +brain to think what "Gi-may" meant. At last it came to him in a flash. +He turned to the driver and asked in French,</p> + +<p>"Is the horse named Gi-may?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes," said the driver. "He belongs to Monsieur MacPherson and he +calls him Gi-may."</p> + +<p>"Oh, you mean Jimmy," said Bob.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">37</a></span></p> + +<p>"But, yes, Gi-may," said the driver, and Bob had solved the riddle. He +then told Mr. Waterman how he had tried to think what "Gi-may" meant, +thinking at first that it meant something like "Allons" but that he had +found out it was the horse's name.</p> + +<p>It was getting dark when they came to the ford. Mr. Anderson yelled like +an Indian and his call was answered by a real Indian yell. A moment +later, two men appeared on the opposite bank.</p> + +<p>"That's Joe and Pierre," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"How are we going to get across?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"That's easy," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>The driver answered Pud by driving the horse down the bank into the +water. The stream ran swiftly and the horse put his head down sniffing +the water as if frightened. The driver used the whip and the horse +proceeded.</p> + +<p>"The river's pretty high," yelled Mr. Waterman to Mr. Anderson. "You had +better put those dunnage bags on the seat. That buggy of yours is lower +than this one."</p> + +<p>"All right," came back the cry, almost drowned by the noise of the +carriage as it bumped on the rocks at the bottom of the river, the swish +of the water and the noise of the horse's hoofs. Each took his dunnage +bag on his lap and in the center of the river they had to lift up their +feet as the water came into the body of the buggy. It almost seemed that +they would be swept down the river. Bob looked at the driver and at Mr. +Waterman. Both had a look of unconcern on their faces so Bob felt that +things were all right. This turned out to be the case, for five minutes +later the horse came out on a sort of sand bar. The driver drove down +stream a little and then, putting the whip to the horse, they tore up a +steep bank and along a wood road. They had gone only a little distance +before they came to an opening where they found Joe and Pierre busy +about a fire. The other buggy came up in a moment and everything was +dumped out on the side of the road.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">38</a></span> Mr. Waterman had bought a lot of +supplies and this was the real reason why the two guides had met them +for they were needed to get the stuff back into the camp where they +planned to stay for a week or more. After paying off the drivers, the +latter turned and drove back.</p> + +<p>"Are they going all the way back to Escoumains to-night?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Mr. Anderson. "They will go back as far as that logging camp +we passed about four miles away. There they will give their horses a +little grain and as soon as the moon comes up they will be off, and back +in Escoumains about midnight. Those little Canadian horses are very +strong and can stand a lot of hard work."</p> + +<p>Bob, Pud, and Bill stood around watching the guides and the two men as +they busied themselves about the fire.</p> + +<p>"Let's have supper first," said Mr. Waterman. "Afterwards we'll pack up +the stores we have brought in and get them ready to carry so that we can +make a real early start and get to our camp in Lac Parent in time for +breakfast."</p> + +<p>This was voted a good scheme by the others. Pierre was the guide that +was most noticed by the boys. He was a full blooded Montagnais Indian +and could not speak a word of English, though he talked French and his +own Indian tongue. He was straight as an arrow and moved with the +litheness and silence of the real Indian. Though his expression never +changed, the boys could see that he missed nothing that went on about +him. Joe was a little Frenchman. He could talk a little English and was +very proud of that fact.</p> + +<p>"The dinnaire is prepair," said he to Bob with a smile.</p> + +<p>"Ah, that's the kind of French I can understand," said Pud, as he moved +over towards the fire.</p> + +<p>"Now be prepared to shout," said Mr. Anderson. "Here's some real trout +caught within the hour and cooked as only Joe can cook them."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">39</a></span></p> + +<p>He gave each of the boys a whole trout out of the frying pan and this, +with bread, butter, prunes and coffee, was their supper. The trout was +hot and all three boys stated that they had never tasted anything better +in their lives. They all meant it too. At their praise, Joe's face +lighted up, for he was proud of his cooking. They formed a real woodsman +picture as they sat or squatted around the fire eating their supper +without the use of plates or a table. The picture was rather out of +harmony, for the Indian and the Frenchman were the typical woodsmen, the +two older men hardened fishermen, but even the merest novice could see +that the three boys were unused to the woods and their present +surroundings.</p> + +<p>But, in any case, the scene was not lost on the boys. The bright light +cast by the fire on the faces of the men and the dark shadows of the +woods formed a contrast that was fascinating to the boys. They could not +keep their eyes off Pierre with his silent but speedy movements, and his +impassive face, nor from Joe, who formed such a contrast with his +animation and gestures, his good-natured talk and his smile. Mr. +Waterman and Mr. Anderson sat to the side talking in low tones, and the +boys felt that these were two men worthy of their confidence. They +looked as though they would be ready for any emergency that might arise. +They were startled by a splash in the river. Pierre seemed to vanish as +if by magic into the trees on the side towards the river. Though he went +with great speed, the boys listened in vain to hear him tearing through +the bushes. All ears were tensed but not a sound was heard.</p> + +<p>"Pierre will let us know what it is," said Mr. Waterman in a +matter-of-fact tone, as he motioned the boys to sit down again. "Don't +worry, there's nothing up here to do us much harm. Even the bears run +from us and it's necessary to hunt them carefully if you want to see +one, though we see traces of them every day."</p> + +<p>As they were talking, Pierre came back almost as quickly and silently as +he had gone. He sat down by the fire and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">40</a></span> said about three words to Mr. +Waterman and relapsed into silence again.</p> + +<p>"'Big fish,' he says," translated Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"It sounded like a deer to me," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"We'll look for tracks in the morning before we leave," said Mr. +Waterman.</p> + +<p>He then turned to Pierre and talked to him in French.</p> + +<p>"'No deer. Big fish,' he says," said Mr. Waterman as he turned around.</p> + +<p>"Well, if he's sure of it, he's right," said Mr. Anderson. "They have +ways of knowing some of these wood matters that seem uncanny to us."</p> + +<p>"Well, let's get to bed," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>They all turned to their dunnage bags and got out their sleeping bags. +Pierre and Joe had only a blanket and they lay down by the fire, +wrapping the blanket around their shoulders but otherwise making no +further preparation.</p> + +<p>"Is that the way they sleep all the time?" said Bob.</p> + +<p>"No, they probably did not want to burden themselves with anything +extra, as they have lots to carry to-morrow."</p> + +<p>The guides had cut down some boughs and the boys soon had a fine bed +ready. They were stretched out looking up at the stars in a very few +moments and Bob felt that this was just the beginning of what promised +to be a most interesting summer. For some time he lay there, watching +lazily the fire as it occasionally threw into relief the green branches +of the trees, or made the shadows deeper and more mysterious. It was not +long, however, that he lay thus undisturbed, for the gnats, "les +moustiques" as the guides called them, began to buzz around and made his +life miserable. Over the fire, Bob had not been much bothered by this +pest but further away they soon became unbearable.</p> + +<p>"Ye gods!" said Pud, as he sat up in his blankets. "I'm getting eaten +alive."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">41</a></span></p> + +<p>"Let's make a smudge," said Bob. "That will help some."</p> + +<p>The two boys got up and soon had a real smudge throwing out a sickly +smoke over their blankets. All this time Bill slept peacefully. It +seemed that with his head buried in his blankets he was able to stand +the gnats, but the smoke got him. Evidently a good puff got under his +blankets, for he woke up suddenly and said in a choked voice,</p> + +<p>"What in sin's going on? I'm choking. What's the idea?"</p> + +<p>Just then a swarm of gnats enveloped his head and he ducked under his +blankets. No more was said, for Bill knew why the smoke was there. All +three covered up their heads and were soon asleep. It got real cold in +the middle of the night and the gnats became too torpid to move. The +boys slept like logs for they were tired. It could not have been more +than four o'clock when the cheery voice of Mr. Waterman was heard +calling them up.</p> + +<p>"Out of your blankets, boys. We're going all the way to Lac Parent +before breakfast and that will take some hiking."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes, the camp was a scene of the greatest activity. The +guides filled large dunnage bags with the provisions that had been +brought in. This was soon done and the boys had also packed their +blankets in their bags.</p> + +<p>"Is everything ready?" asked Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I think so," said Mr. Anderson. "You boys will have about all you can +handle to carry in your dunnage bags. We'll manage the rest all right, I +guess."</p> + +<p>The guides led off after loading themselves with two large bags. Each of +them carried at least one hundred and fifty pounds. The Indian seemed to +handle his load with the greatest ease. He looked back and helped the +boys adjust their bags more comfortably, or so that they would carry +more easily. They had gone only a half mile when they came to a small +lake. It was only a quarter mile across it, but the guides had canoes +there. The loads were soon in the boats and they got the other side +very<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">42</a></span> quickly. Then to the surprise of the boys, the Indian and Mr. +Waterman got the packs on their backs and then, lifting the canoes, they +got them over their shoulders and away they went.</p> + +<p>"Gee whizz!" said Bill. "I thought you two had a big load on before but +you walk away with those canoes with ease."</p> + +<p>"There's a great knack in carrying canoes," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That's all right," said Pud. "But those two men must have at least two +hundred pounds on their backs and they are going right along."</p> + +<p>"I'll admit," said Mr. Anderson, "that they have a larger load than +usual, but they are not going far and we'll relieve them on the next +portage."</p> + +<p>The way led up across a ridge. Part of it was rather steep and the boys +found themselves panting as they got to the top and began the descent to +the next little lake beyond. They found Mr. Waterman and Pierre already +there and with the canoes in the water.</p> + +<p>"That was some pull," said Mr. Waterman. "Pierre is in better condition +than I am. He doesn't seem to mind it a bit, but I found that a little +heavy before breakfast."</p> + +<p>"We'll help with the dunnage on the next portage," said Bob. "My bag +does not feel very heavy. Let me try the canoe."</p> + +<p>"I'll let you have the canoe," said Mr. Waterman, "but I'll take your +stuff."</p> + +<p>This was done. Mr. Waterman showed Bob how to arrange the paddles so +that they would rest on his shoulders. He also showed him the use of the +small rope that Bob had noticed along the middle stay of the canoe. This +was put over the head so that when the canoe was rightly placed Bob was +carrying it on his shoulders, his forearms and also his head. He found +the weight well distributed and he walked away like a veteran. He found +it awkward work<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">43</a></span> at first to keep to the trail and to avoid bumping the +canoe into the trees. He soon got used to this and went along finely. He +had no trouble until they got to the top of the little divide between +the two lakes and started down. They had gone down only a little piece +before he stepped on a piece of slippery moss, his feet flew out from +under him, and down he came with the canoe on top of him. Rather +crestfallen, he got up and began to arrange the paddles, etc., in place +again.</p> + +<p>"Had a tumble?" said Mr. Waterman. "That was because you didn't have the +weight well balanced coming down the hill. You'll soon learn. Do you +need any help with the canoe?"</p> + +<p>"No, I think that I can manage," said Bob.</p> + +<p>He then caught hold of the gunwales of the canoe and started to lift it +over his head, but he plunged forward and down came the canoe again.</p> + +<p>"Let me help you this time," said Mr. Waterman. "When we get to camp and +get rid of these packs, I'll show you just how to do it. It's easy when +you know how."</p> + +<p>Bob once more had the canoe on his shoulders and arrived at the next +lake without further mishap. They found every one waiting for them. They +were soon across and after one more portage, they reached Lac Parent. +Far down the lake, they saw smoke rising.</p> + +<p>"Jean is waiting for us," said Mr. Anderson to Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Is there another guide?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes," replied Mr. Waterman. "We have Pierre's son with us. He was +told to have breakfast ready for us at six o'clock and I'll bet he's +been waiting for some time, as it has taken us a little longer than I +expected to get here."</p> + +<p>The two canoes sped down the lake. The boys looked around with much +interest. There was a real mountain on the far shore of the lake, part +of which came down to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">44</a></span> the water very precipitously. The small islands +in the lake made it more picturesque. They soon rounded a point of land +and came full on the camp lying before them. With its line of tents, the +smoke curling up from the fire, and the beauty of the forests in the +background, it made a scene that would rejoice any fisherman's eye. As +they came to the shore, Jean came running down. He was a big fellow for +his age, seventeen. He had very regular features like his father, and +was remarkably well built.</p> + +<p>The boys landed and one and all felt that at last they were fairly in +the woods and ready for whatever might befall.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">45</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER III</h2><h3>CAMP AT LAKE PARENT</h3> +</div> + +<p>No sooner had they landed than Jean announced that breakfast was ready.</p> + +<p>"Let's get something into our stomachs before we think of anything +else," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That suits me," said Pud, and all the others joined in so that the +motion was carried unanimously.</p> + +<p>The party went across a little stream and sat down at a table made of +logs that had been split fairly in two. The middle sides of the logs +were up, thus making a smooth surface, but this was really made a fact +by big strips of birch bark that covered the top. A long seat at each +side of the table was also made out of a split log, while a sawed-off +stump made a special seat for Mr. Waterman at the head of the table. +This table was under a big tent fly. Jean had set the table with tin +plates and cups and a goodly portion of prunes was on each plate. They +set to at once and after the prunes, some good oatmeal was brought on. +To the surprise of the boys, they had milk.</p> + +<p>"Where do you get milk up here?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"Oh, we get it from the mountain goats," said Mr. Anderson, with a wink +to Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"We're lucky," said the latter. "We now have four mountain goats that +are getting real tame, though it takes some time to round them up each +morning."</p> + +<p>"Why this tastes like real milk to me," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Of course," said Mr. Anderson. "Very few people can tell the difference +between goat's milk and the ordinary cow's milk."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">46</a></span></p> + +<p>"I'll have to watch you milk them," said Pud. "It must be interesting."</p> + +<p>"It is interesting," said Mr. Waterman. "I really think that we'll soon +have another goat around here."</p> + +<p>At this, Mr. Anderson laughed heartily, and Pud saw that the laugh was +on him.</p> + +<p>"I'm easy," said Pud; "I know I'm easy. But seriously speaking, where do +you get this milk? It's a little thin but otherwise it's O.K."</p> + +<p>"It's evaporated milk," said Mr. Waterman. "It comes in cans and is easy +to make, as it requires only the proper quantity of water to make it +fairly good. You'll get a lot of it this summer for that's the only kind +one can have in the woods."</p> + +<p>"We're having ham and eggs this morning," said Mr. Anderson. "We're +going to let you have the pleasure of getting your own fish for dinner."</p> + +<p>"Oh, Heavens," said Pud. "I'm afraid that I'll go hungry, for I've never +cast a line in my life."</p> + +<p>"Well, the lake is full of them, and even a very poor fisherman is sure +to catch a few," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That's good news," said Bill. "I'm a novice at the game, but I +certainly am anxious to see what I can do and to try my hand."</p> + +<p>"That's the spirit," said Mr. Anderson. "It won't take long for you boys +to learn. As soon as we get things settled a bit here, we'll go after +the shiny beauties."</p> + +<p>After their breakfast, the boys had a chance to look around. They were +delighted with the site of the camp. It was on a level spot at the shore +and the camp was divided by a little stream. On the far side of the +stream was the tent for the guides, the cook tent, and the dining tent, +which consisted of the table described before with the big tent fly over +it. Looking across the little stream, the layout was not only very +picturesque, but it also served to divide the camp very well from what +might be called the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">47</a></span> social standpoint. The guides had put quite a +little time on clearing up the shore so that there was a very nicely +cleared spot in front of the five shelter tents, all of which faced the +lake. They made a very fine appearance. The view from the front of the +tents was very good. The lake opened out, and right opposite there was a +big bluff that shot straight down into the lake from a height of at +least three hundred feet. The whole camp, including the tents for the +guides, stretched along the water front for about one hundred yards.</p> + +<p>There was one other feature of the camp which proved especially +interesting to the boys. The guides had broadened this stream which +divided the camp into a sort of pool near the edge of the lake, with a +little log bridge at each end of the pool. Into this pool, they had put +any unusually fine trout they had caught, and already there were nearly +a hundred speckled beauties swimming around in the clear water. Each end +of the pool had been fixed with crossed willow wands so that the fish +could not get out. This pond had proved a never-ending source of +pleasure to the boys, for it must be remembered, that they had +practically never seen a trout before.</p> + +<p>"When do you expect Jack back?" Mr. Waterman inquired of Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"He said he'd be back some time to-day," replied the latter.</p> + +<p>"Who's Jack?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"He's one of the guides," said Mr. Waterman. "He's a corker. He's been +up in through to Lac Corbeau trimming up some of the portages."</p> + +<p>"You'll find Jack the best fellow in the world," said Mr. Anderson. "He +knows the woods like a book and he can cook very well. We won't know +what real grub is until he gets back."</p> + +<p>"Can he talk English?" asked Bill.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">48</a></span></p> + +<p>"Sure," said Mr. Waterman. "He's a Yankee. I brought him up here the +first year so I would be sure to have one dependable guide."</p> + +<p>"Well, let's go fishing," said Pud, as if that was all there was about +it.</p> + +<p>"All right," said Mr. Waterman, "but first of all, you'll have to be +initiated into the ABC's of fishing, namely, getting your rods and lines +ready."</p> + +<p>"What's hard about that?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"Oh, nothing much if you know how, but quite a little if you have never +set up a rod and line," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Get your tackle and come over to the table," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>They were all soon there and under the skillful tutelage of Mr. Waterman +and Mr. Anderson, the boys soon had their rods in readiness. Pud was +much surprised at the care taken by Mr. Waterman in seeing that +everything was ship-shape before he would pass the tackle as perfect. +Pud learned more about reels, lines, leaders and flies than he had ever +heard tell of before. At last they were all ready.</p> + +<p>"I'll paddle, Bob. You, Mr. Anderson, take Bill and I'll have Joe look +after Pud," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"What's the idea?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"Fishing in this lake, two generally go together, one paddling and the +other casting," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That would be the best way to-day in any case," said Mr. Anderson. "We +can each show the boys how to cast and, in fact, give them a lesson in +the art of trout fishing. When you see Joe here, or Jack or Mr. Waterman +casting, boys, you will agree with me that real trout fishing is an +art."</p> + +<p>"We'll need the instruction," said Bob.</p> + +<p>They were soon out on the water.</p> + +<p>"Let's have your rod a minute, Bob," said Mr. Waterman. Bob handed it +over and his tutor showed him how to cast.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">49</a></span> Bob was awkward at first but +he was soon casting very nicely. Bob was so interested trying to get the +knack of casting that he wholly forgot that he was on a lake full of +trout. He was therefore very much surprised to feel his fly snatched +away like an arrow.</p> + +<p>"You've got one," called Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Bob pulled in quickly and his rod bent almost double.</p> + +<p>"Give him line, give him line," cried Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Bob let out his line and all at once the tension ceased.</p> + +<p>"I believe he's got away," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"Reel in, reel in!" cried Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Bob did so, and the fish made another rush. This time Bob let out his +line and when the trout stopped he began to reel in. He soon saw the +trout near the canoe and tried to pull him out of the water into the +canoe with a motion as fast as he had often done when fishing for +catfish on the banks of a river. He got the trout out of the water, but +with a mighty wiggle, the trout hopped off the hook and disappeared like +a silver streak in the water.</p> + +<p>"I didn't think you were going to do that," said Mr. Waterman. "I wasn't +looking, as I was just getting the net ready. The next time, pull him +easily to the side of the canoe and I'll get him with the landing net."</p> + +<p>"I'm sorry," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"That's all right," said Mr. Waterman. "It was really my fault. The +novice does just what you did nine times out of ten, and I should have +remembered that and warned you."</p> + +<p>"I'll remember the next time," said Bob, emphatically.</p> + +<p>"I wonder how the others are getting on," said Bob, as he looked around. +Bill was down the lake casting in good fashion. Pud was close by, and +looked very awkward.</p> + +<p>"Watch out," said Joe to him, "or you will catch me in the eye."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">50</a></span></p> + +<p>"Don't worry," replied Pud, "I'm much more likely to take off one of my +own ears."</p> + +<p>"Do it like you crack de whip," suggested Joe.</p> + +<p>"All right," said Pud.</p> + +<p>He gave the line a mighty heave but the fly flew too low and caught him +in the back. It must have stuck in a little, for Pud gave a lurch +forward and, in spite of Joe's frantic efforts with his paddle, over +went the canoe.</p> + +<p>"Hold on to your rod," yelled Mr. Waterman, when he saw Pud go sprawling +into the water. That was the last thing Pud thought of for he cast the +rod away and turned to the canoe. Joe was already there. With an expert +twirl, he righted the canoe with but little water in it. In another +moment he was in the back seat, giving Pud directions how to climb in +without upsetting the canoe. Three different times Pud upset the canoe +before he got in. As they started to row back to the camp Pud felt +something sticking him in the back. He felt and it was the fly which had +remained fastened to him.</p> + +<p>"Stay quiet, Pud," yelled Bob. "We'll come over and see if we can't save +your rod."</p> + +<p>Pud stopped paddling and they soon fished up his rod from the bottom of +the lake.</p> + +<p>"You're lucky," said Mr. Waterman. "Remember that rods do not grow on +bushes up here. If you're tipped over again, hold on to your rod. Paste +that right in your hat and remember it."</p> + +<p>"I won't forget it," said Pud. "I'll be back again when I get some dry +clothes on. I'm going to catch a fish this morning if I have to dive for +one."</p> + +<p>"You dive enough already," said Joe in his serious way.</p> + +<p>Bob and Mr. Waterman paddled off and it was not long before Bob had +landed his first trout. It was a beauty, about eighteen inches long and +weighing about two pounds. In another hour he had seven in his basket +and was getting more skillful each time.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">51</a></span></p> + +<p>"Suppose you paddle and let me fish for a while," said Mr. Waterman at +last.</p> + +<p>"Good," said Bob. "I'll be glad to see you do it."</p> + +<p>"You won't see anything extraordinary," said Mr. Waterman. "I just want +to show you a few things though. We've kept out in open water. Well, the +best place for trout is near the shore, under overhanging branches, near +rocks or trees that have fallen into the lake. If I had brought you to +such places at first you would probably have lost half your tackle. But, +to be a good fisherman, you must not only know how to cast, but you must +be able to cast accurately."</p> + +<p>Bob then followed Mr. Waterman's directions and paddled close to the +shore. With unerring aim, Mr. Waterman cast the fly almost to the +desired inch. It seemed uncanny to Bob, but trout after trout was hooked +and played with a master hand. Only one got away, due to no fault of Mr. +Waterman.</p> + +<p>"We've caught plenty," said Mr. Waterman at last. "I guess we won't +starve for a couple of days."</p> + +<p>"I should think not," said Bob, as he looked in his basket and saw the +mass of speckled beauties.</p> + +<p>Their fishing had brought them down to the far end of the lake.</p> + +<p>"That's quite a mountain there," said Bob, pointing to the far shore.</p> + +<p>"Yes, the whole country here is filled with just such mountains with +lakes on at least three sides. It is a curious formation, but this makes +it very fine for hunting and fishing."</p> + +<p>The paddle back to camp was soon over. They found Bill and Pud also just +getting out of their canoes.</p> + +<p>"That's some sport," said Bill. "I have nearly two dozen fine trout. I +hope to be able to cast well before long and then I'll do better."</p> + +<p>"How did you get along, Pud?" asked Bob.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">52</a></span></p> + +<p>"Oh, pretty well. It took me some time to get the knack of it, but Joe +at last said that I was improving. I knew I was, because after a while +he stopped dodging every time I cast."</p> + +<p>The boys got out of the canoes and made for their tents.</p> + +<p>"Wait a minute, wait a minute," said Mr. Anderson. "We all clean our own +fish at this camp, so come along."</p> + +<p>The boys followed him, and under his direction they soon got so they +could clean a trout in no time at all. They then made for their tents, +got stripped and had a good swim.</p> + +<p>Mr. Waterman and Mr. Anderson watched the boys from the shore.</p> + +<p>"Well, it's fine to have the boys with us again, isn't it?" said Mr. +Waterman.</p> + +<p>"You bet," said Mr. Anderson. "They are a fine trio. I only hope that +those who come later will be as agreeable."</p> + +<p>"I like that Bob Hunt," said Mr. Waterman. "He's very keen. He took to +casting in no time. He'll be an expert in a month."</p> + +<p>"Williams is a fine boy and Pud is awkward, but I'm no judge of +character if he isn't as big-hearted as they make them," said Mr. +Anderson.</p> + +<p>"He's a card. It certainly was funny to see him casting. Every time he +cast Joe would duck, and at last he caught himself in the back so hard +that he tipped over the canoe."</p> + +<p>"Is that so?" said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>Mr. Waterman then had to tell him about the upset and they laughed +heartily.</p> + +<p>"He's a good swimmer, so there wasn't any danger," said Mr. Waterman in +conclusion.</p> + +<p>"He's good and strong and should make a good man for the carries," +remarked Mr. Anderson, as he noted Pud's bulky form as he came out of +the water.</p> + +<p>"Yes, some good portaging will take off about ten pounds of fat and make +him as hard as nails," said Mr. Waterman.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">53</a></span></p> + +<p>"What's that you say?" asked Pud, as he turned towards them.</p> + +<p>"I was just saying," said Mr. Waterman, "that some good portaging would +take ten pounds or so off you and make you as hard as nails."</p> + +<p>"Lead me to it. I'm game," replied Pud. "I came up here not only to +learn how to fish, but mainly to get hardened up for football in the +fall."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry then," said Mr. Anderson. "Anybody that charges you next +October will think that he has run into a stone wall."</p> + +<p>"How long before dinner?" asked Pud, as he looked longingly across the +little stream where Jean was busily engaged around the fire.</p> + +<p>"Not very long," said Mr. Waterman. "Let's go over and see if we can +hurry things along."</p> + +<p>"All right," said Pud. "Just give me a minute to slip into my clothes."</p> + +<p>Mr. Waterman went over to the fire and he was joined there in a few +minutes by all three boys. They were set at peeling potatoes and onions, +for Joe had three partridges the previous day and they were going to +have a stew. The boys' task was soon through and it was not long until +the smell of the partridge stew and the fresh trout on the fire fairly +made the boys' mouths water. They soon set the table and then went off +to try and get a look at a woodpecker they heard hammering away in the +woods. They had just gotten under the big old tree on which the +woodpecker was busy and were watching his diligent operations when they +heard a welcome call and they broke for the camp. They arrived with Pud +bringing up the rear, puffing and blowing. They then sat down to what +all the boys afterwards stated seemed to them the best meal they had +ever tasted. Partridge stew, fresh trout, hot bread cooked in an oven +that stood before the fire and caught the heat in that way, plenty of +tea and a dessert of stewed apricots formed the menu. It was indeed a +merry party that sat around the table with Mr. Waterman at the head.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">54</a></span> +The guides were the waiters and they were kept busy bringing the trout +hot and sizzling from the fire to the table.</p> + +<p>"I take it all back," said Bill Williams, "I said I didn't like fish. I +meant the kind we get in the city. But—this trout is fit for the gods. +It is certainly good."</p> + +<p>"You're right," said Pud. "I didn't think that any fish could taste so +good."</p> + +<p>"My sentiments, too," said Bob, "and as for this partridge stew, there's +only one thing the matter with it and that there isn't enough of it."</p> + +<p>"That's something we don't have every day, but we have the fish always +and we never get tired of it," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>At last, filled to repletion, they leaned back and began a general +conversation.</p> + +<p>"I know one thing," said Pud, with a sigh.</p> + +<p>"What's that?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"I'll never take off any weight here. I've just eaten enough to feed a +family."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry," said Mr. Waterman. "You'll need all the food you get when +you're carrying a canoe across some of the portages we'll be on this +summer."</p> + +<p>"We'll take it easy for an hour, and then let us all get busy and get +out balsam boughs for our beds. Mr. Waterman and I have a pretty good +lot already, but a little more will help. We've left you the privilege +of making your own beds as all good campers insist on doing."</p> + +<p>"That's a good idea," said Mr. Waterman. "That will take some time. +There's a lot of cleaning up to do along the shore front also, so that +we'll put in a little time each day on that. We'll kill two birds with +one stone, as we'll get out a lot of firewood at the same time. That +will leave the guides free to make us a landing."</p> + +<p>"Where will you get the boards?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"Leave it to Joe," said Mr. Anderson. "He'll have as nice a landing out +there in a day or two as you would care<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">55</a></span> to see, and there won't be a +nail in it and it will be made entirely with his axe."</p> + +<p>"I'll watch them do it," said Pud, with an air of unbelief.</p> + +<p>They all then went to their tents and for an hour they lounged around, +dozing and talking. Mr. Anderson then roused them out. They got their +short axes and went into the woods. Each had a big bag and it was not +very long until they returned laden with the fragrant tips. More than +one trip was necessary, but at last all had downy balsam beds on which +to lay their blankets. They made up their blankets for the night and did +various other things around the tents.</p> + +<p>"Let's go for a paddle," at last said Bob.</p> + +<p>This was agreed to eagerly, and they all got into a canoe and went on an +exploring expedition. First they went opposite and started to climb the +bluff. They found it a harder task than they had supposed, as finally +they had to go back some distance before they could get to the top. At +last they came out on the edge and brought Mr. Waterman and Mr. Anderson +down to the edge of the opposite shore by their shouts. They waved to +the boys and then slowly disappeared in the trees.</p> + +<p>"This is some little mountain, isn't it?" said Bob.</p> + +<p>"It certainly is," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Let's roll down one of these big bowlders and see what happens," said +Pud.</p> + +<p>The front of the bluff was rather crumbly, with big rocks near the edge +looking as if they had been left there by the frost, or rather as if the +frost had pried away their brothers to let them crash down into the +lake. They soon found a big rock that looked as if it would move easily. +Pud found a small tree that had fallen down, and with this as a lever +they loosened the rock and it started down the cliff. It moved slowly at +first and the boys drew close to the edge to watch its course. Down it +dashed, gathering momentum and finally taking along with it into the +water<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">56</a></span> a small tree that grew out from the mountain about half way down. +In their eagerness to see the splash they went too near to the edge, and +the ground began to give way beneath them. Bob, as usual, was the first +to act. He bumped Bill back with his shoulder and then caught Pud's coat +just as it was disappearing. Bill, quick-witted also, rushed to his +assistance, and between them they hauled Pud back, though all three were +on the ground and nearly over the edge before the two could stop the +heavy Pud. A yell from the opposite shore told them that Mr. Waterman +and Mr. Anderson had seen their predicament. Bob and Bill held on and +slowly pulled Pud up to them. When all three at last arose, probably +only a minute later, they were bathed in perspiration, as they had all +been under a terrible physical strain.</p> + +<p>"That was a close shave," said Pud, as he walked over to the edge to +look down.</p> + +<p>"Come back, you crazy Indian. Don't you know that it was your weight +that caused the trouble before, and there you are, trying to tempt fate +again," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"You're right, fellows. I'm some ungrateful cuss. I've not even thanked +you for saving my precious neck."</p> + +<p>"Don't thank me. Thank Bob," said Bill. "He pushed me back and then +caught you just as you were preparing to take a high dive that would +have made Steve Brodie look like a piker. Thank Bob. He's always there +with the presence of mind stuff when it's needed."</p> + +<p>"Not a bit of it, Pud," said Bob. "Bill is too modest. If he hadn't +caught me in time, you would have pulled me over the edge, so you see we +both owe our lives to him."</p> + +<p>"I guess it's up to me to do all the thanking, for if you had not +grabbed my coat, you would not have been in any danger yourself."</p> + +<p>"Well, let's forget it, fellows," said Bob.</p> + +<p>Just then they heard a voice from the water, and they looked down to see +their two leaders in a canoe.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">57</a></span></p> + +<p>"We're all right," yelled Pud.</p> + +<p>"Don't go near the edge," yelled Mr. Waterman. "It's dangerous."</p> + +<p>"All right," yelled Bob. "We're coming right down, so don't worry."</p> + +<p>They found the two men waiting for them when they reached their canoe at +the bottom of the cliff. Explanations were in order.</p> + +<p>"We saw it all," said Mr. Waterman, "for when that rock started down +that cliff it made such a racket that we rushed down to the shore. We +felt like yelling at you to get back, but just as the thought occurred +to us, we saw the rock under your feet giving way. Then Bob knocked Bill +back and caught Pud's coat. We thought it was all over with the two of +you, but Bill recovered his balance just in time to grab Bob and, I tell +you, we sweat some while you were tugging to get Pud back, for it was a +wonder that the rock under you did not give way and let you all down."</p> + +<p>"You're a plucky lot of boys," said Mr. Anderson. "You will have to +remember not to go too near to the edge of these cliffs up here, for the +frost has made the face of some of them very brittle."</p> + +<p>"We certainly won't forget it," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"We've had enough excitement for one day," said Bob. "Let's go back to +camp and take it easy for the rest of the afternoon."</p> + +<p>"I'll take it back. I'll take it back," said Pud, as he held up his +hands in mock terror.</p> + +<p>"What's that you'll take back?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"That I was bound to put on flesh up here. To get thrown out of a canoe +in the morning and to come within an ace of making a three hundred foot +dive in the afternoon is just about enough excitement to make any one +lose weight. I bet I lost five pounds in that minute and a half when Bob +had me by the coat, and I was wondering whether<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">58</a></span> he could hold on to my +elephantine form; whether the rock would not give way, and whether I +could get back to safety. I sweat like a bull."</p> + +<p>"It certainly made me sweat too," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"That was because you were under terrific physical and nervous tension. +A minute or even half a minute under such conditions will exhaust one +more than half a day's hard work," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Gee, I don't dare write home my full experiences of my first day at +camp," said Pud. "That mamma of mine would be up here taking me home."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I guess we had both better let this story wait until we are home, +for it would only worry them," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"That's the sensible thing to do, for it is very unlikely that you will +be exposed to such danger a second time," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>The two canoes started across the lake. They noticed the small tree +dislodged by the bowlder. It was floating near the base of the cliff and +had been snapped off like a pipe stem.</p> + +<p>In spite of the excitement of the day, the boys had a good appetite for +their supper. Afterwards they sat around the camp fire that had been +made in front of Mr. Waterman's tent and talked of many things. The +guides could be seen lying back on their balsam boughs before the fire, +talking and gesticulating.</p> + +<p>"We'll have to go over and talk to the guides some time," said Bob. +"They seem to have a lot to tell each other."</p> + +<p>"Yes, they are talkative to-night. Generally they have not much to say +unless you get them telling some of their experiences," said Mr. +Anderson.</p> + +<p>"What do you say to a taste of portaging to-morrow?" asked Mr. Waterman +of the boys.</p> + +<p>"That's fine," said Bob, answering for the others. "Where shall we go?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">59</a></span></p> + +<p>"We'll go up north to a little lake where the water always seems a +little warmer than it is here, probably because it's shallower. We'll +catch some fish, climb a mountain and have a good swim."</p> + +<p>"That 'listens' fine," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"We'll take a lunch along and make a day of it," said Mr. Anderson. "For +one, I'm going to turn in, as I have been up since four o'clock this +morning, and I'm dead for sleep."</p> + +<p>"That's a good idea," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>In a short time, the boys were sound asleep and only the glowing coals +told the starry sky that there human beings were to be found.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">60</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER IV</h2><h3>ACROSS THE PORTAGE</h3> +</div> + +<p>Six o'clock the next morning found every one up and ready for a dip. Mr. +Anderson, having heard of the fact that Pud was bound to have his +morning dip no matter how cold the water, thought to have some sport +with him.</p> + +<p>"Pud, have you seen our famous shower bath?" asked Mr. Anderson quietly.</p> + +<p>"No. Where is it?" said Pud.</p> + +<p>"It's just up this little stream. It's a little cold for me, but they +tell me that you like cold water in the morning."</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes," said Bill, "Pud has to have his cold shower every morning, +winter or summer."</p> + +<p>"Lead us to it," said Bob.</p> + +<p>Mr. Anderson then led the boys up a path which finally came out right +under a fifteen-foot waterfall. It certainly looked like a natural +shower bath, for the water was broken in its fall by the jutting rocks. +Bill put his hand into the water and pulled it back with a jerk.</p> + +<p>"Some cold," said he.</p> + +<p>Bob did the same.</p> + +<p>"Me for the lake. That's too cold for my blood," was Bob's remark.</p> + +<p>It was certainly up to Pud. He tried the water and could hardly restrain +himself from pulling back.</p> + +<p>"Fine, fine," said Pud, as he pushed under the down-rushing water and +stood there for a minute. He came out almost breathless because of the +contraction of his muscles by the cold water.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">61</a></span></p> + +<p>"Won't you indulge?" asked Mr. Anderson, turning to Bill and Bob.</p> + +<p>"No, thank you," said Bill. "To tell the truth, I really prefer the +lake."</p> + +<p>"Well, I'll beat you to it," said Bob, and off they dashed down the +path. In a moment Mr. Anderson and Pud heard them splash as they plunged +into the lake.</p> + +<p>"That's some cold shower," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"I thought that you would like it," said Mr. Anderson seriously.</p> + +<p>Pud looked at him said nothing as they went down the path. As they came +out at the lake, Mr. Waterman said,</p> + +<p>"Pierre objects to our using the stream for bathing purposes, as we use +it for our drinking and cooking."</p> + +<p>"I didn't think of that," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"Neither did I until he spoke to me about it," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That's too bad," said Pud. "I thought I was going to have a real cold +shower every morning."</p> + +<p>He said it so seriously that neither Mr. Waterman nor Mr. Anderson knew +whether he really meant it or not. To Bob later, Pud stated that the +intervention of Pierre was providential for he had never been under such +a real icy shower before.</p> + +<p>After their swim they all sat down to breakfast and enjoyed every bit of +it. After breakfast they spent some time cleaning up the camp. They got +everything ship-shape in their tents first and then they cleared up a +part of the beach. The boys enjoyed this as the experience of wielding +an axe was new to then. They also had cause for wonder at the way in +which their two leaders used the axes. They went at things very +strenuously and seemed to be able to hit just where they wished. Bob +commented on their skill, but they both stated that they were mere +beginners in comparison with the guides.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">62</a></span></p> + +<p>About nine o'clock Mr. Waterman called a halt, and they got ready for +their little journey. They took along just a loaf of bread and a small +tin in which butter, salt and pepper were packed. The boys took along +their rods and Mr. Waterman carried a small rifle. In explanation of the +latter he said that they might have a shot at a duck or a partridge. +They took two canoes. Bob went with Mr. Waterman, while Pud and Bill +carried Mr. Anderson as a passenger. To their surprise, Mr. Waterman led +the way just around the bend and then to the opposite shore. The boys +had not noticed a path, but on landing they could see a trail leading +off along a little stream that emptied into the lake at this place. On +landing, Mr. Waterman fixed the paddles in the right way, took up the +canoe and was off. Bob carried his gun, and he had all he could do to +keep up with his leader. Mr. Anderson also wished to make the first +portage, but Pud prevailed, and after a little trouble, they started +off. Pud was soon puffing and blowing, for the path was steep. Mr. +Anderson led the way for the other two had been lost to view even before +the second party got started.</p> + +<p>"This isn't so easy as it looks," said Pud to Bill.</p> + +<p>"If you're getting tired, I'll take it," answered Bill.</p> + +<p>"Not on your life. I've got to learn the knack of this portaging, for I +mean to do a lot of it this summer, and I might just as well get used to +it now as any time," said Pud, between his puffs.</p> + +<p>"Let the weight rest on forearms, head and shoulders and you won't mind +it," said Mr. Anderson. "As you say, there's a knack to it. Also, it +takes muscles that we don't use right along, and for that reason it's +rather tiring at first."</p> + +<p>By this time they had topped the little divide between the two lakes and +they began to descend. Pud began to have his troubles, for like all +novices, he carried the canoe poorly. He came near to falling several +times, and it was with a sigh of relief that he came out on the shore of +a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">63</a></span> small lake. Bob and Mr. Waterman were in their canoe off the shore, +evidently waiting for them.</p> + +<p>"How's the portaging?" yelled Bob, as soon as Pud came in sight.</p> + +<p>"Fine," said Pud. "But I have a crease here in the back of my neck that +will be sore for a week."</p> + +<p>They were soon off again, with Bob leading. The lake opened out and they +found themselves in a stretch that gleamed a good mile ahead of them. +All at once Bob slowed down and Mr. Anderson called on the boys to stop +paddling.</p> + +<p>"He sees something," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>All eyes were on Mr. Waterman as he got his gun ready. Over to the left +the boys saw three ducks swimming, and they knew that this was the +reason for their stop. "Bang!" went the gun, and one of the ducks +toppled over, but the other two disappeared as if by magic.</p> + +<p>"Pick up the bird," yelled Mr. Waterman to Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"All right," replied the latter.</p> + +<p>Mr. Waterman looked around carefully, and a minute later the two ducks +arose to the surface some distance farther on. Bob and he took up their +paddles and tried to get within a reasonable distance again. They had +scared the birds so that they kept swimming away, keeping out of +distance. At last Mr. Waterman laid down his paddle and got his rifle +again. This time he missed, for it must be remembered that he was +shooting with a rifle and not with a shotgun. It was only after three +more trials that he bagged his second duck and it took a good hour +longer to get the other one. For some reason the birds did not want to +leave the lake and they were all three finally in Mr. Anderson's canoe.</p> + +<p>"That will make another fine pot-pie," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"We haven't any pot to make it in," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"We'll have it back at camp," said Mr. Anderson. "These ducks, with some +dumplings and flour gravy, will be some dish."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">64</a></span></p> + +<p>They made for the far end of the lake and then got out. By this time it +was nearly twelve o'clock, and they debated whether to climb the +mountain then or wait until they had had something to eat.</p> + +<p>"I tell you what to do," said Anderson. "You fellows go and climb this +mountain. I'll stay here, catch a few fish, then build a fire and have +everything ready for you when you return."</p> + +<p>This was considered a good plan, so the three boys and Mr. Waterman set +out. There was no trail this time, but Mr. Waterman strode ahead with +confidence.</p> + +<p>"Have you been over here before?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes," replied Mr. Waterman. "I want to come here again several +times before the summer is over, for when we get to the top of this +mountain you will see something that very few city dwellers have ever +seen, namely, a real primeval forest."</p> + +<p>"I thought that this was all primeval, way up here," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"No," was the reply. "The big lumber companies see to it that there is +but little first growth any place where they can get the lumber to tide +water."</p> + +<p>"Well, how is it that we'll see first growth up here, then?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"You'll see when we get there," replied Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>He walked on and they followed. Pud was saying nothing, but he was +having his troubles keeping up. He looked ahead at Mr. Waterman, who was +apparently sauntering along, and he wondered how he did it. Fortunately +for him, Mr. Waterman was very observant, for he noted Pud's distress +and slackened his pace or stopped to point out some great pine tree or +other object worth noting.</p> + +<p>"Do you smell him?" suddenly said Mr. Waterman, as he stopped and looked +around carefully.</p> + +<p>"Smell whom?" asked Pud, stopping in his tracks.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">65</a></span></p> + +<p>"The bear," said Mr. Waterman. "Can't you smell something in the air? I +can. A bear has been here not very long ago. Ah, there are his tracks." +He pointed to an old pine stump, which had been clawed recently. The +boys looked at the stump, but they saw no tracks.</p> + +<p>"Come here," said Mr. Waterman, as he strode over the stump. "Bears like +grubs, ants, and things of that kind, so you will often know that bears +are around by noting stumps, hollow trees, etc., when they have clawed +at them."</p> + +<p>The boys came over. Bob looked at the stump and then down at the ground.</p> + +<p>"There's a track," said Bob, as he pointed at a rather big print in the +soft earth on the lower side of the stump. Sure enough, they could +plainly see the footprint of the bear.</p> + +<p>"Will he come after us?" inquired Pud, looking around rather anxiously, +with his eyes resting finally on Mr. Waterman's rifle.</p> + +<p>"I'll answer your unasked question first," replied Mr. Waterman. "No, +this gun would be worse than nothing for a bear. It would only wound +him, and that would only make sure of an attack. As for your real +question, there is not one chance in a hundred that the bear will come +for us. The bears in this part of the country are well-known black bears +and they have hardly ever been known to attack men unless wounded or +backed into a corner. Judging by the fact that I smelt this bear even +before I noticed this stump, I would guess that we disturbed him and +that as soon as he smelt us, away he went, and he's probably a mile away +by this time."</p> + +<p>They then went on, and after a good climb they came out on the top of +the mountain. Mr. Waterman first led them to the southern side. The +slope fell quite abruptly to a little lake far below.</p> + +<p>"Do you see the St. Lawrence?" asked Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"No. Where?" asked Bob.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">66</a></span></p> + +<p>Mr. Waterman then pointed to the south, and about fifteen miles away +they could see the broad St. Lawrence stretching as far as the eye could +reach.</p> + +<p>"I thought that was a cloud," said Bill. "I see now that it is water, +and away off there to the right I can see a big steamer making for +Quebec."</p> + +<p>Mr. Waterman then pointed out several lakes, giving them names and +telling them that they would visit practically all of them before the +summer was over. He told them that Lac Parent, on which they were +camping, was hidden from view by the mountains next to the one on which +they stood. It was a fine day and Bill thought that he could distinguish +the Andirondack Mountains far off to the south in the United States. Mr. +Waterman stated that this might be true, as they had been seen from this +vicinity on very clear days. After thoroughly enjoying the view to the +south, Mr. Waterman turned away and they went in a northeasterly +direction. In a little while they came to another side of the mountain. +In a short time Mr. Waterman led them out onto a bold rocky precipice +that stood out from the mountain. They looked down into a gulch hundreds +of feet below. They gazed at an immense coliseum, the sides of which +were lined with giant trees. It was the wildest bit of scenery that the +boys had ever looked on.</p> + +<p>"That looks just like some of the mining camps in the Rockies," said +Bob. "I've seen pictures of several that look just like this."</p> + +<p>"That's just what struck me when I first looked down from this rock," +said Mr. Waterman. "It certainly does look as if there might be some +kind of mineral down there. As yet, I have not been able to find time to +go down to the bottom. Those trees interest me. They are the finest I +have ever seen. I can't see any lake down there, but there must be some +outlet for the water."</p> + +<p>"Why not come over here some time and go down there and investigate?" +said Bill.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">67</a></span></p> + +<p>"We'll do that, and I'll bring you along. Let's go down the gulch a bit +so you can get a look at some of these great tamaracks and cedars. You +won't see them any place else."</p> + +<p>They followed their leader, who gave them another hour of hard climbing, +though he finally brought them out, half way down the mountain.</p> + +<p>"Ye gods!" cried Mr. Waterman, as he looked at his watch. "It's after +two o'clock. Let's hurry, for Mr. Anderson will think that we are lost."</p> + +<p>Suiting action to the word, he plowed along, and though the boys were +not sure in what direction they were going, they soon came out on a +lake. Mr. Waterman gave a cry, which was answered immediately, not far +off.</p> + +<p>In another moment they saw Mr. Anderson putting off in a canoe. They all +got in, though it brought the gunwale of the canoe down pretty close to +the water. Paddling carefully, they soon landed, to find a fire burning, +several fish all ready cleaned and ready for the fire, and bread all +ready buttered.</p> + +<p>"We forgot the frying pan," said Pud. "How are we going to cook the +fish?"</p> + +<p>"That's easy," said Bob. "Haven't you ever cooked fish on a stick over +the fire?"</p> + +<p>"Never," replied Pud.</p> + +<p>"Well, you have something to learn, then," said Mr. Anderson. "You'll +find pointed sticks all ready, so get busy, as it's getting late and we +must be on our way."</p> + +<p>The boys found the sticks all ready prepared, and it was not long before +they were all sitting around the fire, eating fish with one hand and +holding another trout over the fire with the other. The two men had +often cooked fish this way and they did theirs to a turn, but the boys +more often than not had theirs burned outside and half raw within. But +their exercise had given them such appetites that the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">68</a></span> fish disappeared +as if by magic. They stopped when there was no more bread nor fish.</p> + +<p>"You boys are some feeders," said Mr. Anderson. "I thought I had more +fish than we could eat."</p> + +<p>"I'm just getting into action," said Pud, as he licked off his fingers +and looked around for more. But more there was not, so they got into +their canoes and were off down the lake. When they came to the portage +Bob took the canoe and marched off into the bushes followed by Mr. +Waterman carrying rod and gun. Bill insisted on carrying the canoe back, +and he did very well considering that it was his first experience. He +also found the going down hill rather difficult, but he soon balanced +the canoe properly and had no more trouble. When they got to the end of +the trail they saw Bob and Mr. Waterman just rounding the point for +camp. They set out after them, but by the time they arrived, they found +them already stripped and in the water.</p> + +<p>"Come on in, the water's fine," yelled Bob.</p> + +<p>"We'll be with you in a minute," said Bill.</p> + +<p>On getting out of the canoe they found that the guides had already been +busy with the landing. Four logs had been split in two and were ready at +the chosen place. Mr. Anderson carried the ducks to the cook tent and he +came back to assure the boys that they were in for a rare treat for +supper.</p> + +<p>"Jack's back, and he said that he would see to this pot-pie himself."</p> + +<p>The boys turned at once to note the new guide. They found a rather old +man, sharp of feature and eye but not very strong-looking.</p> + +<p>"I thought he was a big fellow," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"Oh, no," replied Mr. Waterman. "Jack's not very big, but he can tote +quite a load over the hardest kind of portage. He's a wonder with the +axe, and he can cook like a French chef. You'll find that out +to-night."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">69</a></span></p> + +<p>After a fine swim and bath the boys were quite content to lie around +their tents until they heard the welcome call to supper.</p> + +<p>"I feel as empty as a barrel," said Pud, as he walked over to the table. +"Gee, I'm stiff. I won't be able to get out of my blankets to-morrow."</p> + +<p>"That just shows how soft you are," said Bob. "I'm a little stiff +myself, but not very much. The back of my neck is sore."</p> + +<p>"So is mine," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"That's where you rest the canoe when portaging," said Mr. Anderson, who +had heard the remark. "You'll get a real callous there before the summer +is over. Just for curiosity, feel Pierre's neck some time. He has been +at this all his life, and he has a regular muscle there."</p> + +<p>What those hungry fellows did to that pot-pie would be a shame to tell. +It disappeared very quickly, while the biscuits that Jack made tasted +even better than those that mother used to bake. Even the big dish of +prunes that topped off the meal was relished.</p> + +<p>"Take me to my little bed," said Pud as, with a sigh, he saw the last +prune disappear from his plate.</p> + +<p>"Impossible, impossible," said Bob. "I think after that meal that you'll +have to go around and not dare to cross the bridge over the trout pond. +You'll break through."</p> + +<p>"Not an extra step," said Pud. "In fact, I've been wondering for the +last five minutes if I can get to my tent. I'm so stiff I can hardly +move." It was indeed only with difficulty that Pud could navigate, for +he had put in a hard day for a fat boy.</p> + +<p>"If I survive the summer," said Pud, with a twinkle in his eye, "just +watch me tear that old line to pieces this fall. This life should put +the stuff into anybody."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Mr. Waterman, as he winked at Bob, "this was a rather easy +day. Later we'll do some real work and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">70</a></span> cover some ground. I wanted to +break you in easily at first."</p> + +<p>"Now, what do you think of that?" queried Pud of Bill, as they crossed +the trout pond to their tent. "He says this is an easy day. I wonder +what he thinks of doing when he gets real strenuous?"</p> + +<p>"I guess he was joking," replied Bob. "Personally, I think that we had +just about all the exercise to-day that we need."</p> + +<p>"Jack's some cook, isn't he?" queried Bill, as they sat before the fire +a short time later.</p> + +<p>"We're all agreed on that," said Bob. "I never tasted a better supper +than we had."</p> + +<p>"If we can get some duck and partridge now and then, we'll certainly +live high," said Pud. "I could get along with the trout alone, for I +have never tasted anything better than that."</p> + +<p>"I was going over and make the guides tell me some of their experiences +to-night," said Bob. "To tell the truth, I'm tired, and I think I'll get +to bed early. Anyway, I think I'd better wait a while until I get back +my French again. They talk pretty good French. It's a sort of dialect, +but I can understand them pretty well. I am told that it is easier to +understand their patois or dialect than many of the dialects in France +itself."</p> + +<p>Shortly after night had fallen the boys turned in, and they were soon +fast asleep, all weary after their strenuous day.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">71</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER V</h2><h3>THE SHORT TRAIL TO ESCOUMAINS</h3> +</div> + +<p>They were awakened the next morning by a rifle shot. The boys, as if +with one accord, rose up on their elbows and looked around with startled +glances.</p> + +<p>"What was that?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"A rifle shot," answered Bill.</p> + +<p>Their discussion was cut short by another shot, and they heard voices +down at the lake. They hurried down to the water and they found Mr. +Waterman and Pierre there, the latter with a smoking gun in his hand.</p> + +<p>"It's a loon," said Mr. Waterman, as they came up. "Let me have a try," +he said, turning to Pierre and reaching for the gun. Pierre handed it +over and Mr. Waterman scanned the waterfront closely. In about a minute, +a big bird rose to the surface about one hundred yards away and looked +around carelessly.</p> + +<p>"No use. Too far away," said Pierre.</p> + +<p>Mr. Waterman took careful aim and blazed away, but the loon disappeared +and the bullet was seen to hit the water right where the bird had been +the previous moment. It looked too fast to be true. The stories that the +boys had heard of the wonderful quickness of loons were proven to them +right then and there.</p> + +<p>"I'll get him next time," said Mr. Waterman, as he jumped in another +shell. "That blame loon is crazy. He thinks I can't hit him."</p> + +<p>"He's right," said Pierre. "I go help fix breakfast," said the Indian, +as he walked away.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">72</a></span></p> + +<p>Sure enough, in a short time up came the loon, and swam around +apparently defying fate. Once more Mr. Waterman took steady aim, but the +result was just the same.</p> + +<p>"That beats the Dutch," said Mr. Waterman. "I thought I had him that +time."</p> + +<p>"What!" said Mr. Anderson, as he came up. "Trying to hit that loon +again. If you get that bird you lose anyway, for you've already shot off +more lead than he's worth."</p> + +<p>"All right," said Mr. Waterman. "Let's have a plunge before breakfast. +We'll just have time."</p> + +<p>They all hurried back to their tents, and were still in the water when +they heard Jack's cheery halloo calling them to the table. They were +hungry and enjoyed the fare set before them.</p> + +<p>"We'll have another fishing lesson to-day," said Mr. Waterman, after +they had eaten. "I think you had better take it easy after yesterday's +strenuousness, so we'll all start out together at ten o'clock and see +which boy gets the most fish by twelve."</p> + +<p>This was agreed on, and until the hour set, the boys busied themselves +around their tents, helped to clear up more of the beach or watched the +guides as they worked on the landing. The latter was a very interesting +operation. They had three logs cut in half. It was easy to cut the ends +of the logs so that they rested on a short piece on the shore and on the +top of two small pieces that were driven in at the right distance from +the shore. The whole was kept together by wooden spikes driven into +place through holes made by fire in the logs. When the first section was +completed, it was as solid as possible, making a landing over two feet +wide and nearly twenty feet long. The guides planned to put in another +section of the same length, and they expected to have more trouble with +it. This extra section was being put in more for swimming and diving +purposes than for any real need. Mr. Waterman made such a remark to +Jack, who said that it would be just the thing for him when the rest of +the party were away on trips.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">73</a></span></p> + +<p>"I'll just get out on the end of that little landing and I'll bet you I +get just about as many trout as the rest of you," said Jack.</p> + +<p>"I wouldn't be surprised if you would, you old wizard," said Mr. +Anderson. "I think you must have some special bait, for those trout just +come to your hook like flies to honey."</p> + +<p>The boys paired off about ten o'clock, and when they came back shortly +before one o'clock, it was found that Bill had had the best luck, with +Bob next and Pud last. Bill had twenty-six fine trout in his bag, Bob +twenty-one and Pud fifteen.</p> + +<p>Jack looked them over as they brought them to him.</p> + +<p>"Well, I guess we won't starve for another day or two anyway," he said. +"I'm glad to see that you can catch enough fish to supply yourselves. A +fisherman is no good at all until he can do that."</p> + +<p>"You don't need to be much of a fisherman to do that up here," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"Yes, fortunately, that's so," replied Jack, as he went on with his +work.</p> + +<p>Several days sped on and it became necessary to go out to Escoumains to +get the letters and some more grub. Mr. Waterman made this known one +evening, stating that he thought that he would go out through an old +Indian trail that had not been used for some years.</p> + +<p>"This trail is much shorter than by the road, and, if we can open it up, +it will be a fine thing for us."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and it will be a fine thing for the habitants at Escoumains," said +Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"I hadn't thought of that," said Mr. Waterman reflectively. "If we get +too good a road in here they will be coming in themselves and bringing +their friends."</p> + +<p>"You bet they will," said Jack. "We don't want that bunch in here, so +keep to the old road."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">74</a></span></p> + +<p>"It would be a good thing to know this old trail. It is so much +shorter," said Mr. Waterman. "Then if we had need for speed we could get +out, or Pierre's cousin could bring in any important mail to us."</p> + +<p>"I'll go out that way anyway, and we'll not make any real improvements +to the trail," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Do you want any one to go with you?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"I don't need any one, but I'll be glad to have you if you want to come. +That stands for all of you," added Mr. Waterman, as the other boys +looked up.</p> + +<p>The next morning they were up very early. The three boys, Mr. Waterman +and Jean were going into the village. Joe, Jack and Pierre were going +along part of the way to bring back the canoes, for they were going to +portage through two lakes on the way. As they were coming back by the +road, they would not be able to get the canoes back themselves. After a +hurried breakfast they got in their canoes. Much to the surprise of the +boys, Mr. Waterman led them down the lake, around the bend and then into +a cove on the same side of the lake from which they had started. They +got out at what was evidently a very old trail. This led up very +steeply. Fast time was made, as Pierre and Mr. Waterman carried the +canoes and the others were going light. Up they went, and came to a lake +that must have been at least one hundred feet higher than their own +lake.</p> + +<p>"It would be easy to drain that lake into ours," said Bob, when he saw +the new stretch of water.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Mr. Anderson. "The lake is just like a big reservoir on a +hill. It could easily be drained into Lac Parent, but it is so high up +that no water would be left. Let's leave it as it is, for it will serve +us well this morning."</p> + +<p>They set off across the lake with Mr. Waterman, Bob and Jean in the +first canoe. On they went with strong strokes, so that Pierre and Mr. +Anderson, with four in their canoe, had to work hard to keep them in +sight. The<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">75</a></span> lake was not very long, and soon they were on the trail +again. This time the portage was at least a mile long, and it led down a +gradual slope. So far there was no trouble following the trail and the +party went ahead without a stop. Once more the canoes were launched, and +this time they paddled through two lakes connected by a small stream. At +the far end of the second lake the canoes were beached and the party +landed. Here they separated. At first they had no trouble following the +trail, which led along a brook that evidently drained the two lakes over +which they had just come. Straight ahead they went, with Mr. Waterman +leading.</p> + +<p>After they had gone steadily a little over a mile, Jean called to Mr. +Waterman and a halt was made. Jean jointed off into the woods and after +a consultation Mr. Waterman concluded that the young Indian was right, +and they turned off. The trail soon became very hard to distinguish, but +each time that Mr. Waterman hesitated, the Indian went by him, leading +the way without a halt. As they were passing through some thick +undergrowth Mr. Waterman halted and pointed to a partridge seated on a +limb on a nearby tree, only twelve or fifteen feet from the trail. The +bird, evidently trusting to its protective coloring, sat on the limb +without moving a muscle. Mr. Waterman had just begun to explain to the +boys that the bird was undoubtedly trusting to its instinct in remaining +in quiet when, with a flutter of the wings, down fell the partridge from +the tree to be grabbed almost instantly by the Indian.</p> + +<p>Jean had noted the bird just as quickly as Mr. Waterman, but he had +followed his natural bent by swiftly dodging off the trail, cutting a +stout little club from a hardwood tree, rushing back to the trail and +with unerring aim knocking over the partridge with his improvised +weapon. The boys could see that Mr. Waterman was put out, but he +evidently knew that the Indian would not be able to see his point of +view, so he said nothing. The Indian, with a gleam in his eye, walked +ahead, having tied the bird to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">76</a></span> his belt. The boys were all sorry that +the partridge had met such an untimely end, but they could not help +admiring the woodcraft shown by the young Indian.</p> + +<p>The only other excitement they had on the way was furnished by Pud. +About half way to the village they came to a little stream that was +rather deep. They looked about and at last found a big tree that had +fallen across the stream. All of the party except Pud walked across the +log without any trouble. He got about half way across when he lost his +balance. He felt himself going, so he threw himself on the log and +encircled it with his arms and legs. His weight proved too much for the +bark, which had been loosened by the water, and it began to come off. It +moved around the trunk in a body and Pud followed it. In spite of his +efforts, he gradually disappeared in the dark water. He tried in vain to +get up on the log, but he could not make it and finally had to pull his +body along in the water until he got to the other side. Pud's acrobatic +performance had brought peals of laughter from Bob and Bill. Even the +Indian had a smile on his face as Pud got out of the water.</p> + +<p>"What are you laughing at?" asked Pud, as he got ashore, evidently sore +at the joke on him.</p> + +<p>"Oh, nothing," said Bob. "Only you reminded me of a fat monkey on a +stick."</p> + +<p>"I'll 'fat monkey' you, letting me drown without so much as putting out +your hand," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Letting you drown," said Bill. "You fat porpoise, don't you know that +you couldn't sink if you tried?"</p> + +<p>"I bet he was just trying to practice walking the greasy pole so he +could show us how to do that stunt," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"That old tree has all the greasy poles you ever saw beaten to death," +said Pud with disgust.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps that was a slippery elm tree," said Bill. "What do you say, +Pud? Did you taste it?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">77</a></span></p> + +<p>"No, I didn't taste it. I'll give you both a taste if you don't stop +standing there laughing like two old women," said Pud, as he dashed for +them. He was evidently up to mischief, so they ran up the trail. Pud +soon gave up the chase, and as they came out at a habitant's farm +shortly afterwards, he forgot all about his troubles and regained his +habitual cheerfulness.</p> + +<p>Just before they started down a hill on the outskirts of Escoumains, +they all stopped to empty out their shoepacks. All of them had at one +time or other gotten into some hole filled with water and all had wet +feet. They wrung out their socks and then put on their footgear again.</p> + +<p>"Holy smoke," said Bill, "if mother saw me do that little stunt she +would call me back home at once."</p> + +<p>"What's that?" asked Mr. Waterman, who had thought nothing of the +matter.</p> + +<p>"Why, wringing out my socks and then putting them on again," said Bill. +"Mother would be sure that that would mean pneumonia at least."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry," said Mr. Anderson. "Before we get home you will probably +have your feet quite dry again and then much wetter. A little water will +not do any one any harm when one is living out in the open air this way. +Of course, in the winter time, it would be different. Then it would be +serious to get one's feet so wet."</p> + +<p>"Why so?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"Because then, wet feet unless one can get to the fire right away, +generally mean frosted or frozen feet, and that always means trouble in +the woods in the winter time."</p> + +<p>Down they all trooped to Escoumains. They stopped in at Madame +LaBlanche's boarding house to let her know that they would be there for +lunch.</p> + +<p>"Make us up some of those good biscuits of yours," said Mr. Waterman to +her in French.</p> + +<p>She promised to do so and also said that her son would be ready at one +o'clock to drive them all back to the woods.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">78</a></span></p> + +<p>"Are we going to drive back?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Mr. Anderson. "We'll take in quite a supply of grub, for we +do not expect to come out except for mail for at least a month. We'll +have to go in via the ford, as we did the first time, and you know that +that is some sixteen miles away."</p> + +<p>The boys all received letters and busied themselves reading them and +writing others. They spent the morning very pleasantly and were at the +boarding house in good time. They presented quite a different appearance +from the trim young city fellows that had eaten there on their arrival +such a short time before. Now they were clothed for the woods, with blue +shirts, mackinaws, heavy trousers and shoe packs. At a distance, one +could hardly distinguish them from the numerous woodsmen that were to be +seen around the village. They brought back from the woods great +appetites, and the famous LaBlanche biscuits disappeared by the +plateful. Chicken was once more the center of the meal, and it was +thoroughly enjoyed.</p> + +<p>"Thank Heaven," said Pud, as they got up from the table, "we don't have +to walk back. I'm so full I couldn't walk if I tried."</p> + +<p>"You'll do some walking," said Mr. Waterman. "We have only one pair of +horses and a wagon. We'll all walk on the hills."</p> + +<p>Soon they were off, Mr. Waterman and Mr. Anderson on the front seat with +the driver, and the boys seated on the bags that were stowed behind. The +little Canadian horses set off at a sharp trot. The boys nodded at every +one they met as they went through the village, not forgetting even the +vivacious, petite, dark-haired and dark-eyed French Canadian misses that +did not fail to come to many of the windows or doors as the wagon +rattled by. It was a fine day and they were happy as the gods. They +laughed and talked and sang and asked innumerable questions. Their two +leaders were also full of good spirits and gave them all the information +they had. For the first five miles the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">79</a></span> horses went along famously. Then +the roads got poorer and the pace slackened. They soon struck a steep +hill and they all got out except the driver. At the top of the hill, the +wagon stopped and all got on but Pud. He was slow as usual so the driver +made believe that his horses had run away and Pud ran along after them +for nearly a mile. Finally the horses were stopped and Pud at last came +up puffing, blowing and sweating. Mr. Waterman had cautioned every one +to be quite serious and not give the joke away.</p> + +<p>"Sacre," said the driver. "Dese horse, he not get drive enough. He run +away."</p> + +<p>"How's the running, Pud?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"Never you mind. Just let me in. I'm done out. I'm no runner like Bob +there," replied Pud.</p> + +<p>"Possibly your life was saved for when these horses ran away, we could +hardly keep on this load," said Bob, as he winked at Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"Yes, if you're born to be hanged you'll never get killed in a runaway, +Pud," said Bill solemnly.</p> + +<p>"What's that?" said Pud, who was having too much cleverness thrust at +him to take it all in.</p> + +<p>Away they went, and as the way was down hill, the driver once more gave +the reins to his little horses and they started so fast that Pud nearly +went out over the back of the wagon. Bill caught him and Pud held on +like grim death as the wagon bumped and rattled along the rough road. +Bill and Bob laughed until they could hardly hold on themselves, for +Pud's face was a study. He knew that they had put something over on him +but he could not exactly figure it out.</p> + +<p>In spite of the speed shown by the horses in the runaway, it was already +four o'clock when they reached the ford. The driver drove right in and +when he got to the other side he drove up such a steep part of the bank +with such a rush that he spilled out not only the three boys but also +about half<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">80</a></span> his load. No one was hurt and the grub was soon on the wagon +again. He drove for at least half a mile until the road could be +followed no longer. The food was then dumped out on the ground, and with +cheery good-by the driver was soon out of sight on the back trail.</p> + +<p>"Let's get busy right away," said Mr. Waterman. "We want to get to camp +to-night so we'll have to hustle."</p> + +<p>"I wonder where Pierre, Joe and Jack are," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"They'll be along right away, I'll bet," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Sure enough, before the boys had been loaded for the walk to the first +lake, the three men hove in sight. It was really wonderful to see what +they piled on each other. It is enough to tell, that when all were +loaded down, they had taken care of everything that had been brought in +the wagon.</p> + +<p>"When we get to the canoes, we can make this stuff more easily handled," +said Jack. "I did not think you were going to bring too much but I +brought along some dunnage bags and tump lines."</p> + +<p>"That's the stuff," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>They moved off Indian file, and though the boys carried only half that +borne by the guides and their leaders, they had difficulty in keeping up +with the procession. They soon came to the first lake to find three +canoes there. In twenty minutes, the baggage was put into the dunnage +bags and they were off across the lake. The boys were given a light bag +and a canoe to carry and the men carried the rest. In this way, they +soon got to the next lake, and a short time later they were on their own +lake, making for their camp.</p> + +<p>"Just carry everything over to the cook tent and leave it there for the +present," said Mr. Waterman. "Jack will put things in order to-morrow."</p> + +<p>This was done, and the guides at once set to work to get supper. It was +a hurried meal but it was relished by all. The night had set in by the +time the meal was cooked and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">81</a></span> they ate by the light of the fire, which +was kept brightly going by one of the guides. Bob thought as he looked +at the lights and shades cast by the fire, the ruddy face here, the +countenance half in shadow there, the greenness of the leaves that were +lighted up by the fire, the solemn avenues of the trees stretching back +into the woods, the animated movements of the guides and the whiteness +of the tents as the light on them came and went, that he had never seen +anything quite so close to nature, quite so picturesque.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">82</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER VI</h2><h3>PIERRE'S BEAR STORY</h3> +</div> + +<p>The boys slept a little later the next morning, though when they did get +up it was evident that Jack had been long busy. The entire stock of grub +gotten the day before had been put away neatly and carefully and the +dunnage bags and tump lines were piled in a heap at one end of the +table. They spent the day quietly, fishing, swimming and fixing up +things around the camp. They had an early supper and were down by their +fire talking and joking. The guides were soon up in their tent, talking +and showing much more life than usual. This gave Bob an idea, and he +proposed that they would go and visit the guides. This seemed good to +all and they went over to the guides' tent. They were welcomed solemnly +and quietly. It was evident that they considered their tent as their +part of the camp.</p> + +<p>For the time being, they were the hosts and they were evidently +flattered by the visit from the boys. Jack soon had the attention of Pud +and Bill and it was with a merry twinkle in his eye that he told of many +incidents in his life either in hunting or in the lumber camps. Bob +being the only boy to understand French was soon in animated discussion +with Joe and Pierre. The Indian under the questioning of the boy forsook +his usual taciturnity, and in the most casual way told Bob of exploits +in hunting and fishing that would make most interesting reading. To the +Indian, they were events likely to happen to any one that goes out in +the dead of winter to trap and hunt. Bob was a most interested listener +and it was not until he had been called to twice by Bill that he awoke +to the fact that it was nearly ten o'clock.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">83</a></span></p> + +<p>"Mr. Waterman says that we had better not keep the guides up too long or +they will not want to be visited again," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"I didn't think we had been here so long," replied Bob.</p> + +<p>They said "Good Night" to the guides and were soon fast asleep.</p> + +<p>The next day was another quiet one. The boys fished in the morning and +they had very good luck. It was a good day for fishing and but few of +the speckled beauties got away from the boys, who were becoming more +expert every day. Even Pud had caught the hang of casting and promised +to be the best fisherman of the lot.</p> + +<p>In the afternoon, Bob proposed another visit to the mountain opposite, +the same one where they had so nearly come to grief before.</p> + +<p>"Go ahead," said Mr. Anderson, "but for your own sake, be careful."</p> + +<p>"We'll promise not to get into trouble," said Pud. "We just need a +little exercise and that climb will about fill the bill."</p> + +<p>They started off and in a short time Mr. Waterman and Mr. Anderson, who +were busy down on the water front putting the finishing touches to the +landing place, saw them seated in the lee of a big rock looking out over +the country. There they sat and for nearly two hours they could be seen +with heads close together, evidently very much interested in their +conversation. The fact of the matter was that Pud and Bill had asked Bob +to tell them what the guides had told him the previous evening. As they +sat up on the mountain, they looked far off to the south and saw the +mighty St. Lawrence dividing the country as if with a giant silver +knife.</p> + +<p>"The Indians have had lots of experiences up north of here, hunting and +trapping in the winter time," Bob began.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">84</a></span></p> + +<p>"What did Pierre tell you?" asked Pud. "Has he ever scalped any one?"</p> + +<p>"You big dub," said Bill. "Indians don't go on scalping expeditions any +more."</p> + +<p>"Well, I thought that maybe some other Indian tribe might have tried to +attack them," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Don't be foolish," said Bob. "There are few Indians up in this country +and I guess from what Pierre tells me that they have enough troubles +fighting for their lives against the forces of nature to keep them from +thinking of fighting one another. In addition, the Canadian Government +would soon put a stop to that. Anyway, these Indians are just as peace +loving as any white man."</p> + +<p>"I suppose you're right," said Pud. "All the same, I like to think of an +Indian with tomahawk in hand having a fierce fight for his life with +some other Indians or with the pale faces."</p> + +<p>"You've been brought up on Nick Carter," laughed Bill. "Get that foolish +rot out of your mind. Indians are just ordinary human beings and that is +all."</p> + +<p>"I don't know about that," said Pud. "That young Jean is some boy for +his age. He can follow a trail just like the Indians we read of, and he +knows all about the woods, animals, birds and all that. He's certainly +like the Indians we read of in history."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Bob. "Jean is a fine specimen. He has all the good points of +our ancestors, the real aborigines, without their failings."</p> + +<p>"But what about Pierre? You were talking a long time with him, Bob," +said Bill. "What was so interesting?"</p> + +<p>"He was telling me of his winter hunting trips and he has had some +thrilling experiences. He says that every year he gets ready just as +soon as the snow flies in the fall. This generally means about the +middle of November in this country. As soon as the earth is blanketed +with snow, he gets his dogs and sleds ready and starts out with +provisions<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">85</a></span> to last for three months. Since his boy has grown up he +takes him with him. Sometimes they make up a small party of three or +four. It is always better to have two or three companions because Pierre +says that it is not well to go alone into this wild, lonely region, for +then a simple accident might mean death. He told me of several incidents +where his life was in danger and only his quickness and presence of mind +saved his life.</p> + +<p>"Once, early in the spring, he had stayed too long in the woods. The +trapping had been good and he had hated to leave while the skins were +heaping up. At last a real thaw came and he had to start for Escoumains. +He was about sixty miles north of here, he said, and he rushed along +with his dogs wallowing in the snow at every step. When he came to the +Port Neuf River, he found the ice just ready to go out. As he got in the +middle of the river, it started to break up. He feverishly drove ahead +and though he lost part of his load, he got to the other side. His son +was not so fortunate, for on looking back, he saw him on a big ice float +that had become separated from the shore. He yelled to Jean, who was +then only fifteen years of age, and directed him what to do. The ice +suddenly began to break up, and he followed his son down the river +nearly a mile before he could get to land, and then he was on the wrong +side of the river.</p> + +<p>"Signing to him to stay where he was, Pierre had to retrace his steps to +get his dogs and sleigh. He found them nearly frozen to death, for with +the going down of the sun, it began to get very cold. He at last roused +them and started down the river. He could see the water steadily rising +and knew that it would be only a short time until he would have to get +back to higher ground. By hurrying, he reached a point opposite to where +Jean was. He yelled across and his cry was answered. He then started +down the river, hoping that in some place the ice would still be +holding. After going about two miles, the river narrowed and the ice had +piled up into a jam. It was threshing<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">86</a></span> around, munching and crunching +like some giant monster. He stopped there and waited for the moon to +rise.</p> + +<p>"The night had become cold and the fore part of the jam seemed frozen +into a solid mass. He determined to risk a crossing. Strapping +everything tightly on the sleigh, he called to the dogs. They were +frightened and he had to lick them to get them started. Four or five +times on the way across he thought they were lost, but they finally got +to the other side. Everything was drenched and he found himself in great +danger of freezing to death, and he found Jean in almost as bad shape. +Their first care was to find some rising ground. After slipping into +several pools of icy water, they at last got to a small hill. With +frost-bitten fingers and frozen feet, they both were almost helpless. By +exercising the greatest determination, they at last succeeded in making +a fire and they gradually warmed themselves.</p> + +<p>"So far, their experience had been very disheartening. They had lost one +load of furs, together with the sled and the dogs. In addition, two of +Pierre's five dogs died before morning from their exposure to the icy +waters. The next morning, they found themselves marooned on their little +hill. The jam could be seen still holding and the waters had been backed +up far over the banks. There was nothing to do except to wait for the +jam to break. This it did that afternoon and the waters went out with a +mighty roar, no doubt carrying devastation down through the valley. This +made it possible for them to leave their refuge, but they did not dare +do so at once for the thaw had continued all that day and it would have +been impossible for the dogs to make any headway.</p> + +<p>"After careful deliberation, the father and son determined to make their +way if possible down the river about twelve miles to an old lumber camp. +They started about midnight to take advantage of the frost that had put +a hard surface on the snow. The dogs went along finely for they were not +too heavy for the crust on the snow. Time after time,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">87</a></span> the two men broke +through, frequently going up to their hips in water. They kept going and +by dawn they had covered about half the distance. They again sought a +hillock and once more thawed out their frosted hands and feet. Both +suffered intensely because of the hardships they had undergone. They +again started a fire going and got a little sleep for the first time in +two days.</p> + +<p>"They repeated their previous night's experience again and at last +arrived at the lumber camp. Their troubles were then nearly over for +they found a canoe there. This they determined to confiscate as they had +but few provisions since most of their supplies had been lost on the +sled that had gone under the ice. They rested up a whole day and then as +the ice had practically all gone down the river, they set out. The river +was very high and they came near swamping on several occasions but at +last they came to the mouth of the river and reached their friends +safely. Pierre stated that he lost two toes through the frost on that +adventure. He said that it taught him a lesson for if he had not been so +greedy for pelts and had come out when he knew he ought to, he would +have had no trouble."</p> + +<p>"That was an ugly experience," said Bill. "I guess it gets pretty cold +up here in the winter time."</p> + +<p>"Yes, Pierre says that it often gets to forty below zero," replied Bob. +"He says that in such weather, he wears three suits and then can keep +warm only by sticking close to the fire or by continual motion when +outside."</p> + +<p>"Three suits! And I think that one heavy suit is a little too much at +times. But did Pierre tell you any more of his experiences?" inquired +Pud.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Bob. "He told me a great bear story, but it's getting late +now, so don't you think I better tell you that to-night after supper? If +we go back to camp now, we can have a swim before supper."</p> + +<p>"Sure, that's a go," said Bill.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">88</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys were soon back in camp, and seen splashing around in the cool +water. So after supper they sat around the fire that evening filled with +the real and lasting content that comes only from living close to +nature.</p> + +<p>"What were you young fellows so interested in this afternoon over on the +mountain?" asked Mr. Anderson, interrupting the peaceful silence. "I saw +you up there, for the longest time with your heads together as if you +were plotting the destruction of the world."</p> + +<p>"Far from that. Bob was telling us some of the experiences that Pierre +has had in his winter hunting," replied Bill.</p> + +<p>"Pierre has certainly had some interesting experiences. It is rarely +that one can get him to talk, but when he does he always has something +worth telling," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"Yes, and he relates incidents of the most desperate character in that +same colorless tone, just as if they were the most ordinary routine," +said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Say, Bob, tell us the bear story you promised?" demanded Pud.</p> + +<p>"Let's get Pierre to tell it himself," suggested Bob.</p> + +<p>"That would be all right for you, but you forget that we do not +understand French," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"I forgot about that. He's a clever Indian for he talks two languages +quite well and can make himself understood in English," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"What two languages can he talk?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"He speaks the Montagnais language," replied Mr. Waterman. "He is a +Montagnais Indian of the very same stock as was seen by Jacques Cartier +when he first landed at Tadousac when he was going up the St. Lawrence +River hoping to discover a new route to China."</p> + +<p>"Well, tell us the bear story anyway," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"We want to hear it."</p> + +<p>Scenting a good tale, they all moved closer to the fire, and Bob began.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">89</a></span></p> + +<p>"Pierre says that this experience with the bear happened in the late +spring. He had been back from his winter's hunting about a month and the +spring had opened up very finely. One day, the call to nature was too +insistent. He got out his gun, told his wife to tell Mr. MacPherson at +the store that he would not be down to the big saw mill to work for a +few days, and he started back into the country. The rivers were rather +swollen then, the woods were wet and damp, but there was the rush of +life in the trees and in the very air itself. Pierre swung along with +Jean by his side, his heart full of happiness. He had had a good +winter's hunt and his wife had money for everything necessary. But more +than anything else he wanted the golden sunshine, the ripple of the +waters in the stream, the curved body of the salmon as they darted out +of the water in their eagerness to get up the streams. He told his boy +that though they had come out for game, he really just wanted to be in +the woods when the buds were coming out and when he could feel the sap +driving up from the ground into the furthest shoots of the bushes and +trees. Jean's face was just as bright as his own and he raised his head +and sniffed the air as if in answer to the voice of spring that reigned +everywhere.</p> + +<p>"Back they went along the wood road. They stopped for lunch at the foot +of a riffle where they very soon caught all the trout they wished to +find. They made their whole lunch on the fish, using only a little salt +to make it palatable; a simple fare but really good enough for a king. +On they went after lunch and they were lucky enough to bag four +partridges as they went along. Early in the afternoon, they came to an +old lumber camp and they decided to stay there for the night. It can +well be imagined that though Pierre and his son said little to each +other, they were enjoying themselves just like two boys playing hookey +from school. They had spent the winter in the freedom and wildness of +the woods and a month of the dreary grind in the saw mill had made them +as restive as colts.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">90</a></span></p> + +<p>"They made a fine supper off the partridges and were up early the next +morning. The remains of the partridges and some freshly caught trout set +them on their way again with well filled stomachs and happy hearts. They +had not gone far before Pierre stopped dead. 'I smell bear,' said he to +Jean. 'Big black one,' said Jean, as he looked around. How he had known +that it was big and black will remain one of the mysteries that +distinguish the real Indian from his woodland imitators. They looked +around and sure enough they had not gone far before they saw an old +hollow tree that had been scratched and torn by the bear's big claws in +his eagerness to get the grubs that no doubt were living among the +rotting wood. They followed the bear's tracks. Jean in his eagerness +went ahead and the father watched his boy with pride as he followed the +indistinct tracks with swiftness and sureness. Finally the bear led them +up one of the numerous mountains that are a feature of this country, as +you know. Soon the tracks could be followed only with the greatest +difficulty. Pierre was soon in the van and about noon he stopped dead +and pointed off about half a mile where they saw the bear himself busy +tearing away at another rotting tree.</p> + +<p>"As they were somewhat to the windward side of the bear, they turned off +and went down the valley. An hour's swift walking and climbing brought +them out on the ridge on which they had seen the bear. Jean in his +eagerness had gone ahead again. Just as they rounded a point of rock, +the bear rose up almost on top of Jean. He had only a small caliber +rifle, but he gave it to the bear at once. The bullet cut a hole in the +beast's shoulder and with a growl of rage he rushed at the boy. Jean +gave him another, but it only seemed to enrage the bear the more, for he +plunged right on and threw Jean back with a mighty thrust.</p> + +<p>"In the meantime, Pierre was in terror, not for himself but for Jean. On +the rather narrow ledge, he found his boy right in line with the bear +and he did not dare shoot<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">91</a></span> for fear of killing him. When the bullets +from the small rifle failed to stop the rush of the wounded bear, Pierre +rushed forward, and as the bear thrust Jean back, he stepped over the +body of the boy, gave him a bullet from his rifle point blank and +throwing away his gun, he plunged his hunting knife into the bear with +all his might just as the monster flung him off as though he were a +plaything.</p> + +<p>"Pierre says that about ten or twenty minutes later, perhaps half an +hour, he awoke to consciousness and started up on one elbow half dazed. +He felt that he had just narrowly escaped death, but for a moment he +could not just remember what had happened. Then the whole thing rushed +back to his mind and he got unsteadily to his feet. He found that he had +a bad scalp wound and a big bump on the back of his head which he had +hit on falling. When he got his dazed eyes to seeing properly, he was at +first horror-struck, for the bear lay half over his Jean. The latter was +lying on his back with his breast laid bare by the cruel claws of the +bear, deathly pale and to all appearances dead. One look at the bear +showed Pierre that it was dead. He hauled it with difficulty off his +boy's legs and then felt his heart.</p> + +<p>"At first, he could distinguish no movement and he was almost overcome +by grief, but a slight heart movement galvanized him into action. He at +once looked around and seeing a spring a short distance away, he ran, +and filling his coonskin cap with water he was back by the side of the +boy in a moment. Signs of life finally returned and Jean was soon +looking around trying with glazed eyes to come back from the Happy +Hunting Grounds to which his soul had just paid such a fleeting visit. +In a short time, father and son were fully back to consciousness but it +was only after a night spent right there that they felt like real live +men again.</p> + +<p>"Jean had a very ugly slash across his chest and the father felt sure +that at least two of his ribs had been broken by the savage blow the +bear had dealt him. Though<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">92</a></span> pretty sore himself, he felt fairly well, +though his scalp wound left no doubt that he had come near to death. +They camped there that day enjoying the bear steaks and getting off the +skin. In fact, it was not until two days later, that they set out on the +back trail. Then, though they presented a rather dilapidated appearance, +they managed to carry off the skin of the bear and the best portions of +the meat. Jean with his broken ribs went light and then had trouble in +following his sturdy father, who thought very little of having tackled a +bear with his hunting knife. Pierre told me," concluded Bob, "that he +found that the death stroke given the bear was dealt by his hunting +knife just as the bear closed in on him."</p> + +<p>"What a narrow escape! And I guess they think such events are +commonplace. Let's go up to their tents and ask them to show us the +scars," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Don't you believe Pierre, then?" asked Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"Sure," said Pud, "but I would like to see the scars. It would make the +whole story more real."</p> + +<p>Thereupon the boys went up to the tent and Bob talked to Pierre in +French. Pierre then pulled back the hair and showed the boys a white +scar across his head and Jean showed them a ragged scar that made Pud's +flesh creep.</p> + +<p>"Gee," said Pud, "that bear must have given Jean some rip. Ask Pierre +how he got that wound to heal."</p> + +<p>Bob did so and Pierre explained that he put some healing herbs on the +wounds and that they got well very quickly.</p> + +<p>"De rib, she no get well queeck," said Pierre, turning to Pud. "She vera +sore, some long time."</p> + +<p>"You two certainly had a narrow escape," said Mr. Anderson, as the whole +party, admiring the wonderful bravery and courage of these Indians, said +good-night.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if any such thing as that would happen to us?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"Maybe," said Mr. Waterman aloud, but to Mr. Anderson, "in their sleep I +guess."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">93</a></span></p> + +<p>By this time the boys were ready for bed and they were soon lying snugly +in their sleeping bags, no doubt dreaming of bears and what they would +do if they saw a big black bear come rushing down on them when they were +on a narrow ledge.</p> + +<p>Some such dream was surely surging through the brains of Pud and Bill, +for Bob was awakened by an awful racket and nearly smothered to death by +feeling two heavy bodies plunk down on him.</p> + +<p>"Hey, there, get up!" yelled Bob.</p> + +<p>It seemed that Pud and Bill had dreamt of the bear. Bill in his dream +jumped up just as the dream bear was rushing on him, and fell on Pud +just as Pud in his dream was set grimly to await the onset of the +monster. Bill, though half awake, was sure the bear had him, and Pud was +just as sure when Bill grabbed him that he was in the clutches of a +mighty black bear. They threshed around a moment and did not really wake +up until they fell on Bob and nearly smothered him. Bob had been too +sleepy to dream of bears, but he got up very quickly. After a hearty +laugh at their vivid dreams, the boys got into their blankets again and +were not disturbed until morning.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">94</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER VII</h2><h3>BOB'S CLUE</h3> +</div> + +<p>A week quickly sped with short trips here and there—a restful week for +them all, yet a week in which the boys learned more fully the woodman's +ways. For one thing they were becoming expert fishers and rapidly +improving in portaging. Even the two older men noticed how the boys were +so quickly becoming adapted to the rough life.</p> + +<p>"I think you boys are getting into good enough shape to warrant a week's +trip away from the home camp," said Mr. Waterman one morning.</p> + +<p>"I'm game," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"So am I," said Bob and Pud together.</p> + +<p>"Good! Why not go down then and climb that mountain from which one can +see so many lakes?" queried Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"All right. That would be a beautiful trip," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That sounds fine," said the three boys.</p> + +<p>A half hour later, they were off in two canoes, and they paddled down to +the far end of the lake.</p> + +<p>"Stick together, fellows," said Mr. Waterman. "We are going by the +compass and there won't be any trail. It's the easiest thing in the +world to get lost here and I can tell you that it's the hardest thing in +all creation to find your way back again, for all these mountains look +alike."</p> + +<p>"I've noticed that," said Pud, as they all got out of their canoes.</p> + +<p>The party swung off and made their way through the woods skirting the +lower part of the mountain. At last,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">95</a></span> Mr. Waterman began to climb and +the boys soon found that this was quite some mountain they were on. It +went up interminably. On they plodded and at last they came to a very +steep part just before reaching the summit. Mr. Waterman led the way. In +a short time, they were climbing straight up the side of the rocks. It +was hard and exciting work and more than once, Mr. Waterman turned and +looked around carefully.</p> + +<p>"Can we make it here?" asked Mr. Anderson in his quiet tones.</p> + +<p>"I think so," replied Mr. Waterman. "I thought that this was the place +we came up last summer but evidently it isn't."</p> + +<p>Up they climbed.</p> + +<p>"That old Mont Blanc hasn't anything on this for steepness," said Bob as +they stopped for rest.</p> + +<p>"I think I can see the top now," said Mr. Waterman. "We either have to +go on or go back to where we started up. I think that we can make it, +but be careful."</p> + +<p>By this time, they were climbing almost perpendicularly up the cliff. +There was no trail and they wound back and forth and at times had to +help each other up from rock to rock. As they neared the top, the rocks +became more brittle and it was necessary to try the rocks above before +trusting their weight to them. Once when they strung out down the +mountain for a hundred feet or more, Mr. Waterman, who was leading, +broke off a big rock just as he reached a higher altitude. He shouted +and every one below ducked. It went right over Mr. Anderson's head and +crashed down the side of the mountain.</p> + +<p>"Steady, steady," said Mr. Anderson. "Don't kick up such a fuss."</p> + +<p>"That was a close call both for you and me," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Once again before they reached the top they started rocks down the +mountain side but no one was hurt. At last they reached the top and the +view they had more than<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">96</a></span> repaid them for their exertions. This point was +the highest elevation in that part of the country and they could see for +many miles the cool, green, yet solemn-looking forests; the many lakes +which reflected the clear blue sapphire sky, speckled with fleecy white +clouds. They counted over thirty lakes. After enjoying the beauties of +the view, they started down again.</p> + +<p>"We'll go down the natural slope of the mountain and then work back +around the bottom to our lake," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Then you can't heave any more rocks at us," laughed Pud.</p> + +<p>They walked on for at least an hour and at last Mr. Waterman said:</p> + +<p>"We are now in our own valley. The small stream at the bottom of this +mountain runs from our lake so if any of you should get lost, just +follow the stream and you'll come out all right."</p> + +<p>This proved very good advice for after a half hour's walk, Pud fell +behind and before Bob knew it, the others were lost ahead. They yelled +but there was no reply.</p> + +<p>"Let's take a short cut," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"How's that?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"We'll go down the mountain and then follow that stream as Mr. Waterman +told us to."</p> + +<p>"All right," said Bob.</p> + +<p>Down they started and they soon came to the stream. They then had an +argument as to whether Mr. Waterman had said that the stream emptied +into their lake or ran from it. At last Bob said, "I remember distinctly +that Mr. Waterman said that this stream runs out of our lake so I'm +going this way."</p> + +<p>"All right," said Pud. "I know you're wrong, but if I don't go with you, +you'll get lost for good, so lead the way."</p> + +<p>The undergrowth near the stream was rank, as might be expected, and the +boys made slow progress. After<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">97</a></span> about an hour's walk they stopped, as +they felt sure they should have been at the lake.</p> + +<p>"We should have been there long ago," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"I think we ought to be there soon," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"We'll never get there going this way," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"This is the right way all right for I noticed that we went generally in +an easterly direction coming here and we have been going west for some +time. Let's hustle on."</p> + +<p>They did so and neither spoke a word for some time. At last they both +paused, startled, for they heard a crashing in the bushes up the stream. +They darted into the woods as quietly as they could and looked out. The +crashing continued and came their way. Finally, as they looked out they +saw that it was a man and they both gave a shout. This was answered at +once by Mr. Anderson's cheery voice. Pud's short cut had proved a very +long way home. Bill and the two leaders had gone around the foot of the +mountain and had saved a long distance in that way. After reaching the +lake they had waited there for some time and at last Mr. Anderson, +remembering the instructions that Mr. Waterman had given, had started +down the stream to find them. He said that they did not have a very long +distance to go.</p> + +<p>Mr. Anderson's appearance had acted like a tonic and the boys followed +him eagerly. They soon heard voices and in a moment more they saw Mr. +Waterman and Bill sitting on a big log by the shore of the lake right +near where the stream ran from the lake. Bill kidded Bob and Pud about +getting lost.</p> + +<p>"I didn't get lost," replied Bob. "Pud thought that by going down into +the valley and then up the stream that we would beat you here."</p> + +<p>"It was much longer," said Mr. Waterman. "We merely skirted the edge of +the mountain and came here almost directly."</p> + +<p>"It's a good thing that Bob was with me," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"How so?" asked Mr. Anderson.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">98</a></span></p> + +<p>"I got mixed up when I got to the stream and I wanted to go down the +stream instead of up," replied Pud.</p> + +<p>"Well, why didn't you then?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"Bob was sure we had to go up stream and he insisted on going in that +direction," admitted Pud.</p> + +<p>"You have to use your old bean up here," said Bill. "When in doubt, Pud, +leave it to Bob. He's full of gray matter whereas—"</p> + +<p>"Don't 'whereas' any more, Bill, or I'll give you a ducking," said Pud, +as he cornered Bill so that if he rushed him, he would have to go out +into the lake.</p> + +<p>"All right, all right," said Bill. "I'll keep my further remarks about +beans, mentality, cerebellum, etc., until we're ready for the swim."</p> + +<p>"You'd better," said Pud strongly.</p> + +<p>They all then got into their canoes and got back to camp to find there +an air of mystery that was noted at once by their leaders and shortly +later by the boys. Joe got Mr. Waterman aside right away and what he had +to say made him look very serious. Just then Jack came up and Mr. +Waterman listened to him very carefully. Mr. Anderson was called over +and the boys saw the four of them talking very seriously together.</p> + +<p>"I wonder what's up," said Bob. "Something has gone wrong but I don't +see anything the matter with the camp, do you?"</p> + +<p>"Not a thing," replied Bill. Pud looked around in his easy-going +fashion, just as if nothing could disturb him anyway.</p> + +<p>Mr. Anderson and Mr. Waterman did not offer any explanation when they +came back to the boys and they soon were in the water having a fine +swim. Later on they found that in some mysterious way a bag of flour, a +fitch of bacon, a small bag of salt, and a few other small articles had +been taken from the cook tent. Mr. Waterman felt<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">99</a></span> sure that he could +rely on the honesty of his guides and he was greatly mystified.</p> + +<p>"It beats me," said Mr. Waterman. "If an Indian or a stray fisherman +really needed grub, he would know that we would be perfectly willing to +help him out. No one ever refuses hospitality in the woods."</p> + +<p>"I can't make it out either," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps it was a bear," said Pud with one of his great inspirations.</p> + +<p>"Why to be sure," said Bill. "These bears up here have regular pouches +like the Australian kangaroo and I'll bet if we could see mother bear +just now she'd be waddling up some rocky place, her pouch filled with +flour, bacon, salt and other dainties for the little cubbies."</p> + +<p>Everybody laughed at this but no one had any further suggestion.</p> + +<p>"I really can't figure it out," said Mr. Waterman, more seriously. "The +worst of it is that this is not the first time this has happened. We +have said nothing about it but the same thing happened about ten days +ago. Then we scoured the camp and could not find a trace of the thief. +Jack tells me that the four of them have been all over the lake to every +trail and that they have seen nothing."</p> + +<p>"Let's organize a real hunt after lunch," said Bob eagerly.</p> + +<p>"That's just what I was thinking of doing," replied Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Everything was hurried through. Bob and Pud forgot the weariness they +had felt while lost that morning. Four different parties hurried away +after they had eaten. Bob and Mr. Waterman went together and they made +for the trail that led up north.</p> + +<p>"I figure it out," said Mr. Waterman, "that whoever it is that has been +at our cook tent came from the north."</p> + +<p>"How so?" asked Bob.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">100</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, it isn't far to Escoumains and any one in real trouble would find +food there. It's probably some stray Indian who is afraid of being +arrested for some crime if he goes back to the settlements. I can't +figure out anything else."</p> + +<p>"Did you bring a gun along?" asked Bob rather anxiously.</p> + +<p>"No," said Mr. Waterman. "We won't need any gun if we catch up with this +fellow. But first of all let us get some trace of him."</p> + +<p>They soon reached the beginning of the portage. They got out and +searched carefully. They saw tracks, to be sure, for they had been over +there just a few days before. No new tracks were to be seen. At last, +Mr. Waterman picked up the canoe and said, "Let's go on over the divide. +Keep your eye peeled for recent marks. If he came over here with a +canoe, he will probably slip or slide some place. Look for his tracks at +the sides of the trail."</p> + +<p>They went along at a slow pace. More than once Mr. Waterman stopped and +set down the canoe, only to pick it up a moment later and go on along +the trail. Just after they had reached the top of the divide in a very +steep place, Bob noticed a place near the side of the trail that was +trampled down. Mr. Waterman set down the canoe and came back. After +carefully looking at the bushes, he said,</p> + +<p>"I think that you're right, Bob. He evidently got off his balance here +and not wishing to make a bad slide on the trail, has stepped off in the +bushes."</p> + +<p>"It looks to me as if he had tried to cover this up too," said Bob. +"Look at this small branch. It was bent right over and evidently some +one has tried to straighten it out."</p> + +<p>Mr. Waterman bent over and exclaimed,</p> + +<p>"You're right, Bob. This is the way he came."</p> + +<p>The two then went on, but though they watched very carefully, they could +not find a single further trace of the man they were seeking. They soon +came to the little lake<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">101</a></span> they had been on before. Mr. Waterman led the +way and they got out at the further end as if both had agreed that the +fugitive was heading for the north and would take this course.</p> + +<p>"Now if we can get another trace of this son-of-a-gun on this portage, +I'll bet some money that I know where he is staying," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>This time Bob carried the canoe and Mr. Waterman went ahead. It was not +until they had come almost to the next lake that Mr. Waterman noticed a +tree from which a piece of bark had been chipped off.</p> + +<p>"That's funny," said he.</p> + +<p>"What's funny?" asked Bob, who looked all around but could note nothing +out of the way.</p> + +<p>"That tree," replied Mr. Waterman. "That piece of bark was knocked off +by something out of the ordinary."</p> + +<p>"Maybe he bumped into it with his canoe," replied Bob.</p> + +<p>"Hardly," replied Mr. Waterman. "A real woodsman does not bump his canoe +into trees and other things along the trail. He avoids them by +instinct."</p> + +<p>"That is probably true," said Bob, "but the only time he could steal +those things from camp would be at night, and he might hit a tree then."</p> + +<p>"You're right," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Once more they emerged at a lake. This one was fairly large. They +paddled slowly around it but could see no sign of a trail except the one +at the far end. This was a long trail over a low divide and Mr. Waterman +did not seem to want to start on it.</p> + +<p>"I don't want to set out on this trail because it is about five miles +long and we could not get home to-night. Anyway, I have a hunch that +this fellow has piked off to the north. It's the easiest thing in the +world to cover up a trail. Let's go around this north end of the lake +again."</p> + +<p>They did so but without any success.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">102</a></span></p> + +<p>"I guess we're stumped," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"Not on your life," replied Mr. Waterman. "That hunch of mine grows more +insistent every minute. I tell you what I'll do. Let me out here. I'll +tramp around this north shore and if he has any hidden trail, I'll +probably cross it sooner or later."</p> + +<p>Bob paddled to the shore of the lake and Mr. Waterman got out. Bob then +paddled slowly along the shore. He expecting to keep in touch with Mr. +Waterman by the noise he would make as he broke through the bushes. But +not so. Mr. Waterman had been schooled for many years by the Indians and +he had many of their accomplishments. One of these was his ability to +move through the woods with very little noise. The consequence was that +the leafy background of the little lake swallowed up Mr. Waterman and +not a sound was heard. The stillness seemed oppressive to Bob as he +slowly paddled to the other end of the lake. He had been there some time +when he was startled by hearing Mr. Waterman say in his usual calm +tones,</p> + +<p>"I've found it. My hunch was working properly."</p> + +<p>"Let's follow it right away," said Bob eagerly.</p> + +<p>"No," was the reply. "It will keep. We have just time to get back to +camp for a late supper. I'll take Pierre and Jack to-morrow and we'll +ferret out this matter."</p> + +<p>"Can't I go along too?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"No, I think that it would be best for just the three of us to go," +replied Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I hope you change your mind about that," said Bob. "I really think that +I might be of some use. I hardly like to ask you to remember that I was +the first to notice his tracks on the portage."</p> + +<p>"You're too modest, Bob," replied Mr. Waterman. "You certainly have +sharp eyes and know how to use them. I'll think it over and if possible +I'll take you with me. I am afraid that there may be some trouble and, +of course, I don't want to have anything happen to you."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">103</a></span></p> + +<p>"I'm part Irish," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"What's that?" asked Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I said that I was part Irish and you know that a real Irishman always +likes to be along when there's likely to be trouble."</p> + +<p>"You're part Irish all right," said Mr. Waterman. "I think you've kissed +the blarney stone some time."</p> + +<p>"That I did," replied Bob, merrily. "I can remember my father holding me +down from the tower by my heels to kiss the stone. If there's any virtue +in having kissed the famous stone, I ought to have my share, for I +skinned both my knee and my nose in doing the stunt."</p> + +<p>"I didn't know that you had ever been in Ireland," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, my father took me there one summer when I was a little +fellow," replied Bob, innocent enough.</p> + +<p>In the meantime they had reached the head of the lake. Mr. Waterman made +off at once with the canoe as he said that they would be late for supper +if they didn't hurry. He kept Bob hustling to keep up with him, stopping +only once on the way. That was on the last portage when they came to the +spot where Bob had noted the trampled bushes. Mr. Waterman looked very +carefully at the marks and went on apparently satisfied.</p> + +<p>"What did you notice this time that you didn't observe before?" asked +Bob.</p> + +<p>"Not very much," replied Mr. Waterman, "but enough to convince me that +there was only one person over the trail."</p> + +<p>"Well, if that's the case," said Bob, "surely there won't be much danger +in my going with you to-morrow."</p> + +<p>"Why not? There might be four or five in this party for all we know," +answered Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That's so," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"I'm inclined to take you along for you have very good sense about most +things, I notice," said Mr. Waterman, half to himself.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">104</a></span></p> + +<p>Bob blushed up to the ears at hearing this praise from his leader.</p> + +<p>"I'm sure, I'll try to be useful if you take me along," said Bob.</p> + +<p>They were soon down on the shore of their own lake and they could hear +the shouts of Bill and Pud as they wallowed in the water.</p> + +<p>"The rest of them are back," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if Pud found any traces of his bear thief," laughed Bob.</p> + +<p>As they came to the landing, the guides ran down eager to hear the news.</p> + +<p>"We found his trail," said Mr. Waterman. "Get the guns ready, Pierre and +Jack, and we'll go after the son-of-a-gun to-morrow."</p> + +<p>"Did you see him?" asked Jack.</p> + +<p>"No," said Mr. Waterman. "We just picked up his trail. I think I know +where he is, but you had better put together enough grub to last us a +week, for we don't know where he may be."</p> + +<p>"All right," replied Jack. "We'll be ready."</p> + +<p>Bob had to tell his various experiences to the boys, who listened with +bated breath. On their part they had little to relate. They had gone out +to the trails agreed on but could find no trace whatever of any +stranger. They had arrived only a short time before Bob had shown up.</p> + +<p>"Ye gods, but I'm hungry," sighed Pud.</p> + +<p>"You haven't anything on me," said Bob. "That Mr. Waterman is some +'moose.' He tears along like a steam engine and never seems to get +tired."</p> + +<p>"I noticed that the other day," said Pud. "He had me puffing and blowing +going up that mountain and he was breathing like a sleeping child."</p> + +<p>Just then, tang! tang! tang! tang! went the stick against the wash pan +in Jack's hands and the boys made a rush<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">105</a></span> for the table. They did more +than justice to the great bill of fare prepared for them by Jack. Trout +after trout, hot from the pan, disappeared like magic, not to speak of +the hot biscuits and the apricots for dessert.</p> + +<p>"How did you get these apricots up here?" asked Pud. "I'd think they +would be too heavy to carry."</p> + +<p>"They would be if we brought in the canned variety," said Mr. Anderson. +"But, thank you, we have plenty of good 'aqua pura' here without +bringing in canned pears and such things."</p> + +<p>"Well, how do you have them, then?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"We bring in the dried fruit," replied Mr. Anderson. "This is very light +and easily carried. We'll have our share of fruit here this summer all +right. The only thing we won't get much of is fresh meat and that you +can't get even at Escoumains every day."</p> + +<p>"A few partridges now and then will help along the fresh meat problem," +said Bob.</p> + +<p>"You bet," said Pud, licking his lips. "That partridge stew last week +was as fine as anything to be had at the Bellevue-Stratford or Kugler's +in Philadelphia."</p> + +<p>They had had a very strenuous day and they were all ready for bed. The +morrows's expedition had livened their imaginations and they sat around +the fire chatting and talking until the moon came out over the edge of +the opposite mountain and warned them that it was time to seek their +balsam boughs.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">106</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER VIII</h2><h3>THE WIRELESS IN THE WILDERNESS</h3> +</div> + +<p>The sun had hardly touched with gold the tops of the mountains before +Bob felt a light touch on his arm. He opened his eyes to see Mr. +Waterman with his hands to his lips in token of silence. He arose +quietly and with a surge of pride and joy in his heart, for he felt that +he was to be permitted to go on the expedition in search of the thief.</p> + +<p>"Bring along your sleeping bag," said Mr. Waterman, when Bob got out of +the tent.</p> + +<p>"Are we leaving right away?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Yes, just as soon as Jack can rustle a cup of coffee and something to +eat for us. He'll be ready as soon as we can get our things in shape."</p> + +<p>Bob hustled back to the tent and very quietly got his sleeping bag ready +for travel. He made a neat pack of it and hurried over to the grub tent. +Jack and Pierre were serving Mr. Waterman already so that Bob got a +hasty breakfast. He enjoyed it, for there was an atmosphere of +suppressed excitement that was altogether new to him. Ten minutes later +they were getting into two canoes. When Bob reappeared with his pack and +his gun, Mr. Waterman asked,</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do with that gun?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know," said Bob. "I saw that you all had guns and so I toted +mine along."</p> + +<p>"Now I know you're excited," said Mr. Waterman. "When a Southerner +begins to talk about 'you all' and 'toting' things, he's just plain +excited."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">107</a></span></p> + +<p>Bob just laughed quietly, for he knew that Mr. Waterman was right.</p> + +<p>They at last got away without waking up the two boys.</p> + +<p>"I bet Pud and Bill will be mad as sin when they find me gone with you," +said Bob to Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I suppose that they would like to come, but you know we may run +into trouble of some kind and in that case, it will be best not to have +too many along," replied Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I can't make this out," said Jack. "There is something amiss, for every +one knows that in this country, all one has to do is to ask and any grub +that one has will be shared."</p> + +<p>"Bad man," said Pierre. "He no have to steal if he not be bad."</p> + +<p>"You may be right," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>By this time they were on the first portage. When they came to the place +where Bob had noticed the tracks, Pierre and Jack stopped and examined +them attentively.</p> + +<p>"He no want to be seen," said Pierre.</p> + +<p>"He's a corking good woodsman," said Jack.</p> + +<p>"You're both right," replied Mr. Waterman. "Later on, we shall see how +clever he is in concealing a trail."</p> + +<p>When they came to the second lake, Mr. Waterman remarked to Bob that he +would paddle down the north end of the lake to see if either Jack or +Pierre would notice the trail. This they did and despite the sharp eyes +of the two guides, they did not notice any trail starting from the +water's edge. Mr. Waterman led them back and taking a line on a very big +tamarack tree that he had noted before, they got out of their canoes. +They had gone only a few rods to the left when they came to what was +evidently a new trail. They had gone only a short distance when Pierre +stopped and remarked that he was sure that no canoe had been brought +over the trail. When Mr. Waterman heard this, he had the men retrace +their steps to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">108</a></span> lake. They then began a systematic search for a +canoe. In about twenty minutes, Jack's sharp eyes searched out the +hiding place and the canoe was pulled out for inspection. They found it +to be an ordinary Peterboro, such as were to be found all through the +country.</p> + +<p>"If he's left his canoe here," said Mr. Waterman, "he can't be very far +off."</p> + +<p>"That's so," said Pierre.</p> + +<p>"We had better go careful," said Jack.</p> + +<p>All four then looked to their guns and took the trail, with Mr. Waterman +leading. He went along very carefully. In an hour they were over the +divide and going down into what seemed like a deep gulch.</p> + +<p>"This looks to me like the same gulch we visited the other day," said +Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I am sure of it," said Bob. "Then, I noticed that big rock over there."</p> + +<p>"What's peculiar about that rock?" asked Jack.</p> + +<p>"It looks like a big horse," said Bob. "I am sure that it's the same +one."</p> + +<p>"It does look like a horse," said Mr. Waterman. "I know the far side of +this gulch pretty well, but I did not think that there was any way out +of it so easy as the one we have come."</p> + +<p>They then proceeded very cautiously. Mr. Waterman gave way to Pierre, +who went ahead without any noise. Bob tried to imitate his movements but +he felt angry at himself, for he made a great noise as he went along. He +now knew why Mr. Waterman had hesitated at bringing him. He did the very +best he could and followed along, feeling the excitement tugging at his +heart. Mr. Waterman and the two guides moved like shadows before him and +only by the sudden gleam in their eyes could he see that they were at +all excited. At last Pierre came back a step or two and put his fingers +to his lips in token of silence.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">109</a></span></p> + +<p>"A log cabin not far ahead," said he to Mr. Waterman very quietly.</p> + +<p>Mr. Waterman and Jack went ahead very stealthily, and they came back in +a moment.</p> + +<p>"I guess we've treed our coon," said Mr. Waterman. "Now, how shall we +catch him?"</p> + +<p>"I go," said Pierre. "I make believe that I'm just an Indian fishing and +I come back 'bimby.'"</p> + +<p>"That's a pretty good plan," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>They watched Pierre disappear through the bushes and then settled down +to wait. In only about twenty minutes Pierre returned. They were all +surprised to see him so soon.</p> + +<p>"No one at cabin," said Pierre, as he came up.</p> + +<p>"How long since has there been some one there?" asked Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Only short time. He come back any time now."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes they were all in the house with the exception of +Pierre, who stayed outside to keep an eye on things. As soon as they +entered Mr. Waterman and Bob at once noticed that this was no Indian's +hut nor that of the ordinary woodsman. The room was as neat as a pin. +This was rather out of the ordinary for a cabin in the woods. But what +attracted the attention of both of them was the sight of several +chemical and wireless instruments that both recognized at once.</p> + +<p>"What's this?" said Mr. Waterman. "I'm not much on wireless, but I know +that this is part of a wireless plant."</p> + +<p>"You're right," said Bob. "I have one of them on my aerial for my +wireless at home. This is merely for receiving."</p> + +<p>"Now, what do you think any one would want with a wireless outfit away +back here in the woods?" asked Mr. Waterman, more to himself than to +Bob.</p> + +<p>"Do you think it has anything to do with the great European war that is +raging at this time?" said Bob.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">110</a></span></p> + +<p>"That's the natural explanation, of course," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"But what's the use of a wireless up here?" asked Bob in his turn.</p> + +<p>"You think that this is only a receiving station. Perhaps this is run by +some German spy to discover just when the troop ships are leaving Quebec +for England."</p> + +<p>"If that's so," said Jack, who had not said a word so far, but who had +followed the conversation very closely, "we are likely to run into +trouble, for any one that would do a thing of this kind would not +hesitate to go to the limit."</p> + +<p>"That's very true," said Mr. Waterman reflectively. "At the same time, I +hardly see why we should run into danger, as we are Americans."</p> + +<p>"I think that we have to get a look at this fellow and let him know that +after a certain date we shall be obliged to let the Canadian Government +know what is going on. Otherwise, if the Canadian Police run down this +fellow, they may find out that we have been here and then arrest us as +accomplices," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"The boy's right," said Jack. "And it would be a hanging job for us if +they proved that we knew what was going on here and did not notify the +constable."</p> + +<p>Further conversation was cut short by a shot outside, followed almost +immediately by another. Hurried footsteps were heard and a big fellow +rushed in and closed the door.</p> + +<p>"Hands up!" cried Mr. Waterman, as he leveled his gun at the stranger. +The latter made a quick movement, but a spurt of flame from Jack's rifle +was followed by the clatter of the stranger's rifle as it fell to the +floor. Coming in from the outside, the newcomer seemed to be unable to +see clearly.</p> + +<p>"Disarm him," said Mr. Waterman to Jack, who moved over and removed a +revolver from the hip of the owner of the hut.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">111</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, what is it?" asked the man defiantly. "It took you a long time to +find out this little place, didn't it?"</p> + +<p>"We're Americans," said Mr. Waterman. "It is quite plain to any one of +intelligence what you are here for. At the same time, I'm very much +mistaken if you're not an American yourself, or at least passed for such +until this war broke out. You know too much about the woods to be a +native born German."</p> + +<p>"You're right," said the man, as he lowered his arms. "I'm from the +West, and I'm an American, but in the pay of Germany—and have +established my post here."</p> + +<p>"You, of course, know that you must get out of here at once," continued +Mr. Waterman. "I don't think that it is our duty to take you in, though +Pierre, who is just coming, is a Canadian. There is the other door. +Here's your gun. We'll hold Pierre for a few minutes and then let him do +what he thinks best."</p> + +<p>"You're all right, men. I thought that the Canadian police had me, as +they probably have my companions."</p> + +<p>In a second he was out of the door and away down the trail. The members +of the party waited for Pierre. He came in very shortly and looked +around with great surprise.</p> + +<p>"Where is he?" asked he, as he looked around in astonishment. "I trail +him here. You let him go?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, we let him go," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Why for dat?" asked the Indian. "He bad man. He shoot at me twice but +no hit me."</p> + +<p>"He was here trying to get news for the Germans," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"How he get news here? No news here. What news?"</p> + +<p>"I could not make you understand," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Why not understand?" asked Pierre.</p> + +<p>"Have you ever heard that it is possible to speak miles and miles +through the air?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, Great Spirit speaks to all his children all over," said Pierre +devoutly.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">112</a></span></p> + +<p>"I don't mean the Great Spirit, but men, just like you and I."</p> + +<p>"Oh, no, no, that impossible," said Pierre.</p> + +<p>"It is done, and this man was here listening, so that he would know +things and then tell the enemies of Canada."</p> + +<p>"I no understand. What enemies?" asked Pierre.</p> + +<p>"Have you not heard that England and Canada are at war with the +Germans?" asked Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, but that is far across the Big Water," said Pierre.</p> + +<p>"Quite true, but the Germans are over here too. In some places, trying +to do harm to Canada," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"This bad man, a German?" asked Pierre, as his eyes lighted up.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Bob.</p> + +<p>"Where he go?" asked Pierre.</p> + +<p>"We, Americans, have no war with Germans. He goes that way," said Mr. +Waterman, pointing up the trail. In another moment Pierre was lost to +view.</p> + +<p>"What do you think of that?" said Jack. "I think I'll tag along behind +for fear he gets hurt."</p> + +<p>"Things certainly have come with a rush," said Mr. Waterman. "Suppose +you follow Pierre, so that if the German gets him that you will be there +to lend aid."</p> + +<p>"I'll be there," said Jack, as he looked significantly at his rifle. +"That skunk fired twice at Pierre already. He may get him the third +time. If he does, I'll take only one shot."</p> + +<p>"Don't run into trouble, Jack," said Mr. Waterman. "This is not our +fight. But follow Pierre and help him if he gets into trouble. Bob and I +will get down to Escoumains and report the matter."</p> + +<p>The two men shook hands and Jack disappeared after Pierre just as +quickly and as silently as the latter had done.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">113</a></span></p> + +<p>"That will be some chase," said Mr. Waterman. "That German is a real +woodsman and he'll lead them a merry chase."</p> + +<p>"It's a pity that Jack did not go with Pierre. How is he going to find +him?"</p> + +<p>"Leave that to him," said Mr. Waterman. "There are few Indians more +clever than Jack in following a trail. He'll be up with Pierre by +nightfall."</p> + +<p>They then looked around and were surprised at the completeness of the +outfit. Evidently four or five men had been needed to get all these +things into the woods.</p> + +<p>"How they ever got all this stuff here without arousing the suspicion of +the Canadian Government passes my comprehension," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>Going outside, they noticed a path, and following it, if soon led them +to the top of a mountain that was opposite to the one they had climbed +but a few short days before. Sure enough, there was the wireless, hidden +most cleverly by the trees and branches so that from the opposite hill; +nothing out of the ordinary could be seen even with a glass.</p> + +<p>"This is rather an old instrument," said Bob. "It is dated 1912."</p> + +<p>"That may explain the whole matter," said Mr. Waterman. "It is well +known that the Germans have a wonderful spy system. It is possible that +all this may have been brought in here four or five years ago for this +very purpose."</p> + +<p>"I guess that that's the answer," replied Bob, "for it would be +absolutely impossible for any party of men to get this stuff in here +now."</p> + +<p>On returning to the hut they took a good look around and found +everything in the best of order. There were supplies of all kinds there +except food.</p> + +<p>"I guess that the Canadian Government got his mates all right, and that +left him stranded here as far as grub was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">114</a></span> concerned. He had his nerve +with him all right, for he was liable to be shot down at any time," said +Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>They were soon on their way back. When they came to the lake they found +that the German's canoe was gone. Pierre was evidently right on his +trail, for one of the two canoes they had brought along was also +missing.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if Jack has caught up with Pierre so soon," mused Mr. +Waterman.</p> + +<p>"It looks that way," replied Bob, "for otherwise he would probably have +taken our canoe, knowing that we could get back to camp even without a +canoe."</p> + +<p>"You're right," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>They hurried on and in due time they arrived in camp. By this time it +was getting late, so they determined to go into Escoumains the next +morning and inform the authorities of their discovery. They found Bill +and Pud and Jean quite excited. In a short time they had the story in +full.</p> + +<p>"You did not see any one around here to-day, did you?" asked Mr. +Waterman, addressing the young Indian Jean.</p> + +<p>"No," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"I am pretty sure that the German is making for the St. Lawrence to try +and get out of the country. Let's go over to the old trail, just to see +if any one has passed that way to-day," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>All of them went, for the trail was only a few minutes' paddle down the +lake around a point of land that almost cut the lake in two. On arrival +there it was plain even to the unpracticed eyes of the boys that more +than one person had passed that way recently. Mr. Waterman and Jean +landed first. Jean had been on land not more than a minute before he +pointed to some tracks and said,</p> + +<p>"Pierre here, Jack there, other man there."</p> + +<p>They boys came over, but though they could see some tracks in the soft +trail, they did not see how Jean had identified his father and Jack at +once.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">115</a></span></p> + +<p>"You're right," said Mr. Waterman. "Three men have passed this way +to-day. It looks as if Pierre and jack are hot on his trail."</p> + +<p>They then returned to camp. Bob was compelled to tell his mates all +about the trip, and they were greatly excited when they were told of the +scene in the hut when it was necessary to hold up the German in +self-defense at the point of a rifle.</p> + +<p>When Bob and Mr. Waterman arrived in Escouniaias early the next +morning-they found things in a great state of excitement. It seems that +Pierre and Jack had gotten in about nine o'clock the night before, hot +on the trail of the spy. To the chagrin of Sandy MacPherson, an old +friend of his named Field, had come into the store and without showing +any signs of haste had made arrangements for a launch to take him down +the river. This had been done and a half hour later Pierre had arrived. +He had tried to explain the situation, but it was not until Jack had +given his version of the matter that it dawned on the irate Sandy that +the innocent-looking and very friendly Field was the German spy. When +Mr. Waterman had told all that he knew about the matter Sandy was +angrier than ever.</p> + +<p>"That son-of-a-gun has played me for an easy mark for years," said +Sandy. "About three years ago he got me to take into the woods a lot of +electrical stuff on the pretense that he wanted it in trying out some +ores that he thought were valuable. Then to put me farther off the +scent, two years ago he came back with a story that his whole outfit had +been burned down and totally destroyed."</p> + +<p>"Have the Government agents been here?" asked Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"No," was the reply, "but they were up at Tadousac about six weeks ago, +and they arrested three men there, though they held them only on +suspicion. When I come to think of it, one of them was a Mr. Samson that +used<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">116</a></span> to come into the woods with Field. I think that Samson is still +held and he'll get his share anyway."</p> + +<p>The party, having told their end of the story, returned to the woods. +Some three weeks later, on returning to Escoumains, they found out that +Field had apparently made good his escape. He had landed near Riviere de +Loup, and no doubt had gotten over into the United States from there.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">117</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER IX</h2><h3>A WEEK ON THE TRAIL</h3> +</div> + +<p>The previous days had been so full of excitement that they had +altogether forgotten that they were to go on a week's trip. Mr. Waterman +went ahead making preparations. On Sunday evening, after the short +devotions they always held on that day, said he:</p> + +<p>"Boys, you remember that we are going on an exploring trip this week. So +get ready. You will have to carry everything with you, so take those +things that are absolutely necessary. In addition, remember that each of +you boys is expected to carry his share of the grub for the week."</p> + +<p>The boys began to plan and they went to their blankets filled with the +idea of taking a real trip under old-time voyageur conditions.</p> + +<p>"Supposing it rains?" suggested Pud.</p> + +<p>"Well, what of it?" replied Bob. "Do you think that we're sugar and that +a little rain will hurt us?"</p> + +<p>"Don't worry very much," said Mr. Waterman. "If we have any really bad +weather you will be surprised how quickly the guides will make a wood +hut out of birch bark, and a few supports quickly cut in the woods."</p> + +<p>Very early the next morning they were astir. Bob had to give many +suggestions to Pud and Bill, too, but at last they had their duffle all +ready so that by means of tump lines they could not only bear their own +blankets and sleeping bags, but also their share of the week's supplies.</p> + +<p>"We are going north," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Let's go to the spy's cabin," said Pud.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">118</a></span></p> + +<p>"Ah, do," chimed in Bill. "You see, Pud and I had no part in that +adventure."</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Mr. Waterman, "it won't be a bad thing for us to go +there and see how much of the place the Government agents have left."</p> + +<p>"Have the police been there?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"You can bet they've been there," said Mr. Waterman. "A party left +Escoumains the very day we were there."</p> + +<p>They were a picturesque party as they set out. Pierre was the only one +left behind. Jean, Jack and Joe were there; Joe with his little pointed +hat, mackinaw and shoe pack, looking all the world like the pictures of +the old voyageurs that one sees in the illustrations of the early French +occupation of Canada. With the three guides, Mr. Waterman, Mr. Anderson, +and the three boys, there were eight in the party. Mr. Waterman led the +way, taking Bob in his canoe. Jack had Pud with him, Jean was paired +with Bill, while Mr. Anderson and Joe brought up the "honorable rear," +as they say in Japan. In their blue shirts, khaki trousers, bandanna +handkerchiefs around their necks and shoe packs, they looked ready to +tackle a journey to James Bay. In fact, Jean and Joe had both made the +trip to James Bay and back, over the Great Divide almost due north of +Tadousac, going first up the St. John River from Chicoutimi. They would +have been quite willing to make the trip again but, no doubt, they would +have objected to the presence of the boys on such a trip. Such a canoe +journey needs real woodsmen and is not for novices such as the boys +were.</p> + +<p>They were soon over into the lake from which the path led to the spy's +cabin. Mr. Waterman steered straight for the trail. They got out and +were soon over the short divide and into the big gulch. They found the +cabin still standing and apparently with everything just as it had been +left by them. When, however, they came to the wireless on the top of the +mountain, they could not find a trace<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">119</a></span> of it. It had been taken away +entirely. The boys enjoyed the view from the top of the mountain.</p> + +<p>"I almost believe that in clear weather Field and his mates could +recognize the ships on the St. Lawrence if they had strong glasses, as +they most probably had," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Yes, it's so clear to-day," said Mr. Anderson, "that your idea seems +not only possible but very probable. This was a very fine place for such +a purpose. They could read the wireless messages that were sent from +vessels going or coming from Quebec, and if they could get out to the +United States now and then they could very easily keep their Government +informed as to the movements of the British vessels, at least the most +important vessels plying in and out of Quebec."</p> + +<p>In a short time they were down the mountain and at the cabin once more.</p> + +<p>"I must come in here some time and look for the outlet of this gulch," +said Mr. Waterman. "There is quite a big watershed here, and the fact +that there is no lake shows that there is a good outlet. Unless this +outlet is underground it will lead down to either the Portneuf River or +the Escoumains or some lake that empties into one or other of these +streams."</p> + +<p>"Have we time to look for it now?" asked Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"No," was the reply, "I have planned the trip for the week and it will +be best to make a day's trip here just for the purpose."</p> + +<p>They then went on their way and were soon over into another lake.</p> + +<p>"Do you think you can stand another carry?" asked Mr. Waterman, turning +to the boys.</p> + +<p>"Sure," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"Ab-so-lute-el-y," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"All right," replied Pud.</p> + +<p>"Why so modest?" asked Mr. Anderson.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">120</a></span></p> + +<p>"I find it hard work," said Pud. "I not only have to carry my load but +about twenty-five pounds of superfluous flesh. I guess I can stand it if +they can. I'm here to get in shape, so go ahead."</p> + +<p>"We can stay here just as well and go on to the other lake in the +morning. It is only mid-afternoon now, though," said Mr. Waterman, "and +we could make the next lake easily. I plan to stay there all day +to-morrow."</p> + +<p>"Don't mind me," said Pud.</p> + +<p>So they went ahead. Bob carried the canoe and a duffle bag full of grub, +while Mr. Waterman kept piling on stuff until he had at least one +hundred and fifty pounds on his back. With a tump line over his +forehead, he moved ahead, apparently little concerned about the weight +of his load. Mr. Anderson and the guides were also similarly loaded. Pud +elected to carry his bag and the portion of the grub. Jack kept on +piling up the stuff with a merry wink to Bob. Finally they moved off. +The carry proved to be about a mile and a quarter long. They had to go +up a fairly steep hill first. All did very well, though Pud was puffing +and blowing like a porpoise and sweating like a foundryman when they +stopped at the top of the hill for a short rest. They were soon on their +way again. Jack stayed behind with Pud and the others were soon lost to +view. Bob and Mr. Waterman walked ahead at a good pace and were soon at +the lake, which opened out before them most invitingly. They were all in +swimming when at last Jack and Pud hove in sight. Pud was certainty the +picture of fatigue.</p> + +<p>"Don't overdo it, Jack," said Mr. Waterman. "That was really too big a +load for him to carry."</p> + +<p>"I guess you're right," replied Jack. "I put it on him more for a joke +than anything else, intending to take it myself later. But that kid's +game. He would not let me have it, although I thought he would melt away +before we got here. I won't overload him again. When he gets back to +Philadelphia he'll be hard as a rock. With his gameness<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">121</a></span> and his weight +and strength, he should tear things loose on that football team. I don't +know much about the game, but they tell me it's rough.</p> + +<p>"It is a little rough," said Mr. Waterman, who himself had been a noted +player when he went to college. "A little roughness in sport is really +necessary for the full development of boys. They must get that personal +contact and feel that they have to get the best of the other fellow +through their own efforts. If this is done fairly, the roughness will +not deteriorate into anything dangerous."</p> + +<p>In the meantime Pud prepared for a swim, which was certainly a reward +for him after such a long stretch of portage.</p> + +<p>"Oh, you water," said Pud, as he luxuriously lay out on his back +floating. "That last carry was some hike. It had all the Plattsburg +full-equipment hikes beaten to death. I'm just going to load my pater +down some day with what I had on my back and then ask him how he would +like to tote that over a young mountain."</p> + +<p>"You did very well, Pud," said Mr. Waterman. "I did not notice how much +Jack was piling on you or I would have taken part of it myself."</p> + +<p>"Not on your life," said Pud. "I'm here, and that extra sweat I had will +do me good. I told Jack I would switch with him now and then. I did not +realize what a load he had. On the previous carries he walked along just +as if he was out for a little jaunt. He's getting old, too. I don't see +how how he does it."</p> + +<p>"They get used to it and know just how to distribute the load so that it +will be carried most easily," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>While the boys were enjoying the water, the guides were busy. Already +they had cut a couple of poles, and with the aid of two trees they had +made a very serviceable fireplace and was getting ready to make +biscuits.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">122</a></span></p> + +<p>"Hey, you boys," called Mr. Waterman, "get busy. We'll clear up around +here, but you fellows get out and catch us some trout for supper."</p> + +<p>"Nothing easier," said Bob, as he came ashore and put on his clothes. In +a little while they were all three out on the lake casting like +veterans. Bob was in one canoe alone while Pud paddled Bill in the other +canoe. In a very short time they had over thirty fine trout, and at a +shout from Jack they came back to camp.</p> + +<p>"Well, did you have any luck?" asked Jack, as they came to the shore.</p> + +<p>"Bully!" said Bob. "This lake is full of trout as fine as I have ever +seen."</p> + +<p>"No wonder," replied Jack. "There is no one here to catch them, and they +keep on increasing."</p> + +<p>"Well, I'll reduce the supply if we stay here a few days," said Pud. "I +could eat an ox, let alone a few trout."</p> + +<p>"You'll get all you want to eat and then some," said Jack.</p> + +<p>The fish were soon cleaned, and twenty minutes later they sat around a +table made of two big logs with birch bark spread over it. It was not +quite so comfortable as in their home camp, where they had a rude bench +to sit on, but not one of them even thought of any such luxuries. They +had had a strenuous day with but a very small lunch, and they were as +hungry as wolves. The way the biscuits, the trout and everything else +disappeared was a tribute to Jack's cooking. Even Pud at last drew back +from the improvised table fully satisfied.</p> + +<p>"The Germans have a proverb to the effect that 'Hunger is the best +cook,'" said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"That's true," broke in Pud, "but when you have a fine cook and hunger +too, then there is real enjoyment in eating even the most simple fare."</p> + +<p>"Well said, old top," remarked Bill. "'But first tell me when you got to +be a philosopher."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">123</a></span></p> + +<p>"The best time to philosophize," said Mr. Waterman, "is just after such +a meal as we have had. Then there is such a sense of bodily satisfaction +that everything else appears to us as if detached from our own selves. +The true philosophers are the woodsmen. They have time to think over +life and its many chances, and they get to know things at their true +worth. That is why men who are brought up near to nature are always such +good judges of character either in men, women, or animals."</p> + +<p>"Now we are philosophizing," said Mr. Anderson. "I think you're right, +though, for practically the only true philosophers that I have ever +known are men of the woods. Pierre is a good example of this. His views +of life and death would do credit to Dr. Talmage or any other of our +great preachers."</p> + +<p>"Well, all I can say is this," said Pud, "I'm glad I'm here."</p> + +<p>At this everybody laughed, for it was typical of big, hearty, jovial +Pud, that any real serious conversation should go over his head, even +though his own ideas may have started the talk.</p> + +<p>After supper the boys got their sleeping bags ready and everything else +so placed that they would not be wet by the dew, which is very heavy in +the Saguenay region. Then, like true sons of Nimrod, they once more +sought the limpid waters of the little lake in quest of the ever elusive +and ever interesting trout. They all had good luck, which guaranteed +them a hearty breakfast. As Bob and Pud came back to the camp they found +Jack out on a log casting. The woods were back of him and almost +directly above him, but in some uncanny way he managed to cast his fly +just where and just as far as he wanted to. As they came by he showed +them a dozen fine specimens that he had hooked.</p> + +<p>"Why go so far from camp?" said he, in his quizzical way. "They bite +just as good here."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">124</a></span></p> + +<p>"For you," said Bob. "You're a wizard with the fly, but for a poor +novice like myself it is better to seek the fish where they are pretty +sure to be found. I'm no Pied Piper of Hamlin to be able to draw fish to +my fly as he did rats with his pipe."</p> + +<p>The camp fire proved more than usually attractive that evening. All +gathered around, even the guides, after they had straightened everything +up.</p> + +<p>"Well, we don't need to worry much now," said Mr. Waterman. "We'll stay +right here to-morrow and have a good day's fishing and possibly +hunting."</p> + +<p>"What kind of hunting?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"I was thinking merely of a partridge or two," replied Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Arc you going to use your sleeping bag to-night?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Sure thing," replied Mr. Anderson. "We're going to have a fine night, +but about four o'clock to-morrow morning you are liable to make the +acquaintance of some of those moustiques or gnats that Pierre tells +about. If you are in your sleeping bag you can then just pull over the +flap and have another snooze."</p> + +<p>"It certainly looks like fine weather," said Bill. "I think that I'll +get up real early and visit that trout hole I found to-night. They just +jumped at the fly. It was almost dark when I struck the place, so I had +time only for a 'strike' or two."</p> + +<p>"I'm with you," said Pud, with a yawn.</p> + +<p>"Swell chance," said Bob. "We won't be able to waken you to-morrow +morning until you hear Jack's voice yelling that breakfast is ready."</p> + +<p>"Is that so?" replied Pud. "Now, don't you believe it. I've turned over +a new leaf, and I'm going to get up promptly from now on."</p> + +<p>"The only thing you'll turn over to-morrow at dawn is yourself for +another nap," said Bill.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">125</a></span></p> + +<p>"Just try me and you'll see," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"You're on," was the reply, "but I warn you that I'll call you just +once."</p> + +<p>Just then Mr. Waterman broke in by asking Joe if this was not the lake +where he had had such an experience with wolves some years before. Joe +nodded. The boys immediately wanted to know the story. Bob sat down by +Joe and was soon lost as he listened to the vivacious tale of the French +habitant.</p> + +<p>"That isn't fair," said Bill, to no one in particular.</p> + +<p>"What isn't fair?" asked Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"Why, Bob knows French, so he is having Joe tell him the wolf story. +We'd like to know that too."</p> + +<p>"It is really a fairly common occurrence; at least was some years ago in +this country," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"But Bob will tell us, won't you?" said Pud, turning to him.</p> + +<p>"Sure." So Bob began the interesting tale.</p> + +<p>"Joe was up here with Pierre and another Indian hunting some years ago. +The winter had been a very severe one with a wealth of snow. On this +account, the wolves had been able to get but little to eat. They were +then much more numerous than they are to-day. At that time there was a +bounty on wolves and hundreds of heads were turned in to the government +each winter and spring. Joe and his party were coming back to Escoumains +after a good winter's hunt. They stopped on the next lake at a hunter's +shack that was there at that time. As the weather promised to keep cold, +they determined to stay there, feeling that if the spring should come +with a rush that they would be able to get down to Escoumains, as it was +only a week's journey distant.</p> + +<p>"They therefore set their traps and went methodically about their +business of gathering in the furry harvest made profitable to them +through the desires of 'My Lady' in the large cities, whose fair necks +must be covered and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">126</a></span> protected from even the cold autumn's breath. One +fine day Joe set out to make the round of the traps. He had good luck +and was going home about four o'clock in the afternoon, laden with two +foxes and four rabbits. Joe was hurrying on, for there was no moon and +the shades of night fall very early in these latitudes even in March. +They had heard a wolf occasionally, but had felt no fear of them, so +that when Joe heard the long-drawn note, he did not give it even a +thought. He was intent on getting back before nightfall, so he failed to +note that the howls were rapidly approaching.</p> + +<p>"As he reached the surface of the lake, which was of course frozen +tightly at that time of year, he was astonished to hear the howl of a +wolf, immediately followed by other howls only a short distance in his +rear. He hurried on, but before he could get across the lake, he saw +several dark forms dash out on the ice behind him. He broke into a run, +but the pack rapidly overtook him. Raising his gun to fire, he was +thunderstruck to find that in some way he had jammed the trigger and +that it would not work.</p> + +<p>"He did not have any time to waste, so he threw down two rabbits and +hurried on. The wolves stopped only a moment, when they came to the +rabbits. He could hear them snarling and quarreling over their small +carcasses. He felt his blood run cold and wondered if he was to be torn +to pieces in like manner. Once more the pack came on, so he threw +another couple of rabbits to them and ran ahead. They got quite near to +him the next time, so he dropped the remainder of his load and fled for +the shore. He felt that his only chance lay in getting ashore and up a +tree. As he ran he tried to fix the trigger of his gun, but he could not +get it working. He was quite near the shore now, but the wolves were +close behind. With a last desperate rush, he sprang up the steep bank. +Turning around, he was just in time to strike down with his clubbed gun +a big gray form that leaped at him with gleaming fangs.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">127</a></span> This lucky +stroke probably saved Joe's life, for the rest of the pack stopped to +devour their comrade, thus giving Joe time to get safely into the +branches of a tree. The wolves, now with bloody mouths and glaring +eyeballs, surrounded the tree and let out howls of such fierceness that +they made Joe tremble even though he knew that he was safe for the +present. He was only about a mile and a half away from their shack, and +he knew that if he did not turn up, that sooner or later Pierre would be +out to hunt him.</p> + +<p>"But, can you imagine how pleasant it must be to be up in a tree, with +broken gun, a dozen hungry wolves beneath you and a cold night coming +on? Already Joe began to get very cold, for in his race across the lake +through the heavy snow he had broken out into a heavy perspiration. As +darkness came down he could feel the cold hand of King Frost, as it +were, reaching for him and trying to throw him down to the beasts below. +This idea took possession of Joe's mind and he fought it off with all +his strength. He tried as best he could in the gathering darkness to fix +his gun, but it was hopelessly jammed. At last he gave this up and +settled down to wait for the morning, which would surely bring Pierre to +his rescue.</p> + +<p>"As the cold became greater, his desire to sleep became the stronger. He +felt himself nodding several times and once awoke just as he was on the +point of falling from the tree. He grabbed a branch lower down, but his +feet swung beneath and before he could get back safely on the limb one +of the watchful band below by a mighty leap snapped at his leg and took +a piece cleanly out of the calf, tearing his trousers leg almost +entirely off him. The smell of the blood put the wolves into a frenzy +and they tried again and again to reach him by leaping. They seemed +maddened by hunger, for when one of their number fell after making a +mighty upward bound, the pack was on him in a minute, and before the +horrified eyes of Joe, they tore their mate to pieces and in ten minutes +there was neither hide nor hair of him to be seen.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">128</a></span></p> + +<p>"Joe now had to bind up his leg as best he could. He bound the rags of +his trouser leg around so that it kept out the cold pretty well. This +excitement kept him up for some time, but about twelve o'clock Joe felt +that the cold was sure to get the better of him if he did not do +something. He thereupon undid the leather strap that he used ordinarily +to carry his gun over his back when not in use. This strap, together +with his belt, made a strap sufficiently long so that he was able to +bind himself to the tree. He then felt easier, for he knew that at +least, even though he went to sleep, that he would run no risk of +falling down as prey for the murderous pack below. He wondered if he +would be able to stand the cold night or whether when Pierre came in the +morning he might not find him stark and rigid, tied to the branch of the +tree.</p> + +<p>"He shuddered as he remembered the gruesome sight he had once noted far +to the north one day. Then, on one of his fishing expeditions, he had +come upon the body of a man hanging in a tree, evidently treed by wolves +and then frozen. He wondered if some chance passer-by in after years +would find his skeleton in a similar way and would pass on with only a +'Dieu benisse' (May God bless) as he had done, and not even give him +decent burial. He commenced to think that his present position was +directly due to his haste on this former occasion. He begged God to +forgive him and promised to burn a hundred candles for the soul of the +unknown if he ever got back to Escoumains.</p> + +<p>"At last human strength could hold out no longer and Joe fell asleep, +asleep with the cold, that forerunner of death. Joe knew nothing until +he awoke in the cabin with Pierre busy about him. It seems that when he +did not return Pierre had gotten uneasy. He and his mate had started +out. With pine torches they followed his trail, and when they saw the +numerous wolf tracks they feared for the worst. They followed across the +ice and were themselves attacked by the pack. Their guns soon put them +to flight and a few minutes later they found Joe insensible up in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">129</a></span> the +tree. They hurried him back to the hut and in a few days Joe was none +the worse for his experience except for the painful wound on his leg +made by the champion high jumper of the pack."</p> + +<p>"Are there any wolves up here now?" asked Pud, as he looked out into the +forest with its dark avenues of trees.</p> + +<p>"Not so many," replied Mr. Anderson, "but Sandy, down at Escoumains, +told me the other day that they were getting numerous again, and that a +bounty had once more been put on their heads."</p> + +<p>"Don't be dreaming of wolves and pounce on me again, as you did when +dreaming of bears," laughed Bob.</p> + +<p>"Yes, to bed, to bed, now," cried Mr. Waterman. "I'm sure we all need +the rest, for we have had a great day."</p> + +<p>They all agreed with him and were soon warm and cozy in their sleeping +bags, sleeping as only tired men can sleep out of doors. The fire died +down, the greenness of the nearby branches became gray and then black +and were finally merged into the blackness of the surrounding woods, and +not a sound told that here under God's own canopy slept human beings +enjoying nature as the primeval men of old did.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">130</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER X</h2><h3>MOCCASINS AS FOOD</h3> +</div> + +<p>Pud made good the next morning, for when Bill woke him he got up at +once, plunged into the lake for an eye opener, and was ready with rod +and line as soon as Bill. They were soon out on the lake and Bill made +at once for the trout hole that he had spotted the night before. They +had remarkably good luck and returned in time for breakfast with +twenty-five fine trout. These they cleaned and handed to Jack, who soon +had them sizzling on the fire and ready for breakfast. Bob and Mr. +Waterman had also gone fishing. They did not return until Jack's cheery +"Halloo!" brought they in scurrying. After breakfast they divided into +parties. Bob and Mr. Waterman elected to go hunting partridges, while +the others said that they would go fishing. Bob and Mr. Waterman were +soon off. Arriving at the far end of the lake, they left their canoes +and were soon lost in the depths of the forest. For some time they went +along, but at last Mr. Waterman noted a partridge, and with a clever +shot it was his. They wandered around, climbed a mountain and +incidentally got three more birds, two of which Bob had the good fortune +to bag.</p> + +<p>"Well, we'd best be going," said Mr. Waterman. "Lead the way."</p> + +<p>Bob said nothing, but started off confidently. Mr. Waterman followed on +for a few minutes. He then asked,</p> + +<p>"Let's see your compass, Bob."</p> + +<p>Bob felt in his pocket, but did not find it there. He then remembered +that he had left it in his sleeping bag. He was compelled to confess as +much to Mr. Waterman.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">131</a></span></p> + +<p>"That's bad dope, Bob," said Mr. Waterman. "You should never leave camp +without your compass nor without first noting carefully in which +direction you are going."</p> + +<p>"I know that," said Bob. "I just forgot it."</p> + +<p>"Which direction did we take this morning?" queried Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"We first went east to the end of the lake, and since then we have been +going mainly in a northerly direction."</p> + +<p>"That is right," was the reply. "Now, if you can tell me which way is +south, we can at least go in the right direction."</p> + +<p>"We're going south now, aren't we?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"No," Mr. Waterman replied. "We are going north, or nearly so."</p> + +<p>He then pulled out his compass and showed Bob that this was so.</p> + +<p>"Now, supposing we had no compass, how would we be able to tell the +points of the compass?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"By the sun," answered Mr. Waterman, in his usual, quiet way.</p> + +<p>"How?" was the query.</p> + +<p>"It's quite simple. In this latitude the sun is to the south of us. We +therefore turn and face the sun, as it is now near noon, and we are +facing south. Behind us is north, to our right, the west and to our left +the east."</p> + +<p>"A woodsman certainly must be on the lookout," said Bob.</p> + +<p>Then they turned around and after quite a tramp they came to their own +lake. They reached camp about three o'clock to find it empty. The others +were evidently still out fishing. They busied themselves about the camp, +finally opening out their sleeping bags and lying down on them. In due +time the others returned and showed such a multitude of shining beauties +that they were amazed.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">132</a></span></p> + +<p>"This is one of the best lakes we have ever been on," said Jack, as he +went about preparing supper. "The trout are very numerous and of fine +size. If we had time it would pay us to stay here a few days and get +ready some smoked trout to take out with you when you go back to the +city."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to do it," said Mr. Waterman, "but I want to carry out my +original schedule, so we'll reserve your idea for later on in the +season."</p> + +<p>Once more they had a fine supper, consisting of partridge stew with +dumplings, trout, biscuits and prunes for dessert. They spent another +very pleasant evening around the camp fire.</p> + +<p>In the morning, after a hearty breakfast, they set out for another lake +farther north and a little to the east.</p> + +<p>"I want to work over towards the Escoumains River, so that we can come +down that stream on Friday and get our first taste this season of fast +water," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That will be fine," said Bob. "Father has often told me of the exciting +times he has had shooting the rapids in the Lake St. John region."</p> + +<p>They were soon ready for their journey. When they came to the first +portage Pud was the first man out of the boat. He had his dunnage bag on +his back and the canoe on his shoulders, and waited for Jack to show the +way. Off they plodded, and in about an hour they came down again to +another fine lake. The guides at once began to make camp, while the +others looked to their sleeping bags and cleared up for the night. By +ten o'clock they were settled for the day, and off they went in their +canoes to try their luck on the new lake. They found it just as full of +fish as the lake they had just left. When they returned at one o'clock +they found that they really had more fish than they could use.</p> + +<p>"We'll have to stop fishing for the rest of the day," said Mr. Waterman. +"There's no use catching trout merely to throw them back again."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">133</a></span></p> + +<p>"Let's climb some mountain this afternoon and have a good swim +afterwards," suggested Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>After lunch the three boys, with their two mentors, left the camp and +made for the opposite shore of the lake, as the mountain rose up sharply +there. They scrambled up the sides of the mountain and had gotten nearly +to the top when they were startled to see a party of men above them. +When they came out on the top they found the strangers there apparently +waiting for them. Mr. Waterman greeted them pleasantly, but they gave +only gruff answers. They inquired at first very politely what they were +doing there. Mr. Anderson gave them civil answers, but they evidently +did not think that his answers were full enough, so they threw off all +disguise, and the leader said,</p> + +<p>"We are Government officials, sent up here to see if there are any more +stations such as Field had down near your camp. It looks rather +suspicious that you should discover this man Field so opportunely. We +already know that food you bought in Escoumains has been found in his +cabin."</p> + +<p>"Very true," said Mr. Waterman. "As I explained to Mr. MacPherson, that +was the reason why we went out looking for the thief. It was on that +quest that we found Field and discovered his business. We notified the +Government immediately, which proves that we were honest in the matter."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps it does and perhaps it doesn't," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"What you do not know is that we had ferreted out Field's accomplices, +and I have no doubt that we would have gotten him in a short time. It is +possible that he knew this and made an arrangement with you to keep him +supplied with grub."</p> + +<p>"Nothing of the kind," said Mr. Waterman. "You evidently have not read +the evidence I left with Mr. MacPherson. There I told him all about the +scene at the hut, and if you have read that you must know that we knew +nothing of Field or his work. All we know is that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">134</a></span> he stole some of our +grub and showed remarkable skill in doing so. All through, he was about +as clever as one could imagine."</p> + +<p>"I'll grant that he was clever, and you seem clever yourself," was the +reply.</p> + +<p>"Don't forget that we'll keep our eye on you the rest of the summer, and +that at the first suspicious move, we'll arrest you," said another +official.</p> + +<p>"You will find that totally unnecessary. We have been coming up into +this country for several years, and the delights of nature, the fishing, +hunting and adventure are the only things we are after here," said Mr. +Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I hardly know what to believe," said the spokesman of the party. "That +man Field was here on just the same plea that you have stated, and until +a few days ago he was just as little suspected as you now actually are. +Pardon my questioning, but it seemed necessary. We are camping over on +Lac Corbeau for some time, so if you see more of us do not be surprised. +For the present we'll assume that things are just as you state they are. +I sincerely hope so, for otherwise it will be a very serious matter for +you."</p> + +<p>The two parties then separated, and Mr. Waterman led the way back down +the mountain. They were just in time for a real good swim before supper. +Jack had been out and he had gotten four ducks, so that they had a very +fine meal. Duck, trout, biscuits hot from the pan, ginger-bread and +apricots made up a meal that would have done credit to Delmonico's, let +alone a camp far away in the Canadian wilds. They certainly enjoyed it.</p> + +<p>The next morning they were up early. They were going to get over to the +Escoumains River and this meant that they would have to portage through +three lakes.</p> + +<p>"We'll have some hard work this morning, boys, so let's get away as +early as we can," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"How many portages have we?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"Three," was the reply.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">135</a></span></p> + +<p>"It's all the same to me," said Pud. "I'm getting to like the feel of +that old canoe on my neck. It certainly does not seem half as heavy as +it was ten days ago."</p> + +<p>"That's because you know how to distribute its weight so that you carry +it with head, neck, and arms," said Mr. Anderson. "These canoes are +especially made and they weigh only sixty pounds. You ought to carry the +canoes we used the first year of the Saguenay Club. They were just the +ordinary canoe and they weighed nearly one hundred pounds and were badly +balanced. These canoes not only weigh less than any other canoes you +will see in this country, but they are especially balanced so that they +are thereby easier to carry."</p> + +<p>"I never used any other canoes," said Bob. "Now that I am used to these +canoes, I do not mind them very much."</p> + +<p>"You must also remember that you boys are getting into the finest kind +of physical shape," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"We ought to up here," said Pud. "I've done more real work here the past +two weeks than I would do at home in six months. It certainly puts the +muscle on a fellow."</p> + +<p>Shortly after breakfast they had all their duffle packed and they were +off. They went along from one lake to another without incident and in +due time they arrived at the Escoumains River. By this time it was +nearly two o'clock, so they had a hurried lunch and then started up the +river. Then the boys had a taste of river canoe work that they had never +seen before. It was well that for each of the four canoes there was an +experienced man, for otherwise there would have been plenty of trouble. +Before they started the boys were surprised to see the guides come out +of the woods with several long poles nicely trimmed up. These they laid +in the canoes.</p> + +<p>"What's the idea?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"Of what?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>"The poles."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">136</a></span></p> + +<p>"We use the pole getting up the rapids. One can go better that way," +said Joe.</p> + +<p>"I didn't know that one ever used anything but paddles in canoes," said +Bill.</p> + +<p>"You'll very soon find how much more power you can get out of the pole +than out of a paddle when going up a stream," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>The canoes were pretty well loaded down but the party set out bravely. +For some time the river was deep and by hard paddling they made progress +against the current. Then they came to a rapid. Mr. Waterman got out and +went up the stream. In a little while he returned and stated that he +thought they could get up all right if they poled. Then the boys saw how +this was done. Generally they kept near the shore. The man with the pole +stood in the rear and shoved the boat along. It was necessary to be real +clever with the pole, as any one can make sure of by trying this +manoeuver some time in fast water. Finally they got up the first rapid, +though frequently the boys thought that they were due for a wetting. +When they came to the next rapids Joe told Mr. Waterman that he knew +these rapids well and that it would be necessary to portage. Joe said +that it was a full hour's portage, meaning that it was nearly two miles. +They landed and were soon headed up the stream, laden with their canoes +and duffle bags. It was hard work, though they found a well-beaten trail +leading up the river. They got glimpses of the cool waters of the +Escoumains as it dashed foaming from rock to rock. They could hardly +admire the scenery, for they were all well weighed down with their packs +or canoes. At last they came out at the head of the rapids and found a +fine sheet of water ahead of them. In fact, as often happens, they found +the river broad and slow-flowing for several miles, and they made steady +progress.</p> + +<p>"Keep your eye out for a good camping place," said Mr. Waterman. Hardly +had he said this than they came around<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">137</a></span> a curve of the river and saw +before them a little opening in the woods that had been cleared. A +little stream ran down into the larger river, forming a sand bar near +its mouth.</p> + +<p>"Here's the place," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>As if by one consent they all steered for the shore and quickened their +strokes. In a little while they were practically ready for the night. It +was well that they had stopped, for it was now close to six o'clock and +they were all getting very hungry.</p> + +<p>"Hurry up the grub, Jack," said Mr. Waterman. "I could eat a moccasin."</p> + +<p>"I eat moccasin before now," said Joe. "It ees hard to chew."</p> + +<p>"When was that?" asked Bill, who scented a story.</p> + +<p>"It was many year ago, when I very hungry in dees wood," said Joe.</p> + +<p>"Let's have the story after supper," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"Oh, no, it is too difficile for me to speak Engleesh," replied Joe.</p> + +<p>"Well, tell it to me," said Bob, "and I can then tell it to the others."</p> + +<p>"All right, all right," said Joe, "but you must not expect big story. It +ees only what happened to me one long wintaire."</p> + +<p>The boys went in for a swim and they found the water a little colder +than the lake on which they had camped the previous weeks. Joe, Jean and +Jack kept very busy, and it was not long before the noise of a stick +beaten against a tin can made known to all that supper was ready.</p> + +<p>"Trout will do us to-night, but to-morrow morning we must have salmon +for breakfast," said Mr. Waterman. "An extra dish of prunes for the one +who catches the first salmon."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">138</a></span></p> + +<p>This offer does not mean anything to the ordinary person in the city, +but on a trip out into the woods where the grub has to be rationed out, +fruit of any kind is at a premium. It was almost dark when they got +through their supper and were ready for the night. It was quite a cool +night in spite of the hot day they had had. The guides piled on the wood +and it was very comfortable after their hard day's paddling and +portaging, to sit around the fire and talk over the events of the day or +whatever happened to come up. Bob soon sneaked away from the fire and +went over to the smaller fire which the guides had made close to the +little wood hut they had hastily thrown up. It did not take Joe long to +plunge into his story, and for quite a while Bob stayed with the guides +listening to Joe. When Bob returned to the main party he found them +getting ready to seek their blankets. His return was greeted gladly by +Bill and Pud, who remembered the story that Bob had promised to get from +Joe and then relate to them.</p> + +<p>"Well, how did you make out?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"Did Joe tell you the story?" exclaimed Pud eagerly.</p> + +<p>"Yes, he told me the story in his matter-of-fact way. To him his +experience was only an ordinary occurrence that may almost be expected +by any hunter in a hard winter. I think that I had better keep the story +until to-morrow night, as it is getting late," said Bob, looking +questioningly at Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Go ahead, Bob," said Mr. Waterman. "We are going to stay here and fish +to-morrow, so it won't make much difference if we stay up a little later +than usual. I don't think that Joe has ever told us of this experience, +has he?" added Mr. Waterman, turning to Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"No. Joe has told us a lot of very interesting experiences that he has +had, but he never told us of the time he got so hungry that he tried to +eat his moccasins," said Mr. Anderson.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">139</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well," said Bob, "though Joe told me the story in his own very laconic +fashion, I am sure that it was much more interesting than I can make it. +I'll do the best I can, however."</p> + +<p>"All right, then," said Bill, "go ahead."</p> + +<p>"When Joe was a young man he once came hunting far north of this country +in the company of an old Montagnais chief named Howling Wolf. They +started out late in November, expecting to get back about Christmas +time. They went up the Portneuf River, which was frozen over then, and +made good progress. They had very good success from the start. Contrary +to what they had generally experienced, the further north they went the +better was the hunting. They were led on by this unexpected factor to go +much farther north than they had ever been before. They had three dog +teams along and were provisioned for a three months' trip. Their good +fortune lured them on and it was almost Christmas before they awoke to +the fact that they must soon get started home or they might get into +serious trouble because of lack of provisions.</p> + +<p>"Let's see if we can get some deer meat so that we can stay longer," +said Howling Wolf one day. Joe consented and they went out with this +idea in view. They were very successful. They both brought in a deer and +at the end of a week, they had quite a lot of meat on hand. Things thus +went along until shortly after Christmas, as sometimes happens, the game +suddenly became scarce. They could not get a deer or even a rabbit. In +addition, the winter came on in earnest. One heavy fall of snow was +followed by another and they were kept close to their quarters. The +heavy weather continued and they determined to make for the south just +as soon as it became possible to do so.</p> + +<p>"About the tenth of January, they left for the south. They made good +progress, though their provisions became lower and lower. At last they +were on very short rations and it was under these conditions that +Howling Wolf had the misfortune to break his leg. Joe bound up the leg +as<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">140</a></span> best he could, but the injured man made progress all the slower. As +Joe found that the extra burden slowed down the dogs so much in the +heavy snow, he determined to cache one load of pelts, make use of the +extra dogs and hurry on. Food was very low and if they should hit a +week's storm he could easily see that he would have the greatest +difficulty getting out to Escoumains.</p> + +<p>"As bad luck would have it, a regular blizzard came on and for four +days, Joe and Howling Wolf had to lie low in a rude shelter that Joe had +hastily thrown up when overtaken by the blizzard. It was impossible to +keep a fire burning as the snow came down in icy particles that made +wandering from camp a foolhardy undertaking. Howling Wolf on several +occasions begged Joe to leave him there and go on his way. Like the +Indian that he was, he felt that the storm gods were against them and he +had given up.</p> + +<p>"Before they left their improvised shelter, Joe had to sacrifice three +of the dogs to furnish food for the other dogs. Joe also stated that he +made his first hearty meal for several days on some dog steaks that he +had kept for himself and Howling Wolf. At last they got away, but on the +very next night they were attacked by a large band of wolves, and though +they succeeded in driving them off it was only at the expense of almost +their last cartridges and the loss of three more dogs. Joe spoke again +of the heroism of Howling Wolf, who sat up in his sledge and shot at the +wolves, though they threatened to overwhelm him and Joe on more than one +rush that they made. Joe said nothing of himself but one's imagination +can easily picture these two hardy hunters, sheltered only by their +sledges, making a fight for life against a large pack of hungry wolves.</p> + +<p>"When the storm was over and the wolves had been driven off, there were +over a dozen dead wolves lying around. Joe stated that knowing that he +could not get the pelts out, he had been compelled to leave the wolves<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">141</a></span> +unskinned. In fact, the most vivid impression made on Joe by this fight +for his very life seemed to lie in the fact that twelve fine wolf skins +had to be left there. The further loss of the dogs made it necessary for +Joe to cache all the rest of his pelts. He did this very reluctantly, +for he felt that unless he could get back before the winter was over, he +would lose all the fine skins they had gotten by their hard work. Then, +with hardly any grub and only a few cartridges, one dog team and a big +heavy Indian with a broken leg as a load, Joe started off for +Escoumains, at least one hundred and twenty miles away.</p> + +<p>"When Joe told me this, he did so in just as matter-of-fact a way as if +it were the most ordinary occurrence for a man to find himself far to +the north in the depth of winter, practically without grub and without +ammunition. The latter was really practically useless anyway, for the +heavy snow seemed to have sent everything alive into their winter +burrows. Joe could not take time to go hunting anyway, but he felt it +would be useless, for though he kept his eyes alert, he did not cross a +single track. Bad luck seemed to follow their journey out just as good +luck had urged them further and further north.</p> + +<p>"Another heavy storm came on and for three days Joe was compelled to lie +quiet waiting for the weather to break. By this time the grub had +entirely disappeared and only two dogs were left. Though the storm +stopped in the middle of the night, Joe got his two Eskimo huskies out +of their snow beds, hitched himself to the sledge also and started on. +By the end of that day they had covered nearly thirty miles, according +to Joe's reckoning, and both he and the dogs were practically exhausted. +There was no food for man nor beast, so Joe once more had recourse to +the dogs. He had to kill one of his favorite dogs. This was the only +part of the story in which Joe showed any trace of excitement or +sentiment. The killing of that favorite dog was evidently a very hard +task for Joe.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">142</a></span></p> + +<p>"After only four hours' rest, Joe and the only dog left took up their +burden. By this time Howling Wolf was in a regular delirium, caused by +his injured leg and his privations. Joe struggled on all that day and +far into the night. According to his calculations, he traveled nearly +sixteen hours. In his naive way, Joe excused himself for not keeping on +farther by stating that his dog finally gave out completely and he had +to stop. With no food again, Joe took to eating the leather straps that +had bound the grub on the sled. Then the dog suddenly went mad shortly +after midnight and Joe was compelled to shoot him in self-defense. By +hard work, he got a fire and made a good stew of dog's meat. A good meal +of this also had a very stimulating effect on Howling Wolf, who quieted +down and went to sleep. Without waiting for the morning, Joe hurried on, +but the snow was deep and he made but very slow progress.</p> + +<p>"In the intervals between his delirium, the stoic Indian urged Joe to +leave him and hurry on. Joe makes no hero of himself, but he refused to +do this, stating that they would either both reach Escoumains or neither +of them would get there. In this way, Joe struggled on for two days +more, living on the remains of the dog. This at last gave out. Joe now +found himself only twenty miles away from Escoumains and he felt that if +he could only hold out another day, he might get to some place of +safety. Thus, starving, but determinedly dragging his injured friend, +Joe staggered on. That night he eased the pangs of hunger by chewing on +an old pair of moccasins that he found at the bottom of the sled. +Howling Wolf also chewed away and cheered on his friend for, though he +did not feel that Joe should still keep on dragging him along, he felt +that if he would do it that it was his duty to keep up Joe's spirits. +They both slept a few hours that night and long before dawn Joe was +toiling away.</p> + +<p>"At last, tired and exhausted, nature would have her due. Joe became +merely a driveling maniac, urged along by an<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">143</a></span> insane desire to make +progress. At times he would wander round and round, but eventually he +would head on straight again. It was late that night that Joe saw far +ahead a welcome light. This spurred him on and for about half a mile he +almost ran. This spurt soon died down and left him so weak that he could +hardly move along. Once or twice he fell but he kept on and was soon +within hailing distance of the light. He tried to cry out but no sounds +came from his exhausted lips. At last, when at the very end of his +physical resources, he came to the door and knocked He heard a rustle +within, but even before the door was open, he had fallen down in a +faint. When he opened his eyes, he was in the cabin of his good friend +Antoine Gagnon, who was bathing his head and feet with hot water and +gently urging some hot liquid down his throat. Already Howling Wolf was +seated by the fire and telling the good wife, Gagnon, what a brave man +Joe had been and how he had saved his life. When he lifted his head, the +whole family crowded around and praised him for his wonderful endurance. +Joe stated that he had to spend a week in that house before he was +strong enough to walk. Howling Wolf's leg got all right and Joe was soon +as strong as ever.</p> + +<p>"Three weeks after his almost fatal trip, he was off to the north again +with another Indian and a week or more later returned with the pelts +that had been bought almost with his life's blood. 'But,' concluded Joe, +'I would give all the pelts I get in one-two-yessair, three wintaire, if +I not kill my dear dog, Marie, I love so well.'"</p> + +<p>"Joe must have been some hardy youth twenty years ago," said Mr. +Waterman. "I can assure you that everything he told you was true and +probably even worse than he depicted it."</p> + +<p>Pud and Bill were greatly impressed with Joe's story and sat a long time +staring into the fire. Pud, however, soon realized his own troubles, for +he exclaimed,</p> + +<p>"Gee, boys, I'm sleepy. I'm going to turn in."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">144</a></span></p> + +<p>"I guess you had better, boys. You know, late hours are not on the +camper's schedule," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>Ten minutes later, not a sound could have been heard except the distant +calling of a loon or the low roaring of the river as it rushed along its +rocky bed.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">145</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER XI</h2><h3>A RESCUE IN THE RAPIDS</h3> +</div> + +<p>The same thought seemed to awaken every one the next morning. All were +out early but they found Jack making the fire. He stated that they were +going to have some very fine biscuits that morning and so he was up +early. No one thought of him in connection with the extra dish of +prunes. The boys were soon on the water though they did not expect to +get the first salmon.</p> + +<p>"Ye Heavens!" said Pud. "If one of those big salmon got on my line, I +wouldn't know what to do with it anyway. But all the same, I'm going to +have a try."</p> + +<p>"Same here," said Bob. "I really would like to hook one because my +father has told me so much about salmon fishing that I'm anxious to see +if I can play one as he told me how to do it. He has caught salmon not +one hundred miles from here, you know."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it's all very well for them to tell us how to do it," said Bill. +"I'll bet, though, that we make a botch of it when we get one."</p> + +<p>They were soon separated by varying distances. Bob got three trout but +no salmon rose to his fly. Pud was down the stream and as Bob floated +by, he said,</p> + +<p>"I don't believe there are any salmon here anyway. I've got four trout +but nary a salmon."</p> + +<p>As if to rebuke his disbelief in the presence of salmon in that river, a +big fish leaped clear of the water and tore away with Pud's line. In a +moment, Pud was busy. He got so excited when he saw the wonderful fish +make another flying leap that he forgot that he was on a frail<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">146</a></span> canoe +and over he went. Bob hurried to his rescue and Pud was soon in his boat +again. Pud had held on to the rod and when he got in the boat, he +started to reel in but he was due for a rude awakening, as he was nearly +yanked out of the canoe by a terrific rush from the fish.</p> + +<p>"He's still on," yelled Pud.</p> + +<p>"Give him line! Give him line! Now, careful. Reel in," yelled Bob.</p> + +<p>Pud kept at it and for nearly an hour that fish kept him as busy as a +bee. At the end of that time, Pud drew the salmon gently towards the +canoe. Bob reached over to get him in the landing net when off he went +again. It took another good twenty minutes before he was finally landed. +Bob and Pud then paddled for the camp and reached there to find that Mr. +Waterman and Mr. Anderson were already there each with a fine specimen.</p> + +<p>In a little while they all gathered around for breakfast when a big +surprise awaited them. Jack demurely brought on a fine baked salmon. +When this appeared, Mr. Waterman hurried over to the tent, lifted the +covering under which the three salmon he and Mr. Anderson had caught had +been placed, and there were still the three salmon.</p> + +<p>"You old dog!" said Mr. Waterman. "When did you get that fish? I was up +pretty early myself but you must have had it still earlier, for you have +had plenty here to keep you busy since we got up."</p> + +<p>Jack did not answer Mr. Waterman's question. Instead, he merely queried +in his quizzical way.</p> + +<p>"Do I get them prunes?"</p> + +<p>For answer, Mr. Waterman went over to the shelter made for the grub and +came back with a can filled with the succulent prune. Jack took them +with a merry twinkle in his eye.</p> + +<p>"I don't think that I ought to take them," said he.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">147</a></span></p> + +<p>"Sure. Take them. I said that I'd give extra prunes to the man getting +the first salmon and you did the trick," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That's all right, but I don't need them. Let me give them to the first +boy that gets a fish," said Jack.</p> + +<p>"All right," said Mr. Waterman. "Then you'll have to give them to Pud, +for he was the only boy to land one."</p> + +<p>Jack then came over to the table and with grave ceremony, he handed the +prunes to Pud. The latter did not want to take them but finally yielded. +They had a very merry breakfast and Jack at last told them that he had +gotten up about half past three and had hardly got out into the stream +before he had a fine salmon on his line. He had a merry battle with the +gamy fish but finally landed him and, hurrying back, he sneaked into +camp without being seen. After breakfast, the various members of the +party once more set out in quest of salmon, it being agreed that no one +would catch more than two.</p> + +<p>When they reassembled at lunch, every one had at least one salmon. All +were happy as kings, especially the three boys, who had had one of their +ambitions realized in catching these wonderful game fish. They went +exploring in the afternoon. Mr. Waterman took the boys back from the +river into a part of the country that had been burned over. They made +for a rather high ridge merely to get the view, with Mr. Waterman +leading. As he topped the ridge, he was seen to sink suddenly to the +ground and then hurry back to them.</p> + +<p>"Two fine bears up there," said Mr. Waterman in a whisper when he got +back to them.</p> + +<p>"Where? Where?" exclaimed Pud.</p> + +<p>"Just over the ridge. They're eating berries," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Let's run," said Pud. "None of us has even a revolver."</p> + +<p>"That's all right," replied Mr. Anderson. "Bears won't hurt you. Mr. +Waterman came back stealthily so that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">148</a></span> you could have a look at them. If +they scent us we shan't get within a mile of them. So be careful."</p> + +<p>Pud held back but Bob hurried on with Mr. Waterman and Bill was close +behind. They very quietly got to the top of the ridge and both of the +boys had a very good view of the two black bears that were busily +engaged eating the raspberries that grew very luxuriantly there in the +bare spots left by the ravages of the fire. Mr. Waterman had just begun +to explain to them what very timid creatures they were when Pud came up, +and falling over a root crashed down, making a terrific racket. In a +moment the bears were gone. They seemed to vanish. They seemed +instinctively to keep in line with big rocks or trees so that even the +lynx-eyed Mr. Waterman had great trouble in following their course. The +boys did not see them again.</p> + +<p>"You big boob!" said Bill. "What's the matter with you?"</p> + +<p>"I didn't mean to do it, honest to goodness," replied Pud. "But were +there really any bear here or were you stringing me as usual?"</p> + +<p>"Of course there was a bear here," said Bob. "But a big elephant came +along and scared them away. I don't wonder they took to their heels when +they heard the noise you made. You'd make a fine Indian scout. You had +better walk behind Jean and note how noiselessly he moves along."</p> + +<p>"I'm sorry," said Pud.</p> + +<p>The party then turned away after looking over the country from their +high point of vantage. They could see far and wide and for miles the +great forest fire had left only blackened stumps and dead trees. They +got back to camp in time for supper. Joe had had time to get out and as +he had returned with five partridges, they had another great supper.</p> + +<p>"They told me when I wanted to come up here," said Bob, "that if I +wanted to live on bacon, prunes, hard dough, and beans all summer that +this was the place to come."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">149</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes, that is what they generally expect to get on such trips as this, +but with just a little luck and a good cook like Jack, the least thing +to be objected to is the 'eats,'" said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"I should think so," replied Bob. "I don't know that I have ever enjoyed +my meals so much as up here."</p> + +<p>"The same here," piped in Pud. "I think we get almost too good grub, +that is as far as I am concerned, for I want to reduce and I have a +swell chance to do that with partridge and trout, one night, salmon for +breakfast, and salmon, trout, and duck for supper."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Mr. Waterman. "We've been unusually lucky this summer."</p> + +<p>After supper, they went for a paddle up the stream, going up for nearly +three miles until they came to another rapid. Bob and Bill were in one +canoe and Pud and Mr. Anderson in another. They went up the rapid as far +as they could paddle and then swung around and came racing back. When +they came to the quiet part of the river again, Bob said,</p> + +<p>"That's great fun. I bet we have some excitement to-morrow when we go +down the river to a point opposite Lac Parent."</p> + +<p>"I guess we'll enjoy it all right. I pity Pud if he gets in the drink," +said Bill.</p> + +<p>The next morning, the guides and their two leaders took the greatest +precautions in binding up the duffle bags and the grub. Everything was +folded so that even though they might be capsized, there would be little +risk of their kits and grub.</p> + +<p>"You are making preparations as if you expect trouble," said Bob to Mr. +Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Not especially," was the reply. "It is always best to be ready for +anything in fast water. A broken paddle, just a mistake in judgment, may +spell disaster. However, I think you'll enjoy it this morning. The river +has some fast<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">150</a></span> water all right but it is not very deep and though we may +get wet, there will not be much real danger."</p> + +<p>"How are we going to pair off?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Jack will take Pud. Joe will pair with Bill, you will come with me and +Jean and Mr. Anderson will make up the party."</p> + +<p>They were soon off, with Mr. Waterman and Bob leading. They had quite a +stretch of slow water first and the boys were given their directions +then.</p> + +<p>"The main thing about getting through fast water is not to lose your +nerve," said Mr. Waterman. "Next you must have confidence in your +steersman and do what he tells you just as soon as he tells you."</p> + +<p>"That's what I'm here for," said Bob, in his position up in the bow.</p> + +<p>They soon swung into the rapids and it was exhilarating fun at first. +Then Bob's heart came up into his throat for a minute as he looked ahead +and could see only a smother of foam. Mr. Waterman steered straight for +what seemed the worst part of it. In another moment they were in it and +Bob thought that the canoe would never rise to the wall of water ahead. +But it did. In a second, they were shooting down with Bob paddling for +dear life trying as best he could to follow the calm directions of Mr. +Waterman. The very speedy part of the descent lasted only a few minutes, +but it was very exciting. Then they swung once more into the calm waters +of the broad reaches of the river.</p> + +<p>"Did we cover those two miles that took us over an hour to do the other +day when we were portaging up?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"That we did," said Mr. Waterman. "We did it very well. After a few +trips of this kind, you will qualify as an expert canoeist."</p> + +<p>"That's very kind of you to say so," replied Bob. "I know though that if +I had hit that water with Pud or Bill that we would have been swimming +long before now."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">151</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, it does help to have an old stager like me in the back end of the +canoe," said Mr. Waterman with quiet satisfaction. "To tell the truth, +that is really an easy stretch of water. If you ever go through some of +the rapids on the Shipshaw River or some of the larger rivers of this +country, you will know what fast water really means. I went down the +Shipshaw three years ago with Pierre and there were times when the +slightest mistake would have meant death almost surely."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to try that sometime," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"You may think so, but really it is a foolhardy proposition unless you +have very clever guides with you," replied Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"That's some sport," said Bill, as his canoe came abreast of theirs.</p> + +<p>"I had my troubles," said Jack. "This young baby elephant up in the bow +is too heavy and makes the canoe very hard to steer."</p> + +<p>"That's right," said Mr. Waterman. "Suppose, before we reach the next +rapids, that you get out a moment, shift some of the load up into the +bow and have Pud sit back of the first thwart. That will balance the +canoe better."</p> + +<p>"That's a good idea," said Jack. "I'll do it."</p> + +<p>"Why so quiet?" asked Bob of Pud as he looked across.</p> + +<p>"Now don't kid me," said Pud. "I really thought three or four times that +I'd be swimming down those rapids a mile a minute, but Jack brought me +through all right. I'll give him all the credit."</p> + +<p>"Don't you believe it," said Jack. "He did fine. He obeyed orders, but +his weight in the bow made it very hard and I wouldn't want to try it +over again."</p> + +<p>A little later, Pud and Jack went ashore and fixed the cargo so that the +canoe would not be down at the bow. Then they were off again. Once more +they shot down through foam and spray, just missing rocks by a fraction<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">152</a></span> +of an inch. It proved the greatest sport that the boys had ever tried. +They grew enthusiastic.</p> + +<p>"Now, it's all right to like fast water," said Jack, "but don't let that +make you careless. You can never afford to be careless even in rather +easy water. If you do, you'll come a cropper sure."</p> + +<p>They paddled on and went down three or four more easy rapids. By this +time the boys commenced to think that they knew quite a little about how +to take fast water. As they went along, Mr. Waterman warned them that +they were now coming to a rather hard place but that it was very short. +In another moment they were in it. Bob and his teacher went through like +a breeze. Under the master hand of Mr. Waterman, the speedy descent of +the waters was made without dipping a drop into the canoe. As they came +down into the smooth reach at the foot of the rapids, Mr. Waterman +turned the canoe around, saying,</p> + +<p>"Let's watch the others come down this last bit. It certainly looks +exciting but while you're in it you have little time to think of the +exciting features."</p> + +<p>Just then Mr. Anderson and Jean came into view. They seemed poised +almost on the brink of a cascade but the canoe came rushing down like a +bird. At times, it seemed buried in the spray but it emerged triumphant +at the foot. They also turned around to watch the others. Pud and Jack +were next. Jack made it seem so easy that the boys were amazed at the +deftness with which he steered the boat. At one spot, by a peculiar +wrist motion known only to the initiated, he made the boat move bodily +over to the right just in time to miss a big rock that seemed sure to be +their Waterloo. It now remained only for Joe and Bill to come safely +through. Under the influence of the eddies, Mr. Waterman and Bob had +floated up almost to the very foot of the rapids. This was the big +factor in what followed.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">153</a></span></p> + +<p>Jack and Bill hove in sight and down they rushed. Just before they +struck the bad part of the rapids, Bill was seen to hold up his paddle +broken short off at the handle. He turned around to snatch up the extra +paddle but in doing so he was too hasty and in another moment, the canoe +was caught by a swell and overturned. Anxiously the party at the foot of +the rapids watched for the heads of Joe and Bill. Joe came up and was +seen to make frantic efforts to get back to the canoe, but he was swept +on. Bill did not appear. Bob was out of his canoe and out on the bank +before any one even thought of stopping him. In another moment, he was +running up the trail that ran alongside the river. A minute later he was +out on the rocks above where the overturned canoe was now seen to be +jammed between the rocks. A moment later, he plunged into the foaming +rapids and fortunately drifted down right on the canoe. When he came +there he had the greatest difficulty in not being swept over the canoe. +Frantically he clung to the canoe, now finding himself helpless to save +Bill, who was partly pinned under the canoe and was rapidly drowning +right before his eyes.</p> + +<p>Bills eyes were turning glassy, Bob thought, as he made a final effort +to get the canoe free. He succeeded in doing this, but not as he +expected, for his weight and the weight of the water as it swept along +crumpled up the canoe and suddenly he found himself rushing down the +rapids just like a wisp of straw on a miniature stream such as little +boys sometimes make in the gutters. All at once he felt Bill's body bump +him and instinctively he grabbed it and though bruised in a hundred +places, he finally shot out at the foot of the rapids still clutching +Bill's limp form. Bob was himself practically unconscious, but struggled +to keep himself and Bill afloat as if under some superpower.</p> + +<p>A moment later, the others were there and they soon had Bob and Bill out +on the bank. Bill was far gone, as he not only had been half drowned +when pinned under the canoe but he had knocked his head against the +rocks<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">154</a></span> in the latter part of his descent. First aid was given to him +first. He was stretched out over a log and then his arms were worked to +get the air back into his lungs. In about five minutes, Bill opened his +eyes and with a big sigh closed them again. A few minutes later he was +sitting up, still in rather a dazed condition, but fast recovering. Bob +had received quite a cut on his head, but he had not actually lost +consciousness and he fast recuperated. He was up and about in a little +while, apparently none the worse for his strenuous exertions.</p> + +<p>"That was a close call," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I should think so," said Pud. "When I saw Bob plunge into those rapids, +I thought he was a fool, for I could not see how he could do anything."</p> + +<p>"He saved my life all right," said Bill. "I was pinned under that canoe +and was nearly drowned when Bob got there. I didn't get get this bump on +the head until afterwards. I saw Bob come, but I was so nearly all in +that I could only struggle faintly to get a breath of air now and then. +When the canoe suddenly broke in two, I shot down and I must have hit a +rock for I knew nothing more until I woke up on the bank."</p> + +<p>"You deserve a great deal of credit, Bob," said Mr. Anderson, "not only +for your heroism but for the quick presence of mind you showed in doing +the only thing that had a chance of saving Bill's life."</p> + +<p>"You beat me to it all right," said Mr. Waterman. "The way you got out +of that canoe and up that trail would have made me look like a snail so +I stayed at the foot hoping to be of use there. I thought that Bill +might appear any moment at the foot of the rapids as I could not see +that he was pinned down by the canoe."</p> + +<p>"I'm certainly glad you were there," said Bob, "for I would never have +gotten Bill ashore by myself. I certainly was all in. I was not +unconscious but I had big black spots before my eyes and I guess I was +just about ready to pass out."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">155</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, it's all over and we're very lucky," said Mr. Waterman. "We'll +camp right here for the night and go on our way to-morrow morning. We +can get back to camp all right even if a little later than we had +planned."</p> + +<p>In the meantime, Joe had come down the rapids unhurt and crawled into +Jean's boat as if nothing out of the ordinary had occurred. While the +others were bringing Bob and Bill back to the world, he and Jean set out +after the broken canoe and captured it. Owing to the great care with +which their duffle bags had been made up that morning, nothing was +really injured. Bill and Bob did not have much appetite for supper that +evening as both were suffering more from shock than they recognized. In +the morning, Mr. Waterman let them sleep until the last call for +breakfast. After a swim, they were both just about as good as ever.</p> + +<p>"How are we going to get everything into the canoes this morning?" asked +Pud.</p> + +<p>"What's that?" asked Mr. Waterman in turn.</p> + +<p>"We had the canoes pretty well filled yesterday," said Pud. "With one +less canoe, we'll have to shift things around, won't we?"</p> + +<p>"Who said that we had one less canoe?" asked Mr. Waterman quietly. Pud +looked to the bank of the stream and sure enough, there were four canoes +there.</p> + +<p>"Where did we get the extra canoe?" asked Pud puzzled.</p> + +<p>"We didn't get it any place," replied Mr. Anderson. "Joe and Jean were +up real early this morning and they fixed the one that seemed such a +wreck last evening."</p> + +<p>Pud went over to the canoes and sure enough, he saw where the canoe had +been patched up.</p> + +<p>"This isn't a very good job," said Mr. Waterman. "When we get back to +camp, they will take out those broken ribs and replace them entirely +instead of splicing them up as they have done. It will do all right +until we get home but when Joe really gets through with that canoe, +there won't be a sign of that smash-up."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">156</a></span></p> + +<p>"He's certainly clever," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Yes, he is in one sense, though in another he is just using the +knowledge that he has acquired in years in the woods," said Mr. +Anderson.</p> + +<p>"Pierre, Jean, Joe or Jack can all build a very good canoe as they have +often done so," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Can Pierre make a birch bark canoe just like the Indians used to have?" +asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Nothing easier," replied Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"I'll get him to make me one ofter camp is over and send it down to me +in Virginia," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"He'll be very glad to do it," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>After a good breakfast, they were on their way. It was a credit to the +real courage of Bob and Bill that though they had to go down three +rapids before they came to the ford near Lac Parent, that neither of +them showed any sign of the white feather. Both boys seemed to enjoy the +exciting sport just as much as before the almost fatal accident of the +previous day. On arrival at the ford, they found Pierre there.</p> + +<p>Two hours later, they were back at their home camp and settled in their +shelter tents. That night around the camp fire they went over the events +of the week and concluded that they had had more fun and excitement +crowded into that week than they had had in any other similar space of +time during their lives. They all went to bed glad to-morrow was the +Sabbath and that they could just laze around and enjoy the comparative +comforts of their home camp.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">157</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER XII</h2><h3>PIERRE'S BIG SALMON</h3> +</div> + +<p>The next night, Bob visited the guides' tent after supper and he did not +return to the others until nearly ten o'clock.</p> + +<p>"What did you find so interesting up there with the guides?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"Nothing much," replied Bob. "Pierre was telling me how he nearly lost +his life landing a big salmon on the Shipshaw River one summer."</p> + +<p>"Let's hear the story," demanded Pud.</p> + +<p>"It's too late to-night but I'll tell it to you to-morrow night if you +want me to," replied Bob.</p> + +<p>The next evening it was raining, so a fire had been built outside of +Bob's shelter tent. The boys were leaning back inside, all the more +comfortable because of the dreary conditions outside. In spite of the +rain, the birch logs burned brightly though accompanied by hissing, as +big drops of rain came down now and then from the pines overhead.</p> + +<p>"This is a good night to do murder or some other light occupation," said +Pud to the others.</p> + +<p>"Why not tell us that fish story of Pierre's now?" queried Bill.</p> + +<p>"That's a good idea," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"All right," answered Bob, "but I really wish I could give you the story +just as Pierre told it to me, with the sidelights of Indian philosophy +and the natural expressions of wood lore that made his story much more +piquant and picturesque than mine could ever be. Anyway, I'll do the +best I can.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">158</a></span></p> + +<p>"It seems that one summer he was sent out by one of the big lumber +companies to scout for timber. He was told to get another Indian or two +and go up the Shipshaw River and report the growth of timber near the +water, whether he thought it could be rafted down or not, and any other +information that would be valuable for the lumber companies. He took +along two nephews of his, named Jean and Jacques, and an old Indian, +named Montagnais because he was reputed to be the head chief of the +tribe of that name to which all the Indians of that part of the country +belonged. The old Indian told Pierre before he started that there was +plenty of big timber in the Shipshaw Valley but that he would find it +practically impossible to raft it down. Pierre told the lumber company +this but they desired him to go anyway, stating that they wished to find +out definitely about the matter that summer.</p> + +<p>"They started off and took the steamer to Chicoutimi at the head of the +Saguenay River. They there got into their canoes and were soon going up +the Shipshaw. They found this river one of great volume, and they had +many long portages to make and much fast water to pole up. It took them +over three weeks of hard paddling and portaging to get near its source. +At last they got as far up as the valley as Pierre thought was +necessary. It was Pierre's idea that on the way down, they would stop +off every few miles and go back into the country to look over the woods +This they did, and, of course, this made their progress down rather +slow.</p> + +<p>"One day they came on a real Indian encampment at the foot of the +rapids, and as it was near evening they determined to stop and enjoy the +company of their brother tribesmen for the night. They found the Indians +very glad to see them. They told them that they had wintered far to the +north of the Great Divide and that they planned to get down to the St. +Lawrence and in touch with white people and civilization once more. +Later in the evening, they learned that the little party had stayed at +that one<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">159</a></span> place for three full days, because the chief was determined to +catch a big salmon that had tantalized him during that time. This salmon +had been seen by all of them, as he lived in a big pool at the head of +some rapids only a short distance down the river. It was then too dark +to show this big fish to Pierre and his companions, but early the next +morning, Pierre was down at the pool. He looked over a big rock into the +pool, that was formed by a back eddy, and, sure enough, there was an +especially large salmon swimming about in the quiet water. In another +moment, Pierre had out his fishing tackle, but to no avail. The big +salmon would have nothing to do with anything Pierre offered him. He +tried one fly after another, but without effect. It seemed as if the big +salmon despised his efforts. As if in defiance, every now and then the +fish would swoop up to the surface and jump two or three feet out of the +water.</p> + +<p>"Pierre grew stubborn. All that day, he stayed by the pool, either he +himself fishing or watching the old chief try every while to entice the +giant salmon to take that hook. At night they all returned to camp and +told stories of phantom fish that could not be caught except by black +magic. They came to the conclusion finally that the big fish must be one +of that kind, with something uncanny about him, and they decided that it +would be bad medicine to try to catch him. Pierre was the only one that +dissented from this.</p> + +<p>"He got up even before dawn the next morning and was early down at the +pool. He procured a little pitch and some black flies and stuck them +together in such a way that, when they were thrown on the water, they +looked just like a half dozen flies floating down the stream. He got out +his smallest leader and fastened a hook among the flies. When he had +finished, it looked very lifelike and Pierre was proud of his handiwork. +Carefully approaching the stream without making any noise or permitting +any shadow to fall on the water, he threw his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">160</a></span> semi-artificial fly far +out on the stream, so that the back eddy would ultimately bring it into +the pool. Sure enough, the little black spot on the water whirled around +and finally floated calmly and slowly around the pool. Twice it made the +circuit and Pierre had just about decided that he was doomed to +disappointment again, when he saw a streak fly into the air and his reel +fairly sang as it spun around. Unfortunately something jammed and the +rod was jerked out of his hands. Pierre saw it disappear over the edge +of the rock, but he was after it and just caught the end of the rod as +it was being dragged under. Pierre held on like grim death. In another +minute he found himself out in the river and a moment later he was in +the powerful current at the head of the rapids. Even yet he had time to +get to shore but, with his usual obstinacy, he held on. A minute later +he was going down the rapids, doing his best to keep his head above +water, but with the line wound tightly around his arm. It was now a +fight for life, and he had no time to think of the fish. Down he went, +carried hither and thither by the powerful currents. He knew that each +moment might be his last but he struggled on. Once he believed he heard +a shout and thought he caught a glimpse of a canoe shooting after him, +but the noise of the water and his fearful struggle to keep from being +dashed upon the rocks that lined the river made this appear more like a +dream than a reality.</p> + +<p>"He was on the point of exhaustion when he swung around a bend of the +river and found himself in quiet water. In one sense he was saved, for +he had come through the rapids safely, but in another he was just at the +beginning of his struggle for he was practically exhausted and at least +a half mile from shore. He lay back on the water and closed his eyes, +feeling that he could never reach land. Just then he heard a call, and +his two nephews swung around the point and made for him. They pulled him +into their canoe and paddled for the shore. When they reached there, +they started to carry Pierre up on the beach,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">161</a></span> but found the line tied +around his arm. They disentangled this to find that the pole was still +at the one end of the line. They then started to reel in and in a moment +they felt a weight pulling on the line. They pulled warily, and a minute +later the big salmon came into view. Pierre had caught him after all. +Whether he was drowned by being pulled down the rapids, whether he had +hit a rock when entangled in the line, or for whatever reason, the fact +remained that the line had held and that the big fish was brought safely +ashore.</p> + +<p>"Jean proposed that they should camp there that day to celebrate the +occasion. Pierre was secretly very glad to do so, for he really was all +in, not only because of his great exertion in coming down the rapids, +but also because of the many bruises he had received from the rocks. He +asked his nephews how they had come along so luckily to his rescue. They +replied that they were just on their way to get a last look at the big +fish when they saw him plunge over the rock by the side of the pool and +then go down the rapids. He was some quarter mile ahead of them and they +could not get near him in the rapids. They kept on going, however, +although they were afraid that he would hit his head on some sharp rock +and be drowned.</p> + +<p>"One of the nephews then went up the river by the portage trail, and in +another hour the small tribe and the old Montagnais chief were gathered +around Pierre, hearing of his remarkable escape from death in the rapids +and his more remarkable catch of the giant salmon. They roasted the fish +for dinner and had a great feast in honor of the occasion. Pierre stated +that this was the biggest salmon he had ever seen and that it was just +luck that he had caught it. He gave himself some credit for the bait +that had tempted the fish, but otherwise he felt that it was only luck +that had brought the fish down through the rapids with him."</p> + +<p>Bob stopped here and looked out at the rain which was still coming down +steadily.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">162</a></span></p> + +<p>"Pierre has had some adventures in his life," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"He told me another story about that trip up the Shipshaw, and though I +tried to explain it to him, he could not see it," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"What was that?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"According to Pierre the Good Spirit showed that he was displeased at +him for catching the fish. As they were going down a wide reach of the +river two days later they saw a big pearshaped black object rise into +view over the hilltops. It sailed on over them and just as it was above +them, it dropped a rock which went right through Pierre's canoe. If the +other canoe had not been near, they would not have had time to save +anything. As it was, they saved all their duffle, and, going ashore, +they soon had the canoe in shape again. Pierre felt that the Great +Spirit had thus reminded him of his sacrilege in killing the big spirit +fish. I tried to tell Pierre that he had seen a big balloon, and I +called to mind that in that very year a big balloon had floated far into +the wilderness. Pierre would have no such explanation. To him, the big +object was a direct visitation of the Great Spirit, It completely +terrorized, him and his mates, and he said that he would always remember +it."</p> + +<p>Here Bob paused and Pud took occasion to ask:</p> + +<p>"Did Pierre get back all right after his trip?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes; though he had one more experience that was not very pleasant," +said Bob.</p> + +<p>"What was that?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"As I have already mentioned, they got out of their canoes and went +inland every few miles to scout around and see what timber was in the +little valleys leading off the main valley of the Shipshaw. On one of +these occasions, Pierre and the old Indian went off on one side of the +river, and the two others on the opposite side. They had only one rifle +between them, for they were not out hunting<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">163</a></span> and had taken it along +merely from habit. Pierre had the gun, while the old Indian went ahead +with his easy stride. Though over sixty years of age, he was noted as +one of the best walkers and sturdiest paddlers in the country. He led +the way and Pierre came after, thinking hard about the displeasure of +the Great Spirit as shown by the sinking of his canoe. They broke +through a very narrow ravine and came upon a she-bear with three cubs. +The sight of the Indians angered the bear and she made a rush for them.</p> + +<p>"Pierre was not able to fire for a moment as Montagnais was right in his +path. At Pierre's yell, the old Indian stepped back and the gun belched +forth almost in the bear's face. The ball did not take effect and did +nothing except to add fury to the mad rush of the bear. She swept Pierre +aside ripping his shoulder with her claws, and caught Montagnais fairly +in the chest. The latter went down without a cry. Fortunately, Pierre's +shoulder was not very badly hurt and he had not dropped his gun. He +slipped another cartridge into the rifle and gave the bear her quietus +by hitting her right behind the shoulder and striking her heart. Pierre +then looked at his old Indian friend and saw that he had received a very +bad wound. Several ribs were evidently broken, while the chest bone +seemed to be caved in. Pierre hastened to a nearby brook and got some +water in a hastily improvised birch bucket. The water brought Montagnais +to his senses, but a broken ankle made it impossible for him to move. He +was evidently in great pain.</p> + +<p>"In the excitement, Pierre had done nothing for himself and did not do +so until he finally commenced to feel giddy and came near fainting. He +then tore off his shirt and found that his weakness was due to loss of +blood. He bound up his arm and sat down to rest and to think what to do. +He tried to carry the old Indian, but soon gave that up, both because he +was too weakened to do so and because the great pain caused by moving +his old<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">164</a></span> friend made the latter faint. There was nothing to do except to +stay with his friend and wait for Jean and Jacques to hunt them up, or +else to get to the river and bring them back. He thought that the latter +would be the better plan, so he made Montagnais as comfortable as he +could, propping him up against the old bear and giving him the rifle as +defense. The cubs by this time had gotten over their scare and they came +back to their mother and smelled around her with little whines and moans +that were almost childlike. He left Montagnais leaning against the old +bear with a cub on each side of him. They were quite little and as +harmless as kittens.</p> + +<p>"Pierre found that he must have lost a lot of blood for he had some +difficulty in getting back to the river. At last he reached there, and +in due course of time Jean and Jacques came paddling across the river, +singing a low Indian love song, happy as any children of the forest +should be when in their native haunt on a fine summer's day. They were +all attention when they saw Pierre and were ready to start at once even +without their suppers. This Pierre did not let them do as he felt that +he himself would not be able to get back to his old friend without some +nourishment. The two young Indians hurried things along and Pierre felt +much better by the time supper was over. They then started off and, +though by this time night had fallen, Pierre led them straight to the +gully and found old Montagnais quietly sleeping with the three cubs +lying around him. They built a fire and examined the injuries of the old +man. He was now quite conscious and he told Pierre and the others just +how badly he was hurt and what they would have to do to get him out.</p> + +<p>"Under his directions, they built a leafy litter and as soon as dawn +showed the way, they carried him back to the river. They felt that it +would be best to rest there for a few days. Jean and Jacques made a trip +back to the gully<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">165</a></span> and returned with the bear's skin, as much bear meat +as they could handle, and the three cubs following them like puppies. By +the end of their week's stay, the old Indian was able to sit up and he +said that he would be able to do his share if they got him into the +canoe. Pierre stayed three days more and then set out. It required +skillful paddling for him to make some of the rapids but finally they +emerged once more upon the bosom of the wide Saguenay. In due time, +Pierre got back to Escoumains and made his report about the lumber."</p> + +<p>"Now, I know why Pierre was not very anxious to go up the Shipshaw with +me two years ago," said Mr. Waterman. "He told me that he had been up +the river but he did not want to go again."</p> + +<p>"He was no doubt thinking of the balloon," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Do you think it was a balloon?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"It undoubtedly was," said Mr. Waterman. "The very year that Pierre went +up the Shipshaw, they held a long distance balloon race starting away +over in the United States. One of the balloons was carried away to the +east of the Saguenay and the two pilots did not get back to civilization +for over two weeks. They had a very hard time for they had to tramp out. +The remains of the big balloon are up there in the wilderness and have +probably more than once aroused the astonishment and amazement of +wandering Indians."</p> + +<p>"Maybe no one has found them," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"That's quite probable, for you know that we have been up here for quite +some time, and we haven't seen anything of them," said Mr. Waterman.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">166</a></span></p> + +<p>The rain still came down but, sheltered as they were, they rather +enjoyed it. They talked for some time and then dispersed to their +various tents.</p> + +<p>Bob and Bill were together. Just before turning in, Bob put two big logs +on the fire and they lay down in their blankets watching the fitful +flames that darted feebly up into the rain.</p> + +<p>"We're lucky to-night that we're not out on a trip," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"How so?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Well," replied Bill, "if we were on a trip we should not have this +shelter tent along and we should stand a good chance to get a soaking."</p> + +<p>"I shouldn't mind that much," said Bob. "But don't you remember that +last trip? We had a rainy night then and we did not get very wet. Our +sleeping bags kept us just as dry as punk all night, though I could hear +the rain beating down like sin on my head."</p> + +<p>"That's true," said Bill. "These sleeping bags are great stuff. All the +same, I'm glad I'm here to-night."</p> + +<p>"Are you going to keep the fire going to-night?" asked Bob sleepily.</p> + +<p>"Yes, if I happen to wake up," said Bill. "I'm nearest the fire and I'll +just throw on a log if I can reach one without getting out of my bag."</p> + +<p>"I've seen to that," said Bob. "You can reach these logs easily enough. +Don't bother to do it though unless you wake. Needn't keep it on your +mind."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">167</a></span></p> + +<p>"Don't worry. I'm as sleepy as the dickens now, so I shall probably not +bat an eyelid until morning."</p> + +<p>"Good-night," said Bob as he rolled over.</p> + +<p>"Pleasant dreams," said Bill in answer.</p> + +<p>Ten minutes later the only sign of life about that part of the woods was +the fire which blazed up now and then, only to be put down when a breeze +knocked a lot of big drops from the trees.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div style='margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em;'> +<a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">168</a></span> +<h2>CHAPTER XIII</h2><h3>THE PLATINUM MINE</h3> +</div> + +<p>Because of the experience that Bob and Bill had had, Mr. Waterman +thought it best to stick around Lac Parent and take it easy for a few +days. This they did. They found the trout fishing very good and +concluded that after all there was nothing like fly fishing for the +speckled beauties. Fishing for salmon was a change but they all felt +that if they were to fish for a summer they would much prefer the +smaller fish. There seemed to be no lessening of the supply. On +Wednesday they all went into Escoumains. They went by the trail, +carrying their canoes through the first two lakes so that they had only +about six or seven miles of walking. They did this because they made the +trip more for the sake of a change than because they had to go to the +village for supplies. Sandy MacPherson still talked of the German spy.</p> + +<p>"I have to admire both his nerve and his cleverness," said Sandy.</p> + +<p>"To come here for that purpose and to do so for several years simply +proves the excellence of the German spy system, considered by far the +greatest and most far-reaching of any nation's in the world," said Mr. +Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Sure," said Sandy, "that's the point. Field has been here for the last +five years so when he came in early this<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">169</a></span> spring we thought nothing of +it. The way he got me—me, the representative of the law, to help him in +with those wireless instruments four years ago was the height of +audacity. How did he know that I knew nothing about wireless?"</p> + +<p>"He had probably talked to you about it," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"Well, I bear him no ill-will," concluded Sandy, "especially as the +German submarines did not get a single troop ship that left either +Halifax or Quebec."</p> + +<p>"Did those revenue officers question you about us?" asked Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I should think they did," replied Sandy. "I got mad at last and asked +them if they suspected me of being disloyal. That shut them up. I guess +the thing is over for good."</p> + +<p>They all went back to the camp via the short route with the exception of +Mr. Waterman, who went back via the road with a load of provisions. As +he left, he stated that he would camp at the ford that night and would +expect them all over there very early in the morning to help him with +the stuff. The party separated and the next morning even before +daybreak, they all left the home camp and headed for the ford. The fact +that the boys were quite willing to go along and would really have felt +slighted had they been left behind showed how much they had developed +since coming up to the camp. They not only thought nothing of getting up +before daybreak and going off over two lakes but they knew that when +they got there, they would merely load themselves down with grub and +come back. What would have seemed to them a big day's<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">170</a></span> work only a few +weeks before, they were now eager to do before breakfast.</p> + +<p>Such is the way of the wilderness. Men get to see that every one must do +his share and a little discomfort is scoffed at. The boys enjoyed the +early morning paddle through the two lakes, while the portaging of the +canoes was by this time mere child's play to them. They really thought +nothing about it and took their turn when traveling light just as a +matter of course. The improvement in Pud was the most noticeable. He had +lost weight and was quicker on his feet and handled himself much better. +They arrived at the ford to find Mr. Waterman busy getting everything +ready to move out. He had things in good shape and in ten minutes they +were on the back trail. There were so many of them that the weight +assigned each was comparatively light and they walked away at a rapid +pace. Before seven o'clock, they were back on Lac Parent and with +appetites that would have been the delight of an epicure.</p> + +<p>Jack was the only one that had remained behind and as soon as they +disembarked, he called them. They all came running. He had salmon +steaks, hot biscuits, porridge with milk and apricots. They certainly +enjoyed the meal, went fishing as usual. Coming back about eleven +o'clock, they went in for a swim and got a lot of enjoyment out of this. +In spite of the northern clime in which they were, the shallowness of +the lakes permitted the water to get pretty well heated by the hot July +and August sun, and swimming was a real pleasure. It was only now and +then when they struck a lake fed mainly by springs that they found the +water too cold for swimming.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">171</a></span></p> + +<p>The next day, Pud suggested that they should go over to the cabin in the +gulch, called by all the German spy's hut, and explore.</p> + +<p>"That's a good suggestion," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"We can easily do it in a day," said Pud.</p> + +<p>"Possibly not," said Mr. Waterman. "We'll take sufficient grub for a +week for we do not know just where our search may lead us. We may come +out on the Portneuf River, fifty or sixty miles away."</p> + +<p>"I didn't think of that," said Pud.</p> + +<p>They were soon ready. Mr. Waterman and Pierre brought along their guns. +The party was made up of the three boys, the two leaders just mentioned +and Mr. Anderson. They were soon over in to the second lake. There they +stopped to fish, except Mr. Waterman, who went off to one end of the +lake as he thought that he was pretty sure to bag a duck or two there. +He was right, as his gun was heard occasionally during the next two +hours. The fishing was fine and when Mr. Waterman returned with six fine +young ducks, the boys knew that they were going to have a big supper +again. They had lunch and then went on to the cabin. They determined to +stay there all night and just explore the gulch.</p> + +<p>"I have often been up on the sides of this gulch but I have never been +down here to see what was here," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>Behind the cabin they found an excellent spring with a little stream +leading away from it.</p> + +<p>"I guess we'll make no mistake if we take this spring for a starting +point to-morrow. This stream will surely<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">172</a></span> lead us out of the gulch, as +it must have an outlet," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"There is sure to be an outlet because there is no lake here," said Bob.</p> + +<p>The stream led them further down the gulch and they found themselves +going down even further. When they had reached a point about a half mile +from the cabin, they found that the path they had been following stopped +and turned up the hill. This was not the path they had previously noted +as leading to the top of the mountain.</p> + +<p>"Let's follow this path," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"All right," said Pud.</p> + +<p>They turned off and they had not gone far before they came to what +seemed like a mine. The boys were very excited as it seemed to them that +they had discovered the reason why Field and his friends had made their +summer home in this gulch rather than in some other that would have been +just as suitable from the wireless standpoint.</p> + +<p>"This looks like a mine to me," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"It certainly does look that way," replied Bill.</p> + +<p>"He has a lot of quartz over here," said Bob as he went over to a little +pile that had been made to one side.</p> + +<p>"It looks as if this were a recent discovery," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"It certainly does," said Pud.</p> + +<p>They examined the quartz but it did not look like anything they had ever +seen.</p> + +<p>"Let's take some of it back with us," said Bob. "Mr. Waterman is quite +an expert on metals, rocks, etc., and he will probably know what it +is."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">173</a></span></p> + +<p>"That's a good idea," said Bill. "He told us the first time we climbed +the mountain to the west of this gulch that it looked as if there should +be some kind of minerals down here. From above, this gulch certainly +looks like many a mining camp site in Colorado."</p> + +<p>"I remember his saying that," said Pud.</p> + +<p>The boys hurried back to the cabin and they had hard time restraining +their impatience until Mr. Waterman returned. Bob handed him the quartz +without any comment. Mr. Waterman took it and after a short examination, +he said,</p> + +<p>"Where did you find this, boys?"</p> + +<p>"We found it off the little stream," said Bob. "Evidently Field has +recently discovered a mine of some sort and he has just started to work +it, for not very much work has been done yet."</p> + +<p>"You have made a valuable discovery," said Mr. Waterman. "If I am not +mistaken, this quartz has streaks of platinum and you know, platinum is +more valuable than gold."</p> + +<p>"What!" yelled Pud. "We've discovered a mine that is better than a gold +mine."</p> + +<p>"Now don't get excited," said Mr. Waterman. "It is most probable that +Field has had this place regularly staked out and claimed by some friend +over here."</p> + +<p>"How can we find out?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"We'll have to look it up at Tadousac, where the records are kept," said +Mr. Waterman. "Lead me to your platinum mine," concluded he.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">174</a></span></p> + +<p>They all went over to the hole in the ground and Mr. Waterman looked +over the quartz that had been taken out. "I have no doubt that this is +platinum," said he at last. "I may be mistaken, but I hardly think so."</p> + +<p>"Let's hustle back and get out of Tadousac right away and put in a +claim," said Bill.</p> + +<p>"Now, don't hurry. It will keep, no doubt," said Mr. Waterman. "In any +case, it will not be necessary for all of us to go to Tadousac. I would +suggest that Mr. Anderson and Bill take the back trail and get out to +Tadousac in due time and put in a claim for the mine in the name of Pud, +Bill and Bob."</p> + +<p>"Not on your life," said Bob. "You and Mr. Anderson are in on this as we +would never have come had it not been for you. In addition, you would +have been sure to discover the mine yourself before the afternoon is +over."</p> + +<p>Bob spoke with such sincerity and he was backed up by the two other boys +so earnestly that at last Mr. Anderson and Mr. Waterman gave in and +consented to be given a share in the mine.</p> + +<p>"Now don't go building any great castles in the air," said Mr. Anderson. +"We may be mistaken and this quartz practically worthless."</p> + +<p>"I'll wager that that German knew what he was doing," said Bob. "Mr. +Waterman thought that he was from the west by the way he knew the woods +and woodcraft and I bet he did not dig that big hole himself without +feeling that he had something worth while."</p> + +<p>"You are probably right," said Mr. Waterman. "But here is another +thought. If we put in a claim for this<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">175</a></span> gulch, we may have a hundred +mining sharks down here right away and that would spoil the whole thing, +especially if there is more of the stuff."</p> + +<p>"Well, let's lay claim to the whole gulch," said Mr. Anderson. "I'll +give them the impression that we are buying this gulch because it is so +picturesque and centrally located."</p> + +<p>"You may be able to get away with it if you go about it carefully," said +Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Don't you think that those revenue officers noticed that mine?" asked +Mr. Anderson suddenly.</p> + +<p>"They probably did but thought nothing of it as they were so intent on +catching Field and finding out what he had been doing," said Mr. +Waterman.</p> + +<p>"We can't be sure of that," said Mr. Anderson. "I think it would be best +for Bill and me to get out as fast as we can without attracting +attention and put in a claim for this gulch at once."</p> + +<p>"You'll have to put in a mining claim for this to be any good," said Mr. +Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I'll fix that," was the reply. "I'll put in a full claim, which means +that if any minerals are found on the land, they belong to the owner of +the land if found by him and half the same if discovered by any other +person."</p> + +<p>"Do you think that we can get to Lac Parent to-night?" asked Bill.</p> + +<p>"If we start right away," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>Everything was full of excitement until the two had departed on the back +trail. We shall not follow them but merely mention that in due course of +time, Mr. Anderson<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">176</a></span> filed a claim for the gulch, the same to be paid for +at the regular settler's rates. It seemed that the big timber companies +had had men down into the gulch and because of the difficulties in +getting out the lumber they had not bought the timber on this particular +part of the country. This was very fortunate, for Mr. Anderson was thus +able to buy the land outright, to be paid for after it had been +regularly surveyed. The preliminary papers were signed and the two then +heaved a sigh of relief as they now knew that they were secure in their +discovery.</p> + +<p>We shall thus leave them and return to the others. These latter spent +the rest of the afternoon exploring the sides of the gulch. Mr. Waterman +saw further evidences of mineral wealth and grew very enthusiastic over +the prospects. They slept in the spy's cabin that night and were very +cozy around the open fireplace that had been built at one side of the +room.</p> + +<p>"This is some cabin," said Mr. Waterman the next morning. "Field was +very comfortable here, I'll bet."</p> + +<p>"It must have been lonely," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"It probably was after the revenue officers had rounded up his mates, +but prior to that time, I have no doubt that they had a very fine time. +They could get out to the north and go fishing, leaving one man to +listen to the wireless, and they probably had their share of game. Well, +let's be going," finally said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>They determined that the best way to travel would be to go right down +the stream. Pierre was detailed to go ahead and clear a trail where +necessary. Pud carried one canoe and Bob the other. They also carried +their packs,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">177</a></span> while Mr. Waterman carried the pack and a big load of +grub. Pierre carried only his little pack, which left him free to swing +the ax. They made fair progress, though it was rough going. They found +that the gulch was not so deep as it looked. In other words, the stream +led them down and down. Under other circumstances they would have found +the scenery very beautiful. It is one thing to find a beautiful bridal +veil falls fifty or sixty feet high when you have nothing to do but +admire it. It is another thing altogether to come upon such a fall and +to have to pick a way down the precipice carrying a canoe and other +load. There seemed no end to the trail on which they were. Down they +went, and Pierre was heard more than once to exclaim "Sacre! Mon Dieu!" +and a few other favorite expressions with him when he was exasperated. +They went along at least five miles in this way and there seemed no end +to the trail.</p> + +<p>"I take it back," said Mr. Waterman. "Field and his pals did not come +out this way to fish. That is sure. There is no sign of a trail."</p> + +<p>"It's a good thing we brought that grub along," said Bob. "This trail is +hard enough coming down, but it would take us all day to get back to the +cabin."</p> + +<p>"You're right," said Pud. "I'm getting into good shape but this trail is +getting my goat."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry," said Mr. Waterman. "I've been within a few miles of this +place, and it can't be very long before we hit either the Portneuf River +or some lake that drains into it. I'll wager that the Portneuf is within +twelve miles of here."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">178</a></span></p> + +<p>"Twelve miles!" said Pud, with a sigh.</p> + +<p>"That's nothing," said Mr. Waterman. "I think, though, that we'll soon +hit a lake, for I have never had to portage more than six miles in this +country without striking some lake or river."</p> + +<p>"Oh, let it be soon," said Pud. "Not that I care. But simply so that Bob +won't play out."</p> + +<p>"Don't worry about me," said Bob. "You haven't heard me kicking, have +you?"</p> + +<p>They stopped for lunch at the base of a forty-foot fall.</p> + +<p>There was a deep pool, flecked with foam, as was to be expected. Mr. +Waterman got out his line and in fifteen minutes he had six fine trout +out of the water. Pierre soon had them cleaned and they had them for +lunch. On they went again, but they traveled more than another five +miles before they came to a small lake. Mr. Waterman looked at his +compass and decided that the lake must flow into the Portneuf River. +They went to the far end of the lake, where a little stream flowed out.</p> + +<p>"I'll wager that we'll hit the Portneuf River in less than an hour +to-morrow," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"To-morrow?" queried Pud.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I think that we have done enough for to-day. Here is a fine place +to camp and I think that the best thing for us to do is to fish for a +couple of hours and then have a good dinner."</p> + +<p>This they did, and when they returned to the camping place they found +that Pierre had the ducks steaming in the pot and that supper was +practically ready. They enjoyed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">179</a></span> that supper most heartily, for they had +had a very hard day. They sat around the camp fire that night until a +little later than usual for it was a wonderful night. The stars seemed +right above them. One big planet stood right over the top of a distant +mountain and it looked exactly like a big incandescent light hung there +to light the travelers on their way.</p> + +<p>Pierre was more talkative than usual. He told them that he had been on +this lake and that he now recognized that he had been half way back to +the gulch. He told of killing a big bear nearby one summer. He pointed +off to a distant mountain and said that it had occurred over there. He +had seen the bear while scouting for timber for one of the big lumber +companies. The bear, when he saw him, was about two miles away on a +mountain opposite to him. He determined to get him if possible. He +crossed over to the other ridge and had great trouble in locating the +bear again. Finally he did so. He worked around to the other side of the +bear so that the wind would not carry his scent to the bear. Finally he +got within one hundred yards of the bear. The latter then showed signs +of uneasiness, and as there were some thick woods near Pierre thought +that he had better not take a further chance.</p> + +<p>He gave the bear one shot, which hit him in the shoulder. The bear, in a +frenzy, rushed straight at him. He had only an old-fashioned rifle and +before he could break his gun and put in another cartridge the bear was +only a few feet away. Taking hasty aim at the glaring eye of the bear, +he pulled the trigger. The bullet hit the bear plump in the eye and he +dropped dead in his tracks.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">180</a></span></p> + +<p>"Gosh!" said Pud. "I don't know what I'd do if I saw a wounded bear +coming right at me. I guess I'd drop my gun and run."</p> + +<p>"That would be the worst thing you could do, for in spite of their size, +bears are remarkably active, and they go through the woods like a +streak," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"I bet that you'd stand your ground, all right," said Bob. "You've lots +of nerve, Pud, and that's all that's necessary in a pinch."</p> + +<p>"I suppose I would, but at the same time, I am not aching for the +experience," answered Pud.</p> + +<p>"Men are generally braver than they think," said Mr. Waterman. "I've +known pretty poor sort of fellows that would stand up in a pinch and +fight like sin, either against some animal like the bear, or even +against their fellows."</p> + +<p>"I think that that's so," said Bob. "You know that in time of war, +practically everybody enlists."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Pud, "but some of them are really forced to do it by public +opinion."</p> + +<p>"That's very true," replied Bob, "but even the fellows that do not care +to enlist are just as brave as the others when a battle comes."</p> + +<p>The conversation drifted on until at last Mr. Waterman looked at his +watch and piled them all off to their blankets. They were up early the +following morning. After a hearty breakfast they set out down the +stream. This proved so small that they were compelled to get out of +their canoes and portage. A half hour later they came into another lake, +which both Pierre and Mr. Waterman recognized at once.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">181</a></span></p> + +<p>"I've been here before," said Mr. Waterman. "The outlet of this lake +leads directly north, so that we shall hit the Portneuf River some +seventy miles from its mouth. They journeyed on, and by that night they +had reached the river.</p> + +<p>"We'll have some fast water that we had not counted on when we left," +said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"Very fast rapide," assented Pierre.</p> + +<p>"Can we make them?" asked Pud.</p> + +<p>"Can a duck swim?" replied Mr. Waterman, with a merry twinkle in his eye +that betokened that he was ready for the fun ahead.</p> + +<p>"Are these the rapids you told me of?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"You bet," said Mr. Waterman. "There are some dangerous spots, but we'll +manage them all right."</p> + +<p>Once more they carefully packed their bags and the grub. Practically all +of the duffle was put into Mr. Waterman's canoe and it was all tied to +the thwarts, so that if an upset occurred things would not be lost. Bob +went, with Mr. Waterman, while Pud was with Pierre.</p> + +<p>"I like this," said Pud, with a frowning glance.</p> + +<p>"Never mind. Pierre and you will manage all right," said Mr. Waterman. +"You'll find that the paddling will be easy. It is more a matter of +steering. We'll hit some water this morning that will make that fast +water in the Escoumains look like a mill pond."</p> + +<p>"Lead me to it," said Bob. "Come on, Pud! Don't stand there."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">182</a></span></p> + +<p>They set off, and for some time they paddled along on a smoothly running +current. It then began to get faster, and soon they were into the thick +of it. Bob and Mr. Waterman went through the first rapids just like +ducks. It was most exhilarating sport. They waited at the foot of the +descent for the other canoe, and they soon saw it shooting towards them.</p> + +<p>"That looks pretty dangerous," said Bob, as he saw the canoe dash +through a foam-flecked bit of water with sharp rocks on both sides.</p> + +<p>"It's a game for small children," replied Mr. Waterman. "In the hands of +experts there is really not much danger in this water."</p> + +<p>"Is there worse water ahead?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Sure thing," said Mr. Waterman. "This was a pretty good one, but you'll +know what real fast water is when we have passed through the Devil's +Cauldron."</p> + +<p>"Some sport," said Pud, as their canoe swung alongside. "I'm trying to +do my share, but I have full confidence in Pierre, so why worry."</p> + +<p>"You're right," answered Bob.</p> + +<p>"That had the Escoumains Rapids beaten hollow," continued Pud.</p> + +<p>"Mr. Waterman says that there's some real sport ahead," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"Go ahead. I'm game," said Pud.</p> + +<p>They went on and they came to a long series of rapids. Down they went at +railroad speed. Bob was kept busy<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">183</a></span> doing as directed by Mr. Waterman. +Several times they burst right through between rocks when Bob could see +nothing but a wall of mist before him. Then at last they came to the +famous Devil's Cauldron. Here the river seemed to rise almost between +cliffs, and the water boiled up on all sides. They rushed down what was +practically a cascade, broken here and there by jagged rocks. Mr. +Waterman steered the canoe most skillfully and they emerged at last on +the smoother reaches below. Once more they turned around and Bob could +hardly believe that he had come through such a swirl of waters in their +frail canoe. Just then the other came into view. It was most exciting to +watch it dart from wave to wave, shooting now like an arrow and then +stopping in its course as if held back by invisible hands. Pierre sat in +the stern and wielded the paddle just as calmly and nonchalantly as if +they were paddling across a pond. His hand seemed sure, and the canoe +came through like a swallow on the wing.</p> + +<p>"Some sport," yelled Pud, as they drifted past.</p> + +<p>"You bet my life," said Pierre. "Dat is ze grand sport. 'Dat is ze +life,' as my fren, Monsieur Waterman, sing."</p> + +<p>"That was the most exciting time I have ever had," laughed Bob, as they +ranged alongside and paddled on together.</p> + +<p>"That is the worst we'll find on the river," said Mr. Waterman.</p> + +<p>"We'll hit two or three more short stretches that will keep us busy."</p> + +<p>On they went and before the sun was low in the sky they had gone over +fifty miles.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">184</a></span></p> + +<p>"It's hard to believe that we have gone so far to-day," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"The water is fairly high now," said Mr. Waterman. "That makes the river +run fast, and it is easy to cover distance under such circumstances."</p> + +<p>"It's been the best day that I have ever spent," declared Bob, as they +stepped out of the canoe on a fine sandy beach, where they were going to +spend the night.</p> + +<p>"I've enjoyed every minute of it," said Mr. Waterman. "Fast water makes +very fascinating sport. It's the danger, I suppose."</p> + +<p>"It's dangerous, all right," said Bob. "If we had been tipped over going +down that Devil's Cauldron, it would have been five to one against our +ever getting out."</p> + +<p>"It would have been a hundred to one," replied Mr. Waterman. "At the +same time, if no accident occurs, one should come through all right if +one knows how to handle a canoe. I have been tipped over three or four +times in all my life, and generally the accident was due to my own +carelessness."</p> + +<p>They spent another happy night around the fire, with Pierre telling them +more of his experiences.</p> + +<p>"It is only on small trips like this that one can get Pierre to talk," +said Mr. Waterman. "When a bunch is along he either feels that he has no +right around the fire with the others or he is too busy to get into the +humor."</p> + +<p>"He has certainly had some experiences," said Bob.</p> + +<p>They determined, before they sought their blankets, that the next day +they would go down to the mouth of the Portneuf River and then get the +St. Lawrence steamer<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">185</a></span> up to Escoumains. They decided to do this so that +they would save time, as Bob and his party had to leave the woods in a +very few days. Then again, they were all eager to find out what luck +Bill and Mr. Anderson had had in getting in a claim on the gulch. +Nothing exciting occurred the next day, as it was smooth sailing, or +rather canoeing, until they hit the St. Lawrence. At this place the St. +Lawrence is about forty miles wide. There was a southerly wind, so they +kept to their original plan and took the river boat to Escoumains, +arriving there about four o'clock in the afternoon. Mr. Waterman hustled +around and soon had a pair of little Canadian horses. These hustled away +with them and the two canoes, and by dark they were at the ford once +more.</p> + +<p>The next morning they were up early, and by seven o'clock they were back +on Lac Parent. Jerry's cheery halloo proved to them that they had been +expected. They found Bill and Mr. Anderson already back, and Mr. +Waterman was very much pleased with the way they had gotten results.</p> + +<p>"The gulch is ours, then," said Mr. Waterman. "We can easily raise the +money, as land is cheap down here."</p> + +<p>"We won't have to pay the money until it is regularly surveyed, and that +will not be until next summer, I expect," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>"I hope that it will keep, for I want to have three or four days' good +fishing before I go," said Bob.</p> + +<p>"I'd like to go over to the cabin again and get some more samples of +that ore, so that we can have it examined in Philadelphia when we get +home," said Bill.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">186</a></span></p> + +<p>"We'll do that too," said Mr. Anderson.</p> + +<p>The next four days were quietly spent. Fishing and a side expedition +over the gulch furnished only moderate excitement, but everybody enjoyed +himself. Then one morning our three boys awoke to the fact that they had +to leave the woods where they had had such a good time and in which they +had learned so much and had such exciting experiences. As usual, they +got up early. It really was not a happy party that left Lac Parent that +morning. They went into Escoumains over the old trail. The fact that +they portaged the canoes through two lakes and then carried their duffle +bags the rest of the way, showed in what excellent condition they now +were. Pud was as hard as nails. He walked along at the head of the +party, with no more signs of being winded than Bob or even Mr. Waterman. +The latter was with them, and he was going to accompany them as far as +Quebec to get the samples of ore into the hands of some expert assayist.</p> + +<p>After reaching Escoumains it was with sincere feelings of regret that +the boys had to get into their civilized garments again. Nothing of +importance or special interest occurred on their way to Quebec. They +once more went up to the Frontenac Hotel and waited there for Mr. +Waterman, who had gone at once to the assayist. In less than two hours +he came back smiling.</p> + +<p>"What luck?" asked Bob.</p> + +<p>"Come up to the room," was the reply.</p> + +<p>When they got up there they all fired questions at him.</p> + +<p>"Not all at once," he said. "I saw the assayist or geologist, and at the +first glance he told me that the samples of ore<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">187</a></span> were genuine and very +valuable. He tried to find out where I had gotten them so I had to do +some tall lying to lead him off the scent. When I left his office I was +careful, and I looked around several times. I thought that I was being +followed, so I went into stores and out again, and I think he will have +his troubles finding out where the mine is."</p> + +<p>"If we really have made such a valuable discovery," said Bob, "we must +be careful not to say anything about it. When we have once gotten full +title to the gulch we can then let others know where the mine is."</p> + +<p>"You're right," said Mr. Waterman. "According to the statement of the +expert, we really have a big thing on our hands, and with careful +handling, we can get rich through it."</p> + +<p>That evening the boys, with Mr. Waterman, went to visit the St. Ann de +Beaupre cathedral. The boys, as well as Mr. Waterman, were deeply +impressed with the solemn dignity and massive beauty of the church's +interior. They also noticed the look of deep, sincere devotion on the +faces of the worshippers as they paid homage to the blessed saint.</p> + +<p>It was hard to say good-by to their pleasant companions, but finally Mr. +Waterman saw them off on the train the next morning, and the following +evening they were back in Philadelphia. Here Bob had to leave his +friends, as he lived farther south. On shaking hands with them they +promised to meet again the next summer and go north to develop their +mine. They each declared that they had enjoyed the summer in the woods +most heartily, and they swore eternal friendship to one another as young +men of their age are apt to do.</p> + +<div class='tnote' style='margin-top: 4em;'><h3>Transcriber's Notes</h3> +<ol> +<li>Punctuation has been changed to conform to contemporary standards.</li> +<li>The Table of Contents was not provided in the original text.</li> +</ol> +</div> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOB HUNT IN CANADA***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 19853-h.txt or 19853-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/9/8/5/19853">http://www.gutenberg.org/1/9/8/5/19853</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/19853.txt b/19853.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2ed45f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/19853.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7019 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, Bob Hunt in Canada, by George W. Orton + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: Bob Hunt in Canada + + +Author: George W. Orton + + + +Release Date: November 17, 2006 [eBook #19853] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOB HUNT IN CANADA*** + + +E-text prepared by Roger Frank and the Project Gutenberg Online +Distributed Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net/) + + + +BOB HUNT IN CANADA + +by + +GEORGE W. ORTON, Ph.D. + +Graduate Coach of Track and Cross Country Teams University of +Pennsylvania, Joint Manager of Camp Tecumseh, N. H., and author of +"Bob Hunt at Camp Pontiac," and "Bob Hunt, Senior Camper." + + + + + + + +Whitman Publishing Co. +Racine, Wis. +Copyright, 1916, by George W. Jacobs & Co. +Printed in 1924 by Western Printing & Lithographing Co. Racine, Wis. +Printed in U. S. A. + + + + +TABLE OF CONTENTS + + I OFF TO CANADA 7 + II UP THE ESCOUMAINS 30 + III CAMP AT LAKE PARENT 45 + IV ACROSS THE PORTAGE 60 + V THE SHORT TRAIL TO ESCOUMAINS 71 + VI PIERRE'S BEAR STORY 82 + VII BOB'S CLUE 94 + VIII THE WIRELESS IN THE WILDERNESS 106 + IX A WEEK ON THE TRAIL 117 + X MOCCASINS AS FOOD 130 + XI A RESCUE IN THE RAPIDS 145 + XII PIERRE'S BIG SALMON 157 + XIII THE PLATINUM MINE 168 + + + + + + +BOB HUNT IN CANADA + +OFF TO CANADA + + +"Hey there, Pud. Come here," yelled Bill Williams one day late in May to +Pud Jones, as the latter sauntered across the athletic field. + +"I'm coming," said Pud, as he rushed across, and grabbing Bill by the +shoulders slammed him up against the fence around the track. + +"What do you think this is?" asked Bill. "A football game, or do you +take me for a tackling dummy?" + +"Well, some kind of a dummy," replied Pud, as he held Bill so firmly +that he could not get at him to punch his head. + +"That'll do, you big rhinoceros," said Bill, as Pud released him. + +"What's the news?" said Pud. + +"I've just had a letter from Bob Hunt and he wants us to go up to Canada +with him to a fishing and hunting camp there," said Bill. + +"That would be fun but I don't know whether my father would let me go or +not. He's been talking about having me work this summer," said Pud. + +"Well, you see what you can do with your father and I'll get after +mine," replied Bill. "I rather think that I won't have much trouble as +father was saying just the other day that he thought the open air life +was the only thing for a boy in the summer." + +"All fathers think that, but some of them want to have us around during +the summer," said Pud, rather gloomily for him. + +"Yes, I've noticed that oftentimes they make cheap chauffeurs out of +us," said Bill. "They tell us they cannot spare us during the summer and +then make us drive them around at all hours. That's quite a snap for +them, I think, but it doesn't get us any place." + +"You're right," assented Pud. "I had a very poor time last summer for my +family was always having me drive them some place where I did not want +to go. They couldn't see that I would much rather get out on a lot in +the hot sun and have a game of ball than take the finest drive there +is." + +"You ought to have been at Pontiac last year. We had a great time. There +was something doing every minute," said Bill. + +"Yes, I heard that you had a great summer," said Pud. "How did you get +along without Bob as a pitcher?" + +"We certainly missed him as he was a whole team by himself," said Bill. +"That's one reason why I would like to go to Canada with Bob, for I +haven't seen him since two summers now, and I would like to spend +another summer with him." + +"So would I," said Pud. "Whereabouts in Canada does Bob want to go?" + +"Wait," said Bill, pulling a letter out of his pocket. "I'll read you +what he says. Here it is: 'Father wants me to go up to a camp in Canada +called Camp Tadousac. It is situated east of the Saguenay River and +there is some wonderful fishing to be had there. I've decided to go and +I hope that your father will let you come along. It will be a new +experience for us. This camp has no permanent quarters but the members +go from one part of the country to the other and live out of doors all +the time. They use shelter tents sometimes but often they will be away +for a week with only one's pack and sleeping bag as protection against +the weather. I'm eager to try it for father says that it is fine sport. +He's been up in that country and says it is a sportsman's paradise. He +was farther west in the Lake St. John region, but it should be even +better farther east. So, Bill, get busy. Talk it up with father and +write me that you'll be with me.' That sounds good, don't it?" concluded +Bill. + +"It 'listens' very well," said Pud. "But, don't you let Professor Gary +hear you say 'Don't it' again or you'll get into trouble." + +"Doesn't it. Doesn't it, you boob," said Bill impatiently. "Mr. Shields +told us a good one this morning about a boy who would write 'I have +wrote' instead of 'I have written.' The teacher kept him in after school +one day and made him write it out one hundred times. The teacher was +called from the room and the boy got through his task. He waited a few +minutes but as the teacher did not return, the boy wrote a note as +follows. 'Dear Teacher, I have wrote "I have written" one hundred times. +You have not came back so I have went home.'" + +"Ha, ha, ha!" roared Pud. "That's a good one, but to get down to cases, +are you really going up to Canada with Bob?" + +"I am if I can get father and mother to let me go," replied Bill. + +"Well, I'll see what I can do, for I think that a month or six weeks up +in those Canadian woods would make me real husky." + +"You, real husky," said Bill in a commiserating tone. "I suppose that +you're not as hard as nails and nearly two hundred pounds in weight. +Now, don't get in wrong at home by telling them that you would like to +go to Canada to get husky. That would be no reason at all for you to go +there. Tell them anything you like but that." + +"I'll see them to-night and let you know to-morrow," said Pud. + +The two boys then separated, Pud to go in to get his baseball suit and +Bill to go out to the diamond, as he already had his suit on. Both boys +were members of the school team. Bill was now the best player in the +school, having made quite a reputation in scholastic circles as a +pitcher. He was the captain of the team, which shows better than +anything else how he had developed since first we met at Camp Pontiac's +Junior camp. + +Pud was waiting for Bill the next morning at the school gate. + +"I'm going, I'm going!" cried Pud, as soon as Bill appeared. + +"That's fine," said Bill in rather a gloomy tone. + +"What's the matter?" asked Pud. "Don't they want you to go?" + +"I'm not sure," said Bill. "Father is willing, but mother is making a +big fuss. She's almost as bad as she was before I went to Pontiac." + +"Gee, that's bad. I don't think they'll let me go unless you go," said +Pud, and he too looked as if he had just lost his best friend. + +"I'll just bet that your father persuades your mother to let you go," +said Pud. "He did the other time, you know." + +"Yes, that's so, but he told me as we walked down to school this morning +that there really was some danger in such a trip as we planned and that +he did not feel that he should persuade mother to let me go. He said +that if he did and then something happened that he wouldn't have an +excuse," said Bill. + +"That's so," said Pud in a hopeless voice. "I guess it's all off, then, +and I was counting on having such a fine summer." + +"It's not all off. I'll have a chance to talk to mother this afternoon +and I'll show her why she should let me go," said Bill. + +"It's not so dangerous, is it?" asked Pud. + +"No, of course not," replied Bill. "Mr. Waterman, the head of the camp, +told me that he was always careful and that unless one got careless or +foolhardy that there was little real danger. He said that they got +tipped over now and then and were sometimes temporarily lost, but that +these things only lent spice to the summer and were the things +remembered in after years." + +"He's right," said Pud. "Well, I hope that you can get your mother on +your side for my parents did not raise any objections." + +"It's going to help me tell mother that you're going and that your +father and mother are contented about it. I'll bring her round all +right." + +"I hope you do," said Pud, as they separated to go to their classes. + +The next morning, Bill was waiting for Pud at the school gate. There was +such a light in Bill's eye that Pud exclaimed on seeing him. + +"Don't tell me. Don't tell me, Bill. I can see in your eyes that you're +going to Canada." + +"You bet I am," said Bill, swelling up his chest. "I talked mother over +and she even got enthusiastic before I got through. Father was all right +as soon as mother felt satisfied." + +"Let's write Bob to-day that we'll be with him," said Pud. + +"Don't worry," said Bill, with a twinkle in his eye. "I did that last +night and I'm going round to see Mr. Waterman to-night to find out what +I'll have to get for the trip." + +"I'll go with you," said Pud. "We'll both need the same kit, for I have +never been to a real fishing camp before, nor have you." + +"That's right," said Bill. "We'll have to get a whole lot of things we +didn't have to get for Camp Pontiac; dunnage bags, sleeping bags, tump +lines, fishing tackle, a lot of flies--" + +"A lot of flies,--why, you dummy, we'll have to take some stuff along to +get rid of the flies, from all I hear." + +"You big dub, don't you know that they fish with flies?" said Bill in a +disgusted tone. + +"How do you catch them?" asked Pud. + +"Say, what are you driving at?" asked Bill. "Do you really mean that you +do not know that they fish with artificial flies?" + +"Oh, artificial flies," said Pud. "Yes, I've heard of that, but I never +saw any. My father's not a fisherman like yours." + +"I should think not," said Bill. + +"Well, don't swell up and bust because you know more about artificial +flies than I do," said Pud, digging Bill in the ribs. "Before we come +back, I'll be telling you a few things." + +"Stop your kidding, you small giant," said Bill. "You can't be even sure +of going until you see Mr. Waterman. I would not be surprised if they +charge you two prices, for they will surely have to get an extra guide +to carry the big canoe they'll have to have for you and another extra +man to carry extra grub." + +"Now, Bill, stop kidding and let me know if you really are going around +to see Mr. Waterman to-night, for if you are, I'll go along," said Pud +in a serious tone. + +"Yes, I'm going," said Bill. "For heaven's sake, don't let on to Mr. +Waterman that you've never seen an artificial fly or he'll be disgusted. +Thank goodness, you learned to paddle a canoe well and to swim well as +Camp Pontiac, for those two accomplishments are really necessary for +such a trip." + +"I'll be all right in that way," said Pud. + +"Well, don't boast, for though you can probably swim better than any +guide we may see, they'll show you a few things about handling a canoe +that you never dreamed of. Father says that the Lake St. John guides are +wonders and we'll be only a little farther east, so our guides should be +just as clever," said Bill enthusiastically. + +"Gee, it's going to be some summer," said Pud. "I wouldn't miss it for +the world." + + * * * * * + +Two weeks later, Bob Hunt, Pud Jones and Bill Williams left Broad Street +Station for Canada. They were going to travel to Tadousac at the mouth +of the Saguenay River, where they would be met by Mr. Waterman or one of +his men. All three boys were big enough to make such a journey alone. +The boys had their dunnage bags with them and had practically no other +baggage excepting a suitcase. Mr. Waterman had told them to take their +dunnage bags right along with them so they would run no risk of having +them held up in the Custom House at Quebec. They were all provided with +passports, as the big European war was going on and they might have use +for this means of identification. + +The boys arrived in New York without any unusual happenings, but Pud got +separated from them at the Big Pennsylvania Railroad Station and they +were worried until they saw his big good-natured form looming up at the +train gate at the Grand Central Station. + +"Where have you been?" asked Bill. + +"Gee, I'm glad I found you," said Pud. "How did you get lost?" + +"We get lost, you big duffer," said Bill. "Why, you were the one that +got lost. We've been looking all over for you." + +"That's rich," said Pud, breaking out into a big laugh. "I thought that +you were lost. I know New York like a book." + +"You remind me of a little boy," said Bob. "A policeman found him +wandering round the Pennsylvania Railroad Station and on going up to +him, the little boy said, 'Have you seen my muvver. I think she's got +losted. I can't find her any place.'" + +"Ha! ha! Ha! ha! ha!" laughed Pud. "That's good, but I don't see how you +can liken me to a little boy." + +"All aboard! all aboard for the Montreal and Eastern Canada Express!" +yelled the crier. + +"That means us, fellows," said Bob. "Let's hustle." + +The three boys went through the gate and were soon sitting in the +Pullman bound for Quebec. + +"That was some idea of father's to get us this drawing-room," said Bill. +"We'll certainly enjoy life on this trip." + +"You bet," said Pud. + +They certainly were traveling in style. They tossed up to see who would +get the lower berth or the sofa. Pud was the one left over and he got +the upper berth, whereupon Bill, who had the lower, said that he would +not take any chances but would take the upper berth himself. A +good-natured, argument followed and the result was that Bob took the +lower berth, Pud the sofa and Bill went upstairs. They awoke in the +morning to find themselves at Sherbrooke and to get their first taste of +the Canadian habitant. When they got down to stretch their legs before +breakfast, they found most of the Canadians speaking French. + +"Here's a chance to spout your French, Bob," said Bill. + +"Who told you that I talked French?" asked Bob. + +"Father told me some time ago," answered Bill. "He said that you could +talk it like a native." + +"I could a few years ago, but I'm rusty now, as I haven't talked French +for at least five years," replied Bob. + +"They don't talk real French here anyway," said Pud. + +"Oh, yes, they do," said Bill. "It's a kind of dialect, but father tells +me that it is much easier to understand a French-Canadian than many of +the French people from Paris." + +"That's very true," said Bob. "My father, as I've told you before, has +been up in the Lake St. John region, and he says that he gets along +quite well with the inhabitants. He says that they have some peculiar +expressions, but that it is quite easy to talk to them as they speak a +pretty pure dialect of French." + +They were soon off again, now headed for Quebec. They got a seat in the +dining-car and watched the scenery as they rode along. They found the +quaint little Canadian cottages of the habitants much like the farmers' +homes in New England. The land was rolling and, as usual, they followed +the course of some river. As they went along, they heard less and less +English and Bob was often called on to translate the cries that were +heard at the different stations. + +"I'll soon get my French back up here," said Bob. "They seem to talk +pretty good French. I can understand them quite easily." + +About ten o'clock, they came into a hilly country and found evidences of +mining being carried on. On Bob's inquiring, they found that they were +asbestos mines and that it was practically a new industry for this part +of Canada. They also noted that many new farms were being cleared by the +young Frenchmen and that much lumber was being transported both by the +rivers and the railroad. The look of the people was quite foreign by +this time and the boys felt that they were indeed in a foreign land. + +"Have you ever been in Toronto?" suddenly asked Bill. + +"No," said Pud. + +"Well, that is certainly different from this part of Canada," said Bill. +"You can hardly tell that you are out of the United States when you are +there." + +"I should think that the French talk would make it seem foreign anyway," +said Pud. + +"That's it," said Bob. "You don't hear any more French there than you do +in Chicago, Philadelphia or any other American city. I remember that I +was up there to the great Toronto Fair and I hardly knew that I was in +Canada." + +"This is certainly different," said Bill. + +"Many people that visit only Quebec and Montreal have an entirely wrong +impression of Canada. They think there are just as many French all over +as they find in those cities. The fact is that outside of the province +of Quebec, Canada is just as much an English-speaking country as the +United States. + +"Is that so?" said Pud. "Why didn't we go, then, to some place where +they talk sense? I'm going to have a fine time getting along with these +fellows. I can't talk French." + +"Get busy and you'll learn a lot this summer," said Bob. "Mr. Waterman +told me that two of the guides talk English a little, so we'll get along +all right." + +"I'm glad they talk English," said Bill. "All the French I know you +could put in your eye tooth." + +A short time later, they arrived at Levis and saw the majestic heights +of Quebec opposite. + +"This St. Lawrence is some river," said Pud. + +"I should think it is," said Bob. "The biggest ocean liners can come up +this far, while there is a twenty-seven-foot channel all the way up to +Montreal." + +"You don't say so," said Pud. "Well, there is one thing sure that I'm +learning some geography at first hand this morning." + +"When do we leave for Tadousac?" asked Bill. + +"We go down to-morrow on the boat," said Bob. + +"That's fine," said Pud. "We can see the town this afternoon." + +"You bet we will," said Bill. + +"Where are we staying?" asked Pud. + +"At the Chateau Frontenac," said Bob. "It's that building up on the +cliff there." + +"That's some hotel," said Pud. + +"You'll think so before to-morrow," said Bill. + +"Say, let's go up to the Plains of Isaac and see where John Paul Jones +fell when he captured Quebec from the English," said Pud. + +At this, Bill and Bob just curled up and laughed until they nearly fell +off their chairs. + +"What's the matter?" asked Pud. "Isn't that the real place to see in +Quebec?" + +"You need some history lessons as well as geography," said Bill. + +"Well, let's have it," said Pud. "I know I'm always getting things +fatally twisted." + +"You mean the Plains of Abraham," said Bob. + +"Oh, Abraham, Jacob or Isaac, it's all the same, isn't it?" said Pud, +apparently rather disgusted that they had blamed him for such a natural +mistake. + +"And, who ever heard of John Paul Jones taking Quebec?" asked Bill, +looking at Bob. + +"Well, who was it?" said Pud. "Those historical names always get me." + +"It was Wolfe, the famous young English general. He was killed in the +moment of victory, and the French general, Montcalm, also was killed," +said Bob. + +"Well, let's go out there and see the place," said Pud. "It must be +interesting." + +By this time, they were across the St. Lawrence and at the mercy of +about a hundred cab drivers. Bob led the way and they were soon going up +the hill to the Chateau. In the dining-hall, they heard practically +nothing but English spoken as the Chateau was the place where most of +the tourists stayed. After an excellent lunch, they sauntered out to +see the sights. They were again mobbed by the cabbies. + +"Let's take one of those funny-looking cabs," said Pud. + +"That's just what I was looking for," said Bob. "Father told me to be +sure and have a ride in a 'caleche,' as he called it." + +They got into the 'caleche,' which is just like a hansom cab except that +the old-fashioned leather springs were used, and instead of the driver +sitting behind, he rode in front on a sort of wide dashboard. Away they +went and the driver plied the whip. The horse was not large but proved +strong and wiry. In a short time, the boys were out on the Plains of +Abraham, looking at the various monuments marking the great battle which +meant the end of the French dominion in Canada. They saw the monuments +to Wolfe and Montcalm and enjoyed the view far south into the United +States. Their guide showed them the path up which Wolfe climbed with his +soldiers to surprise the French that memorable morning. After seeing the +sights there, they drove back and went through part of the citadel. This +proved to be one of the strongest forts in America, and its strength, +the number of British Tommies about, the guns of large caliber that +could be seen, so impressed the boys that Bob at last broke out. + +"This is some fort. It would take a real siege gun to make much of an +impression on those walls and ramparts while I guess those big cannon +would do a little talking themselves." + +"I should think so," said Pud. + +"Wait a minute," said Bill. "I'd like to get some photos." + +Thereupon, he pulled out a little pocket kodak he had, and got ready to +focus on a big gun set in an embrasure of the walls. Before he could +move almost, a soldier was at his side and said, + +"You are under arrest. It is forbidden to bring kodaks or cameras of any +kind within these walls." + +"I didn't know that," said Bill. "I simply wanted to take a few photos +of the place." + +"You'll have to explain all that to the Commandant," said the Tommie, as +he led the way. + +The whole thing had happened so suddenly that neither Bob nor Pud had +time to say a word before they saw Bill turn to follow the soldier. + +"May we not go with our friend?" asked Bob of the Tommie. + +"I was about to ask that you accompany us, for though you are not under +arrest, I'll have to bring you along as witnesses." + +"Don't worry, Pud," said Bob. "It'll be all right. We're not at war and +we were not doing anything very wrong." + +"That's all very well," said Pud also in a low tone. "They may take us +for spies and keep us locked up here all summer." + +"Oh, Tommyrot," said Bob, though at heart he did not know just what was +liable to happen. + +In the meantime, the party went along the walk until they came to a big +door. They entered and soon were asked to seat themselves in a large +room in which there were many desks with officers seated and busily +writing. Gold lace, silver spurs, bright officer's swords, red caps, and +the air of discipline and business that characterized the whole room did +not fail to have its effect on the boys. Nor did they fail to notice +that each of the doors was guarded by soldiers with fixed bayonets +standing at attention. The Tommy who was escorting them took them up to +one of the desks and said, + +"Captain Davidson, I have here under arrest, this young man with these +two others as witnesses." + +"Of what are they accused?" asked the officer, as he glanced sharply at +the three of them. + +"Of espionage," said the soldier. + +"Of espionage?" said the officer. "That is a serious offense." + +"I know it is but that is the term under which the offense comes," +replied the soldier. + +"This must be taken up by the Commandant himself," said the Captain, as +he touched a bell at his side. Immediately a young officer appeared. + +"Captain Abercrombie, tell Major-General Norris, the Commandant, that we +have here a prisoner accused of espionage." + +The orderly saluted and was soon lost to view behind a door at one end +of the hall. He was back in a few minutes. During that time, our three +adventurers stood and watched with interest the varied scene that was +taking-place before them. + +"This is some lark," said Bill to Bob in a low tone. + +"No communication between the prisoner and witnesses," said the Tommy at +once, as he moved nearer as if to enforce his demands. Pud looked over +at Bill with a sort of reproach in his eyes, for he had heard the +remark. Bob kept his eyes front for he was very much interested in the +comings and goings of the officers, orderlies and soldiers that came and +went throughout the hall. + +"Captain Davidson," said the orderly as he returned, "the Commandant +requests that you send in the prisoner and witnesses to him at once.' + +"Very well," said the Captain. "Here they are and I hand them over to +you together with Private Watkins, who arrested them." + +They were then marched into the next room where they found a big +white-haired man sitting at a desk busily engaged. The orderly stopped +his charges at a respectful distance. The Commandant kept on writing for +a few minutes but suddenly he turned around and gave a sharp and +piercing look at the young Americans. + +"Americans," said he, in rather a relieved tone. "Captain Abercrombie, +let me know the gist of this affair." + +"Major-General Norris, I shall have to ask Private Watson to give you +the details at first hand, for as yet I know nothing about the matter, +except that one of these young men is accused of being a spy." + +"Private Watson, give me the details of the matter." + +"Your Excellency," said Private Watson, "I know nothing more than that +as I stood at my post on the Ramparts, near Gun No. 145, I saw this +young man (pointing to Bill) suddenly produce one of those very small +German cameras and try to take a photo of the gun and its location." + +"Young man, is this so?" asked the Commandant in a serious voice. + +"It is so, except that I did not intend to do any harm; the gun seemed +very picturesque to me and I wanted a photo of it," said Bill. + +"Were you not told that you should leave cameras of all kinds with the +gateman?" asked the Commandant. + +"No," said Bill. "We came in a carriage and nothing was said to us." + +"Then, you were given a card and asked to read it, were you not?" +continued the Commandant. + +"Yes," said Bill, "but to tell the truth, I didn't read it carefully." + +"Where is that card?" was the next question. + +Bill fumbled in his pocket and in a moment held it out. + +"Private Watson, kindly show the prisoner the order relating to +cameras," said the Commandant. + +Private Watson then came forward and, taking the card, he showed Bill +the paragraph stating that all cameras must be left at the gate. + +"I am very sorry, sir, that I was so careless," said Bill. "I did not +think that anything I could do would get me into trouble here and I +didn't think it necessary to read the card. There were so many things +to see that I just put it in my pocket." + +"That is not much of an excuse," said the Commandant in a stern voice. +"You must remember that you are here in a military fortress and that we +can't be too strict in some matters." + +"I recognize that now, but I assure you that I had no motive whatever in +taking the picture except to get a unique photo," said Bill humbly. + +The Commandant for the next ten minutes put the three boys through a +regular third degree examination. They told him who they were, where +they came from, who their parents were, what business they were in, and +a hundred other questions. + +"Boys," said the Commandant, "I'm afraid that I'll have to detain you +until Captain Abercrombie here can verify some of your statements." + +Then, turning to the orderly, he said, + +"Captain Abercrombie, call up the Chateau and see if these three are +registered there as they state. Send Private Watson out to the West Gate +to get the driver who took them to the Plains of Abraham this afternoon. +Call up the Richelieu and Ontario Navigation Company's office and see if +passage is booked for to-morrow for three in the name of Hunt. Look +through their luggage at the Chateau and report as soon as possible." + +"Very well, your Excellency," said the Captain, and saluting, he +vanished. + +"Private Watson," said the Commandant. + +"At your orders, sir," said the private, clicking his heels as he +saluted. + +"Take these young gentlemen to the guard-house and remain with them +until I send Captain Abercrombie to you with orders for their release." + +"Very well, your Excellency," said Private Watson, as he led the way out +of the room. + +The boys followed him through the big room, out into the air and along a +path until they came to a smaller building with iron bars at the +windows. Private Watson had to stop and tell the nature of the errand to +the soldier at the door, who finally saluted and let them in. They found +themselves in a rather large antechamber. After a talk with the Captain +in charge, the boys were led to a bright airy room on the second floor. + +"I've brought you here, boys," said Private Watson, "because you can +look out of the windows and find something to interest yourselves with. +I can tell by the way in which Major-General Norris spoke that he thinks +you are all right, so I'll give you the benefit of the doubt. When you +get tired of seeing the scenery, take a look at those old guns in the +cases over there." + +Thereupon, their escort left them and could be seen pacing in front of +the door. + +"You're a fine specimen," said Pud, as soon as the door was closed. + +"Ah, what's the matter?" said Bill. "I suppose you think that I brought +the camera along just to get us into trouble." + +"You didn't seem to think it was serious a little while ago," replied +Pud. "Then, you said it was a lark. This is a fine lark. If we're kept +here, we'll miss our boat to-morrow and that will make us miss the other +boat to Escoumains and then Mr. Waterman won't know where we are and it +will ball everything up." + +"Dry up, you old tear-bag," said Bob. "This isn't very serious. I can +see why it's only right that they should be very careful around a +fortress and any trouble we're in is our own fault, but Captain +Abercrombie will find everything straight and we'll be out of here just +in time to have a good dinner and to talk over our experience with +gusto." + +"I hope so, I hope so," said Pud, in such a dejected tone that even Bill +had to laugh at him. + +"Gee, I'm sorry, Bob, to get you two into all this trouble," said Bill +to Bob. + +"Don't worry. Things will be all right." + +The boys then busied themselves watching the boats ply to and fro on the +broad St. Lawrence. The people seemed like small flies far down on the +esplanade near the Chateau Frontenac, while further down on the wharves, +they could see a jumbled mass of people, carriages, carts, wagons, etc., +all indicating how busy things were in Quebec. They found plenty to +interest them, but at last they turned and began to examine the old +muskets and arms in the cases by the walls. + +"Gee, here's a good one," said Bill. "It's a musket that used to belong +to old Count Frontenac. What do you think of that?" + +"Who was Fronty?" asked Pud. + +"Count Frontenac was one of the greatest governors that Canada ever had +in the time of the French regime." + +"He was a great man, as our forefathers found out in the time of the +French and Indian wars," said Bob. "There are so many stories told, +showing what a wonderful man he was. It's like a touch of the past to +look at a gun that such a famous man once used." + +"That's all right," said Pud, "but it don't help us any in getting out +of here." + +"Don't get impatient," said Bob. "It will take some time to look up the +various things about us." + +"That's so, but it's commencing to get dark and I'm getting hungry," +said Pud. + +"I thought so," said Bob. "I thought it had something to do with your +stomach." + +"It's too bad that I got into this," said Bill. + +"Cut it out, Bill," said Bob. "I've really enjoyed myself so far, for +when you come to think of it, we're not in the slightest danger. At the +worst, we can call for aid on the American consul here and make him +straighten out the matter." + +"That's so," said Pud. "I never thought of that." + +"Of course, you didn't, you big puddenhead," said Bob. "At your time of +life, you have difficulty in thinking of anything but your stomach." + +A little later, Captain Abercrombie came to the door. The boys rushed +over to hear what he had to say. + +"I am instructed by Major-General Norris, the Commandant, to say to you +that he regrets the inconvenience to which you have been put. He finds +that the information given him is correct in every particular, and he +feels that there was no idea of spying on your part. At the same time, +he desires to recommend to all of you that in future, on going into a +fortress, whether here or elsewhere, that when given a card of +instructions, you read and act according to the same. He desires that +you be set at liberty at once and has a military carriage at the West +Gate to drive you to the Chateau. Private Watson, will you kindly see +the gentlemen to the West Gate, where you will find the carriage ready? +With your permission, I shall also accompany you as far as the +Commandant's office." + +"Hurray," said Pud. "I knew it would be all right." + +"I'm sorry to have put you to all this trouble, Captain," said Bill. +"I'm sure that I'll be more careful in the future." + +"It was no bother. I am glad that you got off so easily. We have to be +careful here at all times, for this is, you know, the strongest fortress +in His Majesty's great Dominion, and its secrets must be guarded." + +On arriving at the Commandant's office the captain left them, and it was +not long afterwards that they were sitting around a table at the Chateau +Frontenac, chatting and laughing and having a good feed, as Pud +expressed it. + +"That experience of ours seems just like a dream to me," said Bob, as +the waiter left to get the dessert. + +"It was no dream," said Pud. "If that old Major-General Norris had not +been such a thoroughbred, he might have given us a peck of trouble." + +"Never again for me," said Bill. "If ever I go into a public place and +they give me directions, I'm going to listen and do what's ordered." + +"What's doing to-night?" asked Pud, who was always looking for fun in +some form or other. + +"Nothing much," replied Bob. "I understand that there's a band concert +by the Highland Regiment band on the Esplanade this evening. We can +listen to that for a while and then get to bed. We must be up early as +the boat leaves for Tadousac at seven o'clock to-morrow morning." + +"I'll never make it," said Pud. + +"You'll make it, all right," said Bob. "We're all sleeping in the same +room and I have a call in for five-thirty. That will give us time to get +up and have a decent breakfast before going." + +The boys enjoyed the band concert after their dinner. On the broad-walk +on the river side of the Chateau, a large crowd gathered and sauntered +up and down listening to the excellent music. The scene was interesting +to the boys mainly because of the many kinds of military dress that was +sprinkled throughout the crowd. The military men gave a touch of the Old +World to the scene that was different from anything that the boys had +ever noted in the United States. In good time they turned in, and +five-thirty saw Bob out of bed and on top of Pud, who said that he could +not get awake. + +"I'll waken you up, you lazy dog," said Bob, as he jumped on Pud's bed. +This action thoroughly aroused Pud, and a five minutes' wrestling match +resulted in Bob's being finally buried beneath the covers. + +"Help, Bill," yelled Bob. "This big elephant will crush the life out of +me if you do not come to my assistance." + +Bill, thereupon, rushed over and grabbed Pud by the shoulders with such +a force that he finally had to cry quits. + +"Oh, all right," said Pud, "but it takes two of you to do it." + +"Let's hurry," said Bob. "I have ordered oatmeal, buckwheat cakes and +maple sirup, poached eggs on toast, chops--" + +"Stop, stop," yelled Pud. "My mouth's watering now. I'll beat you all to +the dining room." + +Ten minutes later they were having their last breakfast in Quebec for +many a long day. A little later, they drove down to the wharf and were +soon on board. They found the boat large and roomy and filled with +tourists, taking the Saguenay trip, that is, the trip from Quebec to +Murray Bay, to Tadousac and up the far-famed Saguenay to Chicoutimi. The +scenery is noted all over the world as this is one of the big +sight-seeing trips of the Western continent. It was not long until they +swung out into the stream and headed for the Ile d'Orleans which lies +just below Quebec. Further along, they looked over to the northern bank +of the river and saw the famous Montmorency Falls. + +"I was going to suggest yesterday that we go down to Montmorency for +dinner last night," said Bob. "Father told me to do this, but our +adventure at the Citadel made this out of the question." + +"That's too bad," said Bill. + +"That was some business," said Pud. "I thought it was all over with us +for awhile. I was dreaming of dungeons deep for weeks to come." + +"Don't exaggerate, Pud," said Bob. "We might have had a lot of trouble. +I wonder what that fine church over there is." + +"That's the well known St. Ann de Beaupre cathedral," said an Englishman +or Canadian standing nearby. + +"I never heard of it," said Bill. + +"It's easily seen that you're not a Roman Catholic," said the stranger. +"I can't imagine a Catholic ever coming to Quebec without knowing of the +virtues and miracles of St. Ann." + +"I must confess my ignorance too," said Bob. + +"Well, St. Ann de Beaupre is the patron saint of this particular parish +and for many, many years she had been doing miracles in that little town +over yonder. That magnificent church is a tribute donated by the +hundreds that have been blessed by her ministrations." + +"In what special field does the gracious Saint consent to show her +power?" asked Bob, with his best manner. + +"Towards the crippled," said the stranger. "Hundreds of crutches have +been left in that church as proof of the divine powers of St. Ann." + +"Is that so?" said Pud. + +"Yes, and there really seems to be some miraculous influence at work." + +"We must go there when we are coming home," said Bob. + +"It will pay you," said the stranger, "for you will see there some +things to be seen in no other part of North America except in Mexico." + +As they went down the river it gradually broadened, until they were +steaming along on what looked more like an inland sea than a river. In +due time, they came to the famous northern watering place, Murray Bay. +The ship stopped there for some time and the boys had a chance to hire a +carriage and go up into the town. They saw some nice hotels and +evidences of fashionable country places. It was getting dark as they +came off the mouth of the Saguenay River, and the high rocks on either +side as they moved on gave one the impression of great depth. This +impression was correct, as the river flows along a cleft in the strata +rather than along any bed that has been made by the action of the waters +themselves. They moved into a wharf that merely jutted out from the +rocky shore. Everything was confusion, for there did not seem to be any +one but Frenchmen on the wharf. The boys got off and waited in the glare +of a big torch light, made after the fashion of the lights used by +itinerant showmen. No Mr. Waterman appeared. + +"What was the name of that hotel?" asked Bob of Bill. + +"I can't remember it, but I have it in my notebook," said Bill. + +"Look it up, for if Mr. Waterman does not come soon, we'll go up there +as he directed us. Let's get our baggage." + +They collected this and were just on the point of making a start when +Bill was slapped on the back and turned to see Mr. Waterman standing +before them, dressed for the woods. + +"How are you boys?" asked Mr. Waterman, as he turned to Bob and Pud. + +"Fine as silk," said Pud. "We were just going to try to find that little +hotel you wrote us about." + +"We'll go up there to-night anyway and take the early boat down the +river in the morning. I've engaged rooms for you there and an early +breakfast." + +"Oh, Lord!" said Pud. "Early breakfast again. I'll be a 'shadder' of my +former self if this early rising stunt is to be my regular medicine." + +"Get used to it," said Mr. Waterman, "for you'll be up early from now +on, only some days it will be earlier than others. But I'll guarantee +that you'll get all the sleep that's good for you." + +"All right, I'm game," said Pud. "I came up here to have a good time and +get into condition. You're the doctor and I'll not kick on taking the +medicine." + +"It will be the sweetest medicine you ever had," said Mr. Waterman. +"Why, boy, we're going to have a real man's time this summer and you'll +be the first one to say so six weeks from now." + + + + +CHAPTER II + +UP THE ESCOUMAINS + + +About five o'clock the next morning, Bob was awakened by what sounded +like a parade under his windows. He got up and saw a lot of women and +men coming from the little church on the opposite corner. Bob's action +and noise in opening the window had awakened the others, as they were +all sleeping in a sort of dormitory. + +"What the deuce is going on outside?" asked Bill Williams. "Has the +circus come to town or why this procession so early in the morning?" + +"You must remember that you are in a real Catholic country and that the +Roman Catholic religion plays a very big part in the life of the people +here. The so-called procession you will hear any morning as it is merely +the good souls of the parish returning from the mass or the matin +service," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Well, let's get up now that we're all awake," said Bill. + +"Not all," said Bob, pointing to Pud, who slept on, totally unconscious +of all that had aroused the others. "Little Lord Fauntleroy is still +peacefully sleeping." + +"Not so loud," said Mr. Waterman. "You'll wake him up." + +"No fear of that," said Bill. "What's the answer, Bob? Shall we merely +mob him or what shall it be?" + +"Let's dump him on the floor and have some fun with him," said Bob. + +The two boys then went over and with a mighty shove, they dumped Pud on +the floor and turned cot and mattress over him. They both climbed on top +and only smothered sounds could be heard from beneath the pile. Then +like Goliath in his wrath, Pud arose, cot, mattress, blankets, two +yelling boys, and all, and shook himself. He made a bull-like rush at +Bob but Bill got him from behind and for five minutes there was some +pretty rough-house work in that room. + +"Ye gods! I'm hot," at last cried Bob, stepping back for a breathing +spell. + +"Same here," said Pud, sitting down on a cot and wiping off the sweat +with a pajama top that had gotten separated from its master during the +melee. + +"Let's get dressed and get some breakfast," said Bill. + +"Is this the regular setting up exercises that this little company of +mild-eyed anarchists have every morning?" asked Mr. Waterman in his +quiet way. "If so, I am afraid that I cannot recommend it for persons +nervously disposed." + +"Oh, this is nothing," said Bob. "This will just give us an appetite." + +"Well, I hear Madame Colombe busy getting breakfast ready, so we'll just +be in time," said Mr. Waterman. + +Ten minutes later, the party was seated around a table in the dining +room eating a breakfast of oatmeal, milk, ham and eggs, hot biscuits and +coffee. + +"The boat leaves at six-thirty so we haven't much time to lose," said +Mr. Waterman. + +"We'll be with you in a minute," said Bob. + +The boys hurried upstairs and came down with their dunnage bags. They +had expected to carry these down to the boat, but a little hotel cart +came along and took them down. They had a few minutes to spare as they +arrived at the wharf, so they went out to the little observation house +in the middle of the pond right near the wharf. This pond was used by +the Government as a Fishery Station and there were scores of magnificent +salmon in the pond. The boys were much interested in watching these +wonderful game fish. They could see them swimming around and +occasionally one of them would jump clear out of the water after a fly +or some other insect. + +"We'll have to catch a few like those this summer," said Mr. Waterman +with a glistening eye. + +"Will we really have a chance to catch salmon as large as those?" asked +Bob. + +"Oh, yes, on our Portneuf River trip, we should get some salmon just as +fine as these," said Mr. Waterman. + +"What do you catch them with? I'm sure I have nothing big enough to hold +a fish like that," said Pud. + +"We catch them with the regular rod and fly," replied their leader. + +"Don't say 'we'; say 'I' catch them, for I should think it would have to +be a real fisherman that could land such a big fish with such a small +line and rod," said Pud. + +"That's why we're coming up here," said Bill Williams. "My ambition is +to get one of those salmon and I don't want it unless I can catch it +with my regular tackle." + +"That's talking like a real fisherman and sportsman," said Mr. Waterman. +"Boys, this fishing is or should be considered a sport. That being so, +we must make it a matching of our wits against that of the fish. It +should not be merely our strength against theirs. We, as sportsmen, +should give them a chance." + +"That's the idea," said Bob. "Well, I'll consider that I am developing +into a real fisherman when I am able to land one of those big fellows." + +Just then the boat whistle was heard and the boys hurried on board. The +vessel that was to take them to Escoumains was an old side-wheel steamer +apparently of the vintage of about 1812. It did some wheezing and +puffing before it got straightened out for the trip. The boys looked +over the boat with interest, paying special attention to the people who +were on board. They were greatly interested in the talk and gestures of +the Frenchmen that composed the crew and most of the passengers. A +little old Frenchman with a fiddle also attracted their attention. A +few pennies soon had him playing away for dear life and calling off the +figures in French in a singsong voice. + +On their way down the river, the boat stopped at two places, at both of +which lumbering seemed to be the main industry. At last, the boat put in +for Escoumains. Two large tramp steamers were anchored off the town +loading lumber from big barges. The steamers drew too much water to get +into the town wharf, thus requiring two handlings of the lumber. Quite a +few people were on the wharf. Mr. Anderson, one of Mr. Waterman's men, +was awaiting them. As soon as they were off the boat, he had a carriage +ready and they were off for the little village a half mile away. They +stopped at Madame LaBlanche's boarding house, where Mr. Waterman had +made arrangements for keeping their "store" clothes while they were out +in the woods. They were shown upstairs and in a short time, the boys +were getting into their real wool suits. Mr. Waterman brought in the +shoepacks that he had made for them according to the measurements he had +taken previously. All fitted nicely, though Mr. Waterman looked over +them carefully. + +"It pays to be sure that your shoepacks are right," said Mr. Waterman, +"for they are the real boots for use in canoeing trips. They should be +comfortable." + +"Are these waterproof?" asked Bob. "Father told me that his shoepacks +were tight as a drum and that he stepped right out of the canoe into the +water whenever he wanted to." + +"That's right," replied Mr. Anderson. "It is possible that they may leak +just a little the first two days until the seams swell, but after that +they will be just as dry as rubber boots." + +This information caused Bill and Pud to look at their shoepacks with +more care. They were both anxious to try them out. Finally, they were +ready for the woods, with everything unnecessary put away at Madame +LaBlanche's. Their sleeping bags, extra shirts, moccasins, etc., were +in their dunnage bags and all of these were piled outside the door on +the porch. + +"We still have about a half hour before lunch so let us go over to the +store, as I want you all to meet Sandy MacPherson, the owner," said Mr. +Waterman. "Sandy is the big man of this village. He runs the big saw +mill, owns the store and manages scores of lumbermen in the winter when +the trees are cut many miles up the valleys. He's a good man to know as +everybody here does as he says. In addition, he talks English and that +helps when one cannot talk French very well." + +They all went over to the store and found it the center of male society +at least for the village. Several men were gathered there while others +came and went, buying things in the store, which was quite a large store +for such a small village. Sandy seemed delighted to meet the boys. + +"I'm delighted to meet you, boys," said he. "You're in for a fine time +if you're going into the woods with Mr. Waterman. If you get in trouble, +just call on me." + +The boys thanked him for his good wishes and after taking a look at the +big saw mill, they went back to the boarding house. + +"Fill up, boys, as this is the last meal you'll eat in a house for some +time," said Mr. Anderson. + +"That's all right, but I wager that they'll enjoy some of the meals +we're going to have on Lac Parent or Corbeau more than any they have had +in a long time," said Mr. Waterman. + +Madame LaBlanche outdid herself at this lunch for she had a very good +chicken dinner for the boys, with pie, cake, preserved raspberries and +crabapples for dessert. + +"This is a fine meal to start one off for the woods," said Pud. "I +couldn't walk a step if you paid me five dollars." + +"You won't have to walk for some time," said Mr. Anderson. "We're going +to drive in about sixteen miles and I'll wager that this dinner will be +pretty well digested by the time we get there. We're going in on an old +wood road so you will hardly find it like the macadamized roads you have +in the park in Philadelphia." + +A short time later they were off. Two carriages were to take them into +the woods, each drawn by a hardy looking though rather small +French-Canadian horse and driven by a habitant. Bob was in the front +seat with the driver, with Pud and Mr. Waterman in the back seat. Bill +and Mr. Anderson were in the other buggy. + +"Well, here's a chance to begin talking French," said Mr. Waterman to +Bob. "Bill tells me that you spout it quite well." + +"Bill is exaggerating," said Bob. "I used to talk French rather well and +I hope to pick it up soon again." + +"You will," said Mr. Waterman. "You will also find that these habitants +speak a pretty good dialect of French. In no time, Bob, you will be able +to talk just like the natives." + +"Allons, Gi-may," cried the driver to the horse as he touched him with +the whip. The horse responded nobly and they bowled along right merrily. +Bob tried to think what "Allons, Gi-may" meant. He got the first word +all right. That meant "Giddap or Go-along" in the vernacular but what +that "Gi-may" meant he could not think. He did not want to ask Mr. +Waterman so soon for information. Taking the bull by the horns, Bob +began a conversation with the driver. To be sure it was very limited, +for Bob had his troubles, but after a little while he got along very +well. He was soon asking the driver for the names of the various trees +they noted along the road. Bob thought that this would be valuable in +the woods. All the habitants in such a place as Escoumains are woodsmen, +and the driver, as such, knew the names of everything in the woods. But, +every once in a while, he would cry out "Allons, Gi-may" and Bob would +wonder what that word "Gi-may" meant. Soon the road led by a small +farmhouse that had about two acres cleared around it. + +"That's the last house you'll see," said the driver to Bob. Bob asked +Mr. Waterman if this was right. + +"That's right," said Mr. Waterman, "and you will soon know that it is +so, for the road gets worse from now on." + +This proved correct and Pud was bounced around so that he had no trouble +digesting his dinner. + +"This is some road," said Pud. + +"All the same, we must keep going for we want to ford the river before +dark," said Mr. Waterman. + +"What river?" asked Pud. + +"The Escoumains," said Mr. Waterman. "That is the name of the river at +the little village from which we started. The village is called after +the river. You will get to know this river well before the summer is +over, for we'll run down it to the village some time." + +"Are there any rapids?" asked Bob. + +"You can't find any river in this country without fast water here and +there," said Mr. Waterman. "The only difference is that some rivers have +faster water than others. After I have seen you on the lakes awhile and +have had the guides teach you a few things we'll take a try at some fast +water and you'll think that there is no better sport than shooting a +rapid." + +"It must be great fun," said Bob. + +Shortly afterwards, they struck the river and the road led up along the +bank. It followed the windings of the river and it was slow work. Every +now and then the driver yelled "Allons, Gi-may," and Bob racked his +brain to think what "Gi-may" meant. At last it came to him in a flash. +He turned to the driver and asked in French, + +"Is the horse named Gi-may?" + +"Oh, yes," said the driver. "He belongs to Monsieur MacPherson and he +calls him Gi-may." + +"Oh, you mean Jimmy," said Bob. + +"But, yes, Gi-may," said the driver, and Bob had solved the riddle. He +then told Mr. Waterman how he had tried to think what "Gi-may" meant, +thinking at first that it meant something like "Allons" but that he had +found out it was the horse's name. + +It was getting dark when they came to the ford. Mr. Anderson yelled like +an Indian and his call was answered by a real Indian yell. A moment +later, two men appeared on the opposite bank. + +"That's Joe and Pierre," said Mr. Waterman. + +"How are we going to get across?" asked Pud. + +"That's easy," said Mr. Waterman. + +The driver answered Pud by driving the horse down the bank into the +water. The stream ran swiftly and the horse put his head down sniffing +the water as if frightened. The driver used the whip and the horse +proceeded. + +"The river's pretty high," yelled Mr. Waterman to Mr. Anderson. "You had +better put those dunnage bags on the seat. That buggy of yours is lower +than this one." + +"All right," came back the cry, almost drowned by the noise of the +carriage as it bumped on the rocks at the bottom of the river, the swish +of the water and the noise of the horse's hoofs. Each took his dunnage +bag on his lap and in the center of the river they had to lift up their +feet as the water came into the body of the buggy. It almost seemed that +they would be swept down the river. Bob looked at the driver and at Mr. +Waterman. Both had a look of unconcern on their faces so Bob felt that +things were all right. This turned out to be the case, for five minutes +later the horse came out on a sort of sand bar. The driver drove down +stream a little and then, putting the whip to the horse, they tore up a +steep bank and along a wood road. They had gone only a little distance +before they came to an opening where they found Joe and Pierre busy +about a fire. The other buggy came up in a moment and everything was +dumped out on the side of the road. Mr. Waterman had bought a lot of +supplies and this was the real reason why the two guides had met them +for they were needed to get the stuff back into the camp where they +planned to stay for a week or more. After paying off the drivers, the +latter turned and drove back. + +"Are they going all the way back to Escoumains to-night?" asked Bob. + +"Yes," said Mr. Anderson. "They will go back as far as that logging camp +we passed about four miles away. There they will give their horses a +little grain and as soon as the moon comes up they will be off, and back +in Escoumains about midnight. Those little Canadian horses are very +strong and can stand a lot of hard work." + +Bob, Pud, and Bill stood around watching the guides and the two men as +they busied themselves about the fire. + +"Let's have supper first," said Mr. Waterman. "Afterwards we'll pack up +the stores we have brought in and get them ready to carry so that we can +make a real early start and get to our camp in Lac Parent in time for +breakfast." + +This was voted a good scheme by the others. Pierre was the guide that +was most noticed by the boys. He was a full blooded Montagnais Indian +and could not speak a word of English, though he talked French and his +own Indian tongue. He was straight as an arrow and moved with the +litheness and silence of the real Indian. Though his expression never +changed, the boys could see that he missed nothing that went on about +him. Joe was a little Frenchman. He could talk a little English and was +very proud of that fact. + +"The dinnaire is prepair," said he to Bob with a smile. + +"Ah, that's the kind of French I can understand," said Pud, as he moved +over towards the fire. + +"Now be prepared to shout," said Mr. Anderson. "Here's some real trout +caught within the hour and cooked as only Joe can cook them." + +He gave each of the boys a whole trout out of the frying pan and this, +with bread, butter, prunes and coffee, was their supper. The trout was +hot and all three boys stated that they had never tasted anything better +in their lives. They all meant it too. At their praise, Joe's face +lighted up, for he was proud of his cooking. They formed a real woodsman +picture as they sat or squatted around the fire eating their supper +without the use of plates or a table. The picture was rather out of +harmony, for the Indian and the Frenchman were the typical woodsmen, the +two older men hardened fishermen, but even the merest novice could see +that the three boys were unused to the woods and their present +surroundings. + +But, in any case, the scene was not lost on the boys. The bright light +cast by the fire on the faces of the men and the dark shadows of the +woods formed a contrast that was fascinating to the boys. They could not +keep their eyes off Pierre with his silent but speedy movements, and his +impassive face, nor from Joe, who formed such a contrast with his +animation and gestures, his good-natured talk and his smile. Mr. +Waterman and Mr. Anderson sat to the side talking in low tones, and the +boys felt that these were two men worthy of their confidence. They +looked as though they would be ready for any emergency that might arise. +They were startled by a splash in the river. Pierre seemed to vanish as +if by magic into the trees on the side towards the river. Though he went +with great speed, the boys listened in vain to hear him tearing through +the bushes. All ears were tensed but not a sound was heard. + +"Pierre will let us know what it is," said Mr. Waterman in a +matter-of-fact tone, as he motioned the boys to sit down again. "Don't +worry, there's nothing up here to do us much harm. Even the bears run +from us and it's necessary to hunt them carefully if you want to see +one, though we see traces of them every day." + +As they were talking, Pierre came back almost as quickly and silently as +he had gone. He sat down by the fire and said about three words to Mr. +Waterman and relapsed into silence again. + +"'Big fish,' he says," translated Mr. Waterman. + +"It sounded like a deer to me," said Mr. Anderson. + +"We'll look for tracks in the morning before we leave," said Mr. +Waterman. + +He then turned to Pierre and talked to him in French. + +"'No deer. Big fish,' he says," said Mr. Waterman as he turned around. + +"Well, if he's sure of it, he's right," said Mr. Anderson. "They have +ways of knowing some of these wood matters that seem uncanny to us." + +"Well, let's get to bed," said Mr. Waterman. + +They all turned to their dunnage bags and got out their sleeping bags. +Pierre and Joe had only a blanket and they lay down by the fire, +wrapping the blanket around their shoulders but otherwise making no +further preparation. + +"Is that the way they sleep all the time?" said Bob. + +"No, they probably did not want to burden themselves with anything +extra, as they have lots to carry to-morrow." + +The guides had cut down some boughs and the boys soon had a fine bed +ready. They were stretched out looking up at the stars in a very few +moments and Bob felt that this was just the beginning of what promised +to be a most interesting summer. For some time he lay there, watching +lazily the fire as it occasionally threw into relief the green branches +of the trees, or made the shadows deeper and more mysterious. It was not +long, however, that he lay thus undisturbed, for the gnats, "les +moustiques" as the guides called them, began to buzz around and made his +life miserable. Over the fire, Bob had not been much bothered by this +pest but further away they soon became unbearable. + +"Ye gods!" said Pud, as he sat up in his blankets. "I'm getting eaten +alive." + +"Let's make a smudge," said Bob. "That will help some." + +The two boys got up and soon had a real smudge throwing out a sickly +smoke over their blankets. All this time Bill slept peacefully. It +seemed that with his head buried in his blankets he was able to stand +the gnats, but the smoke got him. Evidently a good puff got under his +blankets, for he woke up suddenly and said in a choked voice, + +"What in sin's going on? I'm choking. What's the idea?" + +Just then a swarm of gnats enveloped his head and he ducked under his +blankets. No more was said, for Bill knew why the smoke was there. All +three covered up their heads and were soon asleep. It got real cold in +the middle of the night and the gnats became too torpid to move. The +boys slept like logs for they were tired. It could not have been more +than four o'clock when the cheery voice of Mr. Waterman was heard +calling them up. + +"Out of your blankets, boys. We're going all the way to Lac Parent +before breakfast and that will take some hiking." + +In a few minutes, the camp was a scene of the greatest activity. The +guides filled large dunnage bags with the provisions that had been +brought in. This was soon done and the boys had also packed their +blankets in their bags. + +"Is everything ready?" asked Mr. Waterman. + +"I think so," said Mr. Anderson. "You boys will have about all you can +handle to carry in your dunnage bags. We'll manage the rest all right, I +guess." + +The guides led off after loading themselves with two large bags. Each of +them carried at least one hundred and fifty pounds. The Indian seemed to +handle his load with the greatest ease. He looked back and helped the +boys adjust their bags more comfortably, or so that they would carry +more easily. They had gone only a half mile when they came to a small +lake. It was only a quarter mile across it, but the guides had canoes +there. The loads were soon in the boats and they got the other side +very quickly. Then to the surprise of the boys, the Indian and Mr. +Waterman got the packs on their backs and then, lifting the canoes, they +got them over their shoulders and away they went. + +"Gee whizz!" said Bill. "I thought you two had a big load on before but +you walk away with those canoes with ease." + +"There's a great knack in carrying canoes," said Mr. Waterman. + +"That's all right," said Pud. "But those two men must have at least two +hundred pounds on their backs and they are going right along." + +"I'll admit," said Mr. Anderson, "that they have a larger load than +usual, but they are not going far and we'll relieve them on the next +portage." + +The way led up across a ridge. Part of it was rather steep and the boys +found themselves panting as they got to the top and began the descent to +the next little lake beyond. They found Mr. Waterman and Pierre already +there and with the canoes in the water. + +"That was some pull," said Mr. Waterman. "Pierre is in better condition +than I am. He doesn't seem to mind it a bit, but I found that a little +heavy before breakfast." + +"We'll help with the dunnage on the next portage," said Bob. "My bag +does not feel very heavy. Let me try the canoe." + +"I'll let you have the canoe," said Mr. Waterman, "but I'll take your +stuff." + +This was done. Mr. Waterman showed Bob how to arrange the paddles so +that they would rest on his shoulders. He also showed him the use of the +small rope that Bob had noticed along the middle stay of the canoe. This +was put over the head so that when the canoe was rightly placed Bob was +carrying it on his shoulders, his forearms and also his head. He found +the weight well distributed and he walked away like a veteran. He found +it awkward work at first to keep to the trail and to avoid bumping the +canoe into the trees. He soon got used to this and went along finely. He +had no trouble until they got to the top of the little divide between +the two lakes and started down. They had gone down only a little piece +before he stepped on a piece of slippery moss, his feet flew out from +under him, and down he came with the canoe on top of him. Rather +crestfallen, he got up and began to arrange the paddles, etc., in place +again. + +"Had a tumble?" said Mr. Waterman. "That was because you didn't have the +weight well balanced coming down the hill. You'll soon learn. Do you +need any help with the canoe?" + +"No, I think that I can manage," said Bob. + +He then caught hold of the gunwales of the canoe and started to lift it +over his head, but he plunged forward and down came the canoe again. + +"Let me help you this time," said Mr. Waterman. "When we get to camp and +get rid of these packs, I'll show you just how to do it. It's easy when +you know how." + +Bob once more had the canoe on his shoulders and arrived at the next +lake without further mishap. They found every one waiting for them. They +were soon across and after one more portage, they reached Lac Parent. +Far down the lake, they saw smoke rising. + +"Jean is waiting for us," said Mr. Anderson to Mr. Waterman. + +"Is there another guide?" asked Bob. + +"Oh, yes," replied Mr. Waterman. "We have Pierre's son with us. He was +told to have breakfast ready for us at six o'clock and I'll bet he's +been waiting for some time, as it has taken us a little longer than I +expected to get here." + +The two canoes sped down the lake. The boys looked around with much +interest. There was a real mountain on the far shore of the lake, part +of which came down to the water very precipitously. The small islands +in the lake made it more picturesque. They soon rounded a point of land +and came full on the camp lying before them. With its line of tents, the +smoke curling up from the fire, and the beauty of the forests in the +background, it made a scene that would rejoice any fisherman's eye. As +they came to the shore, Jean came running down. He was a big fellow for +his age, seventeen. He had very regular features like his father, and +was remarkably well built. + +The boys landed and one and all felt that at last they were fairly in +the woods and ready for whatever might befall. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +CAMP AT LAKE PARENT + + +No sooner had they landed than Jean announced that breakfast was ready. + +"Let's get something into our stomachs before we think of anything +else," said Mr. Waterman. + +"That suits me," said Pud, and all the others joined in so that the +motion was carried unanimously. + +The party went across a little stream and sat down at a table made of +logs that had been split fairly in two. The middle sides of the logs +were up, thus making a smooth surface, but this was really made a fact +by big strips of birch bark that covered the top. A long seat at each +side of the table was also made out of a split log, while a sawed-off +stump made a special seat for Mr. Waterman at the head of the table. +This table was under a big tent fly. Jean had set the table with tin +plates and cups and a goodly portion of prunes was on each plate. They +set to at once and after the prunes, some good oatmeal was brought on. +To the surprise of the boys, they had milk. + +"Where do you get milk up here?" asked Bill. + +"Oh, we get it from the mountain goats," said Mr. Anderson, with a wink +to Mr. Waterman. + +"We're lucky," said the latter. "We now have four mountain goats that +are getting real tame, though it takes some time to round them up each +morning." + +"Why this tastes like real milk to me," said Pud. + +"Of course," said Mr. Anderson. "Very few people can tell the difference +between goat's milk and the ordinary cow's milk." + +"I'll have to watch you milk them," said Pud. "It must be interesting." + +"It is interesting," said Mr. Waterman. "I really think that we'll soon +have another goat around here." + +At this, Mr. Anderson laughed heartily, and Pud saw that the laugh was +on him. + +"I'm easy," said Pud; "I know I'm easy. But seriously speaking, where do +you get this milk? It's a little thin but otherwise it's O.K." + +"It's evaporated milk," said Mr. Waterman. "It comes in cans and is easy +to make, as it requires only the proper quantity of water to make it +fairly good. You'll get a lot of it this summer for that's the only kind +one can have in the woods." + +"We're having ham and eggs this morning," said Mr. Anderson. "We're +going to let you have the pleasure of getting your own fish for dinner." + +"Oh, Heavens," said Pud. "I'm afraid that I'll go hungry, for I've never +cast a line in my life." + +"Well, the lake is full of them, and even a very poor fisherman is sure +to catch a few," said Mr. Waterman. + +"That's good news," said Bill. "I'm a novice at the game, but I +certainly am anxious to see what I can do and to try my hand." + +"That's the spirit," said Mr. Anderson. "It won't take long for you boys +to learn. As soon as we get things settled a bit here, we'll go after +the shiny beauties." + +After their breakfast, the boys had a chance to look around. They were +delighted with the site of the camp. It was on a level spot at the shore +and the camp was divided by a little stream. On the far side of the +stream was the tent for the guides, the cook tent, and the dining tent, +which consisted of the table described before with the big tent fly over +it. Looking across the little stream, the layout was not only very +picturesque, but it also served to divide the camp very well from what +might be called the social standpoint. The guides had put quite a +little time on clearing up the shore so that there was a very nicely +cleared spot in front of the five shelter tents, all of which faced the +lake. They made a very fine appearance. The view from the front of the +tents was very good. The lake opened out, and right opposite there was a +big bluff that shot straight down into the lake from a height of at +least three hundred feet. The whole camp, including the tents for the +guides, stretched along the water front for about one hundred yards. + +There was one other feature of the camp which proved especially +interesting to the boys. The guides had broadened this stream which +divided the camp into a sort of pool near the edge of the lake, with a +little log bridge at each end of the pool. Into this pool, they had put +any unusually fine trout they had caught, and already there were nearly +a hundred speckled beauties swimming around in the clear water. Each end +of the pool had been fixed with crossed willow wands so that the fish +could not get out. This pond had proved a never-ending source of +pleasure to the boys, for it must be remembered, that they had +practically never seen a trout before. + +"When do you expect Jack back?" Mr. Waterman inquired of Mr. Anderson. + +"He said he'd be back some time to-day," replied the latter. + +"Who's Jack?" asked Pud. + +"He's one of the guides," said Mr. Waterman. "He's a corker. He's been +up in through to Lac Corbeau trimming up some of the portages." + +"You'll find Jack the best fellow in the world," said Mr. Anderson. "He +knows the woods like a book and he can cook very well. We won't know +what real grub is until he gets back." + +"Can he talk English?" asked Bill. + +"Sure," said Mr. Waterman. "He's a Yankee. I brought him up here the +first year so I would be sure to have one dependable guide." + +"Well, let's go fishing," said Pud, as if that was all there was about +it. + +"All right," said Mr. Waterman, "but first of all, you'll have to be +initiated into the ABC's of fishing, namely, getting your rods and lines +ready." + +"What's hard about that?" asked Pud. + +"Oh, nothing much if you know how, but quite a little if you have never +set up a rod and line," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Get your tackle and come over to the table," said Mr. Anderson. + +They were all soon there and under the skillful tutelage of Mr. Waterman +and Mr. Anderson, the boys soon had their rods in readiness. Pud was +much surprised at the care taken by Mr. Waterman in seeing that +everything was ship-shape before he would pass the tackle as perfect. +Pud learned more about reels, lines, leaders and flies than he had ever +heard tell of before. At last they were all ready. + +"I'll paddle, Bob. You, Mr. Anderson, take Bill and I'll have Joe look +after Pud," said Mr. Waterman. + +"What's the idea?" asked Bill. + +"Fishing in this lake, two generally go together, one paddling and the +other casting," said Mr. Waterman. + +"That would be the best way to-day in any case," said Mr. Anderson. "We +can each show the boys how to cast and, in fact, give them a lesson in +the art of trout fishing. When you see Joe here, or Jack or Mr. Waterman +casting, boys, you will agree with me that real trout fishing is an +art." + +"We'll need the instruction," said Bob. + +They were soon out on the water. + +"Let's have your rod a minute, Bob," said Mr. Waterman. Bob handed it +over and his tutor showed him how to cast. Bob was awkward at first but +he was soon casting very nicely. Bob was so interested trying to get the +knack of casting that he wholly forgot that he was on a lake full of +trout. He was therefore very much surprised to feel his fly snatched +away like an arrow. + +"You've got one," called Mr. Waterman. + +Bob pulled in quickly and his rod bent almost double. + +"Give him line, give him line," cried Mr. Waterman. + +Bob let out his line and all at once the tension ceased. + +"I believe he's got away," said Bob. + +"Reel in, reel in!" cried Mr. Waterman. + +Bob did so, and the fish made another rush. This time Bob let out his +line and when the trout stopped he began to reel in. He soon saw the +trout near the canoe and tried to pull him out of the water into the +canoe with a motion as fast as he had often done when fishing for +catfish on the banks of a river. He got the trout out of the water, but +with a mighty wiggle, the trout hopped off the hook and disappeared like +a silver streak in the water. + +"I didn't think you were going to do that," said Mr. Waterman. "I wasn't +looking, as I was just getting the net ready. The next time, pull him +easily to the side of the canoe and I'll get him with the landing net." + +"I'm sorry," said Bob. + +"That's all right," said Mr. Waterman. "It was really my fault. The +novice does just what you did nine times out of ten, and I should have +remembered that and warned you." + +"I'll remember the next time," said Bob, emphatically. + +"I wonder how the others are getting on," said Bob, as he looked around. +Bill was down the lake casting in good fashion. Pud was close by, and +looked very awkward. + +"Watch out," said Joe to him, "or you will catch me in the eye." + +"Don't worry," replied Pud, "I'm much more likely to take off one of my +own ears." + +"Do it like you crack de whip," suggested Joe. + +"All right," said Pud. + +He gave the line a mighty heave but the fly flew too low and caught him +in the back. It must have stuck in a little, for Pud gave a lurch +forward and, in spite of Joe's frantic efforts with his paddle, over +went the canoe. + +"Hold on to your rod," yelled Mr. Waterman, when he saw Pud go sprawling +into the water. That was the last thing Pud thought of for he cast the +rod away and turned to the canoe. Joe was already there. With an expert +twirl, he righted the canoe with but little water in it. In another +moment he was in the back seat, giving Pud directions how to climb in +without upsetting the canoe. Three different times Pud upset the canoe +before he got in. As they started to row back to the camp Pud felt +something sticking him in the back. He felt and it was the fly which had +remained fastened to him. + +"Stay quiet, Pud," yelled Bob. "We'll come over and see if we can't save +your rod." + +Pud stopped paddling and they soon fished up his rod from the bottom of +the lake. + +"You're lucky," said Mr. Waterman. "Remember that rods do not grow on +bushes up here. If you're tipped over again, hold on to your rod. Paste +that right in your hat and remember it." + +"I won't forget it," said Pud. "I'll be back again when I get some dry +clothes on. I'm going to catch a fish this morning if I have to dive for +one." + +"You dive enough already," said Joe in his serious way. + +Bob and Mr. Waterman paddled off and it was not long before Bob had +landed his first trout. It was a beauty, about eighteen inches long and +weighing about two pounds. In another hour he had seven in his basket +and was getting more skillful each time. + +"Suppose you paddle and let me fish for a while," said Mr. Waterman at +last. + +"Good," said Bob. "I'll be glad to see you do it." + +"You won't see anything extraordinary," said Mr. Waterman. "I just want +to show you a few things though. We've kept out in open water. Well, the +best place for trout is near the shore, under overhanging branches, near +rocks or trees that have fallen into the lake. If I had brought you to +such places at first you would probably have lost half your tackle. But, +to be a good fisherman, you must not only know how to cast, but you must +be able to cast accurately." + +Bob then followed Mr. Waterman's directions and paddled close to the +shore. With unerring aim, Mr. Waterman cast the fly almost to the +desired inch. It seemed uncanny to Bob, but trout after trout was hooked +and played with a master hand. Only one got away, due to no fault of Mr. +Waterman. + +"We've caught plenty," said Mr. Waterman at last. "I guess we won't +starve for a couple of days." + +"I should think not," said Bob, as he looked in his basket and saw the +mass of speckled beauties. + +Their fishing had brought them down to the far end of the lake. + +"That's quite a mountain there," said Bob, pointing to the far shore. + +"Yes, the whole country here is filled with just such mountains with +lakes on at least three sides. It is a curious formation, but this makes +it very fine for hunting and fishing." + +The paddle back to camp was soon over. They found Bill and Pud also just +getting out of their canoes. + +"That's some sport," said Bill. "I have nearly two dozen fine trout. I +hope to be able to cast well before long and then I'll do better." + +"How did you get along, Pud?" asked Bob. + +"Oh, pretty well. It took me some time to get the knack of it, but Joe +at last said that I was improving. I knew I was, because after a while +he stopped dodging every time I cast." + +The boys got out of the canoes and made for their tents. + +"Wait a minute, wait a minute," said Mr. Anderson. "We all clean our own +fish at this camp, so come along." + +The boys followed him, and under his direction they soon got so they +could clean a trout in no time at all. They then made for their tents, +got stripped and had a good swim. + +Mr. Waterman and Mr. Anderson watched the boys from the shore. + +"Well, it's fine to have the boys with us again, isn't it?" said Mr. +Waterman. + +"You bet," said Mr. Anderson. "They are a fine trio. I only hope that +those who come later will be as agreeable." + +"I like that Bob Hunt," said Mr. Waterman. "He's very keen. He took to +casting in no time. He'll be an expert in a month." + +"Williams is a fine boy and Pud is awkward, but I'm no judge of +character if he isn't as big-hearted as they make them," said Mr. +Anderson. + +"He's a card. It certainly was funny to see him casting. Every time he +cast Joe would duck, and at last he caught himself in the back so hard +that he tipped over the canoe." + +"Is that so?" said Mr. Anderson. + +Mr. Waterman then had to tell him about the upset and they laughed +heartily. + +"He's a good swimmer, so there wasn't any danger," said Mr. Waterman in +conclusion. + +"He's good and strong and should make a good man for the carries," +remarked Mr. Anderson, as he noted Pud's bulky form as he came out of +the water. + +"Yes, some good portaging will take off about ten pounds of fat and make +him as hard as nails," said Mr. Waterman. + +"What's that you say?" asked Pud, as he turned towards them. + +"I was just saying," said Mr. Waterman, "that some good portaging would +take ten pounds or so off you and make you as hard as nails." + +"Lead me to it. I'm game," replied Pud. "I came up here not only to +learn how to fish, but mainly to get hardened up for football in the +fall." + +"Don't worry then," said Mr. Anderson. "Anybody that charges you next +October will think that he has run into a stone wall." + +"How long before dinner?" asked Pud, as he looked longingly across the +little stream where Jean was busily engaged around the fire. + +"Not very long," said Mr. Waterman. "Let's go over and see if we can +hurry things along." + +"All right," said Pud. "Just give me a minute to slip into my clothes." + +Mr. Waterman went over to the fire and he was joined there in a few +minutes by all three boys. They were set at peeling potatoes and onions, +for Joe had three partridges the previous day and they were going to +have a stew. The boys' task was soon through and it was not long until +the smell of the partridge stew and the fresh trout on the fire fairly +made the boys' mouths water. They soon set the table and then went off +to try and get a look at a woodpecker they heard hammering away in the +woods. They had just gotten under the big old tree on which the +woodpecker was busy and were watching his diligent operations when they +heard a welcome call and they broke for the camp. They arrived with Pud +bringing up the rear, puffing and blowing. They then sat down to what +all the boys afterwards stated seemed to them the best meal they had +ever tasted. Partridge stew, fresh trout, hot bread cooked in an oven +that stood before the fire and caught the heat in that way, plenty of +tea and a dessert of stewed apricots formed the menu. It was indeed a +merry party that sat around the table with Mr. Waterman at the head. +The guides were the waiters and they were kept busy bringing the trout +hot and sizzling from the fire to the table. + +"I take it all back," said Bill Williams, "I said I didn't like fish. I +meant the kind we get in the city. But--this trout is fit for the gods. +It is certainly good." + +"You're right," said Pud. "I didn't think that any fish could taste so +good." + +"My sentiments, too," said Bob, "and as for this partridge stew, there's +only one thing the matter with it and that there isn't enough of it." + +"That's something we don't have every day, but we have the fish always +and we never get tired of it," said Mr. Anderson. + +At last, filled to repletion, they leaned back and began a general +conversation. + +"I know one thing," said Pud, with a sigh. + +"What's that?" asked Bill. + +"I'll never take off any weight here. I've just eaten enough to feed a +family." + +"Don't worry," said Mr. Waterman. "You'll need all the food you get when +you're carrying a canoe across some of the portages we'll be on this +summer." + +"We'll take it easy for an hour, and then let us all get busy and get +out balsam boughs for our beds. Mr. Waterman and I have a pretty good +lot already, but a little more will help. We've left you the privilege +of making your own beds as all good campers insist on doing." + +"That's a good idea," said Mr. Waterman. "That will take some time. +There's a lot of cleaning up to do along the shore front also, so that +we'll put in a little time each day on that. We'll kill two birds with +one stone, as we'll get out a lot of firewood at the same time. That +will leave the guides free to make us a landing." + +"Where will you get the boards?" asked Bill. + +"Leave it to Joe," said Mr. Anderson. "He'll have as nice a landing out +there in a day or two as you would care to see, and there won't be a +nail in it and it will be made entirely with his axe." + +"I'll watch them do it," said Pud, with an air of unbelief. + +They all then went to their tents and for an hour they lounged around, +dozing and talking. Mr. Anderson then roused them out. They got their +short axes and went into the woods. Each had a big bag and it was not +very long until they returned laden with the fragrant tips. More than +one trip was necessary, but at last all had downy balsam beds on which +to lay their blankets. They made up their blankets for the night and did +various other things around the tents. + +"Let's go for a paddle," at last said Bob. + +This was agreed to eagerly, and they all got into a canoe and went on an +exploring expedition. First they went opposite and started to climb the +bluff. They found it a harder task than they had supposed, as finally +they had to go back some distance before they could get to the top. At +last they came out on the edge and brought Mr. Waterman and Mr. Anderson +down to the edge of the opposite shore by their shouts. They waved to +the boys and then slowly disappeared in the trees. + +"This is some little mountain, isn't it?" said Bob. + +"It certainly is," said Bill. + +"Let's roll down one of these big bowlders and see what happens," said +Pud. + +The front of the bluff was rather crumbly, with big rocks near the edge +looking as if they had been left there by the frost, or rather as if the +frost had pried away their brothers to let them crash down into the +lake. They soon found a big rock that looked as if it would move easily. +Pud found a small tree that had fallen down, and with this as a lever +they loosened the rock and it started down the cliff. It moved slowly at +first and the boys drew close to the edge to watch its course. Down it +dashed, gathering momentum and finally taking along with it into the +water a small tree that grew out from the mountain about half way down. +In their eagerness to see the splash they went too near to the edge, and +the ground began to give way beneath them. Bob, as usual, was the first +to act. He bumped Bill back with his shoulder and then caught Pud's coat +just as it was disappearing. Bill, quick-witted also, rushed to his +assistance, and between them they hauled Pud back, though all three were +on the ground and nearly over the edge before the two could stop the +heavy Pud. A yell from the opposite shore told them that Mr. Waterman +and Mr. Anderson had seen their predicament. Bob and Bill held on and +slowly pulled Pud up to them. When all three at last arose, probably +only a minute later, they were bathed in perspiration, as they had all +been under a terrible physical strain. + +"That was a close shave," said Pud, as he walked over to the edge to +look down. + +"Come back, you crazy Indian. Don't you know that it was your weight +that caused the trouble before, and there you are, trying to tempt fate +again," said Bob. + +"You're right, fellows. I'm some ungrateful cuss. I've not even thanked +you for saving my precious neck." + +"Don't thank me. Thank Bob," said Bill. "He pushed me back and then +caught you just as you were preparing to take a high dive that would +have made Steve Brodie look like a piker. Thank Bob. He's always there +with the presence of mind stuff when it's needed." + +"Not a bit of it, Pud," said Bob. "Bill is too modest. If he hadn't +caught me in time, you would have pulled me over the edge, so you see we +both owe our lives to him." + +"I guess it's up to me to do all the thanking, for if you had not +grabbed my coat, you would not have been in any danger yourself." + +"Well, let's forget it, fellows," said Bob. + +Just then they heard a voice from the water, and they looked down to see +their two leaders in a canoe. + +"We're all right," yelled Pud. + +"Don't go near the edge," yelled Mr. Waterman. "It's dangerous." + +"All right," yelled Bob. "We're coming right down, so don't worry." + +They found the two men waiting for them when they reached their canoe at +the bottom of the cliff. Explanations were in order. + +"We saw it all," said Mr. Waterman, "for when that rock started down +that cliff it made such a racket that we rushed down to the shore. We +felt like yelling at you to get back, but just as the thought occurred +to us, we saw the rock under your feet giving way. Then Bob knocked Bill +back and caught Pud's coat. We thought it was all over with the two of +you, but Bill recovered his balance just in time to grab Bob and, I tell +you, we sweat some while you were tugging to get Pud back, for it was a +wonder that the rock under you did not give way and let you all down." + +"You're a plucky lot of boys," said Mr. Anderson. "You will have to +remember not to go too near to the edge of these cliffs up here, for the +frost has made the face of some of them very brittle." + +"We certainly won't forget it," said Bill. + +"We've had enough excitement for one day," said Bob. "Let's go back to +camp and take it easy for the rest of the afternoon." + +"I'll take it back. I'll take it back," said Pud, as he held up his +hands in mock terror. + +"What's that you'll take back?" asked Bob. + +"That I was bound to put on flesh up here. To get thrown out of a canoe +in the morning and to come within an ace of making a three hundred foot +dive in the afternoon is just about enough excitement to make any one +lose weight. I bet I lost five pounds in that minute and a half when Bob +had me by the coat, and I was wondering whether he could hold on to my +elephantine form; whether the rock would not give way, and whether I +could get back to safety. I sweat like a bull." + +"It certainly made me sweat too," said Bob. + +"That was because you were under terrific physical and nervous tension. +A minute or even half a minute under such conditions will exhaust one +more than half a day's hard work," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Gee, I don't dare write home my full experiences of my first day at +camp," said Pud. "That mamma of mine would be up here taking me home." + +"Yes, I guess we had both better let this story wait until we are home, +for it would only worry them," said Bob. + +"That's the sensible thing to do, for it is very unlikely that you will +be exposed to such danger a second time," said Mr. Anderson. + +The two canoes started across the lake. They noticed the small tree +dislodged by the bowlder. It was floating near the base of the cliff and +had been snapped off like a pipe stem. + +In spite of the excitement of the day, the boys had a good appetite for +their supper. Afterwards they sat around the camp fire that had been +made in front of Mr. Waterman's tent and talked of many things. The +guides could be seen lying back on their balsam boughs before the fire, +talking and gesticulating. + +"We'll have to go over and talk to the guides some time," said Bob. +"They seem to have a lot to tell each other." + +"Yes, they are talkative to-night. Generally they have not much to say +unless you get them telling some of their experiences," said Mr. +Anderson. + +"What do you say to a taste of portaging to-morrow?" asked Mr. Waterman +of the boys. + +"That's fine," said Bob, answering for the others. "Where shall we go?" + +"We'll go up north to a little lake where the water always seems a +little warmer than it is here, probably because it's shallower. We'll +catch some fish, climb a mountain and have a good swim." + +"That 'listens' fine," said Pud. + +"We'll take a lunch along and make a day of it," said Mr. Anderson. "For +one, I'm going to turn in, as I have been up since four o'clock this +morning, and I'm dead for sleep." + +"That's a good idea," said Mr. Waterman. + +In a short time, the boys were sound asleep and only the glowing coals +told the starry sky that there human beings were to be found. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +ACROSS THE PORTAGE + + +Six o'clock the next morning found every one up and ready for a dip. Mr. +Anderson, having heard of the fact that Pud was bound to have his +morning dip no matter how cold the water, thought to have some sport +with him. + +"Pud, have you seen our famous shower bath?" asked Mr. Anderson quietly. + +"No. Where is it?" said Pud. + +"It's just up this little stream. It's a little cold for me, but they +tell me that you like cold water in the morning." + +"Oh, yes," said Bill, "Pud has to have his cold shower every morning, +winter or summer." + +"Lead us to it," said Bob. + +Mr. Anderson then led the boys up a path which finally came out right +under a fifteen-foot waterfall. It certainly looked like a natural +shower bath, for the water was broken in its fall by the jutting rocks. +Bill put his hand into the water and pulled it back with a jerk. + +"Some cold," said he. + +Bob did the same. + +"Me for the lake. That's too cold for my blood," was Bob's remark. + +It was certainly up to Pud. He tried the water and could hardly restrain +himself from pulling back. + +"Fine, fine," said Pud, as he pushed under the down-rushing water and +stood there for a minute. He came out almost breathless because of the +contraction of his muscles by the cold water. + +"Won't you indulge?" asked Mr. Anderson, turning to Bill and Bob. + +"No, thank you," said Bill. "To tell the truth, I really prefer the +lake." + +"Well, I'll beat you to it," said Bob, and off they dashed down the +path. In a moment Mr. Anderson and Pud heard them splash as they plunged +into the lake. + +"That's some cold shower," said Pud. + +"I thought that you would like it," said Mr. Anderson seriously. + +Pud looked at him said nothing as they went down the path. As they came +out at the lake, Mr. Waterman said, + +"Pierre objects to our using the stream for bathing purposes, as we use +it for our drinking and cooking." + +"I didn't think of that," said Mr. Anderson. + +"Neither did I until he spoke to me about it," said Mr. Waterman. + +"That's too bad," said Pud. "I thought I was going to have a real cold +shower every morning." + +He said it so seriously that neither Mr. Waterman nor Mr. Anderson knew +whether he really meant it or not. To Bob later, Pud stated that the +intervention of Pierre was providential for he had never been under such +a real icy shower before. + +After their swim they all sat down to breakfast and enjoyed every bit of +it. After breakfast they spent some time cleaning up the camp. They got +everything ship-shape in their tents first and then they cleared up a +part of the beach. The boys enjoyed this as the experience of wielding +an axe was new to then. They also had cause for wonder at the way in +which their two leaders used the axes. They went at things very +strenuously and seemed to be able to hit just where they wished. Bob +commented on their skill, but they both stated that they were mere +beginners in comparison with the guides. + +About nine o'clock Mr. Waterman called a halt, and they got ready for +their little journey. They took along just a loaf of bread and a small +tin in which butter, salt and pepper were packed. The boys took along +their rods and Mr. Waterman carried a small rifle. In explanation of the +latter he said that they might have a shot at a duck or a partridge. +They took two canoes. Bob went with Mr. Waterman, while Pud and Bill +carried Mr. Anderson as a passenger. To their surprise, Mr. Waterman led +the way just around the bend and then to the opposite shore. The boys +had not noticed a path, but on landing they could see a trail leading +off along a little stream that emptied into the lake at this place. On +landing, Mr. Waterman fixed the paddles in the right way, took up the +canoe and was off. Bob carried his gun, and he had all he could do to +keep up with his leader. Mr. Anderson also wished to make the first +portage, but Pud prevailed, and after a little trouble, they started +off. Pud was soon puffing and blowing, for the path was steep. Mr. +Anderson led the way for the other two had been lost to view even before +the second party got started. + +"This isn't so easy as it looks," said Pud to Bill. + +"If you're getting tired, I'll take it," answered Bill. + +"Not on your life. I've got to learn the knack of this portaging, for I +mean to do a lot of it this summer, and I might just as well get used to +it now as any time," said Pud, between his puffs. + +"Let the weight rest on forearms, head and shoulders and you won't mind +it," said Mr. Anderson. "As you say, there's a knack to it. Also, it +takes muscles that we don't use right along, and for that reason it's +rather tiring at first." + +By this time they had topped the little divide between the two lakes and +they began to descend. Pud began to have his troubles, for like all +novices, he carried the canoe poorly. He came near to falling several +times, and it was with a sigh of relief that he came out on the shore of +a small lake. Bob and Mr. Waterman were in their canoe off the shore, +evidently waiting for them. + +"How's the portaging?" yelled Bob, as soon as Pud came in sight. + +"Fine," said Pud. "But I have a crease here in the back of my neck that +will be sore for a week." + +They were soon off again, with Bob leading. The lake opened out and they +found themselves in a stretch that gleamed a good mile ahead of them. +All at once Bob slowed down and Mr. Anderson called on the boys to stop +paddling. + +"He sees something," said Mr. Anderson. + +All eyes were on Mr. Waterman as he got his gun ready. Over to the left +the boys saw three ducks swimming, and they knew that this was the +reason for their stop. "Bang!" went the gun, and one of the ducks +toppled over, but the other two disappeared as if by magic. + +"Pick up the bird," yelled Mr. Waterman to Mr. Anderson. + +"All right," replied the latter. + +Mr. Waterman looked around carefully, and a minute later the two ducks +arose to the surface some distance farther on. Bob and he took up their +paddles and tried to get within a reasonable distance again. They had +scared the birds so that they kept swimming away, keeping out of +distance. At last Mr. Waterman laid down his paddle and got his rifle +again. This time he missed, for it must be remembered that he was +shooting with a rifle and not with a shotgun. It was only after three +more trials that he bagged his second duck and it took a good hour +longer to get the other one. For some reason the birds did not want to +leave the lake and they were all three finally in Mr. Anderson's canoe. + +"That will make another fine pot-pie," said Bill. + +"We haven't any pot to make it in," said Pud. + +"We'll have it back at camp," said Mr. Anderson. "These ducks, with some +dumplings and flour gravy, will be some dish." + +They made for the far end of the lake and then got out. By this time it +was nearly twelve o'clock, and they debated whether to climb the +mountain then or wait until they had had something to eat. + +"I tell you what to do," said Anderson. "You fellows go and climb this +mountain. I'll stay here, catch a few fish, then build a fire and have +everything ready for you when you return." + +This was considered a good plan, so the three boys and Mr. Waterman set +out. There was no trail this time, but Mr. Waterman strode ahead with +confidence. + +"Have you been over here before?" asked Bob. + +"Oh, yes," replied Mr. Waterman. "I want to come here again several +times before the summer is over, for when we get to the top of this +mountain you will see something that very few city dwellers have ever +seen, namely, a real primeval forest." + +"I thought that this was all primeval, way up here," said Bob. + +"No," was the reply. "The big lumber companies see to it that there is +but little first growth any place where they can get the lumber to tide +water." + +"Well, how is it that we'll see first growth up here, then?" asked Bill. + +"You'll see when we get there," replied Mr. Waterman. + +He walked on and they followed. Pud was saying nothing, but he was +having his troubles keeping up. He looked ahead at Mr. Waterman, who was +apparently sauntering along, and he wondered how he did it. Fortunately +for him, Mr. Waterman was very observant, for he noted Pud's distress +and slackened his pace or stopped to point out some great pine tree or +other object worth noting. + +"Do you smell him?" suddenly said Mr. Waterman, as he stopped and looked +around carefully. + +"Smell whom?" asked Pud, stopping in his tracks. + +"The bear," said Mr. Waterman. "Can't you smell something in the air? I +can. A bear has been here not very long ago. Ah, there are his tracks." +He pointed to an old pine stump, which had been clawed recently. The +boys looked at the stump, but they saw no tracks. + +"Come here," said Mr. Waterman, as he strode over the stump. "Bears like +grubs, ants, and things of that kind, so you will often know that bears +are around by noting stumps, hollow trees, etc., when they have clawed +at them." + +The boys came over. Bob looked at the stump and then down at the ground. + +"There's a track," said Bob, as he pointed at a rather big print in the +soft earth on the lower side of the stump. Sure enough, they could +plainly see the footprint of the bear. + +"Will he come after us?" inquired Pud, looking around rather anxiously, +with his eyes resting finally on Mr. Waterman's rifle. + +"I'll answer your unasked question first," replied Mr. Waterman. "No, +this gun would be worse than nothing for a bear. It would only wound +him, and that would only make sure of an attack. As for your real +question, there is not one chance in a hundred that the bear will come +for us. The bears in this part of the country are well-known black bears +and they have hardly ever been known to attack men unless wounded or +backed into a corner. Judging by the fact that I smelt this bear even +before I noticed this stump, I would guess that we disturbed him and +that as soon as he smelt us, away he went, and he's probably a mile away +by this time." + +They then went on, and after a good climb they came out on the top of +the mountain. Mr. Waterman first led them to the southern side. The +slope fell quite abruptly to a little lake far below. + +"Do you see the St. Lawrence?" asked Mr. Waterman. + +"No. Where?" asked Bob. + +Mr. Waterman then pointed to the south, and about fifteen miles away +they could see the broad St. Lawrence stretching as far as the eye could +reach. + +"I thought that was a cloud," said Bill. "I see now that it is water, +and away off there to the right I can see a big steamer making for +Quebec." + +Mr. Waterman then pointed out several lakes, giving them names and +telling them that they would visit practically all of them before the +summer was over. He told them that Lac Parent, on which they were +camping, was hidden from view by the mountains next to the one on which +they stood. It was a fine day and Bill thought that he could distinguish +the Andirondack Mountains far off to the south in the United States. Mr. +Waterman stated that this might be true, as they had been seen from this +vicinity on very clear days. After thoroughly enjoying the view to the +south, Mr. Waterman turned away and they went in a northeasterly +direction. In a little while they came to another side of the mountain. +In a short time Mr. Waterman led them out onto a bold rocky precipice +that stood out from the mountain. They looked down into a gulch hundreds +of feet below. They gazed at an immense coliseum, the sides of which +were lined with giant trees. It was the wildest bit of scenery that the +boys had ever looked on. + +"That looks just like some of the mining camps in the Rockies," said +Bob. "I've seen pictures of several that look just like this." + +"That's just what struck me when I first looked down from this rock," +said Mr. Waterman. "It certainly does look as if there might be some +kind of mineral down there. As yet, I have not been able to find time to +go down to the bottom. Those trees interest me. They are the finest I +have ever seen. I can't see any lake down there, but there must be some +outlet for the water." + +"Why not come over here some time and go down there and investigate?" +said Bill. + +"We'll do that, and I'll bring you along. Let's go down the gulch a bit +so you can get a look at some of these great tamaracks and cedars. You +won't see them any place else." + +They followed their leader, who gave them another hour of hard climbing, +though he finally brought them out, half way down the mountain. + +"Ye gods!" cried Mr. Waterman, as he looked at his watch. "It's after +two o'clock. Let's hurry, for Mr. Anderson will think that we are lost." + +Suiting action to the word, he plowed along, and though the boys were +not sure in what direction they were going, they soon came out on a +lake. Mr. Waterman gave a cry, which was answered immediately, not far +off. + +In another moment they saw Mr. Anderson putting off in a canoe. They all +got in, though it brought the gunwale of the canoe down pretty close to +the water. Paddling carefully, they soon landed, to find a fire burning, +several fish all ready cleaned and ready for the fire, and bread all +ready buttered. + +"We forgot the frying pan," said Pud. "How are we going to cook the +fish?" + +"That's easy," said Bob. "Haven't you ever cooked fish on a stick over +the fire?" + +"Never," replied Pud. + +"Well, you have something to learn, then," said Mr. Anderson. "You'll +find pointed sticks all ready, so get busy, as it's getting late and we +must be on our way." + +The boys found the sticks all ready prepared, and it was not long before +they were all sitting around the fire, eating fish with one hand and +holding another trout over the fire with the other. The two men had +often cooked fish this way and they did theirs to a turn, but the boys +more often than not had theirs burned outside and half raw within. But +their exercise had given them such appetites that the fish disappeared +as if by magic. They stopped when there was no more bread nor fish. + +"You boys are some feeders," said Mr. Anderson. "I thought I had more +fish than we could eat." + +"I'm just getting into action," said Pud, as he licked off his fingers +and looked around for more. But more there was not, so they got into +their canoes and were off down the lake. When they came to the portage +Bob took the canoe and marched off into the bushes followed by Mr. +Waterman carrying rod and gun. Bill insisted on carrying the canoe back, +and he did very well considering that it was his first experience. He +also found the going down hill rather difficult, but he soon balanced +the canoe properly and had no more trouble. When they got to the end of +the trail they saw Bob and Mr. Waterman just rounding the point for +camp. They set out after them, but by the time they arrived, they found +them already stripped and in the water. + +"Come on in, the water's fine," yelled Bob. + +"We'll be with you in a minute," said Bill. + +On getting out of the canoe they found that the guides had already been +busy with the landing. Four logs had been split in two and were ready at +the chosen place. Mr. Anderson carried the ducks to the cook tent and he +came back to assure the boys that they were in for a rare treat for +supper. + +"Jack's back, and he said that he would see to this pot-pie himself." + +The boys turned at once to note the new guide. They found a rather old +man, sharp of feature and eye but not very strong-looking. + +"I thought he was a big fellow," said Bob. + +"Oh, no," replied Mr. Waterman. "Jack's not very big, but he can tote +quite a load over the hardest kind of portage. He's a wonder with the +axe, and he can cook like a French chef. You'll find that out +to-night." + +After a fine swim and bath the boys were quite content to lie around +their tents until they heard the welcome call to supper. + +"I feel as empty as a barrel," said Pud, as he walked over to the table. +"Gee, I'm stiff. I won't be able to get out of my blankets to-morrow." + +"That just shows how soft you are," said Bob. "I'm a little stiff +myself, but not very much. The back of my neck is sore." + +"So is mine," said Bill. + +"That's where you rest the canoe when portaging," said Mr. Anderson, who +had heard the remark. "You'll get a real callous there before the summer +is over. Just for curiosity, feel Pierre's neck some time. He has been +at this all his life, and he has a regular muscle there." + +What those hungry fellows did to that pot-pie would be a shame to tell. +It disappeared very quickly, while the biscuits that Jack made tasted +even better than those that mother used to bake. Even the big dish of +prunes that topped off the meal was relished. + +"Take me to my little bed," said Pud as, with a sigh, he saw the last +prune disappear from his plate. + +"Impossible, impossible," said Bob. "I think after that meal that you'll +have to go around and not dare to cross the bridge over the trout pond. +You'll break through." + +"Not an extra step," said Pud. "In fact, I've been wondering for the +last five minutes if I can get to my tent. I'm so stiff I can hardly +move." It was indeed only with difficulty that Pud could navigate, for +he had put in a hard day for a fat boy. + +"If I survive the summer," said Pud, with a twinkle in his eye, "just +watch me tear that old line to pieces this fall. This life should put +the stuff into anybody." + +"Yes," said Mr. Waterman, as he winked at Bob, "this was a rather easy +day. Later we'll do some real work and cover some ground. I wanted to +break you in easily at first." + +"Now, what do you think of that?" queried Pud of Bill, as they crossed +the trout pond to their tent. "He says this is an easy day. I wonder +what he thinks of doing when he gets real strenuous?" + +"I guess he was joking," replied Bob. "Personally, I think that we had +just about all the exercise to-day that we need." + +"Jack's some cook, isn't he?" queried Bill, as they sat before the fire +a short time later. + +"We're all agreed on that," said Bob. "I never tasted a better supper +than we had." + +"If we can get some duck and partridge now and then, we'll certainly +live high," said Pud. "I could get along with the trout alone, for I +have never tasted anything better than that." + +"I was going over and make the guides tell me some of their experiences +to-night," said Bob. "To tell the truth, I'm tired, and I think I'll get +to bed early. Anyway, I think I'd better wait a while until I get back +my French again. They talk pretty good French. It's a sort of dialect, +but I can understand them pretty well. I am told that it is easier to +understand their patois or dialect than many of the dialects in France +itself." + +Shortly after night had fallen the boys turned in, and they were soon +fast asleep, all weary after their strenuous day. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE SHORT TRAIL TO ESCOUMAINS + + +They were awakened the next morning by a rifle shot. The boys, as if +with one accord, rose up on their elbows and looked around with startled +glances. + +"What was that?" asked Bob. + +"A rifle shot," answered Bill. + +Their discussion was cut short by another shot, and they heard voices +down at the lake. They hurried down to the water and they found Mr. +Waterman and Pierre there, the latter with a smoking gun in his hand. + +"It's a loon," said Mr. Waterman, as they came up. "Let me have a try," +he said, turning to Pierre and reaching for the gun. Pierre handed it +over and Mr. Waterman scanned the waterfront closely. In about a minute, +a big bird rose to the surface about one hundred yards away and looked +around carelessly. + +"No use. Too far away," said Pierre. + +Mr. Waterman took careful aim and blazed away, but the loon disappeared +and the bullet was seen to hit the water right where the bird had been +the previous moment. It looked too fast to be true. The stories that the +boys had heard of the wonderful quickness of loons were proven to them +right then and there. + +"I'll get him next time," said Mr. Waterman, as he jumped in another +shell. "That blame loon is crazy. He thinks I can't hit him." + +"He's right," said Pierre. "I go help fix breakfast," said the Indian, +as he walked away. + +Sure enough, in a short time up came the loon, and swam around +apparently defying fate. Once more Mr. Waterman took steady aim, but the +result was just the same. + +"That beats the Dutch," said Mr. Waterman. "I thought I had him that +time." + +"What!" said Mr. Anderson, as he came up. "Trying to hit that loon +again. If you get that bird you lose anyway, for you've already shot off +more lead than he's worth." + +"All right," said Mr. Waterman. "Let's have a plunge before breakfast. +We'll just have time." + +They all hurried back to their tents, and were still in the water when +they heard Jack's cheery halloo calling them to the table. They were +hungry and enjoyed the fare set before them. + +"We'll have another fishing lesson to-day," said Mr. Waterman, after +they had eaten. "I think you had better take it easy after yesterday's +strenuousness, so we'll all start out together at ten o'clock and see +which boy gets the most fish by twelve." + +This was agreed on, and until the hour set, the boys busied themselves +around their tents, helped to clear up more of the beach or watched the +guides as they worked on the landing. The latter was a very interesting +operation. They had three logs cut in half. It was easy to cut the ends +of the logs so that they rested on a short piece on the shore and on the +top of two small pieces that were driven in at the right distance from +the shore. The whole was kept together by wooden spikes driven into +place through holes made by fire in the logs. When the first section was +completed, it was as solid as possible, making a landing over two feet +wide and nearly twenty feet long. The guides planned to put in another +section of the same length, and they expected to have more trouble with +it. This extra section was being put in more for swimming and diving +purposes than for any real need. Mr. Waterman made such a remark to +Jack, who said that it would be just the thing for him when the rest of +the party were away on trips. + +"I'll just get out on the end of that little landing and I'll bet you I +get just about as many trout as the rest of you," said Jack. + +"I wouldn't be surprised if you would, you old wizard," said Mr. +Anderson. "I think you must have some special bait, for those trout just +come to your hook like flies to honey." + +The boys paired off about ten o'clock, and when they came back shortly +before one o'clock, it was found that Bill had had the best luck, with +Bob next and Pud last. Bill had twenty-six fine trout in his bag, Bob +twenty-one and Pud fifteen. + +Jack looked them over as they brought them to him. + +"Well, I guess we won't starve for another day or two anyway," he said. +"I'm glad to see that you can catch enough fish to supply yourselves. A +fisherman is no good at all until he can do that." + +"You don't need to be much of a fisherman to do that up here," said Bob. + +"Yes, fortunately, that's so," replied Jack, as he went on with his +work. + +Several days sped on and it became necessary to go out to Escoumains to +get the letters and some more grub. Mr. Waterman made this known one +evening, stating that he thought that he would go out through an old +Indian trail that had not been used for some years. + +"This trail is much shorter than by the road, and, if we can open it up, +it will be a fine thing for us." + +"Yes, and it will be a fine thing for the habitants at Escoumains," said +Mr. Anderson. + +"I hadn't thought of that," said Mr. Waterman reflectively. "If we get +too good a road in here they will be coming in themselves and bringing +their friends." + +"You bet they will," said Jack. "We don't want that bunch in here, so +keep to the old road." + +"It would be a good thing to know this old trail. It is so much +shorter," said Mr. Waterman. "Then if we had need for speed we could get +out, or Pierre's cousin could bring in any important mail to us." + +"I'll go out that way anyway, and we'll not make any real improvements +to the trail," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Do you want any one to go with you?" asked Bob. + +"I don't need any one, but I'll be glad to have you if you want to come. +That stands for all of you," added Mr. Waterman, as the other boys +looked up. + +The next morning they were up very early. The three boys, Mr. Waterman +and Jean were going into the village. Joe, Jack and Pierre were going +along part of the way to bring back the canoes, for they were going to +portage through two lakes on the way. As they were coming back by the +road, they would not be able to get the canoes back themselves. After a +hurried breakfast they got in their canoes. Much to the surprise of the +boys, Mr. Waterman led them down the lake, around the bend and then into +a cove on the same side of the lake from which they had started. They +got out at what was evidently a very old trail. This led up very +steeply. Fast time was made, as Pierre and Mr. Waterman carried the +canoes and the others were going light. Up they went, and came to a lake +that must have been at least one hundred feet higher than their own +lake. + +"It would be easy to drain that lake into ours," said Bob, when he saw +the new stretch of water. + +"Yes," said Mr. Anderson. "The lake is just like a big reservoir on a +hill. It could easily be drained into Lac Parent, but it is so high up +that no water would be left. Let's leave it as it is, for it will serve +us well this morning." + +They set off across the lake with Mr. Waterman, Bob and Jean in the +first canoe. On they went with strong strokes, so that Pierre and Mr. +Anderson, with four in their canoe, had to work hard to keep them in +sight. The lake was not very long, and soon they were on the trail +again. This time the portage was at least a mile long, and it led down a +gradual slope. So far there was no trouble following the trail and the +party went ahead without a stop. Once more the canoes were launched, and +this time they paddled through two lakes connected by a small stream. At +the far end of the second lake the canoes were beached and the party +landed. Here they separated. At first they had no trouble following the +trail, which led along a brook that evidently drained the two lakes over +which they had just come. Straight ahead they went, with Mr. Waterman +leading. + +After they had gone steadily a little over a mile, Jean called to Mr. +Waterman and a halt was made. Jean jointed off into the woods and after +a consultation Mr. Waterman concluded that the young Indian was right, +and they turned off. The trail soon became very hard to distinguish, but +each time that Mr. Waterman hesitated, the Indian went by him, leading +the way without a halt. As they were passing through some thick +undergrowth Mr. Waterman halted and pointed to a partridge seated on a +limb on a nearby tree, only twelve or fifteen feet from the trail. The +bird, evidently trusting to its protective coloring, sat on the limb +without moving a muscle. Mr. Waterman had just begun to explain to the +boys that the bird was undoubtedly trusting to its instinct in remaining +in quiet when, with a flutter of the wings, down fell the partridge from +the tree to be grabbed almost instantly by the Indian. + +Jean had noted the bird just as quickly as Mr. Waterman, but he had +followed his natural bent by swiftly dodging off the trail, cutting a +stout little club from a hardwood tree, rushing back to the trail and +with unerring aim knocking over the partridge with his improvised +weapon. The boys could see that Mr. Waterman was put out, but he +evidently knew that the Indian would not be able to see his point of +view, so he said nothing. The Indian, with a gleam in his eye, walked +ahead, having tied the bird to his belt. The boys were all sorry that +the partridge had met such an untimely end, but they could not help +admiring the woodcraft shown by the young Indian. + +The only other excitement they had on the way was furnished by Pud. +About half way to the village they came to a little stream that was +rather deep. They looked about and at last found a big tree that had +fallen across the stream. All of the party except Pud walked across the +log without any trouble. He got about half way across when he lost his +balance. He felt himself going, so he threw himself on the log and +encircled it with his arms and legs. His weight proved too much for the +bark, which had been loosened by the water, and it began to come off. It +moved around the trunk in a body and Pud followed it. In spite of his +efforts, he gradually disappeared in the dark water. He tried in vain to +get up on the log, but he could not make it and finally had to pull his +body along in the water until he got to the other side. Pud's acrobatic +performance had brought peals of laughter from Bob and Bill. Even the +Indian had a smile on his face as Pud got out of the water. + +"What are you laughing at?" asked Pud, as he got ashore, evidently sore +at the joke on him. + +"Oh, nothing," said Bob. "Only you reminded me of a fat monkey on a +stick." + +"I'll 'fat monkey' you, letting me drown without so much as putting out +your hand," said Pud. + +"Letting you drown," said Bill. "You fat porpoise, don't you know that +you couldn't sink if you tried?" + +"I bet he was just trying to practice walking the greasy pole so he +could show us how to do that stunt," said Bob. + +"That old tree has all the greasy poles you ever saw beaten to death," +said Pud with disgust. + +"Perhaps that was a slippery elm tree," said Bill. "What do you say, +Pud? Did you taste it?" + +"No, I didn't taste it. I'll give you both a taste if you don't stop +standing there laughing like two old women," said Pud, as he dashed for +them. He was evidently up to mischief, so they ran up the trail. Pud +soon gave up the chase, and as they came out at a habitant's farm +shortly afterwards, he forgot all about his troubles and regained his +habitual cheerfulness. + +Just before they started down a hill on the outskirts of Escoumains, +they all stopped to empty out their shoepacks. All of them had at one +time or other gotten into some hole filled with water and all had wet +feet. They wrung out their socks and then put on their footgear again. + +"Holy smoke," said Bill, "if mother saw me do that little stunt she +would call me back home at once." + +"What's that?" asked Mr. Waterman, who had thought nothing of the +matter. + +"Why, wringing out my socks and then putting them on again," said Bill. +"Mother would be sure that that would mean pneumonia at least." + +"Don't worry," said Mr. Anderson. "Before we get home you will probably +have your feet quite dry again and then much wetter. A little water will +not do any one any harm when one is living out in the open air this way. +Of course, in the winter time, it would be different. Then it would be +serious to get one's feet so wet." + +"Why so?" asked Pud. + +"Because then, wet feet unless one can get to the fire right away, +generally mean frosted or frozen feet, and that always means trouble in +the woods in the winter time." + +Down they all trooped to Escoumains. They stopped in at Madame +LaBlanche's boarding house to let her know that they would be there for +lunch. + +"Make us up some of those good biscuits of yours," said Mr. Waterman to +her in French. + +She promised to do so and also said that her son would be ready at one +o'clock to drive them all back to the woods. + +"Are we going to drive back?" asked Bob. + +"Yes," said Mr. Anderson. "We'll take in quite a supply of grub, for we +do not expect to come out except for mail for at least a month. We'll +have to go in via the ford, as we did the first time, and you know that +that is some sixteen miles away." + +The boys all received letters and busied themselves reading them and +writing others. They spent the morning very pleasantly and were at the +boarding house in good time. They presented quite a different appearance +from the trim young city fellows that had eaten there on their arrival +such a short time before. Now they were clothed for the woods, with blue +shirts, mackinaws, heavy trousers and shoe packs. At a distance, one +could hardly distinguish them from the numerous woodsmen that were to be +seen around the village. They brought back from the woods great +appetites, and the famous LaBlanche biscuits disappeared by the +plateful. Chicken was once more the center of the meal, and it was +thoroughly enjoyed. + +"Thank Heaven," said Pud, as they got up from the table, "we don't have +to walk back. I'm so full I couldn't walk if I tried." + +"You'll do some walking," said Mr. Waterman. "We have only one pair of +horses and a wagon. We'll all walk on the hills." + +Soon they were off, Mr. Waterman and Mr. Anderson on the front seat with +the driver, and the boys seated on the bags that were stowed behind. The +little Canadian horses set off at a sharp trot. The boys nodded at every +one they met as they went through the village, not forgetting even the +vivacious, petite, dark-haired and dark-eyed French Canadian misses that +did not fail to come to many of the windows or doors as the wagon +rattled by. It was a fine day and they were happy as the gods. They +laughed and talked and sang and asked innumerable questions. Their two +leaders were also full of good spirits and gave them all the information +they had. For the first five miles the horses went along famously. Then +the roads got poorer and the pace slackened. They soon struck a steep +hill and they all got out except the driver. At the top of the hill, the +wagon stopped and all got on but Pud. He was slow as usual so the driver +made believe that his horses had run away and Pud ran along after them +for nearly a mile. Finally the horses were stopped and Pud at last came +up puffing, blowing and sweating. Mr. Waterman had cautioned every one +to be quite serious and not give the joke away. + +"Sacre," said the driver. "Dese horse, he not get drive enough. He run +away." + +"How's the running, Pud?" asked Bill. + +"Never you mind. Just let me in. I'm done out. I'm no runner like Bob +there," replied Pud. + +"Possibly your life was saved for when these horses ran away, we could +hardly keep on this load," said Bob, as he winked at Mr. Anderson. + +"Yes, if you're born to be hanged you'll never get killed in a runaway, +Pud," said Bill solemnly. + +"What's that?" said Pud, who was having too much cleverness thrust at +him to take it all in. + +Away they went, and as the way was down hill, the driver once more gave +the reins to his little horses and they started so fast that Pud nearly +went out over the back of the wagon. Bill caught him and Pud held on +like grim death as the wagon bumped and rattled along the rough road. +Bill and Bob laughed until they could hardly hold on themselves, for +Pud's face was a study. He knew that they had put something over on him +but he could not exactly figure it out. + +In spite of the speed shown by the horses in the runaway, it was already +four o'clock when they reached the ford. The driver drove right in and +when he got to the other side he drove up such a steep part of the bank +with such a rush that he spilled out not only the three boys but also +about half his load. No one was hurt and the grub was soon on the wagon +again. He drove for at least half a mile until the road could be +followed no longer. The food was then dumped out on the ground, and with +cheery good-by the driver was soon out of sight on the back trail. + +"Let's get busy right away," said Mr. Waterman. "We want to get to camp +to-night so we'll have to hustle." + +"I wonder where Pierre, Joe and Jack are," said Mr. Anderson. + +"They'll be along right away, I'll bet," said Mr. Waterman. + +Sure enough, before the boys had been loaded for the walk to the first +lake, the three men hove in sight. It was really wonderful to see what +they piled on each other. It is enough to tell, that when all were +loaded down, they had taken care of everything that had been brought in +the wagon. + +"When we get to the canoes, we can make this stuff more easily handled," +said Jack. "I did not think you were going to bring too much but I +brought along some dunnage bags and tump lines." + +"That's the stuff," said Mr. Waterman. + +They moved off Indian file, and though the boys carried only half that +borne by the guides and their leaders, they had difficulty in keeping up +with the procession. They soon came to the first lake to find three +canoes there. In twenty minutes, the baggage was put into the dunnage +bags and they were off across the lake. The boys were given a light bag +and a canoe to carry and the men carried the rest. In this way, they +soon got to the next lake, and a short time later they were on their own +lake, making for their camp. + +"Just carry everything over to the cook tent and leave it there for the +present," said Mr. Waterman. "Jack will put things in order to-morrow." + +This was done, and the guides at once set to work to get supper. It was +a hurried meal but it was relished by all. The night had set in by the +time the meal was cooked and they ate by the light of the fire, which +was kept brightly going by one of the guides. Bob thought as he looked +at the lights and shades cast by the fire, the ruddy face here, the +countenance half in shadow there, the greenness of the leaves that were +lighted up by the fire, the solemn avenues of the trees stretching back +into the woods, the animated movements of the guides and the whiteness +of the tents as the light on them came and went, that he had never seen +anything quite so close to nature, quite so picturesque. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +PIERRE'S BEAR STORY + + +The boys slept a little later the next morning, though when they did get +up it was evident that Jack had been long busy. The entire stock of grub +gotten the day before had been put away neatly and carefully and the +dunnage bags and tump lines were piled in a heap at one end of the +table. They spent the day quietly, fishing, swimming and fixing up +things around the camp. They had an early supper and were down by their +fire talking and joking. The guides were soon up in their tent, talking +and showing much more life than usual. This gave Bob an idea, and he +proposed that they would go and visit the guides. This seemed good to +all and they went over to the guides' tent. They were welcomed solemnly +and quietly. It was evident that they considered their tent as their +part of the camp. + +For the time being, they were the hosts and they were evidently +flattered by the visit from the boys. Jack soon had the attention of Pud +and Bill and it was with a merry twinkle in his eye that he told of many +incidents in his life either in hunting or in the lumber camps. Bob +being the only boy to understand French was soon in animated discussion +with Joe and Pierre. The Indian under the questioning of the boy forsook +his usual taciturnity, and in the most casual way told Bob of exploits +in hunting and fishing that would make most interesting reading. To the +Indian, they were events likely to happen to any one that goes out in +the dead of winter to trap and hunt. Bob was a most interested listener +and it was not until he had been called to twice by Bill that he awoke +to the fact that it was nearly ten o'clock. + +"Mr. Waterman says that we had better not keep the guides up too long or +they will not want to be visited again," said Bill. + +"I didn't think we had been here so long," replied Bob. + +They said "Good Night" to the guides and were soon fast asleep. + +The next day was another quiet one. The boys fished in the morning and +they had very good luck. It was a good day for fishing and but few of +the speckled beauties got away from the boys, who were becoming more +expert every day. Even Pud had caught the hang of casting and promised +to be the best fisherman of the lot. + +In the afternoon, Bob proposed another visit to the mountain opposite, +the same one where they had so nearly come to grief before. + +"Go ahead," said Mr. Anderson, "but for your own sake, be careful." + +"We'll promise not to get into trouble," said Pud. "We just need a +little exercise and that climb will about fill the bill." + +They started off and in a short time Mr. Waterman and Mr. Anderson, who +were busy down on the water front putting the finishing touches to the +landing place, saw them seated in the lee of a big rock looking out over +the country. There they sat and for nearly two hours they could be seen +with heads close together, evidently very much interested in their +conversation. The fact of the matter was that Pud and Bill had asked Bob +to tell them what the guides had told him the previous evening. As they +sat up on the mountain, they looked far off to the south and saw the +mighty St. Lawrence dividing the country as if with a giant silver +knife. + +"The Indians have had lots of experiences up north of here, hunting and +trapping in the winter time," Bob began. + +"What did Pierre tell you?" asked Pud. "Has he ever scalped any one?" + +"You big dub," said Bill. "Indians don't go on scalping expeditions any +more." + +"Well, I thought that maybe some other Indian tribe might have tried to +attack them," said Pud. + +"Don't be foolish," said Bob. "There are few Indians up in this country +and I guess from what Pierre tells me that they have enough troubles +fighting for their lives against the forces of nature to keep them from +thinking of fighting one another. In addition, the Canadian Government +would soon put a stop to that. Anyway, these Indians are just as peace +loving as any white man." + +"I suppose you're right," said Pud. "All the same, I like to think of an +Indian with tomahawk in hand having a fierce fight for his life with +some other Indians or with the pale faces." + +"You've been brought up on Nick Carter," laughed Bill. "Get that foolish +rot out of your mind. Indians are just ordinary human beings and that is +all." + +"I don't know about that," said Pud. "That young Jean is some boy for +his age. He can follow a trail just like the Indians we read of, and he +knows all about the woods, animals, birds and all that. He's certainly +like the Indians we read of in history." + +"Yes," said Bob. "Jean is a fine specimen. He has all the good points of +our ancestors, the real aborigines, without their failings." + +"But what about Pierre? You were talking a long time with him, Bob," +said Bill. "What was so interesting?" + +"He was telling me of his winter hunting trips and he has had some +thrilling experiences. He says that every year he gets ready just as +soon as the snow flies in the fall. This generally means about the +middle of November in this country. As soon as the earth is blanketed +with snow, he gets his dogs and sleds ready and starts out with +provisions to last for three months. Since his boy has grown up he +takes him with him. Sometimes they make up a small party of three or +four. It is always better to have two or three companions because Pierre +says that it is not well to go alone into this wild, lonely region, for +then a simple accident might mean death. He told me of several incidents +where his life was in danger and only his quickness and presence of mind +saved his life. + +"Once, early in the spring, he had stayed too long in the woods. The +trapping had been good and he had hated to leave while the skins were +heaping up. At last a real thaw came and he had to start for Escoumains. +He was about sixty miles north of here, he said, and he rushed along +with his dogs wallowing in the snow at every step. When he came to the +Port Neuf River, he found the ice just ready to go out. As he got in the +middle of the river, it started to break up. He feverishly drove ahead +and though he lost part of his load, he got to the other side. His son +was not so fortunate, for on looking back, he saw him on a big ice float +that had become separated from the shore. He yelled to Jean, who was +then only fifteen years of age, and directed him what to do. The ice +suddenly began to break up, and he followed his son down the river +nearly a mile before he could get to land, and then he was on the wrong +side of the river. + +"Signing to him to stay where he was, Pierre had to retrace his steps to +get his dogs and sleigh. He found them nearly frozen to death, for with +the going down of the sun, it began to get very cold. He at last roused +them and started down the river. He could see the water steadily rising +and knew that it would be only a short time until he would have to get +back to higher ground. By hurrying, he reached a point opposite to where +Jean was. He yelled across and his cry was answered. He then started +down the river, hoping that in some place the ice would still be +holding. After going about two miles, the river narrowed and the ice had +piled up into a jam. It was threshing around, munching and crunching +like some giant monster. He stopped there and waited for the moon to +rise. + +"The night had become cold and the fore part of the jam seemed frozen +into a solid mass. He determined to risk a crossing. Strapping +everything tightly on the sleigh, he called to the dogs. They were +frightened and he had to lick them to get them started. Four or five +times on the way across he thought they were lost, but they finally got +to the other side. Everything was drenched and he found himself in great +danger of freezing to death, and he found Jean in almost as bad shape. +Their first care was to find some rising ground. After slipping into +several pools of icy water, they at last got to a small hill. With +frost-bitten fingers and frozen feet, they both were almost helpless. By +exercising the greatest determination, they at last succeeded in making +a fire and they gradually warmed themselves. + +"So far, their experience had been very disheartening. They had lost one +load of furs, together with the sled and the dogs. In addition, two of +Pierre's five dogs died before morning from their exposure to the icy +waters. The next morning, they found themselves marooned on their little +hill. The jam could be seen still holding and the waters had been backed +up far over the banks. There was nothing to do except to wait for the +jam to break. This it did that afternoon and the waters went out with a +mighty roar, no doubt carrying devastation down through the valley. This +made it possible for them to leave their refuge, but they did not dare +do so at once for the thaw had continued all that day and it would have +been impossible for the dogs to make any headway. + +"After careful deliberation, the father and son determined to make their +way if possible down the river about twelve miles to an old lumber camp. +They started about midnight to take advantage of the frost that had put +a hard surface on the snow. The dogs went along finely for they were not +too heavy for the crust on the snow. Time after time, the two men broke +through, frequently going up to their hips in water. They kept going and +by dawn they had covered about half the distance. They again sought a +hillock and once more thawed out their frosted hands and feet. Both +suffered intensely because of the hardships they had undergone. They +again started a fire going and got a little sleep for the first time in +two days. + +"They repeated their previous night's experience again and at last +arrived at the lumber camp. Their troubles were then nearly over for +they found a canoe there. This they determined to confiscate as they had +but few provisions since most of their supplies had been lost on the +sled that had gone under the ice. They rested up a whole day and then as +the ice had practically all gone down the river, they set out. The river +was very high and they came near swamping on several occasions but at +last they came to the mouth of the river and reached their friends +safely. Pierre stated that he lost two toes through the frost on that +adventure. He said that it taught him a lesson for if he had not been so +greedy for pelts and had come out when he knew he ought to, he would +have had no trouble." + +"That was an ugly experience," said Bill. "I guess it gets pretty cold +up here in the winter time." + +"Yes, Pierre says that it often gets to forty below zero," replied Bob. +"He says that in such weather, he wears three suits and then can keep +warm only by sticking close to the fire or by continual motion when +outside." + +"Three suits! And I think that one heavy suit is a little too much at +times. But did Pierre tell you any more of his experiences?" inquired +Pud. + +"Yes," said Bob. "He told me a great bear story, but it's getting late +now, so don't you think I better tell you that to-night after supper? If +we go back to camp now, we can have a swim before supper." + +"Sure, that's a go," said Bill. + +The boys were soon back in camp, and seen splashing around in the cool +water. So after supper they sat around the fire that evening filled with +the real and lasting content that comes only from living close to +nature. + +"What were you young fellows so interested in this afternoon over on the +mountain?" asked Mr. Anderson, interrupting the peaceful silence. "I saw +you up there, for the longest time with your heads together as if you +were plotting the destruction of the world." + +"Far from that. Bob was telling us some of the experiences that Pierre +has had in his winter hunting," replied Bill. + +"Pierre has certainly had some interesting experiences. It is rarely +that one can get him to talk, but when he does he always has something +worth telling," said Mr. Anderson. + +"Yes, and he relates incidents of the most desperate character in that +same colorless tone, just as if they were the most ordinary routine," +said Mr. Waterman. + +"Say, Bob, tell us the bear story you promised?" demanded Pud. + +"Let's get Pierre to tell it himself," suggested Bob. + +"That would be all right for you, but you forget that we do not +understand French," said Bill. + +"I forgot about that. He's a clever Indian for he talks two languages +quite well and can make himself understood in English," said Bob. + +"What two languages can he talk?" asked Pud. + +"He speaks the Montagnais language," replied Mr. Waterman. "He is a +Montagnais Indian of the very same stock as was seen by Jacques Cartier +when he first landed at Tadousac when he was going up the St. Lawrence +River hoping to discover a new route to China." + +"Well, tell us the bear story anyway," said Mr. Anderson. + +"We want to hear it." + +Scenting a good tale, they all moved closer to the fire, and Bob began. + +"Pierre says that this experience with the bear happened in the late +spring. He had been back from his winter's hunting about a month and the +spring had opened up very finely. One day, the call to nature was too +insistent. He got out his gun, told his wife to tell Mr. MacPherson at +the store that he would not be down to the big saw mill to work for a +few days, and he started back into the country. The rivers were rather +swollen then, the woods were wet and damp, but there was the rush of +life in the trees and in the very air itself. Pierre swung along with +Jean by his side, his heart full of happiness. He had had a good +winter's hunt and his wife had money for everything necessary. But more +than anything else he wanted the golden sunshine, the ripple of the +waters in the stream, the curved body of the salmon as they darted out +of the water in their eagerness to get up the streams. He told his boy +that though they had come out for game, he really just wanted to be in +the woods when the buds were coming out and when he could feel the sap +driving up from the ground into the furthest shoots of the bushes and +trees. Jean's face was just as bright as his own and he raised his head +and sniffed the air as if in answer to the voice of spring that reigned +everywhere. + +"Back they went along the wood road. They stopped for lunch at the foot +of a riffle where they very soon caught all the trout they wished to +find. They made their whole lunch on the fish, using only a little salt +to make it palatable; a simple fare but really good enough for a king. +On they went after lunch and they were lucky enough to bag four +partridges as they went along. Early in the afternoon, they came to an +old lumber camp and they decided to stay there for the night. It can +well be imagined that though Pierre and his son said little to each +other, they were enjoying themselves just like two boys playing hookey +from school. They had spent the winter in the freedom and wildness of +the woods and a month of the dreary grind in the saw mill had made them +as restive as colts. + +"They made a fine supper off the partridges and were up early the next +morning. The remains of the partridges and some freshly caught trout set +them on their way again with well filled stomachs and happy hearts. They +had not gone far before Pierre stopped dead. 'I smell bear,' said he to +Jean. 'Big black one,' said Jean, as he looked around. How he had known +that it was big and black will remain one of the mysteries that +distinguish the real Indian from his woodland imitators. They looked +around and sure enough they had not gone far before they saw an old +hollow tree that had been scratched and torn by the bear's big claws in +his eagerness to get the grubs that no doubt were living among the +rotting wood. They followed the bear's tracks. Jean in his eagerness +went ahead and the father watched his boy with pride as he followed the +indistinct tracks with swiftness and sureness. Finally the bear led them +up one of the numerous mountains that are a feature of this country, as +you know. Soon the tracks could be followed only with the greatest +difficulty. Pierre was soon in the van and about noon he stopped dead +and pointed off about half a mile where they saw the bear himself busy +tearing away at another rotting tree. + +"As they were somewhat to the windward side of the bear, they turned off +and went down the valley. An hour's swift walking and climbing brought +them out on the ridge on which they had seen the bear. Jean in his +eagerness had gone ahead again. Just as they rounded a point of rock, +the bear rose up almost on top of Jean. He had only a small caliber +rifle, but he gave it to the bear at once. The bullet cut a hole in the +beast's shoulder and with a growl of rage he rushed at the boy. Jean +gave him another, but it only seemed to enrage the bear the more, for he +plunged right on and threw Jean back with a mighty thrust. + +"In the meantime, Pierre was in terror, not for himself but for Jean. On +the rather narrow ledge, he found his boy right in line with the bear +and he did not dare shoot for fear of killing him. When the bullets +from the small rifle failed to stop the rush of the wounded bear, Pierre +rushed forward, and as the bear thrust Jean back, he stepped over the +body of the boy, gave him a bullet from his rifle point blank and +throwing away his gun, he plunged his hunting knife into the bear with +all his might just as the monster flung him off as though he were a +plaything. + +"Pierre says that about ten or twenty minutes later, perhaps half an +hour, he awoke to consciousness and started up on one elbow half dazed. +He felt that he had just narrowly escaped death, but for a moment he +could not just remember what had happened. Then the whole thing rushed +back to his mind and he got unsteadily to his feet. He found that he had +a bad scalp wound and a big bump on the back of his head which he had +hit on falling. When he got his dazed eyes to seeing properly, he was at +first horror-struck, for the bear lay half over his Jean. The latter was +lying on his back with his breast laid bare by the cruel claws of the +bear, deathly pale and to all appearances dead. One look at the bear +showed Pierre that it was dead. He hauled it with difficulty off his +boy's legs and then felt his heart. + +"At first, he could distinguish no movement and he was almost overcome +by grief, but a slight heart movement galvanized him into action. He at +once looked around and seeing a spring a short distance away, he ran, +and filling his coonskin cap with water he was back by the side of the +boy in a moment. Signs of life finally returned and Jean was soon +looking around trying with glazed eyes to come back from the Happy +Hunting Grounds to which his soul had just paid such a fleeting visit. +In a short time, father and son were fully back to consciousness but it +was only after a night spent right there that they felt like real live +men again. + +"Jean had a very ugly slash across his chest and the father felt sure +that at least two of his ribs had been broken by the savage blow the +bear had dealt him. Though pretty sore himself, he felt fairly well, +though his scalp wound left no doubt that he had come near to death. +They camped there that day enjoying the bear steaks and getting off the +skin. In fact, it was not until two days later, that they set out on the +back trail. Then, though they presented a rather dilapidated appearance, +they managed to carry off the skin of the bear and the best portions of +the meat. Jean with his broken ribs went light and then had trouble in +following his sturdy father, who thought very little of having tackled a +bear with his hunting knife. Pierre told me," concluded Bob, "that he +found that the death stroke given the bear was dealt by his hunting +knife just as the bear closed in on him." + +"What a narrow escape! And I guess they think such events are +commonplace. Let's go up to their tents and ask them to show us the +scars," said Pud. + +"Don't you believe Pierre, then?" asked Mr. Anderson. + +"Sure," said Pud, "but I would like to see the scars. It would make the +whole story more real." + +Thereupon the boys went up to the tent and Bob talked to Pierre in +French. Pierre then pulled back the hair and showed the boys a white +scar across his head and Jean showed them a ragged scar that made Pud's +flesh creep. + +"Gee," said Pud, "that bear must have given Jean some rip. Ask Pierre +how he got that wound to heal." + +Bob did so and Pierre explained that he put some healing herbs on the +wounds and that they got well very quickly. + +"De rib, she no get well queeck," said Pierre, turning to Pud. "She vera +sore, some long time." + +"You two certainly had a narrow escape," said Mr. Anderson, as the whole +party, admiring the wonderful bravery and courage of these Indians, said +good-night. + +"I wonder if any such thing as that would happen to us?" asked Bill. + +"Maybe," said Mr. Waterman aloud, but to Mr. Anderson, "in their sleep I +guess." + +By this time the boys were ready for bed and they were soon lying snugly +in their sleeping bags, no doubt dreaming of bears and what they would +do if they saw a big black bear come rushing down on them when they were +on a narrow ledge. + +Some such dream was surely surging through the brains of Pud and Bill, +for Bob was awakened by an awful racket and nearly smothered to death by +feeling two heavy bodies plunk down on him. + +"Hey, there, get up!" yelled Bob. + +It seemed that Pud and Bill had dreamt of the bear. Bill in his dream +jumped up just as the dream bear was rushing on him, and fell on Pud +just as Pud in his dream was set grimly to await the onset of the +monster. Bill, though half awake, was sure the bear had him, and Pud was +just as sure when Bill grabbed him that he was in the clutches of a +mighty black bear. They threshed around a moment and did not really wake +up until they fell on Bob and nearly smothered him. Bob had been too +sleepy to dream of bears, but he got up very quickly. After a hearty +laugh at their vivid dreams, the boys got into their blankets again and +were not disturbed until morning. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +BOB'S CLUE + + +A week quickly sped with short trips here and there--a restful week for +them all, yet a week in which the boys learned more fully the woodman's +ways. For one thing they were becoming expert fishers and rapidly +improving in portaging. Even the two older men noticed how the boys were +so quickly becoming adapted to the rough life. + +"I think you boys are getting into good enough shape to warrant a week's +trip away from the home camp," said Mr. Waterman one morning. + +"I'm game," said Bill. + +"So am I," said Bob and Pud together. + +"Good! Why not go down then and climb that mountain from which one can +see so many lakes?" queried Mr. Anderson. + +"All right. That would be a beautiful trip," said Mr. Waterman. + +"That sounds fine," said the three boys. + +A half hour later, they were off in two canoes, and they paddled down to +the far end of the lake. + +"Stick together, fellows," said Mr. Waterman. "We are going by the +compass and there won't be any trail. It's the easiest thing in the +world to get lost here and I can tell you that it's the hardest thing in +all creation to find your way back again, for all these mountains look +alike." + +"I've noticed that," said Pud, as they all got out of their canoes. + +The party swung off and made their way through the woods skirting the +lower part of the mountain. At last, Mr. Waterman began to climb and +the boys soon found that this was quite some mountain they were on. It +went up interminably. On they plodded and at last they came to a very +steep part just before reaching the summit. Mr. Waterman led the way. In +a short time, they were climbing straight up the side of the rocks. It +was hard and exciting work and more than once, Mr. Waterman turned and +looked around carefully. + +"Can we make it here?" asked Mr. Anderson in his quiet tones. + +"I think so," replied Mr. Waterman. "I thought that this was the place +we came up last summer but evidently it isn't." + +Up they climbed. + +"That old Mont Blanc hasn't anything on this for steepness," said Bob as +they stopped for rest. + +"I think I can see the top now," said Mr. Waterman. "We either have to +go on or go back to where we started up. I think that we can make it, +but be careful." + +By this time, they were climbing almost perpendicularly up the cliff. +There was no trail and they wound back and forth and at times had to +help each other up from rock to rock. As they neared the top, the rocks +became more brittle and it was necessary to try the rocks above before +trusting their weight to them. Once when they strung out down the +mountain for a hundred feet or more, Mr. Waterman, who was leading, +broke off a big rock just as he reached a higher altitude. He shouted +and every one below ducked. It went right over Mr. Anderson's head and +crashed down the side of the mountain. + +"Steady, steady," said Mr. Anderson. "Don't kick up such a fuss." + +"That was a close call both for you and me," said Mr. Waterman. + +Once again before they reached the top they started rocks down the +mountain side but no one was hurt. At last they reached the top and the +view they had more than repaid them for their exertions. This point was +the highest elevation in that part of the country and they could see for +many miles the cool, green, yet solemn-looking forests; the many lakes +which reflected the clear blue sapphire sky, speckled with fleecy white +clouds. They counted over thirty lakes. After enjoying the beauties of +the view, they started down again. + +"We'll go down the natural slope of the mountain and then work back +around the bottom to our lake," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Then you can't heave any more rocks at us," laughed Pud. + +They walked on for at least an hour and at last Mr. Waterman said: + +"We are now in our own valley. The small stream at the bottom of this +mountain runs from our lake so if any of you should get lost, just +follow the stream and you'll come out all right." + +This proved very good advice for after a half hour's walk, Pud fell +behind and before Bob knew it, the others were lost ahead. They yelled +but there was no reply. + +"Let's take a short cut," said Pud. + +"How's that?" asked Bob. + +"We'll go down the mountain and then follow that stream as Mr. Waterman +told us to." + +"All right," said Bob. + +Down they started and they soon came to the stream. They then had an +argument as to whether Mr. Waterman had said that the stream emptied +into their lake or ran from it. At last Bob said, "I remember distinctly +that Mr. Waterman said that this stream runs out of our lake so I'm +going this way." + +"All right," said Pud. "I know you're wrong, but if I don't go with you, +you'll get lost for good, so lead the way." + +The undergrowth near the stream was rank, as might be expected, and the +boys made slow progress. After about an hour's walk they stopped, as +they felt sure they should have been at the lake. + +"We should have been there long ago," said Pud. + +"I think we ought to be there soon," said Bob. + +"We'll never get there going this way," said Pud. + +"This is the right way all right for I noticed that we went generally in +an easterly direction coming here and we have been going west for some +time. Let's hustle on." + +They did so and neither spoke a word for some time. At last they both +paused, startled, for they heard a crashing in the bushes up the stream. +They darted into the woods as quietly as they could and looked out. The +crashing continued and came their way. Finally, as they looked out they +saw that it was a man and they both gave a shout. This was answered at +once by Mr. Anderson's cheery voice. Pud's short cut had proved a very +long way home. Bill and the two leaders had gone around the foot of the +mountain and had saved a long distance in that way. After reaching the +lake they had waited there for some time and at last Mr. Anderson, +remembering the instructions that Mr. Waterman had given, had started +down the stream to find them. He said that they did not have a very long +distance to go. + +Mr. Anderson's appearance had acted like a tonic and the boys followed +him eagerly. They soon heard voices and in a moment more they saw Mr. +Waterman and Bill sitting on a big log by the shore of the lake right +near where the stream ran from the lake. Bill kidded Bob and Pud about +getting lost. + +"I didn't get lost," replied Bob. "Pud thought that by going down into +the valley and then up the stream that we would beat you here." + +"It was much longer," said Mr. Waterman. "We merely skirted the edge of +the mountain and came here almost directly." + +"It's a good thing that Bob was with me," said Pud. + +"How so?" asked Mr. Anderson. + +"I got mixed up when I got to the stream and I wanted to go down the +stream instead of up," replied Pud. + +"Well, why didn't you then?" asked Bill. + +"Bob was sure we had to go up stream and he insisted on going in that +direction," admitted Pud. + +"You have to use your old bean up here," said Bill. "When in doubt, Pud, +leave it to Bob. He's full of gray matter whereas--" + +"Don't 'whereas' any more, Bill, or I'll give you a ducking," said Pud, +as he cornered Bill so that if he rushed him, he would have to go out +into the lake. + +"All right, all right," said Bill. "I'll keep my further remarks about +beans, mentality, cerebellum, etc., until we're ready for the swim." + +"You'd better," said Pud strongly. + +They all then got into their canoes and got back to camp to find there +an air of mystery that was noted at once by their leaders and shortly +later by the boys. Joe got Mr. Waterman aside right away and what he had +to say made him look very serious. Just then Jack came up and Mr. +Waterman listened to him very carefully. Mr. Anderson was called over +and the boys saw the four of them talking very seriously together. + +"I wonder what's up," said Bob. "Something has gone wrong but I don't +see anything the matter with the camp, do you?" + +"Not a thing," replied Bill. Pud looked around in his easy-going +fashion, just as if nothing could disturb him anyway. + +Mr. Anderson and Mr. Waterman did not offer any explanation when they +came back to the boys and they soon were in the water having a fine +swim. Later on they found that in some mysterious way a bag of flour, a +fitch of bacon, a small bag of salt, and a few other small articles had +been taken from the cook tent. Mr. Waterman felt sure that he could +rely on the honesty of his guides and he was greatly mystified. + +"It beats me," said Mr. Waterman. "If an Indian or a stray fisherman +really needed grub, he would know that we would be perfectly willing to +help him out. No one ever refuses hospitality in the woods." + +"I can't make it out either," said Mr. Anderson. + +"Perhaps it was a bear," said Pud with one of his great inspirations. + +"Why to be sure," said Bill. "These bears up here have regular pouches +like the Australian kangaroo and I'll bet if we could see mother bear +just now she'd be waddling up some rocky place, her pouch filled with +flour, bacon, salt and other dainties for the little cubbies." + +Everybody laughed at this but no one had any further suggestion. + +"I really can't figure it out," said Mr. Waterman, more seriously. "The +worst of it is that this is not the first time this has happened. We +have said nothing about it but the same thing happened about ten days +ago. Then we scoured the camp and could not find a trace of the thief. +Jack tells me that the four of them have been all over the lake to every +trail and that they have seen nothing." + +"Let's organize a real hunt after lunch," said Bob eagerly. + +"That's just what I was thinking of doing," replied Mr. Waterman. + +Everything was hurried through. Bob and Pud forgot the weariness they +had felt while lost that morning. Four different parties hurried away +after they had eaten. Bob and Mr. Waterman went together and they made +for the trail that led up north. + +"I figure it out," said Mr. Waterman, "that whoever it is that has been +at our cook tent came from the north." + +"How so?" asked Bob. + +"Well, it isn't far to Escoumains and any one in real trouble would find +food there. It's probably some stray Indian who is afraid of being +arrested for some crime if he goes back to the settlements. I can't +figure out anything else." + +"Did you bring a gun along?" asked Bob rather anxiously. + +"No," said Mr. Waterman. "We won't need any gun if we catch up with this +fellow. But first of all let us get some trace of him." + +They soon reached the beginning of the portage. They got out and +searched carefully. They saw tracks, to be sure, for they had been over +there just a few days before. No new tracks were to be seen. At last, +Mr. Waterman picked up the canoe and said, "Let's go on over the divide. +Keep your eye peeled for recent marks. If he came over here with a +canoe, he will probably slip or slide some place. Look for his tracks at +the sides of the trail." + +They went along at a slow pace. More than once Mr. Waterman stopped and +set down the canoe, only to pick it up a moment later and go on along +the trail. Just after they had reached the top of the divide in a very +steep place, Bob noticed a place near the side of the trail that was +trampled down. Mr. Waterman set down the canoe and came back. After +carefully looking at the bushes, he said, + +"I think that you're right, Bob. He evidently got off his balance here +and not wishing to make a bad slide on the trail, has stepped off in the +bushes." + +"It looks to me as if he had tried to cover this up too," said Bob. +"Look at this small branch. It was bent right over and evidently some +one has tried to straighten it out." + +Mr. Waterman bent over and exclaimed, + +"You're right, Bob. This is the way he came." + +The two then went on, but though they watched very carefully, they could +not find a single further trace of the man they were seeking. They soon +came to the little lake they had been on before. Mr. Waterman led the +way and they got out at the further end as if both had agreed that the +fugitive was heading for the north and would take this course. + +"Now if we can get another trace of this son-of-a-gun on this portage, +I'll bet some money that I know where he is staying," said Mr. Waterman. + +This time Bob carried the canoe and Mr. Waterman went ahead. It was not +until they had come almost to the next lake that Mr. Waterman noticed a +tree from which a piece of bark had been chipped off. + +"That's funny," said he. + +"What's funny?" asked Bob, who looked all around but could note nothing +out of the way. + +"That tree," replied Mr. Waterman. "That piece of bark was knocked off +by something out of the ordinary." + +"Maybe he bumped into it with his canoe," replied Bob. + +"Hardly," replied Mr. Waterman. "A real woodsman does not bump his canoe +into trees and other things along the trail. He avoids them by +instinct." + +"That is probably true," said Bob, "but the only time he could steal +those things from camp would be at night, and he might hit a tree then." + +"You're right," said Mr. Waterman. + +Once more they emerged at a lake. This one was fairly large. They +paddled slowly around it but could see no sign of a trail except the one +at the far end. This was a long trail over a low divide and Mr. Waterman +did not seem to want to start on it. + +"I don't want to set out on this trail because it is about five miles +long and we could not get home to-night. Anyway, I have a hunch that +this fellow has piked off to the north. It's the easiest thing in the +world to cover up a trail. Let's go around this north end of the lake +again." + +They did so but without any success. + +"I guess we're stumped," said Bob. + +"Not on your life," replied Mr. Waterman. "That hunch of mine grows more +insistent every minute. I tell you what I'll do. Let me out here. I'll +tramp around this north shore and if he has any hidden trail, I'll +probably cross it sooner or later." + +Bob paddled to the shore of the lake and Mr. Waterman got out. Bob then +paddled slowly along the shore. He expecting to keep in touch with Mr. +Waterman by the noise he would make as he broke through the bushes. But +not so. Mr. Waterman had been schooled for many years by the Indians and +he had many of their accomplishments. One of these was his ability to +move through the woods with very little noise. The consequence was that +the leafy background of the little lake swallowed up Mr. Waterman and +not a sound was heard. The stillness seemed oppressive to Bob as he +slowly paddled to the other end of the lake. He had been there some time +when he was startled by hearing Mr. Waterman say in his usual calm +tones, + +"I've found it. My hunch was working properly." + +"Let's follow it right away," said Bob eagerly. + +"No," was the reply. "It will keep. We have just time to get back to +camp for a late supper. I'll take Pierre and Jack to-morrow and we'll +ferret out this matter." + +"Can't I go along too?" asked Bob. + +"No, I think that it would be best for just the three of us to go," +replied Mr. Waterman. + +"I hope you change your mind about that," said Bob. "I really think that +I might be of some use. I hardly like to ask you to remember that I was +the first to notice his tracks on the portage." + +"You're too modest, Bob," replied Mr. Waterman. "You certainly have +sharp eyes and know how to use them. I'll think it over and if possible +I'll take you with me. I am afraid that there may be some trouble and, +of course, I don't want to have anything happen to you." + +"I'm part Irish," said Bob. + +"What's that?" asked Mr. Waterman. + +"I said that I was part Irish and you know that a real Irishman always +likes to be along when there's likely to be trouble." + +"You're part Irish all right," said Mr. Waterman. "I think you've kissed +the blarney stone some time." + +"That I did," replied Bob, merrily. "I can remember my father holding me +down from the tower by my heels to kiss the stone. If there's any virtue +in having kissed the famous stone, I ought to have my share, for I +skinned both my knee and my nose in doing the stunt." + +"I didn't know that you had ever been in Ireland," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Oh, yes, my father took me there one summer when I was a little +fellow," replied Bob, innocent enough. + +In the meantime they had reached the head of the lake. Mr. Waterman made +off at once with the canoe as he said that they would be late for supper +if they didn't hurry. He kept Bob hustling to keep up with him, stopping +only once on the way. That was on the last portage when they came to the +spot where Bob had noted the trampled bushes. Mr. Waterman looked very +carefully at the marks and went on apparently satisfied. + +"What did you notice this time that you didn't observe before?" asked +Bob. + +"Not very much," replied Mr. Waterman, "but enough to convince me that +there was only one person over the trail." + +"Well, if that's the case," said Bob, "surely there won't be much danger +in my going with you to-morrow." + +"Why not? There might be four or five in this party for all we know," +answered Mr. Waterman. + +"That's so," said Bob. + +"I'm inclined to take you along for you have very good sense about most +things, I notice," said Mr. Waterman, half to himself. + +Bob blushed up to the ears at hearing this praise from his leader. + +"I'm sure, I'll try to be useful if you take me along," said Bob. + +They were soon down on the shore of their own lake and they could hear +the shouts of Bill and Pud as they wallowed in the water. + +"The rest of them are back," said Mr. Waterman. + +"I wonder if Pud found any traces of his bear thief," laughed Bob. + +As they came to the landing, the guides ran down eager to hear the news. + +"We found his trail," said Mr. Waterman. "Get the guns ready, Pierre and +Jack, and we'll go after the son-of-a-gun to-morrow." + +"Did you see him?" asked Jack. + +"No," said Mr. Waterman. "We just picked up his trail. I think I know +where he is, but you had better put together enough grub to last us a +week, for we don't know where he may be." + +"All right," replied Jack. "We'll be ready." + +Bob had to tell his various experiences to the boys, who listened with +bated breath. On their part they had little to relate. They had gone out +to the trails agreed on but could find no trace whatever of any +stranger. They had arrived only a short time before Bob had shown up. + +"Ye gods, but I'm hungry," sighed Pud. + +"You haven't anything on me," said Bob. "That Mr. Waterman is some +'moose.' He tears along like a steam engine and never seems to get +tired." + +"I noticed that the other day," said Pud. "He had me puffing and blowing +going up that mountain and he was breathing like a sleeping child." + +Just then, tang! tang! tang! tang! went the stick against the wash pan +in Jack's hands and the boys made a rush for the table. They did more +than justice to the great bill of fare prepared for them by Jack. Trout +after trout, hot from the pan, disappeared like magic, not to speak of +the hot biscuits and the apricots for dessert. + +"How did you get these apricots up here?" asked Pud. "I'd think they +would be too heavy to carry." + +"They would be if we brought in the canned variety," said Mr. Anderson. +"But, thank you, we have plenty of good 'aqua pura' here without +bringing in canned pears and such things." + +"Well, how do you have them, then?" asked Bill. + +"We bring in the dried fruit," replied Mr. Anderson. "This is very light +and easily carried. We'll have our share of fruit here this summer all +right. The only thing we won't get much of is fresh meat and that you +can't get even at Escoumains every day." + +"A few partridges now and then will help along the fresh meat problem," +said Bob. + +"You bet," said Pud, licking his lips. "That partridge stew last week +was as fine as anything to be had at the Bellevue-Stratford or Kugler's +in Philadelphia." + +They had had a very strenuous day and they were all ready for bed. The +morrows's expedition had livened their imaginations and they sat around +the fire chatting and talking until the moon came out over the edge of +the opposite mountain and warned them that it was time to seek their +balsam boughs. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +THE WIRELESS IN THE WILDERNESS + + +The sun had hardly touched with gold the tops of the mountains before +Bob felt a light touch on his arm. He opened his eyes to see Mr. +Waterman with his hands to his lips in token of silence. He arose +quietly and with a surge of pride and joy in his heart, for he felt that +he was to be permitted to go on the expedition in search of the thief. + +"Bring along your sleeping bag," said Mr. Waterman, when Bob got out of +the tent. + +"Are we leaving right away?" asked Bob. + +"Yes, just as soon as Jack can rustle a cup of coffee and something to +eat for us. He'll be ready as soon as we can get our things in shape." + +Bob hustled back to the tent and very quietly got his sleeping bag ready +for travel. He made a neat pack of it and hurried over to the grub tent. +Jack and Pierre were serving Mr. Waterman already so that Bob got a +hasty breakfast. He enjoyed it, for there was an atmosphere of +suppressed excitement that was altogether new to him. Ten minutes later +they were getting into two canoes. When Bob reappeared with his pack and +his gun, Mr. Waterman asked, + +"What are you going to do with that gun?" + +"I don't know," said Bob. "I saw that you all had guns and so I toted +mine along." + +"Now I know you're excited," said Mr. Waterman. "When a Southerner +begins to talk about 'you all' and 'toting' things, he's just plain +excited." + +Bob just laughed quietly, for he knew that Mr. Waterman was right. + +They at last got away without waking up the two boys. + +"I bet Pud and Bill will be mad as sin when they find me gone with you," +said Bob to Mr. Waterman. + +"Yes, I suppose that they would like to come, but you know we may run +into trouble of some kind and in that case, it will be best not to have +too many along," replied Mr. Waterman. + +"I can't make this out," said Jack. "There is something amiss, for every +one knows that in this country, all one has to do is to ask and any grub +that one has will be shared." + +"Bad man," said Pierre. "He no have to steal if he not be bad." + +"You may be right," said Mr. Waterman. + +By this time they were on the first portage. When they came to the place +where Bob had noticed the tracks, Pierre and Jack stopped and examined +them attentively. + +"He no want to be seen," said Pierre. + +"He's a corking good woodsman," said Jack. + +"You're both right," replied Mr. Waterman. "Later on, we shall see how +clever he is in concealing a trail." + +When they came to the second lake, Mr. Waterman remarked to Bob that he +would paddle down the north end of the lake to see if either Jack or +Pierre would notice the trail. This they did and despite the sharp eyes +of the two guides, they did not notice any trail starting from the +water's edge. Mr. Waterman led them back and taking a line on a very big +tamarack tree that he had noted before, they got out of their canoes. +They had gone only a few rods to the left when they came to what was +evidently a new trail. They had gone only a short distance when Pierre +stopped and remarked that he was sure that no canoe had been brought +over the trail. When Mr. Waterman heard this, he had the men retrace +their steps to the lake. They then began a systematic search for a +canoe. In about twenty minutes, Jack's sharp eyes searched out the +hiding place and the canoe was pulled out for inspection. They found it +to be an ordinary Peterboro, such as were to be found all through the +country. + +"If he's left his canoe here," said Mr. Waterman, "he can't be very far +off." + +"That's so," said Pierre. + +"We had better go careful," said Jack. + +All four then looked to their guns and took the trail, with Mr. Waterman +leading. He went along very carefully. In an hour they were over the +divide and going down into what seemed like a deep gulch. + +"This looks to me like the same gulch we visited the other day," said +Mr. Waterman. + +"I am sure of it," said Bob. "Then, I noticed that big rock over there." + +"What's peculiar about that rock?" asked Jack. + +"It looks like a big horse," said Bob. "I am sure that it's the same +one." + +"It does look like a horse," said Mr. Waterman. "I know the far side of +this gulch pretty well, but I did not think that there was any way out +of it so easy as the one we have come." + +They then proceeded very cautiously. Mr. Waterman gave way to Pierre, +who went ahead without any noise. Bob tried to imitate his movements but +he felt angry at himself, for he made a great noise as he went along. He +now knew why Mr. Waterman had hesitated at bringing him. He did the very +best he could and followed along, feeling the excitement tugging at his +heart. Mr. Waterman and the two guides moved like shadows before him and +only by the sudden gleam in their eyes could he see that they were at +all excited. At last Pierre came back a step or two and put his fingers +to his lips in token of silence. + +"A log cabin not far ahead," said he to Mr. Waterman very quietly. + +Mr. Waterman and Jack went ahead very stealthily, and they came back in +a moment. + +"I guess we've treed our coon," said Mr. Waterman. "Now, how shall we +catch him?" + +"I go," said Pierre. "I make believe that I'm just an Indian fishing and +I come back 'bimby.'" + +"That's a pretty good plan," said Mr. Waterman. + +They watched Pierre disappear through the bushes and then settled down +to wait. In only about twenty minutes Pierre returned. They were all +surprised to see him so soon. + +"No one at cabin," said Pierre, as he came up. + +"How long since has there been some one there?" asked Mr. Waterman. + +"Only short time. He come back any time now." + +In a few minutes they were all in the house with the exception of +Pierre, who stayed outside to keep an eye on things. As soon as they +entered Mr. Waterman and Bob at once noticed that this was no Indian's +hut nor that of the ordinary woodsman. The room was as neat as a pin. +This was rather out of the ordinary for a cabin in the woods. But what +attracted the attention of both of them was the sight of several +chemical and wireless instruments that both recognized at once. + +"What's this?" said Mr. Waterman. "I'm not much on wireless, but I know +that this is part of a wireless plant." + +"You're right," said Bob. "I have one of them on my aerial for my +wireless at home. This is merely for receiving." + +"Now, what do you think any one would want with a wireless outfit away +back here in the woods?" asked Mr. Waterman, more to himself than to +Bob. + +"Do you think it has anything to do with the great European war that is +raging at this time?" said Bob. + +"That's the natural explanation, of course," said Mr. Waterman. + +"But what's the use of a wireless up here?" asked Bob in his turn. + +"You think that this is only a receiving station. Perhaps this is run by +some German spy to discover just when the troop ships are leaving Quebec +for England." + +"If that's so," said Jack, who had not said a word so far, but who had +followed the conversation very closely, "we are likely to run into +trouble, for any one that would do a thing of this kind would not +hesitate to go to the limit." + +"That's very true," said Mr. Waterman reflectively. "At the same time, I +hardly see why we should run into danger, as we are Americans." + +"I think that we have to get a look at this fellow and let him know that +after a certain date we shall be obliged to let the Canadian Government +know what is going on. Otherwise, if the Canadian Police run down this +fellow, they may find out that we have been here and then arrest us as +accomplices," said Bob. + +"The boy's right," said Jack. "And it would be a hanging job for us if +they proved that we knew what was going on here and did not notify the +constable." + +Further conversation was cut short by a shot outside, followed almost +immediately by another. Hurried footsteps were heard and a big fellow +rushed in and closed the door. + +"Hands up!" cried Mr. Waterman, as he leveled his gun at the stranger. +The latter made a quick movement, but a spurt of flame from Jack's rifle +was followed by the clatter of the stranger's rifle as it fell to the +floor. Coming in from the outside, the newcomer seemed to be unable to +see clearly. + +"Disarm him," said Mr. Waterman to Jack, who moved over and removed a +revolver from the hip of the owner of the hut. + +"Well, what is it?" asked the man defiantly. "It took you a long time to +find out this little place, didn't it?" + +"We're Americans," said Mr. Waterman. "It is quite plain to any one of +intelligence what you are here for. At the same time, I'm very much +mistaken if you're not an American yourself, or at least passed for such +until this war broke out. You know too much about the woods to be a +native born German." + +"You're right," said the man, as he lowered his arms. "I'm from the +West, and I'm an American, but in the pay of Germany--and have +established my post here." + +"You, of course, know that you must get out of here at once," continued +Mr. Waterman. "I don't think that it is our duty to take you in, though +Pierre, who is just coming, is a Canadian. There is the other door. +Here's your gun. We'll hold Pierre for a few minutes and then let him do +what he thinks best." + +"You're all right, men. I thought that the Canadian police had me, as +they probably have my companions." + +In a second he was out of the door and away down the trail. The members +of the party waited for Pierre. He came in very shortly and looked +around with great surprise. + +"Where is he?" asked he, as he looked around in astonishment. "I trail +him here. You let him go?" + +"Yes, we let him go," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Why for dat?" asked the Indian. "He bad man. He shoot at me twice but +no hit me." + +"He was here trying to get news for the Germans," said Mr. Waterman. + +"How he get news here? No news here. What news?" + +"I could not make you understand," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Why not understand?" asked Pierre. + +"Have you ever heard that it is possible to speak miles and miles +through the air?" + +"Yes, Great Spirit speaks to all his children all over," said Pierre +devoutly. + +"I don't mean the Great Spirit, but men, just like you and I." + +"Oh, no, no, that impossible," said Pierre. + +"It is done, and this man was here listening, so that he would know +things and then tell the enemies of Canada." + +"I no understand. What enemies?" asked Pierre. + +"Have you not heard that England and Canada are at war with the +Germans?" asked Mr. Waterman. + +"Oh, yes, but that is far across the Big Water," said Pierre. + +"Quite true, but the Germans are over here too. In some places, trying +to do harm to Canada," said Mr. Waterman. + +"This bad man, a German?" asked Pierre, as his eyes lighted up. + +"Yes," replied Bob. + +"Where he go?" asked Pierre. + +"We, Americans, have no war with Germans. He goes that way," said Mr. +Waterman, pointing up the trail. In another moment Pierre was lost to +view. + +"What do you think of that?" said Jack. "I think I'll tag along behind +for fear he gets hurt." + +"Things certainly have come with a rush," said Mr. Waterman. "Suppose +you follow Pierre, so that if the German gets him that you will be there +to lend aid." + +"I'll be there," said Jack, as he looked significantly at his rifle. +"That skunk fired twice at Pierre already. He may get him the third +time. If he does, I'll take only one shot." + +"Don't run into trouble, Jack," said Mr. Waterman. "This is not our +fight. But follow Pierre and help him if he gets into trouble. Bob and I +will get down to Escoumains and report the matter." + +The two men shook hands and Jack disappeared after Pierre just as +quickly and as silently as the latter had done. + +"That will be some chase," said Mr. Waterman. "That German is a real +woodsman and he'll lead them a merry chase." + +"It's a pity that Jack did not go with Pierre. How is he going to find +him?" + +"Leave that to him," said Mr. Waterman. "There are few Indians more +clever than Jack in following a trail. He'll be up with Pierre by +nightfall." + +They then looked around and were surprised at the completeness of the +outfit. Evidently four or five men had been needed to get all these +things into the woods. + +"How they ever got all this stuff here without arousing the suspicion of +the Canadian Government passes my comprehension," said Mr. Waterman. + +Going outside, they noticed a path, and following it, if soon led them +to the top of a mountain that was opposite to the one they had climbed +but a few short days before. Sure enough, there was the wireless, hidden +most cleverly by the trees and branches so that from the opposite hill; +nothing out of the ordinary could be seen even with a glass. + +"This is rather an old instrument," said Bob. "It is dated 1912." + +"That may explain the whole matter," said Mr. Waterman. "It is well +known that the Germans have a wonderful spy system. It is possible that +all this may have been brought in here four or five years ago for this +very purpose." + +"I guess that that's the answer," replied Bob, "for it would be +absolutely impossible for any party of men to get this stuff in here +now." + +On returning to the hut they took a good look around and found +everything in the best of order. There were supplies of all kinds there +except food. + +"I guess that the Canadian Government got his mates all right, and that +left him stranded here as far as grub was concerned. He had his nerve +with him all right, for he was liable to be shot down at any time," said +Mr. Waterman. + +They were soon on their way back. When they came to the lake they found +that the German's canoe was gone. Pierre was evidently right on his +trail, for one of the two canoes they had brought along was also +missing. + +"I wonder if Jack has caught up with Pierre so soon," mused Mr. +Waterman. + +"It looks that way," replied Bob, "for otherwise he would probably have +taken our canoe, knowing that we could get back to camp even without a +canoe." + +"You're right," said Mr. Waterman. + +They hurried on and in due time they arrived in camp. By this time it +was getting late, so they determined to go into Escoumains the next +morning and inform the authorities of their discovery. They found Bill +and Pud and Jean quite excited. In a short time they had the story in +full. + +"You did not see any one around here to-day, did you?" asked Mr. +Waterman, addressing the young Indian Jean. + +"No," was the reply. + +"I am pretty sure that the German is making for the St. Lawrence to try +and get out of the country. Let's go over to the old trail, just to see +if any one has passed that way to-day," said Mr. Waterman. + +All of them went, for the trail was only a few minutes' paddle down the +lake around a point of land that almost cut the lake in two. On arrival +there it was plain even to the unpracticed eyes of the boys that more +than one person had passed that way recently. Mr. Waterman and Jean +landed first. Jean had been on land not more than a minute before he +pointed to some tracks and said, + +"Pierre here, Jack there, other man there." + +They boys came over, but though they could see some tracks in the soft +trail, they did not see how Jean had identified his father and Jack at +once. + +"You're right," said Mr. Waterman. "Three men have passed this way +to-day. It looks as if Pierre and jack are hot on his trail." + +They then returned to camp. Bob was compelled to tell his mates all +about the trip, and they were greatly excited when they were told of the +scene in the hut when it was necessary to hold up the German in +self-defense at the point of a rifle. + +When Bob and Mr. Waterman arrived in Escouniaias early the next +morning-they found things in a great state of excitement. It seems that +Pierre and Jack had gotten in about nine o'clock the night before, hot +on the trail of the spy. To the chagrin of Sandy MacPherson, an old +friend of his named Field, had come into the store and without showing +any signs of haste had made arrangements for a launch to take him down +the river. This had been done and a half hour later Pierre had arrived. +He had tried to explain the situation, but it was not until Jack had +given his version of the matter that it dawned on the irate Sandy that +the innocent-looking and very friendly Field was the German spy. When +Mr. Waterman had told all that he knew about the matter Sandy was +angrier than ever. + +"That son-of-a-gun has played me for an easy mark for years," said +Sandy. "About three years ago he got me to take into the woods a lot of +electrical stuff on the pretense that he wanted it in trying out some +ores that he thought were valuable. Then to put me farther off the +scent, two years ago he came back with a story that his whole outfit had +been burned down and totally destroyed." + +"Have the Government agents been here?" asked Mr. Waterman. + +"No," was the reply, "but they were up at Tadousac about six weeks ago, +and they arrested three men there, though they held them only on +suspicion. When I come to think of it, one of them was a Mr. Samson that +used to come into the woods with Field. I think that Samson is still +held and he'll get his share anyway." + +The party, having told their end of the story, returned to the woods. +Some three weeks later, on returning to Escoumains, they found out that +Field had apparently made good his escape. He had landed near Riviere de +Loup, and no doubt had gotten over into the United States from there. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +A WEEK ON THE TRAIL + + +The previous days had been so full of excitement that they had +altogether forgotten that they were to go on a week's trip. Mr. Waterman +went ahead making preparations. On Sunday evening, after the short +devotions they always held on that day, said he: + +"Boys, you remember that we are going on an exploring trip this week. So +get ready. You will have to carry everything with you, so take those +things that are absolutely necessary. In addition, remember that each of +you boys is expected to carry his share of the grub for the week." + +The boys began to plan and they went to their blankets filled with the +idea of taking a real trip under old-time voyageur conditions. + +"Supposing it rains?" suggested Pud. + +"Well, what of it?" replied Bob. "Do you think that we're sugar and that +a little rain will hurt us?" + +"Don't worry very much," said Mr. Waterman. "If we have any really bad +weather you will be surprised how quickly the guides will make a wood +hut out of birch bark, and a few supports quickly cut in the woods." + +Very early the next morning they were astir. Bob had to give many +suggestions to Pud and Bill, too, but at last they had their duffle all +ready so that by means of tump lines they could not only bear their own +blankets and sleeping bags, but also their share of the week's supplies. + +"We are going north," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Let's go to the spy's cabin," said Pud. + +"Ah, do," chimed in Bill. "You see, Pud and I had no part in that +adventure." + +"Very well," said Mr. Waterman, "it won't be a bad thing for us to go +there and see how much of the place the Government agents have left." + +"Have the police been there?" asked Bob. + +"You can bet they've been there," said Mr. Waterman. "A party left +Escoumains the very day we were there." + +They were a picturesque party as they set out. Pierre was the only one +left behind. Jean, Jack and Joe were there; Joe with his little pointed +hat, mackinaw and shoe pack, looking all the world like the pictures of +the old voyageurs that one sees in the illustrations of the early French +occupation of Canada. With the three guides, Mr. Waterman, Mr. Anderson, +and the three boys, there were eight in the party. Mr. Waterman led the +way, taking Bob in his canoe. Jack had Pud with him, Jean was paired +with Bill, while Mr. Anderson and Joe brought up the "honorable rear," +as they say in Japan. In their blue shirts, khaki trousers, bandanna +handkerchiefs around their necks and shoe packs, they looked ready to +tackle a journey to James Bay. In fact, Jean and Joe had both made the +trip to James Bay and back, over the Great Divide almost due north of +Tadousac, going first up the St. John River from Chicoutimi. They would +have been quite willing to make the trip again but, no doubt, they would +have objected to the presence of the boys on such a trip. Such a canoe +journey needs real woodsmen and is not for novices such as the boys +were. + +They were soon over into the lake from which the path led to the spy's +cabin. Mr. Waterman steered straight for the trail. They got out and +were soon over the short divide and into the big gulch. They found the +cabin still standing and apparently with everything just as it had been +left by them. When, however, they came to the wireless on the top of the +mountain, they could not find a trace of it. It had been taken away +entirely. The boys enjoyed the view from the top of the mountain. + +"I almost believe that in clear weather Field and his mates could +recognize the ships on the St. Lawrence if they had strong glasses, as +they most probably had," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Yes, it's so clear to-day," said Mr. Anderson, "that your idea seems +not only possible but very probable. This was a very fine place for such +a purpose. They could read the wireless messages that were sent from +vessels going or coming from Quebec, and if they could get out to the +United States now and then they could very easily keep their Government +informed as to the movements of the British vessels, at least the most +important vessels plying in and out of Quebec." + +In a short time they were down the mountain and at the cabin once more. + +"I must come in here some time and look for the outlet of this gulch," +said Mr. Waterman. "There is quite a big watershed here, and the fact +that there is no lake shows that there is a good outlet. Unless this +outlet is underground it will lead down to either the Portneuf River or +the Escoumains or some lake that empties into one or other of these +streams." + +"Have we time to look for it now?" asked Mr. Anderson. + +"No," was the reply, "I have planned the trip for the week and it will +be best to make a day's trip here just for the purpose." + +They then went on their way and were soon over into another lake. + +"Do you think you can stand another carry?" asked Mr. Waterman, turning +to the boys. + +"Sure," said Bob. + +"Ab-so-lute-el-y," said Bill. + +"All right," replied Pud. + +"Why so modest?" asked Mr. Anderson. + +"I find it hard work," said Pud. "I not only have to carry my load but +about twenty-five pounds of superfluous flesh. I guess I can stand it if +they can. I'm here to get in shape, so go ahead." + +"We can stay here just as well and go on to the other lake in the +morning. It is only mid-afternoon now, though," said Mr. Waterman, "and +we could make the next lake easily. I plan to stay there all day +to-morrow." + +"Don't mind me," said Pud. + +So they went ahead. Bob carried the canoe and a duffle bag full of grub, +while Mr. Waterman kept piling on stuff until he had at least one +hundred and fifty pounds on his back. With a tump line over his +forehead, he moved ahead, apparently little concerned about the weight +of his load. Mr. Anderson and the guides were also similarly loaded. Pud +elected to carry his bag and the portion of the grub. Jack kept on +piling up the stuff with a merry wink to Bob. Finally they moved off. +The carry proved to be about a mile and a quarter long. They had to go +up a fairly steep hill first. All did very well, though Pud was puffing +and blowing like a porpoise and sweating like a foundryman when they +stopped at the top of the hill for a short rest. They were soon on their +way again. Jack stayed behind with Pud and the others were soon lost to +view. Bob and Mr. Waterman walked ahead at a good pace and were soon at +the lake, which opened out before them most invitingly. They were all in +swimming when at last Jack and Pud hove in sight. Pud was certainty the +picture of fatigue. + +"Don't overdo it, Jack," said Mr. Waterman. "That was really too big a +load for him to carry." + +"I guess you're right," replied Jack. "I put it on him more for a joke +than anything else, intending to take it myself later. But that kid's +game. He would not let me have it, although I thought he would melt away +before we got here. I won't overload him again. When he gets back to +Philadelphia he'll be hard as a rock. With his gameness and his weight +and strength, he should tear things loose on that football team. I don't +know much about the game, but they tell me it's rough. + +"It is a little rough," said Mr. Waterman, who himself had been a noted +player when he went to college. "A little roughness in sport is really +necessary for the full development of boys. They must get that personal +contact and feel that they have to get the best of the other fellow +through their own efforts. If this is done fairly, the roughness will +not deteriorate into anything dangerous." + +In the meantime Pud prepared for a swim, which was certainly a reward +for him after such a long stretch of portage. + +"Oh, you water," said Pud, as he luxuriously lay out on his back +floating. "That last carry was some hike. It had all the Plattsburg +full-equipment hikes beaten to death. I'm just going to load my pater +down some day with what I had on my back and then ask him how he would +like to tote that over a young mountain." + +"You did very well, Pud," said Mr. Waterman. "I did not notice how much +Jack was piling on you or I would have taken part of it myself." + +"Not on your life," said Pud. "I'm here, and that extra sweat I had will +do me good. I told Jack I would switch with him now and then. I did not +realize what a load he had. On the previous carries he walked along just +as if he was out for a little jaunt. He's getting old, too. I don't see +how how he does it." + +"They get used to it and know just how to distribute the load so that it +will be carried most easily," said Mr. Waterman. + +While the boys were enjoying the water, the guides were busy. Already +they had cut a couple of poles, and with the aid of two trees they had +made a very serviceable fireplace and was getting ready to make +biscuits. + +"Hey, you boys," called Mr. Waterman, "get busy. We'll clear up around +here, but you fellows get out and catch us some trout for supper." + +"Nothing easier," said Bob, as he came ashore and put on his clothes. In +a little while they were all three out on the lake casting like +veterans. Bob was in one canoe alone while Pud paddled Bill in the other +canoe. In a very short time they had over thirty fine trout, and at a +shout from Jack they came back to camp. + +"Well, did you have any luck?" asked Jack, as they came to the shore. + +"Bully!" said Bob. "This lake is full of trout as fine as I have ever +seen." + +"No wonder," replied Jack. "There is no one here to catch them, and they +keep on increasing." + +"Well, I'll reduce the supply if we stay here a few days," said Pud. "I +could eat an ox, let alone a few trout." + +"You'll get all you want to eat and then some," said Jack. + +The fish were soon cleaned, and twenty minutes later they sat around a +table made of two big logs with birch bark spread over it. It was not +quite so comfortable as in their home camp, where they had a rude bench +to sit on, but not one of them even thought of any such luxuries. They +had had a strenuous day with but a very small lunch, and they were as +hungry as wolves. The way the biscuits, the trout and everything else +disappeared was a tribute to Jack's cooking. Even Pud at last drew back +from the improvised table fully satisfied. + +"The Germans have a proverb to the effect that 'Hunger is the best +cook,'" said Mr. Anderson. + +"That's true," broke in Pud, "but when you have a fine cook and hunger +too, then there is real enjoyment in eating even the most simple fare." + +"Well said, old top," remarked Bill. "'But first tell me when you got to +be a philosopher." + +"The best time to philosophize," said Mr. Waterman, "is just after such +a meal as we have had. Then there is such a sense of bodily satisfaction +that everything else appears to us as if detached from our own selves. +The true philosophers are the woodsmen. They have time to think over +life and its many chances, and they get to know things at their true +worth. That is why men who are brought up near to nature are always such +good judges of character either in men, women, or animals." + +"Now we are philosophizing," said Mr. Anderson. "I think you're right, +though, for practically the only true philosophers that I have ever +known are men of the woods. Pierre is a good example of this. His views +of life and death would do credit to Dr. Talmage or any other of our +great preachers." + +"Well, all I can say is this," said Pud, "I'm glad I'm here." + +At this everybody laughed, for it was typical of big, hearty, jovial +Pud, that any real serious conversation should go over his head, even +though his own ideas may have started the talk. + +After supper the boys got their sleeping bags ready and everything else +so placed that they would not be wet by the dew, which is very heavy in +the Saguenay region. Then, like true sons of Nimrod, they once more +sought the limpid waters of the little lake in quest of the ever elusive +and ever interesting trout. They all had good luck, which guaranteed +them a hearty breakfast. As Bob and Pud came back to the camp they found +Jack out on a log casting. The woods were back of him and almost +directly above him, but in some uncanny way he managed to cast his fly +just where and just as far as he wanted to. As they came by he showed +them a dozen fine specimens that he had hooked. + +"Why go so far from camp?" said he, in his quizzical way. "They bite +just as good here." + +"For you," said Bob. "You're a wizard with the fly, but for a poor +novice like myself it is better to seek the fish where they are pretty +sure to be found. I'm no Pied Piper of Hamlin to be able to draw fish to +my fly as he did rats with his pipe." + +The camp fire proved more than usually attractive that evening. All +gathered around, even the guides, after they had straightened everything +up. + +"Well, we don't need to worry much now," said Mr. Waterman. "We'll stay +right here to-morrow and have a good day's fishing and possibly +hunting." + +"What kind of hunting?" asked Pud. + +"I was thinking merely of a partridge or two," replied Mr. Waterman. + +"Arc you going to use your sleeping bag to-night?" asked Bob. + +"Sure thing," replied Mr. Anderson. "We're going to have a fine night, +but about four o'clock to-morrow morning you are liable to make the +acquaintance of some of those moustiques or gnats that Pierre tells +about. If you are in your sleeping bag you can then just pull over the +flap and have another snooze." + +"It certainly looks like fine weather," said Bill. "I think that I'll +get up real early and visit that trout hole I found to-night. They just +jumped at the fly. It was almost dark when I struck the place, so I had +time only for a 'strike' or two." + +"I'm with you," said Pud, with a yawn. + +"Swell chance," said Bob. "We won't be able to waken you to-morrow +morning until you hear Jack's voice yelling that breakfast is ready." + +"Is that so?" replied Pud. "Now, don't you believe it. I've turned over +a new leaf, and I'm going to get up promptly from now on." + +"The only thing you'll turn over to-morrow at dawn is yourself for +another nap," said Bill. + +"Just try me and you'll see," said Pud. + +"You're on," was the reply, "but I warn you that I'll call you just +once." + +Just then Mr. Waterman broke in by asking Joe if this was not the lake +where he had had such an experience with wolves some years before. Joe +nodded. The boys immediately wanted to know the story. Bob sat down by +Joe and was soon lost as he listened to the vivacious tale of the French +habitant. + +"That isn't fair," said Bill, to no one in particular. + +"What isn't fair?" asked Mr. Anderson. + +"Why, Bob knows French, so he is having Joe tell him the wolf story. +We'd like to know that too." + +"It is really a fairly common occurrence; at least was some years ago in +this country," said Mr. Anderson. + +"But Bob will tell us, won't you?" said Pud, turning to him. + +"Sure." So Bob began the interesting tale. + +"Joe was up here with Pierre and another Indian hunting some years ago. +The winter had been a very severe one with a wealth of snow. On this +account, the wolves had been able to get but little to eat. They were +then much more numerous than they are to-day. At that time there was a +bounty on wolves and hundreds of heads were turned in to the government +each winter and spring. Joe and his party were coming back to Escoumains +after a good winter's hunt. They stopped on the next lake at a hunter's +shack that was there at that time. As the weather promised to keep cold, +they determined to stay there, feeling that if the spring should come +with a rush that they would be able to get down to Escoumains, as it was +only a week's journey distant. + +"They therefore set their traps and went methodically about their +business of gathering in the furry harvest made profitable to them +through the desires of 'My Lady' in the large cities, whose fair necks +must be covered and protected from even the cold autumn's breath. One +fine day Joe set out to make the round of the traps. He had good luck +and was going home about four o'clock in the afternoon, laden with two +foxes and four rabbits. Joe was hurrying on, for there was no moon and +the shades of night fall very early in these latitudes even in March. +They had heard a wolf occasionally, but had felt no fear of them, so +that when Joe heard the long-drawn note, he did not give it even a +thought. He was intent on getting back before nightfall, so he failed to +note that the howls were rapidly approaching. + +"As he reached the surface of the lake, which was of course frozen +tightly at that time of year, he was astonished to hear the howl of a +wolf, immediately followed by other howls only a short distance in his +rear. He hurried on, but before he could get across the lake, he saw +several dark forms dash out on the ice behind him. He broke into a run, +but the pack rapidly overtook him. Raising his gun to fire, he was +thunderstruck to find that in some way he had jammed the trigger and +that it would not work. + +"He did not have any time to waste, so he threw down two rabbits and +hurried on. The wolves stopped only a moment, when they came to the +rabbits. He could hear them snarling and quarreling over their small +carcasses. He felt his blood run cold and wondered if he was to be torn +to pieces in like manner. Once more the pack came on, so he threw +another couple of rabbits to them and ran ahead. They got quite near to +him the next time, so he dropped the remainder of his load and fled for +the shore. He felt that his only chance lay in getting ashore and up a +tree. As he ran he tried to fix the trigger of his gun, but he could not +get it working. He was quite near the shore now, but the wolves were +close behind. With a last desperate rush, he sprang up the steep bank. +Turning around, he was just in time to strike down with his clubbed gun +a big gray form that leaped at him with gleaming fangs. This lucky +stroke probably saved Joe's life, for the rest of the pack stopped to +devour their comrade, thus giving Joe time to get safely into the +branches of a tree. The wolves, now with bloody mouths and glaring +eyeballs, surrounded the tree and let out howls of such fierceness that +they made Joe tremble even though he knew that he was safe for the +present. He was only about a mile and a half away from their shack, and +he knew that if he did not turn up, that sooner or later Pierre would be +out to hunt him. + +"But, can you imagine how pleasant it must be to be up in a tree, with +broken gun, a dozen hungry wolves beneath you and a cold night coming +on? Already Joe began to get very cold, for in his race across the lake +through the heavy snow he had broken out into a heavy perspiration. As +darkness came down he could feel the cold hand of King Frost, as it +were, reaching for him and trying to throw him down to the beasts below. +This idea took possession of Joe's mind and he fought it off with all +his strength. He tried as best he could in the gathering darkness to fix +his gun, but it was hopelessly jammed. At last he gave this up and +settled down to wait for the morning, which would surely bring Pierre to +his rescue. + +"As the cold became greater, his desire to sleep became the stronger. He +felt himself nodding several times and once awoke just as he was on the +point of falling from the tree. He grabbed a branch lower down, but his +feet swung beneath and before he could get back safely on the limb one +of the watchful band below by a mighty leap snapped at his leg and took +a piece cleanly out of the calf, tearing his trousers leg almost +entirely off him. The smell of the blood put the wolves into a frenzy +and they tried again and again to reach him by leaping. They seemed +maddened by hunger, for when one of their number fell after making a +mighty upward bound, the pack was on him in a minute, and before the +horrified eyes of Joe, they tore their mate to pieces and in ten minutes +there was neither hide nor hair of him to be seen. + +"Joe now had to bind up his leg as best he could. He bound the rags of +his trouser leg around so that it kept out the cold pretty well. This +excitement kept him up for some time, but about twelve o'clock Joe felt +that the cold was sure to get the better of him if he did not do +something. He thereupon undid the leather strap that he used ordinarily +to carry his gun over his back when not in use. This strap, together +with his belt, made a strap sufficiently long so that he was able to +bind himself to the tree. He then felt easier, for he knew that at +least, even though he went to sleep, that he would run no risk of +falling down as prey for the murderous pack below. He wondered if he +would be able to stand the cold night or whether when Pierre came in the +morning he might not find him stark and rigid, tied to the branch of the +tree. + +"He shuddered as he remembered the gruesome sight he had once noted far +to the north one day. Then, on one of his fishing expeditions, he had +come upon the body of a man hanging in a tree, evidently treed by wolves +and then frozen. He wondered if some chance passer-by in after years +would find his skeleton in a similar way and would pass on with only a +'Dieu benisse' (May God bless) as he had done, and not even give him +decent burial. He commenced to think that his present position was +directly due to his haste on this former occasion. He begged God to +forgive him and promised to burn a hundred candles for the soul of the +unknown if he ever got back to Escoumains. + +"At last human strength could hold out no longer and Joe fell asleep, +asleep with the cold, that forerunner of death. Joe knew nothing until +he awoke in the cabin with Pierre busy about him. It seems that when he +did not return Pierre had gotten uneasy. He and his mate had started +out. With pine torches they followed his trail, and when they saw the +numerous wolf tracks they feared for the worst. They followed across the +ice and were themselves attacked by the pack. Their guns soon put them +to flight and a few minutes later they found Joe insensible up in the +tree. They hurried him back to the hut and in a few days Joe was none +the worse for his experience except for the painful wound on his leg +made by the champion high jumper of the pack." + +"Are there any wolves up here now?" asked Pud, as he looked out into the +forest with its dark avenues of trees. + +"Not so many," replied Mr. Anderson, "but Sandy, down at Escoumains, +told me the other day that they were getting numerous again, and that a +bounty had once more been put on their heads." + +"Don't be dreaming of wolves and pounce on me again, as you did when +dreaming of bears," laughed Bob. + +"Yes, to bed, to bed, now," cried Mr. Waterman. "I'm sure we all need +the rest, for we have had a great day." + +They all agreed with him and were soon warm and cozy in their sleeping +bags, sleeping as only tired men can sleep out of doors. The fire died +down, the greenness of the nearby branches became gray and then black +and were finally merged into the blackness of the surrounding woods, and +not a sound told that here under God's own canopy slept human beings +enjoying nature as the primeval men of old did. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +MOCCASINS AS FOOD + + +Pud made good the next morning, for when Bill woke him he got up at +once, plunged into the lake for an eye opener, and was ready with rod +and line as soon as Bill. They were soon out on the lake and Bill made +at once for the trout hole that he had spotted the night before. They +had remarkably good luck and returned in time for breakfast with +twenty-five fine trout. These they cleaned and handed to Jack, who soon +had them sizzling on the fire and ready for breakfast. Bob and Mr. +Waterman had also gone fishing. They did not return until Jack's cheery +"Halloo!" brought they in scurrying. After breakfast they divided into +parties. Bob and Mr. Waterman elected to go hunting partridges, while +the others said that they would go fishing. Bob and Mr. Waterman were +soon off. Arriving at the far end of the lake, they left their canoes +and were soon lost in the depths of the forest. For some time they went +along, but at last Mr. Waterman noted a partridge, and with a clever +shot it was his. They wandered around, climbed a mountain and +incidentally got three more birds, two of which Bob had the good fortune +to bag. + +"Well, we'd best be going," said Mr. Waterman. "Lead the way." + +Bob said nothing, but started off confidently. Mr. Waterman followed on +for a few minutes. He then asked, + +"Let's see your compass, Bob." + +Bob felt in his pocket, but did not find it there. He then remembered +that he had left it in his sleeping bag. He was compelled to confess as +much to Mr. Waterman. + +"That's bad dope, Bob," said Mr. Waterman. "You should never leave camp +without your compass nor without first noting carefully in which +direction you are going." + +"I know that," said Bob. "I just forgot it." + +"Which direction did we take this morning?" queried Mr. Waterman. + +"We first went east to the end of the lake, and since then we have been +going mainly in a northerly direction." + +"That is right," was the reply. "Now, if you can tell me which way is +south, we can at least go in the right direction." + +"We're going south now, aren't we?" asked Bob. + +"No," Mr. Waterman replied. "We are going north, or nearly so." + +He then pulled out his compass and showed Bob that this was so. + +"Now, supposing we had no compass, how would we be able to tell the +points of the compass?" asked Bob. + +"By the sun," answered Mr. Waterman, in his usual, quiet way. + +"How?" was the query. + +"It's quite simple. In this latitude the sun is to the south of us. We +therefore turn and face the sun, as it is now near noon, and we are +facing south. Behind us is north, to our right, the west and to our left +the east." + +"A woodsman certainly must be on the lookout," said Bob. + +Then they turned around and after quite a tramp they came to their own +lake. They reached camp about three o'clock to find it empty. The others +were evidently still out fishing. They busied themselves about the camp, +finally opening out their sleeping bags and lying down on them. In due +time the others returned and showed such a multitude of shining beauties +that they were amazed. + +"This is one of the best lakes we have ever been on," said Jack, as he +went about preparing supper. "The trout are very numerous and of fine +size. If we had time it would pay us to stay here a few days and get +ready some smoked trout to take out with you when you go back to the +city." + +"I'd like to do it," said Mr. Waterman, "but I want to carry out my +original schedule, so we'll reserve your idea for later on in the +season." + +Once more they had a fine supper, consisting of partridge stew with +dumplings, trout, biscuits and prunes for dessert. They spent another +very pleasant evening around the camp fire. + +In the morning, after a hearty breakfast, they set out for another lake +farther north and a little to the east. + +"I want to work over towards the Escoumains River, so that we can come +down that stream on Friday and get our first taste this season of fast +water," said Mr. Waterman. + +"That will be fine," said Bob. "Father has often told me of the exciting +times he has had shooting the rapids in the Lake St. John region." + +They were soon ready for their journey. When they came to the first +portage Pud was the first man out of the boat. He had his dunnage bag on +his back and the canoe on his shoulders, and waited for Jack to show the +way. Off they plodded, and in about an hour they came down again to +another fine lake. The guides at once began to make camp, while the +others looked to their sleeping bags and cleared up for the night. By +ten o'clock they were settled for the day, and off they went in their +canoes to try their luck on the new lake. They found it just as full of +fish as the lake they had just left. When they returned at one o'clock +they found that they really had more fish than they could use. + +"We'll have to stop fishing for the rest of the day," said Mr. Waterman. +"There's no use catching trout merely to throw them back again." + +"Let's climb some mountain this afternoon and have a good swim +afterwards," suggested Mr. Anderson. + +After lunch the three boys, with their two mentors, left the camp and +made for the opposite shore of the lake, as the mountain rose up sharply +there. They scrambled up the sides of the mountain and had gotten nearly +to the top when they were startled to see a party of men above them. +When they came out on the top they found the strangers there apparently +waiting for them. Mr. Waterman greeted them pleasantly, but they gave +only gruff answers. They inquired at first very politely what they were +doing there. Mr. Anderson gave them civil answers, but they evidently +did not think that his answers were full enough, so they threw off all +disguise, and the leader said, + +"We are Government officials, sent up here to see if there are any more +stations such as Field had down near your camp. It looks rather +suspicious that you should discover this man Field so opportunely. We +already know that food you bought in Escoumains has been found in his +cabin." + +"Very true," said Mr. Waterman. "As I explained to Mr. MacPherson, that +was the reason why we went out looking for the thief. It was on that +quest that we found Field and discovered his business. We notified the +Government immediately, which proves that we were honest in the matter." + +"Perhaps it does and perhaps it doesn't," was the reply. + +"What you do not know is that we had ferreted out Field's accomplices, +and I have no doubt that we would have gotten him in a short time. It is +possible that he knew this and made an arrangement with you to keep him +supplied with grub." + +"Nothing of the kind," said Mr. Waterman. "You evidently have not read +the evidence I left with Mr. MacPherson. There I told him all about the +scene at the hut, and if you have read that you must know that we knew +nothing of Field or his work. All we know is that he stole some of our +grub and showed remarkable skill in doing so. All through, he was about +as clever as one could imagine." + +"I'll grant that he was clever, and you seem clever yourself," was the +reply. + +"Don't forget that we'll keep our eye on you the rest of the summer, and +that at the first suspicious move, we'll arrest you," said another +official. + +"You will find that totally unnecessary. We have been coming up into +this country for several years, and the delights of nature, the fishing, +hunting and adventure are the only things we are after here," said Mr. +Waterman. + +"I hardly know what to believe," said the spokesman of the party. "That +man Field was here on just the same plea that you have stated, and until +a few days ago he was just as little suspected as you now actually are. +Pardon my questioning, but it seemed necessary. We are camping over on +Lac Corbeau for some time, so if you see more of us do not be surprised. +For the present we'll assume that things are just as you state they are. +I sincerely hope so, for otherwise it will be a very serious matter for +you." + +The two parties then separated, and Mr. Waterman led the way back down +the mountain. They were just in time for a real good swim before supper. +Jack had been out and he had gotten four ducks, so that they had a very +fine meal. Duck, trout, biscuits hot from the pan, ginger-bread and +apricots made up a meal that would have done credit to Delmonico's, let +alone a camp far away in the Canadian wilds. They certainly enjoyed it. + +The next morning they were up early. They were going to get over to the +Escoumains River and this meant that they would have to portage through +three lakes. + +"We'll have some hard work this morning, boys, so let's get away as +early as we can," said Mr. Waterman. + +"How many portages have we?" asked Pud. + +"Three," was the reply. + +"It's all the same to me," said Pud. "I'm getting to like the feel of +that old canoe on my neck. It certainly does not seem half as heavy as +it was ten days ago." + +"That's because you know how to distribute its weight so that you carry +it with head, neck, and arms," said Mr. Anderson. "These canoes are +especially made and they weigh only sixty pounds. You ought to carry the +canoes we used the first year of the Saguenay Club. They were just the +ordinary canoe and they weighed nearly one hundred pounds and were badly +balanced. These canoes not only weigh less than any other canoes you +will see in this country, but they are especially balanced so that they +are thereby easier to carry." + +"I never used any other canoes," said Bob. "Now that I am used to these +canoes, I do not mind them very much." + +"You must also remember that you boys are getting into the finest kind +of physical shape," said Mr. Waterman. + +"We ought to up here," said Pud. "I've done more real work here the past +two weeks than I would do at home in six months. It certainly puts the +muscle on a fellow." + +Shortly after breakfast they had all their duffle packed and they were +off. They went along from one lake to another without incident and in +due time they arrived at the Escoumains River. By this time it was +nearly two o'clock, so they had a hurried lunch and then started up the +river. Then the boys had a taste of river canoe work that they had never +seen before. It was well that for each of the four canoes there was an +experienced man, for otherwise there would have been plenty of trouble. +Before they started the boys were surprised to see the guides come out +of the woods with several long poles nicely trimmed up. These they laid +in the canoes. + +"What's the idea?" asked Pud. + +"Of what?" asked Joe. + +"The poles." + +"We use the pole getting up the rapids. One can go better that way," +said Joe. + +"I didn't know that one ever used anything but paddles in canoes," said +Bill. + +"You'll very soon find how much more power you can get out of the pole +than out of a paddle when going up a stream," said Mr. Anderson. + +The canoes were pretty well loaded down but the party set out bravely. +For some time the river was deep and by hard paddling they made progress +against the current. Then they came to a rapid. Mr. Waterman got out and +went up the stream. In a little while he returned and stated that he +thought they could get up all right if they poled. Then the boys saw how +this was done. Generally they kept near the shore. The man with the pole +stood in the rear and shoved the boat along. It was necessary to be real +clever with the pole, as any one can make sure of by trying this +manoeuver some time in fast water. Finally they got up the first rapid, +though frequently the boys thought that they were due for a wetting. +When they came to the next rapids Joe told Mr. Waterman that he knew +these rapids well and that it would be necessary to portage. Joe said +that it was a full hour's portage, meaning that it was nearly two miles. +They landed and were soon headed up the stream, laden with their canoes +and duffle bags. It was hard work, though they found a well-beaten trail +leading up the river. They got glimpses of the cool waters of the +Escoumains as it dashed foaming from rock to rock. They could hardly +admire the scenery, for they were all well weighed down with their packs +or canoes. At last they came out at the head of the rapids and found a +fine sheet of water ahead of them. In fact, as often happens, they found +the river broad and slow-flowing for several miles, and they made steady +progress. + +"Keep your eye out for a good camping place," said Mr. Waterman. Hardly +had he said this than they came around a curve of the river and saw +before them a little opening in the woods that had been cleared. A +little stream ran down into the larger river, forming a sand bar near +its mouth. + +"Here's the place," said Mr. Anderson. + +As if by one consent they all steered for the shore and quickened their +strokes. In a little while they were practically ready for the night. It +was well that they had stopped, for it was now close to six o'clock and +they were all getting very hungry. + +"Hurry up the grub, Jack," said Mr. Waterman. "I could eat a moccasin." + +"I eat moccasin before now," said Joe. "It ees hard to chew." + +"When was that?" asked Bill, who scented a story. + +"It was many year ago, when I very hungry in dees wood," said Joe. + +"Let's have the story after supper," said Mr. Anderson. + +"Oh, no, it is too difficile for me to speak Engleesh," replied Joe. + +"Well, tell it to me," said Bob, "and I can then tell it to the others." + +"All right, all right," said Joe, "but you must not expect big story. It +ees only what happened to me one long wintaire." + +The boys went in for a swim and they found the water a little colder +than the lake on which they had camped the previous weeks. Joe, Jean and +Jack kept very busy, and it was not long before the noise of a stick +beaten against a tin can made known to all that supper was ready. + +"Trout will do us to-night, but to-morrow morning we must have salmon +for breakfast," said Mr. Waterman. "An extra dish of prunes for the one +who catches the first salmon." + +This offer does not mean anything to the ordinary person in the city, +but on a trip out into the woods where the grub has to be rationed out, +fruit of any kind is at a premium. It was almost dark when they got +through their supper and were ready for the night. It was quite a cool +night in spite of the hot day they had had. The guides piled on the wood +and it was very comfortable after their hard day's paddling and +portaging, to sit around the fire and talk over the events of the day or +whatever happened to come up. Bob soon sneaked away from the fire and +went over to the smaller fire which the guides had made close to the +little wood hut they had hastily thrown up. It did not take Joe long to +plunge into his story, and for quite a while Bob stayed with the guides +listening to Joe. When Bob returned to the main party he found them +getting ready to seek their blankets. His return was greeted gladly by +Bill and Pud, who remembered the story that Bob had promised to get from +Joe and then relate to them. + +"Well, how did you make out?" asked Bill. + +"Did Joe tell you the story?" exclaimed Pud eagerly. + +"Yes, he told me the story in his matter-of-fact way. To him his +experience was only an ordinary occurrence that may almost be expected +by any hunter in a hard winter. I think that I had better keep the story +until to-morrow night, as it is getting late," said Bob, looking +questioningly at Mr. Waterman. + +"Go ahead, Bob," said Mr. Waterman. "We are going to stay here and fish +to-morrow, so it won't make much difference if we stay up a little later +than usual. I don't think that Joe has ever told us of this experience, +has he?" added Mr. Waterman, turning to Mr. Anderson. + +"No. Joe has told us a lot of very interesting experiences that he has +had, but he never told us of the time he got so hungry that he tried to +eat his moccasins," said Mr. Anderson. + +"Well," said Bob, "though Joe told me the story in his own very laconic +fashion, I am sure that it was much more interesting than I can make it. +I'll do the best I can, however." + +"All right, then," said Bill, "go ahead." + +"When Joe was a young man he once came hunting far north of this country +in the company of an old Montagnais chief named Howling Wolf. They +started out late in November, expecting to get back about Christmas +time. They went up the Portneuf River, which was frozen over then, and +made good progress. They had very good success from the start. Contrary +to what they had generally experienced, the further north they went the +better was the hunting. They were led on by this unexpected factor to go +much farther north than they had ever been before. They had three dog +teams along and were provisioned for a three months' trip. Their good +fortune lured them on and it was almost Christmas before they awoke to +the fact that they must soon get started home or they might get into +serious trouble because of lack of provisions. + +"Let's see if we can get some deer meat so that we can stay longer," +said Howling Wolf one day. Joe consented and they went out with this +idea in view. They were very successful. They both brought in a deer and +at the end of a week, they had quite a lot of meat on hand. Things thus +went along until shortly after Christmas, as sometimes happens, the game +suddenly became scarce. They could not get a deer or even a rabbit. In +addition, the winter came on in earnest. One heavy fall of snow was +followed by another and they were kept close to their quarters. The +heavy weather continued and they determined to make for the south just +as soon as it became possible to do so. + +"About the tenth of January, they left for the south. They made good +progress, though their provisions became lower and lower. At last they +were on very short rations and it was under these conditions that +Howling Wolf had the misfortune to break his leg. Joe bound up the leg +as best he could, but the injured man made progress all the slower. As +Joe found that the extra burden slowed down the dogs so much in the +heavy snow, he determined to cache one load of pelts, make use of the +extra dogs and hurry on. Food was very low and if they should hit a +week's storm he could easily see that he would have the greatest +difficulty getting out to Escoumains. + +"As bad luck would have it, a regular blizzard came on and for four +days, Joe and Howling Wolf had to lie low in a rude shelter that Joe had +hastily thrown up when overtaken by the blizzard. It was impossible to +keep a fire burning as the snow came down in icy particles that made +wandering from camp a foolhardy undertaking. Howling Wolf on several +occasions begged Joe to leave him there and go on his way. Like the +Indian that he was, he felt that the storm gods were against them and he +had given up. + +"Before they left their improvised shelter, Joe had to sacrifice three +of the dogs to furnish food for the other dogs. Joe also stated that he +made his first hearty meal for several days on some dog steaks that he +had kept for himself and Howling Wolf. At last they got away, but on the +very next night they were attacked by a large band of wolves, and though +they succeeded in driving them off it was only at the expense of almost +their last cartridges and the loss of three more dogs. Joe spoke again +of the heroism of Howling Wolf, who sat up in his sledge and shot at the +wolves, though they threatened to overwhelm him and Joe on more than one +rush that they made. Joe said nothing of himself but one's imagination +can easily picture these two hardy hunters, sheltered only by their +sledges, making a fight for life against a large pack of hungry wolves. + +"When the storm was over and the wolves had been driven off, there were +over a dozen dead wolves lying around. Joe stated that knowing that he +could not get the pelts out, he had been compelled to leave the wolves +unskinned. In fact, the most vivid impression made on Joe by this fight +for his very life seemed to lie in the fact that twelve fine wolf skins +had to be left there. The further loss of the dogs made it necessary for +Joe to cache all the rest of his pelts. He did this very reluctantly, +for he felt that unless he could get back before the winter was over, he +would lose all the fine skins they had gotten by their hard work. Then, +with hardly any grub and only a few cartridges, one dog team and a big +heavy Indian with a broken leg as a load, Joe started off for +Escoumains, at least one hundred and twenty miles away. + +"When Joe told me this, he did so in just as matter-of-fact a way as if +it were the most ordinary occurrence for a man to find himself far to +the north in the depth of winter, practically without grub and without +ammunition. The latter was really practically useless anyway, for the +heavy snow seemed to have sent everything alive into their winter +burrows. Joe could not take time to go hunting anyway, but he felt it +would be useless, for though he kept his eyes alert, he did not cross a +single track. Bad luck seemed to follow their journey out just as good +luck had urged them further and further north. + +"Another heavy storm came on and for three days Joe was compelled to lie +quiet waiting for the weather to break. By this time the grub had +entirely disappeared and only two dogs were left. Though the storm +stopped in the middle of the night, Joe got his two Eskimo huskies out +of their snow beds, hitched himself to the sledge also and started on. +By the end of that day they had covered nearly thirty miles, according +to Joe's reckoning, and both he and the dogs were practically exhausted. +There was no food for man nor beast, so Joe once more had recourse to +the dogs. He had to kill one of his favorite dogs. This was the only +part of the story in which Joe showed any trace of excitement or +sentiment. The killing of that favorite dog was evidently a very hard +task for Joe. + +"After only four hours' rest, Joe and the only dog left took up their +burden. By this time Howling Wolf was in a regular delirium, caused by +his injured leg and his privations. Joe struggled on all that day and +far into the night. According to his calculations, he traveled nearly +sixteen hours. In his naive way, Joe excused himself for not keeping on +farther by stating that his dog finally gave out completely and he had +to stop. With no food again, Joe took to eating the leather straps that +had bound the grub on the sled. Then the dog suddenly went mad shortly +after midnight and Joe was compelled to shoot him in self-defense. By +hard work, he got a fire and made a good stew of dog's meat. A good meal +of this also had a very stimulating effect on Howling Wolf, who quieted +down and went to sleep. Without waiting for the morning, Joe hurried on, +but the snow was deep and he made but very slow progress. + +"In the intervals between his delirium, the stoic Indian urged Joe to +leave him and hurry on. Joe makes no hero of himself, but he refused to +do this, stating that they would either both reach Escoumains or neither +of them would get there. In this way, Joe struggled on for two days +more, living on the remains of the dog. This at last gave out. Joe now +found himself only twenty miles away from Escoumains and he felt that if +he could only hold out another day, he might get to some place of +safety. Thus, starving, but determinedly dragging his injured friend, +Joe staggered on. That night he eased the pangs of hunger by chewing on +an old pair of moccasins that he found at the bottom of the sled. +Howling Wolf also chewed away and cheered on his friend for, though he +did not feel that Joe should still keep on dragging him along, he felt +that if he would do it that it was his duty to keep up Joe's spirits. +They both slept a few hours that night and long before dawn Joe was +toiling away. + +"At last, tired and exhausted, nature would have her due. Joe became +merely a driveling maniac, urged along by an insane desire to make +progress. At times he would wander round and round, but eventually he +would head on straight again. It was late that night that Joe saw far +ahead a welcome light. This spurred him on and for about half a mile he +almost ran. This spurt soon died down and left him so weak that he could +hardly move along. Once or twice he fell but he kept on and was soon +within hailing distance of the light. He tried to cry out but no sounds +came from his exhausted lips. At last, when at the very end of his +physical resources, he came to the door and knocked He heard a rustle +within, but even before the door was open, he had fallen down in a +faint. When he opened his eyes, he was in the cabin of his good friend +Antoine Gagnon, who was bathing his head and feet with hot water and +gently urging some hot liquid down his throat. Already Howling Wolf was +seated by the fire and telling the good wife, Gagnon, what a brave man +Joe had been and how he had saved his life. When he lifted his head, the +whole family crowded around and praised him for his wonderful endurance. +Joe stated that he had to spend a week in that house before he was +strong enough to walk. Howling Wolf's leg got all right and Joe was soon +as strong as ever. + +"Three weeks after his almost fatal trip, he was off to the north again +with another Indian and a week or more later returned with the pelts +that had been bought almost with his life's blood. 'But,' concluded Joe, +'I would give all the pelts I get in one-two-yessair, three wintaire, if +I not kill my dear dog, Marie, I love so well.'" + +"Joe must have been some hardy youth twenty years ago," said Mr. +Waterman. "I can assure you that everything he told you was true and +probably even worse than he depicted it." + +Pud and Bill were greatly impressed with Joe's story and sat a long time +staring into the fire. Pud, however, soon realized his own troubles, for +he exclaimed, + +"Gee, boys, I'm sleepy. I'm going to turn in." + +"I guess you had better, boys. You know, late hours are not on the +camper's schedule," said Mr. Anderson. + +Ten minutes later, not a sound could have been heard except the distant +calling of a loon or the low roaring of the river as it rushed along its +rocky bed. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A RESCUE IN THE RAPIDS + + +The same thought seemed to awaken every one the next morning. All were +out early but they found Jack making the fire. He stated that they were +going to have some very fine biscuits that morning and so he was up +early. No one thought of him in connection with the extra dish of +prunes. The boys were soon on the water though they did not expect to +get the first salmon. + +"Ye Heavens!" said Pud. "If one of those big salmon got on my line, I +wouldn't know what to do with it anyway. But all the same, I'm going to +have a try." + +"Same here," said Bob. "I really would like to hook one because my +father has told me so much about salmon fishing that I'm anxious to see +if I can play one as he told me how to do it. He has caught salmon not +one hundred miles from here, you know." + +"Yes, it's all very well for them to tell us how to do it," said Bill. +"I'll bet, though, that we make a botch of it when we get one." + +They were soon separated by varying distances. Bob got three trout but +no salmon rose to his fly. Pud was down the stream and as Bob floated +by, he said, + +"I don't believe there are any salmon here anyway. I've got four trout +but nary a salmon." + +As if to rebuke his disbelief in the presence of salmon in that river, a +big fish leaped clear of the water and tore away with Pud's line. In a +moment, Pud was busy. He got so excited when he saw the wonderful fish +make another flying leap that he forgot that he was on a frail canoe +and over he went. Bob hurried to his rescue and Pud was soon in his boat +again. Pud had held on to the rod and when he got in the boat, he +started to reel in but he was due for a rude awakening, as he was nearly +yanked out of the canoe by a terrific rush from the fish. + +"He's still on," yelled Pud. + +"Give him line! Give him line! Now, careful. Reel in," yelled Bob. + +Pud kept at it and for nearly an hour that fish kept him as busy as a +bee. At the end of that time, Pud drew the salmon gently towards the +canoe. Bob reached over to get him in the landing net when off he went +again. It took another good twenty minutes before he was finally landed. +Bob and Pud then paddled for the camp and reached there to find that Mr. +Waterman and Mr. Anderson were already there each with a fine specimen. + +In a little while they all gathered around for breakfast when a big +surprise awaited them. Jack demurely brought on a fine baked salmon. +When this appeared, Mr. Waterman hurried over to the tent, lifted the +covering under which the three salmon he and Mr. Anderson had caught had +been placed, and there were still the three salmon. + +"You old dog!" said Mr. Waterman. "When did you get that fish? I was up +pretty early myself but you must have had it still earlier, for you have +had plenty here to keep you busy since we got up." + +Jack did not answer Mr. Waterman's question. Instead, he merely queried +in his quizzical way. + +"Do I get them prunes?" + +For answer, Mr. Waterman went over to the shelter made for the grub and +came back with a can filled with the succulent prune. Jack took them +with a merry twinkle in his eye. + +"I don't think that I ought to take them," said he. + +"Sure. Take them. I said that I'd give extra prunes to the man getting +the first salmon and you did the trick," said Mr. Waterman. + +"That's all right, but I don't need them. Let me give them to the first +boy that gets a fish," said Jack. + +"All right," said Mr. Waterman. "Then you'll have to give them to Pud, +for he was the only boy to land one." + +Jack then came over to the table and with grave ceremony, he handed the +prunes to Pud. The latter did not want to take them but finally yielded. +They had a very merry breakfast and Jack at last told them that he had +gotten up about half past three and had hardly got out into the stream +before he had a fine salmon on his line. He had a merry battle with the +gamy fish but finally landed him and, hurrying back, he sneaked into +camp without being seen. After breakfast, the various members of the +party once more set out in quest of salmon, it being agreed that no one +would catch more than two. + +When they reassembled at lunch, every one had at least one salmon. All +were happy as kings, especially the three boys, who had had one of their +ambitions realized in catching these wonderful game fish. They went +exploring in the afternoon. Mr. Waterman took the boys back from the +river into a part of the country that had been burned over. They made +for a rather high ridge merely to get the view, with Mr. Waterman +leading. As he topped the ridge, he was seen to sink suddenly to the +ground and then hurry back to them. + +"Two fine bears up there," said Mr. Waterman in a whisper when he got +back to them. + +"Where? Where?" exclaimed Pud. + +"Just over the ridge. They're eating berries," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Let's run," said Pud. "None of us has even a revolver." + +"That's all right," replied Mr. Anderson. "Bears won't hurt you. Mr. +Waterman came back stealthily so that you could have a look at them. If +they scent us we shan't get within a mile of them. So be careful." + +Pud held back but Bob hurried on with Mr. Waterman and Bill was close +behind. They very quietly got to the top of the ridge and both of the +boys had a very good view of the two black bears that were busily +engaged eating the raspberries that grew very luxuriantly there in the +bare spots left by the ravages of the fire. Mr. Waterman had just begun +to explain to them what very timid creatures they were when Pud came up, +and falling over a root crashed down, making a terrific racket. In a +moment the bears were gone. They seemed to vanish. They seemed +instinctively to keep in line with big rocks or trees so that even the +lynx-eyed Mr. Waterman had great trouble in following their course. The +boys did not see them again. + +"You big boob!" said Bill. "What's the matter with you?" + +"I didn't mean to do it, honest to goodness," replied Pud. "But were +there really any bear here or were you stringing me as usual?" + +"Of course there was a bear here," said Bob. "But a big elephant came +along and scared them away. I don't wonder they took to their heels when +they heard the noise you made. You'd make a fine Indian scout. You had +better walk behind Jean and note how noiselessly he moves along." + +"I'm sorry," said Pud. + +The party then turned away after looking over the country from their +high point of vantage. They could see far and wide and for miles the +great forest fire had left only blackened stumps and dead trees. They +got back to camp in time for supper. Joe had had time to get out and as +he had returned with five partridges, they had another great supper. + +"They told me when I wanted to come up here," said Bob, "that if I +wanted to live on bacon, prunes, hard dough, and beans all summer that +this was the place to come." + +"Yes, that is what they generally expect to get on such trips as this, +but with just a little luck and a good cook like Jack, the least thing +to be objected to is the 'eats,'" said Mr. Anderson. + +"I should think so," replied Bob. "I don't know that I have ever enjoyed +my meals so much as up here." + +"The same here," piped in Pud. "I think we get almost too good grub, +that is as far as I am concerned, for I want to reduce and I have a +swell chance to do that with partridge and trout, one night, salmon for +breakfast, and salmon, trout, and duck for supper." + +"Yes," said Mr. Waterman. "We've been unusually lucky this summer." + +After supper, they went for a paddle up the stream, going up for nearly +three miles until they came to another rapid. Bob and Bill were in one +canoe and Pud and Mr. Anderson in another. They went up the rapid as far +as they could paddle and then swung around and came racing back. When +they came to the quiet part of the river again, Bob said, + +"That's great fun. I bet we have some excitement to-morrow when we go +down the river to a point opposite Lac Parent." + +"I guess we'll enjoy it all right. I pity Pud if he gets in the drink," +said Bill. + +The next morning, the guides and their two leaders took the greatest +precautions in binding up the duffle bags and the grub. Everything was +folded so that even though they might be capsized, there would be little +risk of their kits and grub. + +"You are making preparations as if you expect trouble," said Bob to Mr. +Waterman. + +"Not especially," was the reply. "It is always best to be ready for +anything in fast water. A broken paddle, just a mistake in judgment, may +spell disaster. However, I think you'll enjoy it this morning. The river +has some fast water all right but it is not very deep and though we may +get wet, there will not be much real danger." + +"How are we going to pair off?" asked Bob. + +"Jack will take Pud. Joe will pair with Bill, you will come with me and +Jean and Mr. Anderson will make up the party." + +They were soon off, with Mr. Waterman and Bob leading. They had quite a +stretch of slow water first and the boys were given their directions +then. + +"The main thing about getting through fast water is not to lose your +nerve," said Mr. Waterman. "Next you must have confidence in your +steersman and do what he tells you just as soon as he tells you." + +"That's what I'm here for," said Bob, in his position up in the bow. + +They soon swung into the rapids and it was exhilarating fun at first. +Then Bob's heart came up into his throat for a minute as he looked ahead +and could see only a smother of foam. Mr. Waterman steered straight for +what seemed the worst part of it. In another moment they were in it and +Bob thought that the canoe would never rise to the wall of water ahead. +But it did. In a second, they were shooting down with Bob paddling for +dear life trying as best he could to follow the calm directions of Mr. +Waterman. The very speedy part of the descent lasted only a few minutes, +but it was very exciting. Then they swung once more into the calm waters +of the broad reaches of the river. + +"Did we cover those two miles that took us over an hour to do the other +day when we were portaging up?" asked Bob. + +"That we did," said Mr. Waterman. "We did it very well. After a few +trips of this kind, you will qualify as an expert canoeist." + +"That's very kind of you to say so," replied Bob. "I know though that if +I had hit that water with Pud or Bill that we would have been swimming +long before now." + +"Well, it does help to have an old stager like me in the back end of the +canoe," said Mr. Waterman with quiet satisfaction. "To tell the truth, +that is really an easy stretch of water. If you ever go through some of +the rapids on the Shipshaw River or some of the larger rivers of this +country, you will know what fast water really means. I went down the +Shipshaw three years ago with Pierre and there were times when the +slightest mistake would have meant death almost surely." + +"I'd like to try that sometime," said Bob. + +"You may think so, but really it is a foolhardy proposition unless you +have very clever guides with you," replied Mr. Waterman. + +"That's some sport," said Bill, as his canoe came abreast of theirs. + +"I had my troubles," said Jack. "This young baby elephant up in the bow +is too heavy and makes the canoe very hard to steer." + +"That's right," said Mr. Waterman. "Suppose, before we reach the next +rapids, that you get out a moment, shift some of the load up into the +bow and have Pud sit back of the first thwart. That will balance the +canoe better." + +"That's a good idea," said Jack. "I'll do it." + +"Why so quiet?" asked Bob of Pud as he looked across. + +"Now don't kid me," said Pud. "I really thought three or four times that +I'd be swimming down those rapids a mile a minute, but Jack brought me +through all right. I'll give him all the credit." + +"Don't you believe it," said Jack. "He did fine. He obeyed orders, but +his weight in the bow made it very hard and I wouldn't want to try it +over again." + +A little later, Pud and Jack went ashore and fixed the cargo so that the +canoe would not be down at the bow. Then they were off again. Once more +they shot down through foam and spray, just missing rocks by a fraction +of an inch. It proved the greatest sport that the boys had ever tried. +They grew enthusiastic. + +"Now, it's all right to like fast water," said Jack, "but don't let that +make you careless. You can never afford to be careless even in rather +easy water. If you do, you'll come a cropper sure." + +They paddled on and went down three or four more easy rapids. By this +time the boys commenced to think that they knew quite a little about how +to take fast water. As they went along, Mr. Waterman warned them that +they were now coming to a rather hard place but that it was very short. +In another moment they were in it. Bob and his teacher went through like +a breeze. Under the master hand of Mr. Waterman, the speedy descent of +the waters was made without dipping a drop into the canoe. As they came +down into the smooth reach at the foot of the rapids, Mr. Waterman +turned the canoe around, saying, + +"Let's watch the others come down this last bit. It certainly looks +exciting but while you're in it you have little time to think of the +exciting features." + +Just then Mr. Anderson and Jean came into view. They seemed poised +almost on the brink of a cascade but the canoe came rushing down like a +bird. At times, it seemed buried in the spray but it emerged triumphant +at the foot. They also turned around to watch the others. Pud and Jack +were next. Jack made it seem so easy that the boys were amazed at the +deftness with which he steered the boat. At one spot, by a peculiar +wrist motion known only to the initiated, he made the boat move bodily +over to the right just in time to miss a big rock that seemed sure to be +their Waterloo. It now remained only for Joe and Bill to come safely +through. Under the influence of the eddies, Mr. Waterman and Bob had +floated up almost to the very foot of the rapids. This was the big +factor in what followed. + +Jack and Bill hove in sight and down they rushed. Just before they +struck the bad part of the rapids, Bill was seen to hold up his paddle +broken short off at the handle. He turned around to snatch up the extra +paddle but in doing so he was too hasty and in another moment, the canoe +was caught by a swell and overturned. Anxiously the party at the foot of +the rapids watched for the heads of Joe and Bill. Joe came up and was +seen to make frantic efforts to get back to the canoe, but he was swept +on. Bill did not appear. Bob was out of his canoe and out on the bank +before any one even thought of stopping him. In another moment, he was +running up the trail that ran alongside the river. A minute later he was +out on the rocks above where the overturned canoe was now seen to be +jammed between the rocks. A moment later, he plunged into the foaming +rapids and fortunately drifted down right on the canoe. When he came +there he had the greatest difficulty in not being swept over the canoe. +Frantically he clung to the canoe, now finding himself helpless to save +Bill, who was partly pinned under the canoe and was rapidly drowning +right before his eyes. + +Bills eyes were turning glassy, Bob thought, as he made a final effort +to get the canoe free. He succeeded in doing this, but not as he +expected, for his weight and the weight of the water as it swept along +crumpled up the canoe and suddenly he found himself rushing down the +rapids just like a wisp of straw on a miniature stream such as little +boys sometimes make in the gutters. All at once he felt Bill's body bump +him and instinctively he grabbed it and though bruised in a hundred +places, he finally shot out at the foot of the rapids still clutching +Bill's limp form. Bob was himself practically unconscious, but struggled +to keep himself and Bill afloat as if under some superpower. + +A moment later, the others were there and they soon had Bob and Bill out +on the bank. Bill was far gone, as he not only had been half drowned +when pinned under the canoe but he had knocked his head against the +rocks in the latter part of his descent. First aid was given to him +first. He was stretched out over a log and then his arms were worked to +get the air back into his lungs. In about five minutes, Bill opened his +eyes and with a big sigh closed them again. A few minutes later he was +sitting up, still in rather a dazed condition, but fast recovering. Bob +had received quite a cut on his head, but he had not actually lost +consciousness and he fast recuperated. He was up and about in a little +while, apparently none the worse for his strenuous exertions. + +"That was a close call," said Mr. Waterman. + +"I should think so," said Pud. "When I saw Bob plunge into those rapids, +I thought he was a fool, for I could not see how he could do anything." + +"He saved my life all right," said Bill. "I was pinned under that canoe +and was nearly drowned when Bob got there. I didn't get get this bump on +the head until afterwards. I saw Bob come, but I was so nearly all in +that I could only struggle faintly to get a breath of air now and then. +When the canoe suddenly broke in two, I shot down and I must have hit a +rock for I knew nothing more until I woke up on the bank." + +"You deserve a great deal of credit, Bob," said Mr. Anderson, "not only +for your heroism but for the quick presence of mind you showed in doing +the only thing that had a chance of saving Bill's life." + +"You beat me to it all right," said Mr. Waterman. "The way you got out +of that canoe and up that trail would have made me look like a snail so +I stayed at the foot hoping to be of use there. I thought that Bill +might appear any moment at the foot of the rapids as I could not see +that he was pinned down by the canoe." + +"I'm certainly glad you were there," said Bob, "for I would never have +gotten Bill ashore by myself. I certainly was all in. I was not +unconscious but I had big black spots before my eyes and I guess I was +just about ready to pass out." + +"Well, it's all over and we're very lucky," said Mr. Waterman. "We'll +camp right here for the night and go on our way to-morrow morning. We +can get back to camp all right even if a little later than we had +planned." + +In the meantime, Joe had come down the rapids unhurt and crawled into +Jean's boat as if nothing out of the ordinary had occurred. While the +others were bringing Bob and Bill back to the world, he and Jean set out +after the broken canoe and captured it. Owing to the great care with +which their duffle bags had been made up that morning, nothing was +really injured. Bill and Bob did not have much appetite for supper that +evening as both were suffering more from shock than they recognized. In +the morning, Mr. Waterman let them sleep until the last call for +breakfast. After a swim, they were both just about as good as ever. + +"How are we going to get everything into the canoes this morning?" asked +Pud. + +"What's that?" asked Mr. Waterman in turn. + +"We had the canoes pretty well filled yesterday," said Pud. "With one +less canoe, we'll have to shift things around, won't we?" + +"Who said that we had one less canoe?" asked Mr. Waterman quietly. Pud +looked to the bank of the stream and sure enough, there were four canoes +there. + +"Where did we get the extra canoe?" asked Pud puzzled. + +"We didn't get it any place," replied Mr. Anderson. "Joe and Jean were +up real early this morning and they fixed the one that seemed such a +wreck last evening." + +Pud went over to the canoes and sure enough, he saw where the canoe had +been patched up. + +"This isn't a very good job," said Mr. Waterman. "When we get back to +camp, they will take out those broken ribs and replace them entirely +instead of splicing them up as they have done. It will do all right +until we get home but when Joe really gets through with that canoe, +there won't be a sign of that smash-up." + +"He's certainly clever," said Bill. + +"Yes, he is in one sense, though in another he is just using the +knowledge that he has acquired in years in the woods," said Mr. +Anderson. + +"Pierre, Jean, Joe or Jack can all build a very good canoe as they have +often done so," said Mr. Waterman. + +"Can Pierre make a birch bark canoe just like the Indians used to have?" +asked Bob. + +"Nothing easier," replied Mr. Anderson. + +"I'll get him to make me one ofter camp is over and send it down to me +in Virginia," said Bob. + +"He'll be very glad to do it," said Mr. Waterman. + +After a good breakfast, they were on their way. It was a credit to the +real courage of Bob and Bill that though they had to go down three +rapids before they came to the ford near Lac Parent, that neither of +them showed any sign of the white feather. Both boys seemed to enjoy the +exciting sport just as much as before the almost fatal accident of the +previous day. On arrival at the ford, they found Pierre there. + +Two hours later, they were back at their home camp and settled in their +shelter tents. That night around the camp fire they went over the events +of the week and concluded that they had had more fun and excitement +crowded into that week than they had had in any other similar space of +time during their lives. They all went to bed glad to-morrow was the +Sabbath and that they could just laze around and enjoy the comparative +comforts of their home camp. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +PIERRE'S BIG SALMON + + +The next night, Bob visited the guides' tent after supper and he did not +return to the others until nearly ten o'clock. + +"What did you find so interesting up there with the guides?" asked Bill. + +"Nothing much," replied Bob. "Pierre was telling me how he nearly lost +his life landing a big salmon on the Shipshaw River one summer." + +"Let's hear the story," demanded Pud. + +"It's too late to-night but I'll tell it to you to-morrow night if you +want me to," replied Bob. + +The next evening it was raining, so a fire had been built outside of +Bob's shelter tent. The boys were leaning back inside, all the more +comfortable because of the dreary conditions outside. In spite of the +rain, the birch logs burned brightly though accompanied by hissing, as +big drops of rain came down now and then from the pines overhead. + +"This is a good night to do murder or some other light occupation," said +Pud to the others. + +"Why not tell us that fish story of Pierre's now?" queried Bill. + +"That's a good idea," said Pud. + +"All right," answered Bob, "but I really wish I could give you the story +just as Pierre told it to me, with the sidelights of Indian philosophy +and the natural expressions of wood lore that made his story much more +piquant and picturesque than mine could ever be. Anyway, I'll do the +best I can. + +"It seems that one summer he was sent out by one of the big lumber +companies to scout for timber. He was told to get another Indian or two +and go up the Shipshaw River and report the growth of timber near the +water, whether he thought it could be rafted down or not, and any other +information that would be valuable for the lumber companies. He took +along two nephews of his, named Jean and Jacques, and an old Indian, +named Montagnais because he was reputed to be the head chief of the +tribe of that name to which all the Indians of that part of the country +belonged. The old Indian told Pierre before he started that there was +plenty of big timber in the Shipshaw Valley but that he would find it +practically impossible to raft it down. Pierre told the lumber company +this but they desired him to go anyway, stating that they wished to find +out definitely about the matter that summer. + +"They started off and took the steamer to Chicoutimi at the head of the +Saguenay River. They there got into their canoes and were soon going up +the Shipshaw. They found this river one of great volume, and they had +many long portages to make and much fast water to pole up. It took them +over three weeks of hard paddling and portaging to get near its source. +At last they got as far up as the valley as Pierre thought was +necessary. It was Pierre's idea that on the way down, they would stop +off every few miles and go back into the country to look over the woods +This they did, and, of course, this made their progress down rather +slow. + +"One day they came on a real Indian encampment at the foot of the +rapids, and as it was near evening they determined to stop and enjoy the +company of their brother tribesmen for the night. They found the Indians +very glad to see them. They told them that they had wintered far to the +north of the Great Divide and that they planned to get down to the St. +Lawrence and in touch with white people and civilization once more. +Later in the evening, they learned that the little party had stayed at +that one place for three full days, because the chief was determined to +catch a big salmon that had tantalized him during that time. This salmon +had been seen by all of them, as he lived in a big pool at the head of +some rapids only a short distance down the river. It was then too dark +to show this big fish to Pierre and his companions, but early the next +morning, Pierre was down at the pool. He looked over a big rock into the +pool, that was formed by a back eddy, and, sure enough, there was an +especially large salmon swimming about in the quiet water. In another +moment, Pierre had out his fishing tackle, but to no avail. The big +salmon would have nothing to do with anything Pierre offered him. He +tried one fly after another, but without effect. It seemed as if the big +salmon despised his efforts. As if in defiance, every now and then the +fish would swoop up to the surface and jump two or three feet out of the +water. + +"Pierre grew stubborn. All that day, he stayed by the pool, either he +himself fishing or watching the old chief try every while to entice the +giant salmon to take that hook. At night they all returned to camp and +told stories of phantom fish that could not be caught except by black +magic. They came to the conclusion finally that the big fish must be one +of that kind, with something uncanny about him, and they decided that it +would be bad medicine to try to catch him. Pierre was the only one that +dissented from this. + +"He got up even before dawn the next morning and was early down at the +pool. He procured a little pitch and some black flies and stuck them +together in such a way that, when they were thrown on the water, they +looked just like a half dozen flies floating down the stream. He got out +his smallest leader and fastened a hook among the flies. When he had +finished, it looked very lifelike and Pierre was proud of his handiwork. +Carefully approaching the stream without making any noise or permitting +any shadow to fall on the water, he threw his semi-artificial fly far +out on the stream, so that the back eddy would ultimately bring it into +the pool. Sure enough, the little black spot on the water whirled around +and finally floated calmly and slowly around the pool. Twice it made the +circuit and Pierre had just about decided that he was doomed to +disappointment again, when he saw a streak fly into the air and his reel +fairly sang as it spun around. Unfortunately something jammed and the +rod was jerked out of his hands. Pierre saw it disappear over the edge +of the rock, but he was after it and just caught the end of the rod as +it was being dragged under. Pierre held on like grim death. In another +minute he found himself out in the river and a moment later he was in +the powerful current at the head of the rapids. Even yet he had time to +get to shore but, with his usual obstinacy, he held on. A minute later +he was going down the rapids, doing his best to keep his head above +water, but with the line wound tightly around his arm. It was now a +fight for life, and he had no time to think of the fish. Down he went, +carried hither and thither by the powerful currents. He knew that each +moment might be his last but he struggled on. Once he believed he heard +a shout and thought he caught a glimpse of a canoe shooting after him, +but the noise of the water and his fearful struggle to keep from being +dashed upon the rocks that lined the river made this appear more like a +dream than a reality. + +"He was on the point of exhaustion when he swung around a bend of the +river and found himself in quiet water. In one sense he was saved, for +he had come through the rapids safely, but in another he was just at the +beginning of his struggle for he was practically exhausted and at least +a half mile from shore. He lay back on the water and closed his eyes, +feeling that he could never reach land. Just then he heard a call, and +his two nephews swung around the point and made for him. They pulled him +into their canoe and paddled for the shore. When they reached there, +they started to carry Pierre up on the beach, but found the line tied +around his arm. They disentangled this to find that the pole was still +at the one end of the line. They then started to reel in and in a moment +they felt a weight pulling on the line. They pulled warily, and a minute +later the big salmon came into view. Pierre had caught him after all. +Whether he was drowned by being pulled down the rapids, whether he had +hit a rock when entangled in the line, or for whatever reason, the fact +remained that the line had held and that the big fish was brought safely +ashore. + +"Jean proposed that they should camp there that day to celebrate the +occasion. Pierre was secretly very glad to do so, for he really was all +in, not only because of his great exertion in coming down the rapids, +but also because of the many bruises he had received from the rocks. He +asked his nephews how they had come along so luckily to his rescue. They +replied that they were just on their way to get a last look at the big +fish when they saw him plunge over the rock by the side of the pool and +then go down the rapids. He was some quarter mile ahead of them and they +could not get near him in the rapids. They kept on going, however, +although they were afraid that he would hit his head on some sharp rock +and be drowned. + +"One of the nephews then went up the river by the portage trail, and in +another hour the small tribe and the old Montagnais chief were gathered +around Pierre, hearing of his remarkable escape from death in the rapids +and his more remarkable catch of the giant salmon. They roasted the fish +for dinner and had a great feast in honor of the occasion. Pierre stated +that this was the biggest salmon he had ever seen and that it was just +luck that he had caught it. He gave himself some credit for the bait +that had tempted the fish, but otherwise he felt that it was only luck +that had brought the fish down through the rapids with him." + +Bob stopped here and looked out at the rain which was still coming down +steadily. + +"Pierre has had some adventures in his life," said Bill. + +"He told me another story about that trip up the Shipshaw, and though I +tried to explain it to him, he could not see it," said Bob. + +"What was that?" asked Pud. + +"According to Pierre the Good Spirit showed that he was displeased at +him for catching the fish. As they were going down a wide reach of the +river two days later they saw a big pearshaped black object rise into +view over the hilltops. It sailed on over them and just as it was above +them, it dropped a rock which went right through Pierre's canoe. If the +other canoe had not been near, they would not have had time to save +anything. As it was, they saved all their duffle, and, going ashore, +they soon had the canoe in shape again. Pierre felt that the Great +Spirit had thus reminded him of his sacrilege in killing the big spirit +fish. I tried to tell Pierre that he had seen a big balloon, and I +called to mind that in that very year a big balloon had floated far into +the wilderness. Pierre would have no such explanation. To him, the big +object was a direct visitation of the Great Spirit, It completely +terrorized, him and his mates, and he said that he would always remember +it." + +Here Bob paused and Pud took occasion to ask: + +"Did Pierre get back all right after his trip?" + +"Oh, yes; though he had one more experience that was not very pleasant," +said Bob. + +"What was that?" asked Bill. + +"As I have already mentioned, they got out of their canoes and went +inland every few miles to scout around and see what timber was in the +little valleys leading off the main valley of the Shipshaw. On one of +these occasions, Pierre and the old Indian went off on one side of the +river, and the two others on the opposite side. They had only one rifle +between them, for they were not out hunting and had taken it along +merely from habit. Pierre had the gun, while the old Indian went ahead +with his easy stride. Though over sixty years of age, he was noted as +one of the best walkers and sturdiest paddlers in the country. He led +the way and Pierre came after, thinking hard about the displeasure of +the Great Spirit as shown by the sinking of his canoe. They broke +through a very narrow ravine and came upon a she-bear with three cubs. +The sight of the Indians angered the bear and she made a rush for them. + +"Pierre was not able to fire for a moment as Montagnais was right in his +path. At Pierre's yell, the old Indian stepped back and the gun belched +forth almost in the bear's face. The ball did not take effect and did +nothing except to add fury to the mad rush of the bear. She swept Pierre +aside ripping his shoulder with her claws, and caught Montagnais fairly +in the chest. The latter went down without a cry. Fortunately, Pierre's +shoulder was not very badly hurt and he had not dropped his gun. He +slipped another cartridge into the rifle and gave the bear her quietus +by hitting her right behind the shoulder and striking her heart. Pierre +then looked at his old Indian friend and saw that he had received a very +bad wound. Several ribs were evidently broken, while the chest bone +seemed to be caved in. Pierre hastened to a nearby brook and got some +water in a hastily improvised birch bucket. The water brought Montagnais +to his senses, but a broken ankle made it impossible for him to move. He +was evidently in great pain. + +"In the excitement, Pierre had done nothing for himself and did not do +so until he finally commenced to feel giddy and came near fainting. He +then tore off his shirt and found that his weakness was due to loss of +blood. He bound up his arm and sat down to rest and to think what to do. +He tried to carry the old Indian, but soon gave that up, both because he +was too weakened to do so and because the great pain caused by moving +his old friend made the latter faint. There was nothing to do except to +stay with his friend and wait for Jean and Jacques to hunt them up, or +else to get to the river and bring them back. He thought that the latter +would be the better plan, so he made Montagnais as comfortable as he +could, propping him up against the old bear and giving him the rifle as +defense. The cubs by this time had gotten over their scare and they came +back to their mother and smelled around her with little whines and moans +that were almost childlike. He left Montagnais leaning against the old +bear with a cub on each side of him. They were quite little and as +harmless as kittens. + +"Pierre found that he must have lost a lot of blood for he had some +difficulty in getting back to the river. At last he reached there, and +in due course of time Jean and Jacques came paddling across the river, +singing a low Indian love song, happy as any children of the forest +should be when in their native haunt on a fine summer's day. They were +all attention when they saw Pierre and were ready to start at once even +without their suppers. This Pierre did not let them do as he felt that +he himself would not be able to get back to his old friend without some +nourishment. The two young Indians hurried things along and Pierre felt +much better by the time supper was over. They then started off and, +though by this time night had fallen, Pierre led them straight to the +gully and found old Montagnais quietly sleeping with the three cubs +lying around him. They built a fire and examined the injuries of the old +man. He was now quite conscious and he told Pierre and the others just +how badly he was hurt and what they would have to do to get him out. + +"Under his directions, they built a leafy litter and as soon as dawn +showed the way, they carried him back to the river. They felt that it +would be best to rest there for a few days. Jean and Jacques made a trip +back to the gully and returned with the bear's skin, as much bear meat +as they could handle, and the three cubs following them like puppies. By +the end of their week's stay, the old Indian was able to sit up and he +said that he would be able to do his share if they got him into the +canoe. Pierre stayed three days more and then set out. It required +skillful paddling for him to make some of the rapids but finally they +emerged once more upon the bosom of the wide Saguenay. In due time, +Pierre got back to Escoumains and made his report about the lumber." + +"Now, I know why Pierre was not very anxious to go up the Shipshaw with +me two years ago," said Mr. Waterman. "He told me that he had been up +the river but he did not want to go again." + +"He was no doubt thinking of the balloon," said Bill. + +"Do you think it was a balloon?" asked Pud. + +"It undoubtedly was," said Mr. Waterman. "The very year that Pierre went +up the Shipshaw, they held a long distance balloon race starting away +over in the United States. One of the balloons was carried away to the +east of the Saguenay and the two pilots did not get back to civilization +for over two weeks. They had a very hard time for they had to tramp out. +The remains of the big balloon are up there in the wilderness and have +probably more than once aroused the astonishment and amazement of +wandering Indians." + +"Maybe no one has found them," said Pud. + +"That's quite probable, for you know that we have been up here for quite +some time, and we haven't seen anything of them," said Mr. Waterman. + +The rain still came down but, sheltered as they were, they rather +enjoyed it. They talked for some time and then dispersed to their +various tents. + +Bob and Bill were together. Just before turning in, Bob put two big logs +on the fire and they lay down in their blankets watching the fitful +flames that darted feebly up into the rain. + +"We're lucky to-night that we're not out on a trip," said Bill. + +"How so?" asked Bob. + +"Well," replied Bill, "if we were on a trip we should not have this +shelter tent along and we should stand a good chance to get a soaking." + +"I shouldn't mind that much," said Bob. "But don't you remember that +last trip? We had a rainy night then and we did not get very wet. Our +sleeping bags kept us just as dry as punk all night, though I could hear +the rain beating down like sin on my head." + +"That's true," said Bill. "These sleeping bags are great stuff. All the +same, I'm glad I'm here to-night." + +"Are you going to keep the fire going to-night?" asked Bob sleepily. + +"Yes, if I happen to wake up," said Bill. "I'm nearest the fire and I'll +just throw on a log if I can reach one without getting out of my bag." + +"I've seen to that," said Bob. "You can reach these logs easily enough. +Don't bother to do it though unless you wake. Needn't keep it on your +mind." + +"Don't worry. I'm as sleepy as the dickens now, so I shall probably not +bat an eyelid until morning." + +"Good-night," said Bob as he rolled over. + +"Pleasant dreams," said Bill in answer. + +Ten minutes later the only sign of life about that part of the woods was +the fire which blazed up now and then, only to be put down when a breeze +knocked a lot of big drops from the trees. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE PLATINUM MINE + + +Because of the experience that Bob and Bill had had, Mr. Waterman +thought it best to stick around Lac Parent and take it easy for a few +days. This they did. They found the trout fishing very good and +concluded that after all there was nothing like fly fishing for the +speckled beauties. Fishing for salmon was a change but they all felt +that if they were to fish for a summer they would much prefer the +smaller fish. There seemed to be no lessening of the supply. On +Wednesday they all went into Escoumains. They went by the trail, +carrying their canoes through the first two lakes so that they had only +about six or seven miles of walking. They did this because they made the +trip more for the sake of a change than because they had to go to the +village for supplies. Sandy MacPherson still talked of the German spy. + +"I have to admire both his nerve and his cleverness," said Sandy. + +"To come here for that purpose and to do so for several years simply +proves the excellence of the German spy system, considered by far the +greatest and most far-reaching of any nation's in the world," said Mr. +Waterman. + +"Sure," said Sandy, "that's the point. Field has been here for the last +five years so when he came in early this spring we thought nothing of +it. The way he got me--me, the representative of the law, to help him in +with those wireless instruments four years ago was the height of +audacity. How did he know that I knew nothing about wireless?" + +"He had probably talked to you about it," said Mr. Anderson. + +"Well, I bear him no ill-will," concluded Sandy, "especially as the +German submarines did not get a single troop ship that left either +Halifax or Quebec." + +"Did those revenue officers question you about us?" asked Mr. Waterman. + +"I should think they did," replied Sandy. "I got mad at last and asked +them if they suspected me of being disloyal. That shut them up. I guess +the thing is over for good." + +They all went back to the camp via the short route with the exception of +Mr. Waterman, who went back via the road with a load of provisions. As +he left, he stated that he would camp at the ford that night and would +expect them all over there very early in the morning to help him with +the stuff. The party separated and the next morning even before +daybreak, they all left the home camp and headed for the ford. The fact +that the boys were quite willing to go along and would really have felt +slighted had they been left behind showed how much they had developed +since coming up to the camp. They not only thought nothing of getting up +before daybreak and going off over two lakes but they knew that when +they got there, they would merely load themselves down with grub and +come back. What would have seemed to them a big day's work only a few +weeks before, they were now eager to do before breakfast. + +Such is the way of the wilderness. Men get to see that every one must do +his share and a little discomfort is scoffed at. The boys enjoyed the +early morning paddle through the two lakes, while the portaging of the +canoes was by this time mere child's play to them. They really thought +nothing about it and took their turn when traveling light just as a +matter of course. The improvement in Pud was the most noticeable. He had +lost weight and was quicker on his feet and handled himself much better. +They arrived at the ford to find Mr. Waterman busy getting everything +ready to move out. He had things in good shape and in ten minutes they +were on the back trail. There were so many of them that the weight +assigned each was comparatively light and they walked away at a rapid +pace. Before seven o'clock, they were back on Lac Parent and with +appetites that would have been the delight of an epicure. + +Jack was the only one that had remained behind and as soon as they +disembarked, he called them. They all came running. He had salmon +steaks, hot biscuits, porridge with milk and apricots. They certainly +enjoyed the meal, went fishing as usual. Coming back about eleven +o'clock, they went in for a swim and got a lot of enjoyment out of this. +In spite of the northern clime in which they were, the shallowness of +the lakes permitted the water to get pretty well heated by the hot July +and August sun, and swimming was a real pleasure. It was only now and +then when they struck a lake fed mainly by springs that they found the +water too cold for swimming. + +The next day, Pud suggested that they should go over to the cabin in the +gulch, called by all the German spy's hut, and explore. + +"That's a good suggestion," said Mr. Waterman. + +"We can easily do it in a day," said Pud. + +"Possibly not," said Mr. Waterman. "We'll take sufficient grub for a +week for we do not know just where our search may lead us. We may come +out on the Portneuf River, fifty or sixty miles away." + +"I didn't think of that," said Pud. + +They were soon ready. Mr. Waterman and Pierre brought along their guns. +The party was made up of the three boys, the two leaders just mentioned +and Mr. Anderson. They were soon over in to the second lake. There they +stopped to fish, except Mr. Waterman, who went off to one end of the +lake as he thought that he was pretty sure to bag a duck or two there. +He was right, as his gun was heard occasionally during the next two +hours. The fishing was fine and when Mr. Waterman returned with six fine +young ducks, the boys knew that they were going to have a big supper +again. They had lunch and then went on to the cabin. They determined to +stay there all night and just explore the gulch. + +"I have often been up on the sides of this gulch but I have never been +down here to see what was here," said Mr. Anderson. + +Behind the cabin they found an excellent spring with a little stream +leading away from it. + +"I guess we'll make no mistake if we take this spring for a starting +point to-morrow. This stream will surely lead us out of the gulch, as +it must have an outlet," said Mr. Waterman. + +"There is sure to be an outlet because there is no lake here," said Bob. + +The stream led them further down the gulch and they found themselves +going down even further. When they had reached a point about a half mile +from the cabin, they found that the path they had been following stopped +and turned up the hill. This was not the path they had previously noted +as leading to the top of the mountain. + +"Let's follow this path," said Bill. + +"All right," said Pud. + +They turned off and they had not gone far before they came to what +seemed like a mine. The boys were very excited as it seemed to them that +they had discovered the reason why Field and his friends had made their +summer home in this gulch rather than in some other that would have been +just as suitable from the wireless standpoint. + +"This looks like a mine to me," said Bob. + +"It certainly does look that way," replied Bill. + +"He has a lot of quartz over here," said Bob as he went over to a little +pile that had been made to one side. + +"It looks as if this were a recent discovery," said Bill. + +"It certainly does," said Pud. + +They examined the quartz but it did not look like anything they had ever +seen. + +"Let's take some of it back with us," said Bob. "Mr. Waterman is quite +an expert on metals, rocks, etc., and he will probably know what it +is." + +"That's a good idea," said Bill. "He told us the first time we climbed +the mountain to the west of this gulch that it looked as if there should +be some kind of minerals down here. From above, this gulch certainly +looks like many a mining camp site in Colorado." + +"I remember his saying that," said Pud. + +The boys hurried back to the cabin and they had hard time restraining +their impatience until Mr. Waterman returned. Bob handed him the quartz +without any comment. Mr. Waterman took it and after a short examination, +he said, + +"Where did you find this, boys?" + +"We found it off the little stream," said Bob. "Evidently Field has +recently discovered a mine of some sort and he has just started to work +it, for not very much work has been done yet." + +"You have made a valuable discovery," said Mr. Waterman. "If I am not +mistaken, this quartz has streaks of platinum and you know, platinum is +more valuable than gold." + +"What!" yelled Pud. "We've discovered a mine that is better than a gold +mine." + +"Now don't get excited," said Mr. Waterman. "It is most probable that +Field has had this place regularly staked out and claimed by some friend +over here." + +"How can we find out?" asked Bill. + +"We'll have to look it up at Tadousac, where the records are kept," said +Mr. Waterman. "Lead me to your platinum mine," concluded he. + +They all went over to the hole in the ground and Mr. Waterman looked +over the quartz that had been taken out. "I have no doubt that this is +platinum," said he at last. "I may be mistaken, but I hardly think so." + +"Let's hustle back and get out of Tadousac right away and put in a +claim," said Bill. + +"Now, don't hurry. It will keep, no doubt," said Mr. Waterman. "In any +case, it will not be necessary for all of us to go to Tadousac. I would +suggest that Mr. Anderson and Bill take the back trail and get out to +Tadousac in due time and put in a claim for the mine in the name of Pud, +Bill and Bob." + +"Not on your life," said Bob. "You and Mr. Anderson are in on this as we +would never have come had it not been for you. In addition, you would +have been sure to discover the mine yourself before the afternoon is +over." + +Bob spoke with such sincerity and he was backed up by the two other boys +so earnestly that at last Mr. Anderson and Mr. Waterman gave in and +consented to be given a share in the mine. + +"Now don't go building any great castles in the air," said Mr. Anderson. +"We may be mistaken and this quartz practically worthless." + +"I'll wager that that German knew what he was doing," said Bob. "Mr. +Waterman thought that he was from the west by the way he knew the woods +and woodcraft and I bet he did not dig that big hole himself without +feeling that he had something worth while." + +"You are probably right," said Mr. Waterman. "But here is another +thought. If we put in a claim for this gulch, we may have a hundred +mining sharks down here right away and that would spoil the whole thing, +especially if there is more of the stuff." + +"Well, let's lay claim to the whole gulch," said Mr. Anderson. "I'll +give them the impression that we are buying this gulch because it is so +picturesque and centrally located." + +"You may be able to get away with it if you go about it carefully," said +Mr. Waterman. + +"Don't you think that those revenue officers noticed that mine?" asked +Mr. Anderson suddenly. + +"They probably did but thought nothing of it as they were so intent on +catching Field and finding out what he had been doing," said Mr. +Waterman. + +"We can't be sure of that," said Mr. Anderson. "I think it would be best +for Bill and me to get out as fast as we can without attracting +attention and put in a claim for this gulch at once." + +"You'll have to put in a mining claim for this to be any good," said Mr. +Waterman. + +"I'll fix that," was the reply. "I'll put in a full claim, which means +that if any minerals are found on the land, they belong to the owner of +the land if found by him and half the same if discovered by any other +person." + +"Do you think that we can get to Lac Parent to-night?" asked Bill. + +"If we start right away," said Mr. Anderson. + +Everything was full of excitement until the two had departed on the back +trail. We shall not follow them but merely mention that in due course of +time, Mr. Anderson filed a claim for the gulch, the same to be paid for +at the regular settler's rates. It seemed that the big timber companies +had had men down into the gulch and because of the difficulties in +getting out the lumber they had not bought the timber on this particular +part of the country. This was very fortunate, for Mr. Anderson was thus +able to buy the land outright, to be paid for after it had been +regularly surveyed. The preliminary papers were signed and the two then +heaved a sigh of relief as they now knew that they were secure in their +discovery. + +We shall thus leave them and return to the others. These latter spent +the rest of the afternoon exploring the sides of the gulch. Mr. Waterman +saw further evidences of mineral wealth and grew very enthusiastic over +the prospects. They slept in the spy's cabin that night and were very +cozy around the open fireplace that had been built at one side of the +room. + +"This is some cabin," said Mr. Waterman the next morning. "Field was +very comfortable here, I'll bet." + +"It must have been lonely," said Bob. + +"It probably was after the revenue officers had rounded up his mates, +but prior to that time, I have no doubt that they had a very fine time. +They could get out to the north and go fishing, leaving one man to +listen to the wireless, and they probably had their share of game. Well, +let's be going," finally said Mr. Waterman. + +They determined that the best way to travel would be to go right down +the stream. Pierre was detailed to go ahead and clear a trail where +necessary. Pud carried one canoe and Bob the other. They also carried +their packs, while Mr. Waterman carried the pack and a big load of +grub. Pierre carried only his little pack, which left him free to swing +the ax. They made fair progress, though it was rough going. They found +that the gulch was not so deep as it looked. In other words, the stream +led them down and down. Under other circumstances they would have found +the scenery very beautiful. It is one thing to find a beautiful bridal +veil falls fifty or sixty feet high when you have nothing to do but +admire it. It is another thing altogether to come upon such a fall and +to have to pick a way down the precipice carrying a canoe and other +load. There seemed no end to the trail on which they were. Down they +went, and Pierre was heard more than once to exclaim "Sacre! Mon Dieu!" +and a few other favorite expressions with him when he was exasperated. +They went along at least five miles in this way and there seemed no end +to the trail. + +"I take it back," said Mr. Waterman. "Field and his pals did not come +out this way to fish. That is sure. There is no sign of a trail." + +"It's a good thing we brought that grub along," said Bob. "This trail is +hard enough coming down, but it would take us all day to get back to the +cabin." + +"You're right," said Pud. "I'm getting into good shape but this trail is +getting my goat." + +"Don't worry," said Mr. Waterman. "I've been within a few miles of this +place, and it can't be very long before we hit either the Portneuf River +or some lake that drains into it. I'll wager that the Portneuf is within +twelve miles of here." + +"Twelve miles!" said Pud, with a sigh. + +"That's nothing," said Mr. Waterman. "I think, though, that we'll soon +hit a lake, for I have never had to portage more than six miles in this +country without striking some lake or river." + +"Oh, let it be soon," said Pud. "Not that I care. But simply so that Bob +won't play out." + +"Don't worry about me," said Bob. "You haven't heard me kicking, have +you?" + +They stopped for lunch at the base of a forty-foot fall. + +There was a deep pool, flecked with foam, as was to be expected. Mr. +Waterman got out his line and in fifteen minutes he had six fine trout +out of the water. Pierre soon had them cleaned and they had them for +lunch. On they went again, but they traveled more than another five +miles before they came to a small lake. Mr. Waterman looked at his +compass and decided that the lake must flow into the Portneuf River. +They went to the far end of the lake, where a little stream flowed out. + +"I'll wager that we'll hit the Portneuf River in less than an hour +to-morrow," said Mr. Waterman. + +"To-morrow?" queried Pud. + +"Yes, I think that we have done enough for to-day. Here is a fine place +to camp and I think that the best thing for us to do is to fish for a +couple of hours and then have a good dinner." + +This they did, and when they returned to the camping place they found +that Pierre had the ducks steaming in the pot and that supper was +practically ready. They enjoyed that supper most heartily, for they had +had a very hard day. They sat around the camp fire that night until a +little later than usual for it was a wonderful night. The stars seemed +right above them. One big planet stood right over the top of a distant +mountain and it looked exactly like a big incandescent light hung there +to light the travelers on their way. + +Pierre was more talkative than usual. He told them that he had been on +this lake and that he now recognized that he had been half way back to +the gulch. He told of killing a big bear nearby one summer. He pointed +off to a distant mountain and said that it had occurred over there. He +had seen the bear while scouting for timber for one of the big lumber +companies. The bear, when he saw him, was about two miles away on a +mountain opposite to him. He determined to get him if possible. He +crossed over to the other ridge and had great trouble in locating the +bear again. Finally he did so. He worked around to the other side of the +bear so that the wind would not carry his scent to the bear. Finally he +got within one hundred yards of the bear. The latter then showed signs +of uneasiness, and as there were some thick woods near Pierre thought +that he had better not take a further chance. + +He gave the bear one shot, which hit him in the shoulder. The bear, in a +frenzy, rushed straight at him. He had only an old-fashioned rifle and +before he could break his gun and put in another cartridge the bear was +only a few feet away. Taking hasty aim at the glaring eye of the bear, +he pulled the trigger. The bullet hit the bear plump in the eye and he +dropped dead in his tracks. + +"Gosh!" said Pud. "I don't know what I'd do if I saw a wounded bear +coming right at me. I guess I'd drop my gun and run." + +"That would be the worst thing you could do, for in spite of their size, +bears are remarkably active, and they go through the woods like a +streak," said Mr. Waterman. + +"I bet that you'd stand your ground, all right," said Bob. "You've lots +of nerve, Pud, and that's all that's necessary in a pinch." + +"I suppose I would, but at the same time, I am not aching for the +experience," answered Pud. + +"Men are generally braver than they think," said Mr. Waterman. "I've +known pretty poor sort of fellows that would stand up in a pinch and +fight like sin, either against some animal like the bear, or even +against their fellows." + +"I think that that's so," said Bob. "You know that in time of war, +practically everybody enlists." + +"Yes," said Pud, "but some of them are really forced to do it by public +opinion." + +"That's very true," replied Bob, "but even the fellows that do not care +to enlist are just as brave as the others when a battle comes." + +The conversation drifted on until at last Mr. Waterman looked at his +watch and piled them all off to their blankets. They were up early the +following morning. After a hearty breakfast they set out down the +stream. This proved so small that they were compelled to get out of +their canoes and portage. A half hour later they came into another lake, +which both Pierre and Mr. Waterman recognized at once. + +"I've been here before," said Mr. Waterman. "The outlet of this lake +leads directly north, so that we shall hit the Portneuf River some +seventy miles from its mouth. They journeyed on, and by that night they +had reached the river. + +"We'll have some fast water that we had not counted on when we left," +said Mr. Waterman. + +"Very fast rapide," assented Pierre. + +"Can we make them?" asked Pud. + +"Can a duck swim?" replied Mr. Waterman, with a merry twinkle in his eye +that betokened that he was ready for the fun ahead. + +"Are these the rapids you told me of?" asked Bob. + +"You bet," said Mr. Waterman. "There are some dangerous spots, but we'll +manage them all right." + +Once more they carefully packed their bags and the grub. Practically all +of the duffle was put into Mr. Waterman's canoe and it was all tied to +the thwarts, so that if an upset occurred things would not be lost. Bob +went, with Mr. Waterman, while Pud was with Pierre. + +"I like this," said Pud, with a frowning glance. + +"Never mind. Pierre and you will manage all right," said Mr. Waterman. +"You'll find that the paddling will be easy. It is more a matter of +steering. We'll hit some water this morning that will make that fast +water in the Escoumains look like a mill pond." + +"Lead me to it," said Bob. "Come on, Pud! Don't stand there." + +They set off, and for some time they paddled along on a smoothly running +current. It then began to get faster, and soon they were into the thick +of it. Bob and Mr. Waterman went through the first rapids just like +ducks. It was most exhilarating sport. They waited at the foot of the +descent for the other canoe, and they soon saw it shooting towards them. + +"That looks pretty dangerous," said Bob, as he saw the canoe dash +through a foam-flecked bit of water with sharp rocks on both sides. + +"It's a game for small children," replied Mr. Waterman. "In the hands of +experts there is really not much danger in this water." + +"Is there worse water ahead?" asked Bob. + +"Sure thing," said Mr. Waterman. "This was a pretty good one, but you'll +know what real fast water is when we have passed through the Devil's +Cauldron." + +"Some sport," said Pud, as their canoe swung alongside. "I'm trying to +do my share, but I have full confidence in Pierre, so why worry." + +"You're right," answered Bob. + +"That had the Escoumains Rapids beaten hollow," continued Pud. + +"Mr. Waterman says that there's some real sport ahead," said Bob. + +"Go ahead. I'm game," said Pud. + +They went on and they came to a long series of rapids. Down they went at +railroad speed. Bob was kept busy doing as directed by Mr. Waterman. +Several times they burst right through between rocks when Bob could see +nothing but a wall of mist before him. Then at last they came to the +famous Devil's Cauldron. Here the river seemed to rise almost between +cliffs, and the water boiled up on all sides. They rushed down what was +practically a cascade, broken here and there by jagged rocks. Mr. +Waterman steered the canoe most skillfully and they emerged at last on +the smoother reaches below. Once more they turned around and Bob could +hardly believe that he had come through such a swirl of waters in their +frail canoe. Just then the other came into view. It was most exciting to +watch it dart from wave to wave, shooting now like an arrow and then +stopping in its course as if held back by invisible hands. Pierre sat in +the stern and wielded the paddle just as calmly and nonchalantly as if +they were paddling across a pond. His hand seemed sure, and the canoe +came through like a swallow on the wing. + +"Some sport," yelled Pud, as they drifted past. + +"You bet my life," said Pierre. "Dat is ze grand sport. 'Dat is ze +life,' as my fren, Monsieur Waterman, sing." + +"That was the most exciting time I have ever had," laughed Bob, as they +ranged alongside and paddled on together. + +"That is the worst we'll find on the river," said Mr. Waterman. + +"We'll hit two or three more short stretches that will keep us busy." + +On they went and before the sun was low in the sky they had gone over +fifty miles. + +"It's hard to believe that we have gone so far to-day," said Bob. + +"The water is fairly high now," said Mr. Waterman. "That makes the river +run fast, and it is easy to cover distance under such circumstances." + +"It's been the best day that I have ever spent," declared Bob, as they +stepped out of the canoe on a fine sandy beach, where they were going to +spend the night. + +"I've enjoyed every minute of it," said Mr. Waterman. "Fast water makes +very fascinating sport. It's the danger, I suppose." + +"It's dangerous, all right," said Bob. "If we had been tipped over going +down that Devil's Cauldron, it would have been five to one against our +ever getting out." + +"It would have been a hundred to one," replied Mr. Waterman. "At the +same time, if no accident occurs, one should come through all right if +one knows how to handle a canoe. I have been tipped over three or four +times in all my life, and generally the accident was due to my own +carelessness." + +They spent another happy night around the fire, with Pierre telling them +more of his experiences. + +"It is only on small trips like this that one can get Pierre to talk," +said Mr. Waterman. "When a bunch is along he either feels that he has no +right around the fire with the others or he is too busy to get into the +humor." + +"He has certainly had some experiences," said Bob. + +They determined, before they sought their blankets, that the next day +they would go down to the mouth of the Portneuf River and then get the +St. Lawrence steamer up to Escoumains. They decided to do this so that +they would save time, as Bob and his party had to leave the woods in a +very few days. Then again, they were all eager to find out what luck +Bill and Mr. Anderson had had in getting in a claim on the gulch. +Nothing exciting occurred the next day, as it was smooth sailing, or +rather canoeing, until they hit the St. Lawrence. At this place the St. +Lawrence is about forty miles wide. There was a southerly wind, so they +kept to their original plan and took the river boat to Escoumains, +arriving there about four o'clock in the afternoon. Mr. Waterman hustled +around and soon had a pair of little Canadian horses. These hustled away +with them and the two canoes, and by dark they were at the ford once +more. + +The next morning they were up early, and by seven o'clock they were back +on Lac Parent. Jerry's cheery halloo proved to them that they had been +expected. They found Bill and Mr. Anderson already back, and Mr. +Waterman was very much pleased with the way they had gotten results. + +"The gulch is ours, then," said Mr. Waterman. "We can easily raise the +money, as land is cheap down here." + +"We won't have to pay the money until it is regularly surveyed, and that +will not be until next summer, I expect," said Mr. Anderson. + +"I hope that it will keep, for I want to have three or four days' good +fishing before I go," said Bob. + +"I'd like to go over to the cabin again and get some more samples of +that ore, so that we can have it examined in Philadelphia when we get +home," said Bill. + +"We'll do that too," said Mr. Anderson. + +The next four days were quietly spent. Fishing and a side expedition +over the gulch furnished only moderate excitement, but everybody enjoyed +himself. Then one morning our three boys awoke to the fact that they had +to leave the woods where they had had such a good time and in which they +had learned so much and had such exciting experiences. As usual, they +got up early. It really was not a happy party that left Lac Parent that +morning. They went into Escoumains over the old trail. The fact that +they portaged the canoes through two lakes and then carried their duffle +bags the rest of the way, showed in what excellent condition they now +were. Pud was as hard as nails. He walked along at the head of the +party, with no more signs of being winded than Bob or even Mr. Waterman. +The latter was with them, and he was going to accompany them as far as +Quebec to get the samples of ore into the hands of some expert assayist. + +After reaching Escoumains it was with sincere feelings of regret that +the boys had to get into their civilized garments again. Nothing of +importance or special interest occurred on their way to Quebec. They +once more went up to the Frontenac Hotel and waited there for Mr. +Waterman, who had gone at once to the assayist. In less than two hours +he came back smiling. + +"What luck?" asked Bob. + +"Come up to the room," was the reply. + +When they got up there they all fired questions at him. + +"Not all at once," he said. "I saw the assayist or geologist, and at the +first glance he told me that the samples of ore were genuine and very +valuable. He tried to find out where I had gotten them so I had to do +some tall lying to lead him off the scent. When I left his office I was +careful, and I looked around several times. I thought that I was being +followed, so I went into stores and out again, and I think he will have +his troubles finding out where the mine is." + +"If we really have made such a valuable discovery," said Bob, "we must +be careful not to say anything about it. When we have once gotten full +title to the gulch we can then let others know where the mine is." + +"You're right," said Mr. Waterman. "According to the statement of the +expert, we really have a big thing on our hands, and with careful +handling, we can get rich through it." + +That evening the boys, with Mr. Waterman, went to visit the St. Ann de +Beaupre cathedral. The boys, as well as Mr. Waterman, were deeply +impressed with the solemn dignity and massive beauty of the church's +interior. They also noticed the look of deep, sincere devotion on the +faces of the worshippers as they paid homage to the blessed saint. + +It was hard to say good-by to their pleasant companions, but finally Mr. +Waterman saw them off on the train the next morning, and the following +evening they were back in Philadelphia. Here Bob had to leave his +friends, as he lived farther south. On shaking hands with them they +promised to meet again the next summer and go north to develop their +mine. They each declared that they had enjoyed the summer in the woods +most heartily, and they swore eternal friendship to one another as young +men of their age are apt to do. + + + + + * * * * * + + + + +Transcriber's Notes + +1. Punctuation has been changed to conform to contemporary standards. +2. The Table of Contents was not provided in the original text. + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOB HUNT IN CANADA*** + + +******* This file should be named 19853.txt or 19853.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/9/8/5/19853 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/19853.zip b/19853.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2f4f1a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/19853.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5ccd3e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #19853 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/19853) |